Home

COBOL85 User's Guide 3.0

1. Compier FORM PowerFORM v iy Co 2 Cc il Screen Fom Form Deb Object ompiler descriptors descriptors descriptors gang listi information file program ng Y Y Linker Form EXECUTION averiay pattern gt Executable file y y 4 COBOL85 COBOL85 Interactive Run time FORM RTS Debugger System a Screen Form output output Figure 1 The COBOL85 development environment Applications created using the Windows 3 1 version of COBOL85 are executed as 16 bit applications Applications created using the Windows 95 and Windows NT version of COBOL85 are executed as 32 bit applications 8 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 Setting Up Environment Variables Set the following environment variables according to the COBOL85 functions you want to use When using Windows 95 register in AUTOEXEC BAT by using the text editor When using Windows NT set the variables at the system control panel or command prompt Refer to Setting from the Control Panel and Setting from the Command Prompt in Chapter 5 When using Windows 3 1 set the variables before activating Windows Common At compilation 32 Table 2 Setting environment variable Setup Timing Environment Details Conditions Variable PATH COBOL install directory FORM RTS install di
2. 101234 Jack London MREC TO Chapter 8 Printing PIC X 4 FOVL control record AFTER ADVANCING mnemonic name SPACE TO line record 101234 TO Jack London line record 105678 TO Anne Miller line record utput result of the record e 105678 Anne Miller aL line record AFTER ADVANCING PAGE employee number TO name AFTER ADVANCING 3 employee number TO name AFTER ADVANCING 2 Contents of form overlay pattern NREC jmomrmimimiennmn Nurber Nene Nag As specified with the control gt Line Position after input output record output in step data is statements Q overlaid with form overlay pattern Figure 93 Flow of control with a form overlay pattern Program Compilation and Linkage There are no required compiler and linker options 301 302 Chapter 8 Printing Program Execution This section explains how to execute a program using a form overlay pattern and FCB Programs Using Form Overlay Patterns When a form overlay pattern is used with a print file the following settings are required e Specify the form overlay pattern storage directory for run time environment information FOVLDIR If the FOVLDIR setting is omitted the form overlay pattern is not printed e If the extent of the form overlay pattern storage file is other than OVD specify an extent for run time environment information OVD_SUFFIX If the file has no extent
3. For clarification between the GS series and the previous M series systems the following terms are defined GS series The successor to the M series it is the same as the M series Global server GS series M series as it is seen from the system GS program A program that works with the GS Series M series GS specific function A function that can only be used with the GS series M series system Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 557 Scope of Distributed Development Functions The following figure is a diagram of the scope of GS series functions and COBOL85 functions Operation of the common functions shown in Figure 137 can be checked under this system To what extent GS series functions can be developed under this system differs depending on the functions Refer to Appendix I GS series Function Comparison for notes on handling the functions specific to GS host and operating host programs under this system 558 iGS series Functions Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Scope of COBOL85 functions International standars Sagnenctatya Database SQL dditional international standard Built in function XPG specifications Line sequential file Linkage between programs in C Language value transfer return value Sharing fil and exclusive use of records Screen handling Command Line argument handling Environ
4. Minchou font name Specify the font name used for printing the data item that is specified MINCHOU or Chapter 5 Executing Programs 135 MINCHOU HANKAKU fontin a PRINTING MODE clause If omitted CourierN ew is assumed Gothic font name Specify the font name used for printing the data item that is specified G GOTHIC or GOTHIC HANKAKU font ina PRINTING MODE clause If omitted CourierN ew is assumed 15 ODBC Inf Set the ODBC Information File ODBC_Inf ODBC information file name Specify the name of the file containing information required by the run time system to use ODBC Information in this file is mainly used to connect the client and server with the CONNECT statement 16 SQL_CLI Set the Type of Database Linkage Software 16 SQL_CLI database linkage software name Specify the linkage software name e RDB2 When the linkage software is RDBII Esql COBOL This environment variable is used only when RDBII Esql COBOL is specified as the database access mode It is specified either at installation or within P STAFF 136 Chapter 5 Executing Programs 17 CBR_CIINF Set the Logical Destination Definition File CBR_CIINF definition file name Specify the name of the file containing the logical destination definition when using the simplified inter application communication facility 18 CBR_ENTRYFILE Set the Entry Information File 32 CBR_ENTRYFILE entry information file name To speci
5. NOSOURCE Specify SOURCE to output a source program listing otherwise specify NOSOURCE If SOURCE is specified the source program listing is output to the directory specified in the compiler option PRINT or the dp option 604 Appendix A Compiler Options A source program listing is generated only if this option is specified with the compiler option PRINT or the dp option 34 WINCOB WC FIX FIX SRF FREE FREE VAR VAR Specify the reference formats of a COBOL source program and library Specify FIX for the fixed length format specify FREE for the free format specify VAR for the variable length format Specify the reference format of COBOL source program then specify that of the library If the two reference formats are the same there is no need to specify the library program format 35 WINCOB WC run time environment information name SSIN SYSIN Specifies the data input destination of the ACCEPT statement for ACCEPT DISPLAY function e SSIN run time environment information name A file is used as the data input destination At run time specify the path name of the run time environment information name e SSIN SYSIN The console window is used as the data input destination The run time environment information name can be specified with up to eight uppercase letters and numeric characters beginning with an uppercase letter A to Z Appendix A Compiler Options 605 The run time environm
6. m Link Object Link File ee Browse List Add Delete Figure 34 The WINLINK window The WINLINK window contains the following elements Commands Switches the window between linking files mode and building COBOL libraries mode 92 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Help Access the online help Target edit box Specify the name of the file to be created Type radio buttons Specify whether an EXE or DLL file should be created Link File edit box Specify the name of a file to be added to the List Link Object List Displays a list of the input files to the link Browse button Click to select a file to be included in the link Add button Click to add the file in the Link File edit box to the List D elete button Click to remove the selected file s from the List OK button Click to start the link and close the WINLINK window Cancel button Click to close the WINLINK window without performing a link Options button Click to specify the link options Chapter 4 Linking Programs 93 Link button Click to start the link and keep the WINLINK window open for further links Entering the Target Name The name of the file to be created by linking can be entered in the Target edit box using one of two methods Method 1 1 Select whether the target should be EXE or DLL in the Type box 2 Enter or browse and select an object file in the Link File edit box 3 Click the Add button The object
7. 150 Chapter 5 Executing Programs For example Program call relations rProgram A 7 CALL B2 f CALL C2 CALL C3 f CALL BL f CALL B3 7 CALL C1 f Program B14 rProgram B24 rProgram Ba DLL rProgram Cl4 rProgram C24 rProgram CH DLL Notes on Canceling Subprograms The DLL containing the program that is the target of the CANCEL statement is deleted from the virtual memory space Entry information A ENTRY B1 B DLL B2 B1 B3 B1 C1 C DLL C2 C1 C3 C1 In the above example if any of B1 B2 or B3 is specified in the CANCEL statement B DLL is deleted from the virtual memory space Note Files opened in subprograms may not be closed if the subprogram is not explicitly canceled CANCEL In these circumstances you must make sure your programs close the affected files before a CANCEL is performed The following three examples illustrate this concept Chapter 5 Executing Programs 151 Example 1 When a canceled subprogram does a static call Entry information 7 A ENTRY FILE 1 B1 B DLL ren Pr E2 OPEN FILE 2 Static Linkage structure gt FILE 2 Dynamic Linkage structure gt Dynamic program structure gt DLL State of file after CANCEL sentence is executed FILE 1 Closed FILE 2 Opened rProgram A rogram B1 OPEN FILE 1 F CALL B2
8. 434 QUUING annei a a a a engine AA E hie Ta 435 Operating Environment s ssssssssssssssssssisiirsrntntnenisiststnnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnn na 435 Program SpecifiCatiOns cceccecceccseeseeeceeeeeceeeeeeseeaeaeeeseeesecaesaeeessaeeaseeseetsenesseeaseeeas 436 Program Compilation and Linkage ssssssesesesssrersrsrssisrsrsrsisisnsnnsrsnsrsrsrsnnnnnnnns 440 Program EXECUTION iieiea dias areia are aira e iaaa 440 Using ACM Communication cceccccececeeseeeeeeceeeeseeeseeaeeesaeeesesaetaneeeeaetaseaseetaees 441 Using Presentation File Module Synchronous Communication Programs 442 OUTING iors Sse as arera anaietan a e lb cbs aie aaa aaae a Ea aE ge aaa aaa 443 Program SpecificationS sesessessssssssssesssssnsisrssserenenisnnnsnntnnntntntnnnntnentnenennnnnnnenenene 445 Program Compilation and Linkage ssssssesesesrersrsrsrssrsrsrsrsrsrnrnsnnsnsrsnsrsrsrnnnsnnns 449 Programy EXECU M iaioa ia raan eiia eaaa AAEE ENEA Eaa aar A ENE 449 Using Simplified Inter application COMMuUNICatiOn ssssesssssseersrersrssrrrsrsrsrnrnenen 449 QUH Enaria a arai aeeai i aaiae aa eea araa 449 Operating Procedures sesssssssssssssssssssnsnsenensnsnsnsneununnnntntntnsnennnneneneunnnnnnensnnnnnnnnnna 450 Server Operation WINdOWS s s s sssssssssisrsrsrsisrssssrsistsnstnnntntnnnentnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 454 Client Operation WINdOW ce eeeceecceeeeceeeeeeeceeseeeeeeesecaetaeeessecessetaeseeseetaetaseatieeas
9. 80 SANTA CLARA CA USA LONDON W C 2 ENGLAND FIFTH AVENUE NY USA SANTA CLARA CA USA LONDON W C 2 ENGLAND FIFTH AVENUE NY USA SANTA CLARA CA USA LONDON W C 2 ENGLAND FIFTH AVENUE NY USA SAN FRANCISCO CA USA DALLAS TX USA SYDNEY AUSTRALIA Chapter 15 Database SQL 521 Retrieving Data from a Table Where Rows are Related Data can be retrieved from a table where rows are related in the same manner as when different tables are related The following example retrieves the names of products that are in the warehouse where televisions TELEVISION are stored Two different aliases correlation names are given to the STOCK table They are treated as if they were different tables This COBOL program relates table rows and retrieves the product names in the warehouse which stores televisions TELEVISION EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 PRODUCT NAME PIC X 20 01 SQLSTATE PIC Mo EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P END END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR4 CURSOR FOR SELECT DISTINCT X2 GOODS FROM STOCK X1 STOCK X2 WHERE X1 GOODS TELEVISION AND X1 WHNO X2 WHNO END EXEC P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR4 END EXEC P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR4 INTO PRODUCT NAME END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P END EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR4 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP
10. ALPHAL LINECOUNT 60 SDS BINARY WORD MLBON LINESIZE 136 NOSOURCE Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 39 Diagnostic Message Listing COBOL85 V30L10 program name TUE JAN 30 19 00 45 1996 0002 5 DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE program name C TEST COB 4 JMN2503I S USER WORD A IS UNDEFINED 6 Compile Unit Statistical Information Listing COBOL85 V30L10 program name TUE JAN 30 19 00 45 1996 0003 STATISTICS FILE NAME C TEST COB DATE AND TIME TUE JAN 30 1996 19 00 45 SOURCE STATEMENTS 5 RECORDS PROGRAM SIZE CODE 0 BYTES CONTROL LEVEL 1 LEVEL CPU TIME 4 72 sec HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE S N otes 1 Indicates the compilation date 2 Indicates the page number 3 Indicates the compiler options specified by the user 4 Indicates a list of compiler options established by the COBOL85 compiler 5 Indicates the program name 6 Indicates the diagnostic message output by the COBOL85 compiler For details on the format of the diagnostic message refer to Appendix F Message Lists 7 Indicates the number of records in the source program input by the COBOL85 compiler When a library has been fetched the number of fetched records is included 8 Indicates the size of the object program When the compilation operation was completed normally and the object program has been output the DATA size is also output 40 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 9 Indicates the level of t
11. Click to start the link and close the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window Cancel button Click to close the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window without performing a link Build button Click to start the link and keep the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window open for further links The following sections describe how to use the window to build libraries 100 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Entering a Target Library Name Enter the name of a target library in the COBOL Library File edit box by using either of the procedures below Method 1 Enter the name of an object file in Object File The entered file name having the extension LIB is displayed in the COBOL Library File edit box Method 2 Enter the name of the target file in the COBOL Library File edit box If an existing library name is entered here the library is deleted and anew library is created Entering Files Enter the names of object files to be linked in the Link Object List with the procedures below 1 Click on the Link Object Browse button then select required files from the Browse Files dialog box 2 Click on the Open button The selected file names are displayed in the Object File edit box Alternatively the file name s can be keyed directly into the Object File edit box 3 Click on the Add button The file names are added to the Link Object List 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 until all object files to be linked are entered
12. The x coordinate is calculated by multiplying the line number by a defined constant then dividing by the CPI then multiplying by the DPI and then dividing the remainder by the defined constant The y coordinate is calculated by multiplying the line number by a defined constant then dividing by the LPI then multiplying by the DPI and then dividing the remainder by the defined constant Note As Chapter 5 Executing Programs 139 with TY PE1 the remainder is rounded down However in this case the error is corrected every one inch and actual PrintTextPosition does not shift 22 CBR_TextAlign Specify alignment of print characters with either top or bottom of line 32 TOP CBR_TextAlign BOTTOM Specify the alignment of print characters in a line when the FORMAT clause is omitted from the file control entry When the printer line height is greater than the character height you can specify alignment of the printed characters to the top of the line or the bottom of the line 23 PRN_FormName_xxx Specification of paper size 32 Dynamically specify the paper size to be used at run time when the FORMAT clause is omitted from the file control entry and the control record is used for printing refer to Using Print File 2 in Chapter 8 In the control record the FSIZE field is set toa user defined string of three characters or less The user defined string replaces XXX Environment variable PRN_FormN ame_xxx is se
13. condition For example repeat processing can be terminated by determining the processing result during repeat processing Using Pointers This section explains how to use pointers IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name DATA DIVISION BASED STORAGE SECTION 01 data name 1 BASED ON pointer 1 77 data name 2 BASED ON pointer 2 WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 pointer 1 POINTER LINKAGE SECTION 01 pointer 2 POINTER PROCEDURE DIVISION USING pointer 2 MOVE pointer 1 gt data name l IF pointer 2 gt data name 2 END PROGRAM program name Outline A pointer is used to reference an area having a specific address The following data items are required to use a pointer e Data item defined in BASED STORAGE section 1 e Data item whose attribute is pointer data item 2 424 Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions The pointer is normally used with the pointer qualifier gt 1 is pointed to by 2 This is called pointer qualification as shown in the following example 2 gt 4 In this case the contents of 1 are those of the area whose address is set in 2 Program Specifications This section explains the contents of a program that uses pointers for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required DATA DIVISION The data names where addresses are specified for reference or update must be defined in the BASED STORAGE section
14. 410 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM_ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT sort file 1 ASSIGN TO SORTWKO1 SELECT input file 1 ASSIGN TO file reference identifier 1 SELECT output file 1 ASSIGN TO file reference identifier 2 DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION SD sort file 1 RECORD record size 01 sort record 1 Contents of sort record 02 sort key 1 02 datal FD input file 1 01 input record 1 Contents of input record 02 data2 FD output file 1 01 output record 1 Contents of output record 02 data3 PROCEDURE DIVISION SORT sort file 1 ASCENDING KEY sort key 1 DESCENDING USING input file 1 INPUT PROCEDURE IS input procedure 1 GIVING output file 1 OUTPUT PROCEDURE IS output procedure 1 input procedure 1 SECTION OPEN INPUT input file 1 inputstart READ input file 1 AT END GO TO input end MOVE input record 1 TO sort record 1 RELEASE sort record 1 GO TO input start input end CLOSE input file 1 output procedure 1 SECTION OPEN OUTPUT output file 1 output start RETURN sort file 1 AT END GO TO output end END RETURN MOVE sort record 1 TO output record 1 WRITE output record 1 GO TO output start output end CLOSE output file 1 END PROGRAM program name Chapter 12 Using SORT ME
15. BASED ON clause 425 BASED STORAGE section 424 building 170 BY CONTENT 359 C C programs calling from COBOL programs 364 call programs referring to command line arguments 399 CALL statement 82 149 356 CALL statement 371 called programs 356 calling programs from COBOL programs 356 passing return code values 360 calling relations 354 CHARACTER TYPE 309 CHARACTER TYPE clause 271 chart record 308 client 450 client operation 453 client operation window 473 client server connecting 505 disconnecting 507 COBCI_CLOSE 480 484 COBCI_OPEN 480 482 COBCIL READ 485 COBCI_READ COBCIL_ WRITE 480 COBCI_WRITE 488 COBOL program descriptions for 387 reference format 16 COBOL file creating 252 COBOL files adding records to 253 COBOL functions 2 COBOL programs calling from C programs 368 COBOL source program creating 571 COBOL85 compiler 3 development environment 7 FILE UTILITY 6 interactive debugger 4 programs 3 supported products 10 utilities 3 COBOL85 compiler 560 functions 3 COBOLS85 debugger 560 COBOL85 FILE UTILITY 246 247 execute commands 247 functions 251 using 246 COBOLS85 FILE UTILITY environment set up 246 COBOL85 run time system 560 COBOL85 run time system information file 16 303 COBPRTST command program file 560 COBPRTST dialog box 574 activating 574 using 577 COBPRTST Update dialog box using with presentation file module test function 577 com
16. Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 33 000001 STATISTICS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE I PROGRAM UN lt lt OSS END Ki 1 lines were read Figure 16 The PowerFRAMEVIEW Editor Verify that compilation completed normally and then select Exit in the WINCOB window The WINCOB window closes Compilation of the sample program is now complete Verify that the object program SAM PLE1 OB was created in the same directory C FSC PCOBOL16 SAMPLES SAMPLE1in this example as the directory where the sample program was stored If compilation does not complete normally the program may not have been installed properly Verify that the program was installed properly 34 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Resources Necessary for Compilation This section explains the files used by the COBOL85 compiler and the information that it produces Files Used by the COBOL85 Compiler The COBOL85 compiler uses the following files 1 Source 2 Library 3 Screen and form 4 File descriptor file file descriptor file file COB CBL SMD FFD 5 Option file 4 4 4 4 DEFAULT CBI ac S aI L COBOL85 CBI L L 6 Initialization OBJ SVD LST file 7 Object 8 Debugging 9 Compiler 10 Compile file information Listing message file file Figure 17 Files used by the COBOL85 compiler 1 A compile message is written in the editor when compilation terminates Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 35 The followi
17. DISPLAY 02 Bl PIC S9 7 BINARY OCCURS 20 TIMES MOVE 1 TO I IF B1 I ZD GO TO EXIT 1 ADD 1 TO I IF I IS lt 20 GO TO LOOP 1 If ZD never changes throughout the loop in Example 1 the compiler shifts ZD to Binary conversion processing by the IF statement to the outside of the loop 622 Appendix C Global Optimization Optimizing an Induction Variable If the compiler finds a loop containing a partial expression that uses an item induction item defined recursively only by a constant asin ADD 1TO l for example or by an item with an unchanging value it introduces a new induction variable and changes the multiplication of the subscript calculation formula to an addition Example 1 I PIC S9 4 BINARY REC 1 02 A PIC X 10 OCCURS 20 TIMES ADD 1 TO I IF I IS lt 20 GO TO LOOP 1 Because is defined recursively by a constant within the loop in Example 1 the compiler introduces a new induction variable to replace the multiplication I 10 in the address calculation formula for A I A 10 1 10 with t and generates ADD 10 TO t after 2 Furthermore if is not used anywhere else in the loop and concurrently the value of calculated inside the loop is not used after control exits from the loop the compiler replaces 3 with IF t IS lt 20 GO TO LOOP 1 and deletes 2 Optimizing a PERFORM Statement The compiler expands the PERFORM statement into some instructions for
18. FORM RTS LOCAL Input Output processing MeFt NET REMOTE Input Output processing Use Used for screen input output Used for screen input with complex screens output simple screens for example form slip Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 329 Using Presentation Files Screen Input Output This section outlines how the presentation file module is used for screen input output explains how to establish operation environments and describes how to generate screen descriptors and COBOL source programs For sample programs of screen input output using the presentation file module refer to the Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL guide Outline The presentation file module performs screen input output using screens screen descriptors defined with FORM Screen descriptors are generated with a screen image with FORM Data items for input output processing defined in the screen descriptors can be included ina COBOL program at compile time with aCOBOL COPY statement Therefore you do not specify data item definitions for input output processing ina COBOL program The attributes of data defined in the screen descriptors can be changed during execution of a program with a COBOL special register Operation Environments To use the presentation file screen input output module screen descriptors generated with FORM are required The following figure shows how an executable file is generated 330 Chapter 9 Input
19. Run time Environment Setup Window 7 Quit execution To quit execution and close the WIN EXEC window select Exit in the WIN EXEC window Setting Run time Environment Information This section explains the relationship between the types of run time environment information and setup procedures and how to set each item in the run time environment Types of Run time Environment Information Information required to execute COBOL applications is called run time environment information There are two types of run time environment information environment variable information and entry information Environment variable information includes items such as the console window size console font and file identifier Entry information includes the dynamic program structure The following table lists the types of run time environment information For details on run time environment information see Format of Run time Environment Information 120 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Table 9 Types of run time environment information Run time Description Run time Description Environment Environment Information Information of files GOPT Set run time options CBR_CIINF Set the logical destination definition file M GPRM Set the GS series CBR_ENTRYFILE 3 Set the entry parameter conDLL Set the DLL nameof CBR_PSFILE_xxx Set the connected an icon resource product name used from the presentation file an icon resource time messag
20. Specify the applicable name of the screen and form descriptors to use Cannot be specified at the same time as FCB PRT FORM Specify a print format The following values can be specified e P portrait mode e L landscape mode e LP line printer mode e PZ reduced printing portrait mode e LZ reduced printing landscape mode PZ and LZ reduction specifications however are ignored P and L specifications are used instead SIZE Specify a forms size The following sizes can be specified A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 and LTR You can dynamically specify a paper size to be used at run time In the control record the FSIZE field is set to a user defined string of three characters or less The user defined string replaces XXX in the environment variable PRN_FormName_xxx which is called at run time Environment variable PRN_FormN ame_xxx is set equal to a string that defines the paper size The values for the paper size strings can be found in the Windows system printer defaults 298 Chapter 8 Printing Refer to the method of specifying execution environment information in Format of Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 N ote The user defined string specifies a blank for this field when paper sizes are specified by using the print file with aFORMAT clause and specifies an actual paper size with the printer information file For additional details refer to the FORM RTS online help HOPPER Specify a ho
21. eee eseceeeeetecseeeecesaeeeceeeeesesaesaseeseessaseeseesetataetaseetiee 185 COBOL85 User s Guide xv Creating the M odule Definition Fil cccscssccsssssresssssssssssrssesssssaesersseseneeess 185 Building and Rebuilding the Project ceeccccccseseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeetseeseetteteeeeeaes 187 Modifying File Contents oe cseeceeeeteceeeeeseeecaeeaeeesseeaesaeeeseesseseeseeteteetaetaseatiee 187 Executing Application Programs ccccsecceceeeseeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseesaeeaseeseeteteeteeee 188 Chapter 7 File ProcesSsing ssns eens 189 File OrganiZation Ty Pe vieiis iieiea eae iaaii iaaa 190 File Organization Types and Characteristics eseseesesrssseserrsrsirrerersrersrsrsns 190 Record Sequential Files ccceccccsseceeceesesseceeeeeeecesaeeeseessesaseeseessaseessseeseesesaseatsee 191 Eine Sequential Files scsi wu dona ae a aiaa aea a aaa Bete 192 Relative Files wiccve dese ni denen Siok knees Ah eave Adee eile 193 indexed Files si ceti tee i eivnsieine de ct alin aualn a Ged nates 194 Designing RECA Sgeiran ka ide ited eae ten ah ite 194 PROCESSING Fi eS ieee steht hd distended dedi ced ath dae eed 196 Using Record Sequential Files 0 cecceccccseseeeceeeseeeeeseeeeesaeseeeeseecsesaeeeesaesaeeasaeeeteees 198 Defining Record Sequential Files cccceeeeeeeeseeeeceeseeeeseeeeeessesaeeeseesesaaeeetaees 199 Defining Record Sequential File RECOrS 0 cecceseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseseeeseeteetetaseeees 201 Processing Record Sequential
22. 1 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Correct the program so that the RETURN statement is not executed after a file at end condition is produced The error address is written for 1 JMP0613I I U SORT MERGE LIBRARY CANNOT BE LOADED 1 2 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Remove the cause of the error then re execute The library file name is set in 1 and the error code is set in 2 Refer to the Visual C online help N ote If 1 and 2 are not output confirm whether or not PowerSORT is correctly installed Appendix F Message Lists 677 JMP07011 U GCB IS BROKEN Abnormally terminates the program Response The program is broken Correct the program as follows then re execute e If anitem including a subscript index reference modification or OCCURS DEPENDING ON clauseis referred to confirm that the item is within the allowable reference range If there is a parameter for transferring data through the CALL statement confirm that the sender and receiver have the same parameter attributes Be sure t
23. 3 Error Contents Programmer Response INV CHAR A line sequential file record or Check the data contents print file record contains an invalid character INV LEN The record length specified in Specify the correct length of the the WRITE or REWRITE record to be written statement is invalid KEY CHANGE The key value at request for Correct the program so that the updating the record was key valueis not changed at different from the key valueat updating of the record reading of the record loaded environment NO TRANS Some characters in native mode Check the data contents cannot be converted into a code set S physical structure REC LOCK The record is exclusively used Re execute If the exclusive by another user or the record error occurs repeatedly cannot be used exclusively confirm that the error does not because it is being used by affect operation another user R KEY ERR The relative key contents Specify a data item sizein the conflict with the definition PICTURE clause large enough specified in the PICTURE to store the maximum value of clause during random or the relative key dynamic access The relative key item valueis 0 Specify anon zero value for the relative key item Appendix F Message Lists 661 Table 79 Character strings written for JMP0320I I U 3 cont 3 sd Error Contents Programmer Response Error code from the system A system error probably xxxx Expressed in occurred Collect the
24. 329 using screen descriptors 329 using for each COBOL division 333 presentation file module test function using 573 presentation file module test function opreating environment 568 prime keys 195 223 print characters 271 fonts of 273 forms of 273 size of 272 spaces 273 print file 192 defining 279 defining in a file control entry 309 defining in file control entry 281 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION 280 executing a program that uses form descriptors 314 form descriptors used with 314 program descriptions 280 required environments to execute a program 314 using with FCB 305 print files 268 using with form descriptors 307 writing programs using form descriptors in 308 print format 297 print lines control of 283 print side 298 printer assigning 283 input output statement 311 printer information file assigning 310 assigning to file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause 315 specified with a relative path name 314 specifying a file reference identifier 310 printer modes orders 304 printer modes orders 304 printer programs 287 PRINTERSEQUENCE 303 printing 267 conrol records 295 defining ENVIRONMENT DIVISION 294 forms using form overlay patters 293 procedures 299 using a presentation file 271 using a print file without a FORMAT clause 270 using form overlay pattern with a print file 292 using print file with a FORMAT clause 270 printing data in line mode 278 printing forms
25. 358 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Passing Parameters Parameters can be passed between calling programs and subprograms In acalling program write data items defined in the FILE WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE sections in the USING phrase of the CALL statement In a subprogram write data names to receive parameters in the USING phrase of the PROCEDURE DIVISION header or ENTRY statement The order of data names entered in the USING phrase of the CALL statement of the calling program corresponds to that of data names written in the USING phrase of the called subprogram Data names need not be the same between the calling program and subprogram The attribute length and number of corresponding data items however should be the same A B WORKING STORAGE SECTION LINKAGE SECTION 01 A PICX X PIC X 01 B PIC x 10 7 Y PIC X 10 oc 7 Z PIC X 10 02 D PIC X 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION USING 02 EPIC x 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL B USING Shared area A x B Y C Z Figure 103 Order of data names between calling and called programs When the contents of parameters of the calling program should not be changed with the execution of the subprogram write BY Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication CONTENT data name in the USING phrase of the CALL statement A B WORKING STORAGE SECTION 7 PARM A PIC X 5 PROCEDURE DIV
26. 372 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Program abc is called regardless of whether or not compiler option ALPHAL or NOALPHAL is specified A COBOL program compiled with compiler option ALPHAL specified can be called from a C program If so the desired program may not be called since the program name specified in the PROGRA M ID paragraph is always treated as being uppercase Specify compiler option NOALPHAL when compiling programs For example PROGRAM ID abc When compiler option NOALPHAL is specified the program name is abc When compiler option ALPHAL is valid the program name is ABC When compiling aC program to be linked to a COBOL program an option with which the DS and SS registers are discriminated and the memory mode is large for example Microsoft C compiler option ALw must be specified 16 Since COBOL85 supports multiple data segments you can write the Data Division of 64K bytes or more DS and SS registers do not always have the same address The operation therefore may be undefined when aC program operating on the assumption that DS and SS registers have the same address is called C run time libraries have many functions that process DS and SS on the assumption that they are the same In addition suppressing stack checks and adding Windows prologue and epilogue codes to all FAR functions using Microsoft C compiler option Gws in C programs executed under the Windows
27. AT END CONDITION STM READ FILE 1 2 Abnormally terminates the program Response e Specify AT END phrasein the READ statement to perform file end processing 662 Appendix F Message Lists e Check whether the number of input data items is correct The file name or access name of the file with which a file end condition was produced is written for 1 The error address is written for 2 JMP0322I U KEY SEQUENCE ERROR STM 1 FILE 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Response e If listhe WRITE statement correct the program so that the key values are written in ascending order If 1 is the REWRITE or DELETE statement correct the program so that the key value of the record read by the previous READ statement is not changed The file name or access name of the file with which an invalid key condition was produced is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 JMP0323I U DUPLICATE KEY ERROR STM 1 FILE 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Response Correct the program so that a key is not duplicated The error COBOL statement WRITE REWRITE or CLOSE is written for 1 The file name or access name of the error file is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 JMP0324I U RECORD NOT FOUND STM 1 FILE 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Appendix F Message Lists 663 Response e Correct the program so that attempts to access a non existent record are inhibited Co
28. COMPANY NAME ADDRESS FROM COMPANY WHERE PHONE TELEPHONE NUMBER END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 135 Operating variable length character string data 1 Declares variable length character strings as host variables 2 Executes the ACCEPT statement to read the value of the host variable used as the search condition and sets the value as TELEPHONE NUMBER STRING 3 Sets the length of the read value as TELEPH ON E N UMBER LENGTH 532 Chapter 15 Database SQL 4 Executes the SELECT statement single row to retrieve the row meeting the search condition from column ADDRESS The length and value of the retrieved character string are set into the host variable ADDRESS If the data of a host variable used as a search condition is a character string type or a national character string type define the length of the host variable to be equal to or shorter than the length of the character string Chapter 15 Database SQL 533 Operating the Cursor with More than One Connection This section explains how to operate a cursor with more than one connection The following COBOL program is used for operating the cursor in the following conditions e SVi1and SV2 exist as servers e Both servers contain a table under the same name and in the same format EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 PRODUCT NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 01 PRODUCT NAME
29. ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Define a presentation file in the same manner as you define a general file Write a file control entry in the file control paragraph Required Optional Chapter 14 Communication Functions 437 of the input output section The following table lists the information to be specified in the file control entry Table 49 Information to be specified in the file control entry Information Type Details and Use of Specification SELECT clause File name Specify the file name used in the COBOL program The file name must comply with the COBOL user defined words rules ASSIGN clause Filereference identifier Specify in the GS file identifier format This file identifier is used as run time environment information for specifying the connected product name at run time SYMBOLIC Destination type Specify ACM DESTINATION clause DESTINATION Data name Specify a data name defined as an clause 8 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The logical destination name of input output processing must be specified for this data name when communication starts FILE STATUS Data name Specify a data name defined as a clause 2 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The execution results of input output processing must be specified for this data name See A ppendix B I O Status List for the value to be specified Specify a 4 byte alphan
30. File identifier information file name connected product name Specify the file identifier entered in the ASSIGN clause of the COBOL source program When using FORM RTS specify the FORM RTS window information file name or printer information file name used as data file name Specify a string indicating the connected product name actually used as the connected product name refer to No 20 If omitted the value specified in CBR_PSFILE_xxx is effective If the connected product name in the run time environment information is also omitted the default destination in the presentation file is assumed Specify run time environment information in uppercase letters even if the file identifier was entered in lowercase letters in programs For example e Description of the ASSIGN clause in the COBOL source program ASSIGN TO GS DSPFILE e SYMBOLIC DESTINATION clause SYMBOLIC DESTINATION IS DSP e Name of file data actually used F WORK WRC e Connected product actually used Chapter 5 Executing Programs 145 FORM RTS e Run time environment information DSPFILE F WORK WRC M EFT 28 SYSIN Access Name Set the Input File for the ACCEPT DISPLAY Function SYSIN access name file name Specify the environment variable name specified in the compiler option SSIN as SYSIN access name Specify the name of the file used as the data input destination when the ACCEPT statement of the ACCEPT DISPLAY function is run For exam
31. If the exclusive error occurs repeatedly confirm that the error does not affect operation invalid FILE LOCK The file is exclusively used by another user or the file cannot be used exclusively because it is being used by another user FTNCD xxxx Error code from the system Check for and eliminate the Xxxx Expressed in hexadecimal cause of the error according to the system error code 2 loaded environment LOCK FULL The lock table is full Re execute If the error occurs Ce repeatedly confirm that the error does not affect operation NON FILE The file did not exist when the Before executing the program OPEN statement without create the file OUTPUT specified was executed NON REEL The CLOSE statement with Correct the program executed Appendix F Message Lists 655 Table 77 Character strings written for JMP0310I I U 3 1 cont 3 ErrorContents Programmer Response _ _ NON UNIQUE Allocated file has a duplicate Make the keys duplicate in the invalid then open the file specified file name is invalid specify the correct file name invalid format RM ERR xxxx Error code from the system A system error probably Xxxx Expressed in hexadecimal occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE UNSUPPORT The file does not support the Check the file attribute or specified function confirm that there is no physical error 1 An attempt was made to access a different file organization o
32. SPEC SY DATA WORK 01 PROCE D E END P Message Boxes FICATION DIVISION RAM ID program name ONMENT DIVISION GURATION SECTION AL NAMES SERR IS mnemonic name DIVISION gt NG STORAGE SECTION data name DURE DIVISION SPLAY data name UPON mnemonic name XIT PROGRAM ROGRAM program name Normally COBOL program run time messages are displayed in messag e boxes With a COBOL program messages other than run time messages can also be displayed in the message boxes Executi ng aDISPLAY statement opens a message box and clicking on the OK button closes it Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 391 Program Specifications This section explains program descriptions for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION In the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION associate a mnemonic name with function name SY SERR DATA DIVISION In the DATA DIVISION define data items to set output data Define these data items with one of the following attributes e Group item e Alphabetic item e Alphanumeric item e External decimal item e Alphanumeric edited item e Numeric edited item e National item e National edited item 392 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements PROCEDURE DIVISION To send a message to a message box use a DISPLAY statement where a mnemonic name associated with function name SY SERR is specified in the UPON clause If adata name is specified in a DISPLAY
33. The data names for storing addresses with the attribute of pointer data item POINTER must also be defined in the FILE section WORKING STORAGE section BASED STORAGE section and LINKAGE section Defining Data Names in BASED STORAGE Section A data name can be defined in the BASED STORAGE section by using a data description entry the same way as defining ordinary data An actual area is not secured for a data name defined in the BASED STORAGE section during program execution Thus Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions 425 when referencing a data item defined in BASED STORAGE specify the address of the area to reference When the BASED ON clause is specified in a data description entry the data name can be used without pointer qualification since a pointer is implicitly given by the data name specified in the BASED ON clause When using a data name where the BASED ON clauseis not specified pointer qualification is required PROCEDURE DIVISION A data name with a pointer given can be specified in such statements as the MOVE and IF statements just like an ordinary data name Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linkage options are required Program Execution No specific environment settings are required 426 Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions Using the ADDR and LENG Functions This section explains how to use the ADDR and LENG functions IDENTIFICATION DIVIS
34. Write the record definition to be used for communication and the data definition specified in the file control entry PROCEDURE DIVISION Use input output statements for communication processing in the same manner as for general file processing e OPEN statement Starts message send receive processing e READ and WRITE statements Send and receive messages e CLOSE statement Quits message send receive processing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement to start message send receive processing Execute a CLOSE statement to quit message send receive processing READ and WRITE Statements To send a message use the WRITE statement where the communication record is specified To receive a message use the READ statement where the presentation file is specified Before executing the READ or WRITE statement specify the logical destination name for the data name specified in the DESTINATION 1 clause Messages are sent to and received from the destination of the specified logical destination name Chapter 14 Communication Functions 449 Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler or linkage options are required Program Execution The communication environment of IDCM should be straightened from the execution of the COBOL program when the program which communicates between programs which use the display file function is executed Refer to the IDCM User s Guide and the online help in the IDCM softwa
35. and reference modification is incorporated into the object program Consequently execution performance is degraded When the debug function terminates recompile the program without the Dk option specified Note The Dk option functions the same as compiler option CHECK For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Dt Specify the Dt option to use an interactive debugger Note The Dt option functions the same as the compiler option TEST For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options and the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide 710 Appendix J Command Formats dd directory name Specify a directory of a debug information file If the dd option is not specified the debug information file is created in the directory of the source file The dd option is effective only when it is specified with the Dt option or the TEST compiler option do directory name Specify a directory for storing an object file If the do option is not specified the object file is created in the directory of the source file M Specify the M option to compile a COBOL program serving as the main program for execution Note The M option functions the same as compiler option MAIN For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options O Specify the O option to create a globally optimized object program Note The O option functions the same as compiler option O
36. another file destination file is created in the current directory The name of the copy destination file is the object module name with extension OB added Module move to Specify name of the object module to be moved The move another file destination file is created in the current directory The name of the move destination file is the object module name with extension OBJ added Press the CTRL and C keys together to cancel LIB command processing IMPLIB Command 16 This section explains the MPLIB command of Windows 3 1 Use the IM PLIB command to create import libraries For import libraries refer to Resources Required for Linking in Chapter 4 718 Appendix J Command Formats Input Format IM PLIB 16 import library name module definition filename dll name Operands At least one space is required between the command name and the operand import library name Specify name of the import library to be created module definition file name or dll name Specify a module definition file for a DLL or the DLL name An import library is created according to the contents of the module definition file for a DLL specified here LINK Command 32 This section explains the LINK command for the Windows 95 and Windows NT version Input Format LINK 32 filename list option list Operands At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolut
37. e The system completes linking The command prompt window displays a message stating that the system has completed linking Make sure that linking has completed successfully then close the command prompt window 70 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Windows 3 1 This section shows how to use WINLINK to link the Sample 1 program This section assumes the file containing the object program to be C FSC PCOBOL16 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 OBJ The section describes how to link the example dynamically 1 Select WINLINK from the Utilities menu in the P STAFF window The WINLINK Linking Files window appears WINLINK Linking Files Exit Options Commands Help Target Name Target R EXE c fsc pcoboll 6 samples sample1l sample1 exe C DLL File Names i c fsc pcoboll 6 samples sample1 sample1 objj Build c fsc pcoboll 6 samples samplel sample1 obj Browse inil Remove Figure 29 The WINLINK Linking Files window 2 Set the required information Select EXE in the Target box Enter the object file Click on the Add button The object name is displayed in the list box The executable program to be created by linking is displayed Enter the module definition file Click on the Add button Chapter 4 Linking Programs 71 3 Click on the Build button in the WINLINK Linking Files window A link message is displayed in the message window 4 Thesystem completes linking A message stat
38. file module For details on window information files and how to generate them refer to the FORM RTS online help The following table lists information to be set in a window information file Table 36 Information to be set in a window information file ee o Type screen descriptors Optional MEDSUF Specify the extension of the file containing screen descriptors When the specification of the extension is omitted the default value of FORM RTS is used MEDCNT Specify the number of registrations of screen descriptors The default value is 10 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 341 Program Execution The following environments must be set to execute a program that performs screen input output processing using the presentation file module e When using FORM RTS Add the directory containing FORM RTS to environment variable PATH Set the name of the window information file with the file identifier as an environment variable name When a window information file is specified with a relative path name it is retrieved in the following sequence Directory set for environment variable FORM RTSDIR 2 Current directory e When using MeFt NET 32 Add the directory containing MeFt NET SV to environment variable PATH Set the name of the window information file with the file identifier as an environment variable name The window information file must be prepared for Windows 3 1 The name of the window information f
39. form descriptors COBOL source programs and printer information files are required Generate form descriptors and COBOL source programs before compile time and print information files before execution 318 Chapter 8 Printing The following is the standard order of work procedures for printing forms with the presentation file module 1 Generate form descriptors with FORM or Power FORM 2 Generate COBOL source programs by using a text editor 3 Compile and link COBOL source programs to generate executable programs Generate printer information files with a text editor 5 Execute the executable programs Generating Form Descriptors This section describes how to generate form descriptors used by the presentation file module For detailed FORM functions and how to use FORM refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual Chapter 8 Printing 319 The following table lists information to be set to generate form descriptors Table 27 Information to be set to generate form descriptors Information Type Details and Use of Specification Specify the name of a file in which form descriptor is stored Definition size Specify the forms size with the numbers of lines and columns used as a data name when writing a COBOL program Item group Put one or more item to be printed at a single run of print processing into one item group This item group nameis used when writing aCOBOL program Optional Item control field Specify a 5
40. import library DLL or EXE Created automatically if omitted in the WINLINK window Define when required to create a DLL or executable file Created by the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries function Chapter 4 Linking Programs 75 Table 5 Files used by WINLINK cont File FileName 1 0 Condition to Use or Create Contents Format Import Optional Specify to create an library name LIB executable file having the dynamic link structure 16 Created when DLL is selected in WINLINK Linking Files and checked by selecting Building Import Libraries 32 Created automatically when DLL is selected in WINLINK Linking Files Dynamic Object file Created when linking has link library name DLL completed successfully DLL or Optional Executable Object file program name EXE or Optional name EXE Created when linking has completed successfully Executable Files The executable files created are Microsoft Windows applications and will run in the following environments e Microsoft Windows 95 operating system e Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 3 51 or above Microsoft Windows NT Server N etwork operating system Version 3 51 or above e Microsoft Windows 3 1 operating system 76 Chapter 4 Linking Programs DLLs DLLs are executable modules containing functions called to perform any processing from Windows applications A DLL is linked with an application at run time instead of
41. 1 PIC X 100 02 data 2 03 PICX OCCURS 1 to 100 TIMES DEPENDING ON length 1 WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 record length PIC9 3 BINARY 01 length 1 PIC 9 3 BINARY Processing Record Sequential Files Use input output statements to create extend reference and update record sequential files This section explains the types of input output statements used in record sequential file processing and outlines each type of processing Types of Input Output Statements OPEN CLOSE READ REWRITE and WRITE statements are used for input and output Chapter 7 File Processing 203 Using Input Output Statements The section provides explanation and examples of how to use input output statements OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement only once at the beginning of file processing and a CLOSE statement only once at the end of file processing The open mode specified in the OPEN statement depends on the kind of file processing For example for creation use the OPEN statement in the OUTPUT mode OUTPUT specified Other Statements To read records in a file use a READ statement To update records in a file use a REWRITE statement To write records to a file use a WRITE statement Execution Order of Input Output Statements The execution order of input output statements for creating extending referencing and updating are as follows For file creation OPEN OUTPUT file name Editing records WRITE reco
42. 473 Estimating Memory iseler iieiaei iiiaio aeae ianaeaieo diania ieina 478 Simplified Inter application Communication FUNCHHONS s s s 480 GOBGI OPEN s iieiea eein kaain aaie ankan daa Taa ire en Gees 482 COBCIE C O SE a a A een 434 GOBGI REA Dionas aaiae araa aa aeaea E EEE aia 435 COBE WRITE iii asa aaea aaa aaa a E a a a aeaa aatan 488 Error GOES pofsrii aaa e Seca sea ee ee Ae 493 Chapter 15 Database SQL a eaaa aaa a ea adaa aan aaa Aaaa aaa aa ada aaa 501 ODBC OUN DE a a i eet ede 502 Configuration of a COBOL Program With SQL sssssssssssssssssssrsrsrsisrsrsrsrsrsrsrssnnnn 503 Operations Using Embedded SQL ceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeesesaeeaseeseesaetaneaseeees 504 COMMOCH ON AEE E A E 505 Connecting to a SVE esssesssssssssssrsssssssrssstntnsnenensusnnannstststntntntntnnneunnnannennnnnnnenene 505 Disconnecting from a SEVE sssssssssesisrsrsrsisisissssnsiririnnsisisisinnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 507 Selecting a COnnecG ON is a a eae eu ned eed 507 Manipulating Data ceeeccesecceeecseeeeeeeececaeeaeeeesecaeeaeeesecsesaeeaseessesaesaseeseetaesaseasiees 511 Sample Database cecccceecceceeecseeeeeeeececseeaeeecsecaesaseesessesaeeaseessesaesaseeseetsesaetateetaes 512 Retrieving Data rirnan andar a a i eaea aea A aao 514 Updating Datan nania naaa a a a fisted aE Eaa a Eea 522 Deleting D te areae e a a a OTE gia aE iia 523 Inserting Dataa e e aa A E i A 523 Using Dynami SQL sass Gidea hinsled eine yee ds ears 524 xx
43. COB Start PROGRAM MING STAFF by clicking on Start Programs Fujitsu COBOL and Programming Staff 32 The PROGRAM MING STAFF P STAFF window opens Select WIN COB Compile from the Tools menu in the P STA FF window The WINCOB window opens Click on the Browse button and navigate to the directory where the sample program is stored Alternatively you can specify the file name in the edit box by entering it directly t WINCOB BEE Mode Help Source File OK CAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLET Samplel cob Options Compile Figure 3 The WINCOB window Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 25 Click on the Options button of the WIN COB window The Compiler Options dialog box is displayed Compiler Options Figure 4 The Compiler Options dialog box Click on the Add button The Add Compiler Options dialog box containing a list of available options is displayed Figure 5 The Add Compiler Options dialog box 26 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Select MAIN in the Compiler Options list box and click on the Add button The Details Compiler Option dialog box is displayed N ote The main program must be defined in order to distinguish it from the subprograms Compiler Option E3 MAIN Specification of main entry program Cancel i Compile program as sub program Figure 6 The Details Compiler Option dialog box Select Compile program as main program and click on the OK button
44. COB EXP LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB DLL OUT COB DLL COB DEF COBOL program module definition file name COB LIB COBOL program import library name COB OB COBOL program object file name F3BICIMP LIB COBOL run time system import library COB EXP COBOL program export file generated by the LIB command LIBC LIB KERN EL32 LIB USER32 LIB C run time library import library name required by COBOL COB DLL Name of the DLL to be generated Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 381 Executing Programs When calling COBOL programs from C programs no COBOL run time options can be specified for arguments of functions that call COBOL programs The run time options are treated the same as other arguments and are not handled as COBOL run time options even if specified Do not use the exit function to unconditionally terminate C programs called from COBOL programs Do not use the STOP RUN statement to terminate COBOL programs called from C programs with JMPCINT2 Unlike C character strings no null characters are inserted automatically at the end of COBOL character strings 382 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements This chapter offers tips on using the ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements including I O destination types and specification methods using console windows message boxes and program using files and entering current date and time Additionally C
45. Chapter 3 188 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Executing Application Programs To execute created application programs from the Project window 1 Select an application to execute When multiple applications are created select the appropriate application from the project window 2 When arun time parameter is defined select Argument at Execution from the Project menu in the P STAFF window then enter the parameter in the edit box 3 Click on the Execute button If the program is a COBOL application the Run time Environment Setup window may be displayed Set the required information and start execution Refer to Run time Environment Setup Window in Chapter 5 Chapter 7 File Processing This chapter explains how to read and write data files Among the topics covered in Chapter 7 are file organization types using record and line sequential files using relative and indexed files error processing file processing and the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY 190 Chapter 7 File Processing File Organization Types This section explains file organization types and characteristics and details how to design records and process files File Organization Types and Characteristics The following files can be processed by using sequential relative and indexed file functions Table 15 File types Sequential file function Record sequential files Line sequential files Print files Relative file function Relative files In
46. Chapter 4 Linking Programs 101 Starting and Quitting Library Building After all information required for linking has been set start building the libraries To start building click on the Build button Windows 95 and Windows NT The system brings up a command prompt window that displays the linker messages Windows 3 1 A building library message is displayed in the message window Windows 95 and Windows NT A building library end message is displayed in the command prompt window Make sure that linking has completed successfully then close the command prompt window Windows 3 1 A building library exit message is displayed in the message window Make sure that linking has completed successfully then close the message window To continue building repeat the procedure from the entering a target library name step To quit building click on the Cancel button in the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window This closes the window Using Commands to Link Object programs can also be linked with commands This section describes link operation with commands There are two commands the LINK command and the LIB command 102 Chapter 4 Linking Programs LINK Command 32 In Windows 95 and Windows NT the LINK command performs the link operation Refer to LINK Command in Appendix J for details of the format of the command When executing the LINK command the following libraries must be specified e F3BICI
47. DIVISION ACCEPT data name DISPLAY data name DISPLAY nonnumeric literal EXIT PROGRAM END PROGRAM program name Console Windows In aconsole window data is read from or displayed on a display unit with the ACCEPT DISPLAY function One console window is provided for each COBOL program run unit A console window is generated by the ACCEPT or DISPLAY statement first executed in the program run unit and is closed upon normal termination of the run unit The attributes of console windows can be changed with the COBOL initialization file COBOL85 CBR The following table lists the attributes that can be changed and the specification methods Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 387 Table 42 Changing the attributes of console windows Run time Environment Setting Value Information Automatic window WinCloseM sg ON Closes the window after dosing displaying a message Closes the window 1 OFF without displaying a message Window size CnslWinSize m n Specifies the size of a window with the number of lines m and the number of columns n Number of lines for CnslBufLine Number of lines Data for the number of data to be retained specified lines is retained and can be browsed by vertically scrolling the window 1 This run time environment information is also valid for windows used with the screen operation function Program Specifications This section explains the program descriptions
48. END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P END END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR2 CURSOR FOR SELECT GNO GOODS QOH FROM STOCK WHERE QOH lt 51 END EXEC P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR2 END EXEC P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR2 INTO PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P END EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR2 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 129 Retrieving data with conditions specified Chapter 15 Database SQL 517 1 The embedded SQL DECLARE section defines all host variables to be specified in enbedded SQL statements 2 The table is never referred to by declaring a cursor The table is referred to when the OPEN statement in 4 is executed 3 Executes the CONNECT statement to connect the server 4 Executes the OPEN statement to create a virtual table including rows that meet the condition specified during cursor declaration in 2 The virtual table is created and rows showing 50 or less in column QOH are extracted from the STOCK table then the data of columns GNO GOODS and QOH are retrieved from the extracted rows Generally the row order of a virtual table is undefined Executes the FETCH statement to fetch data row by row from the beginning of the virtual table created in 4 then writes the values of ea
49. EOS clause srenoaue of A eau dase erasure clause Specify partial ERASE EOL clause heare on display status Position Specify column COLUMN Specify line LINE NUMBER mode mode ak Seale eae lca ied skip desis ee characteristics Specify expression format o Can be specified A Can be specified but not validated x Cannot be specified 1 L Literal Input O Output U Update 1O Input output 2 Define G Group as a group item and E Elementary as an elementary item 350 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens PROCEDURE DIVISION To display a screen use a DISPLAY statement with a screen item defined After executing a DISPLAY statement data can be input froma displayed screen After input by referring the values of screen input output status set for data names specified in the CRT STATUS clause in the SPECIAL NAMES paragraph appropriate processing can be selected Program Compilation and Linkage No compiler options or additional libraries are required Program Execution To define a function key set the run time environment variable TERMINATOR as shown in the following example TERMINATOR PF1 PF4 PF5 PF12 PF13 PF16 PF1 to PF4 and PF13 to PF16 are valid but PF5 to PF12 are invalid To change a window attribute define the run time environment information listed in Table 37 Changing window attributes for screen handling Then execute the program The ACCEPT DISPLAY stateme
50. Fil S cccecceceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteseeseetieeaeeeetaes 202 Processing Qutline iniiaiee aaaeaii a eieaa 204 Using Line Sequential Files cecccceeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeesesaesaeeeseesseseeseesesanaetaseetees 206 Defining Line Sequential Files ccc ccccseeeeeecseeeeeeeceeeceesaeeeseesaesaseeseeetaseeseeneees 206 Defining Line Sequential File RECOrS ccececceseseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeseettetaeeaeee 207 Processing Line Sequential Files ccccccceseeseeeeeeseeeeseeceeesaeeeseessesaeeeseeseseeseetaees 208 Processing Qut iNe smsan eese aa AEAN E EEEE E EAE 210 USING Relative Files sssssssssssssssssssssssssnsrurssssnennnnsnstsnntnnntntntnnnntnnntnnnennnnnnnnnenenennnenn ane 211 Defining Relative Fil eiiie aiakiige ii aeaiia iaaea 212 Defining Relative File RecordS ssssssssssssssssssisisrernrininsisrsinntntnnnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnsnnnnns 214 Processing Relative FileS sssssssssrsssssssssrsrsissnsnsnsnssrsrsnntnnntntunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnt 215 Processing Qutline srana ania Mea aie ee alin 218 USING Indexed Files niiin aeaaea aaa a aanta Siaina aei eden 221 Defining Indexed Files esesesssssssssssssssssssnsssrssssnsnsnsnsnensunnnnennntnnntntnnnenennunnnnnnnnnnt 222 Defining Indexed File RecordS ceeeccesseseeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeateaseeseeaeetateeeeeeaseatee 224 Processing Indexed Fil S oo eeeeecsseeseseeeeeececeeeecaeeaeeeesessesaeeataseeeeaesaseeseetaetaseesiee 226 Processing QUEUING 1 ists Aenea die as a ete Ae
51. Function The indexed file recovery function refreshes normal sections from the beginning of the file and outputs abnormal sections to another file This allows you to recover an unusable indexed file unusable because it was not closed normally The indexed file recovery function works the same as the Recovery command of the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY If an indexed file in the unusable state is opened 90 is returned as the I O status Coding Format include flbcfutc h function declaration 16 include f3bifutc h function declaration 32 signed long int CFURCOV char far ixdfilename char far blkdatname char far message e ixdfilename Name of the file to be recovered 726 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery e blkdatname Name of the file containing data which could not be recovered e message Area storing the execution result message of the indexed file recovery function CFURCOV Function The following are explanations of the parameters of this function lixdfilename Specify the address of the area storing the name character string of the indexed file to be recovered The character string must end with a NULL 0x00 or blank 0x20 blkdatname Specify the address of the area storing the name character string of the file where unrecoverable records are written The character string must end with aNULL 0x00 or blank 0x20 Specify 0 if afile for writing unrecoverable record
52. IF statement 3 Declares a cursor to define the cursor name for referring to the STOCK table The example neither selects any specific columns from the STOCK table nor specifies any search conditions Thus a table derived from the query expression is identical to the original STOCK table 4 Executes the CONN ECT statement to connect the server 5 Executes the OPEN statement to enable the specified cursor 6 Executes the FETCH statement to fetch data row by row from the table and sets the values of each column into the corresponding host variable area 7 Executes the CLOSE statement to disable the specified cursor 8 Executes the ROLLBACK statement to terminate the transaction 9 Executes the DISCONNECT statement to disconnect the server 516 Chapter 15 Database SQL If an asterisk is specified in the select list of the query expression the columns are selected in the order specified when the table was defined Retrieving Data with Conditions Specified The following illustrates retrieving data for only rows that meet specified conditions In the example the condition of the quantity in stock QOH is tested to be less than 51 It retrieves the data product number product name and quantity in stock of products that meet the condition EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PRODUCT NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 PRODUCT NAME PIC X 20 QUANTITY IN STOCK PIC S9 9 COMP 5 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL
53. If message J M P03101 I is of a CLOSE statement error displayed before JM P0320I I eliminate the cause of the error according to message JMPO310I I ERRCD xxxx A presentation file access error Check for and eliminate the occurred cause of the error according to the manuals of the linked products 1 EXCEED LEN The length of the record to be Set the record length to within written exceeds the maximum the specified maximum record record length specified in the length program EXCL ERROR An exclusive error occurred Re execute If the exclusive error occurs repeatedly confirm that the error does not affect operation The FCB contents are invalid Check the FCB contents FDBK xxxx Error code from the system Check for and eliminate the xxxx Expressed in cause of the error according to hexadecimal the system error code 2 FONT A font that did not exist in the Install necessary fonts in the system was specified for system output FOVL The specified directory Check the initial file to containing the forms overlay determine if the directory definition is invalid or the containing the correct forms forms overlay definition is overlay definition is specified invalid FTNCD xxxx Error code from the system Check for and eliminate the Xxxx Expressed in cause of the error according to hexadecimal the system error code 2 660 Appendix F Message Lists Table 79 Character strings written for JMP0320I I U 3 cont
54. Length record form grrr rrrrrrrey File where added pecord is stored Renee eee eee Input Output Input Output Unload Load Expand Arbitrary COBOL file Sequential file of variable Arbitrary COBOL file ki hake ae SS Length record form grrr reer rrreey File where added record is stored eee Figure 74 Two methods of adding records from another file 256 Chapter 7 File Processing Browsing Records Browse the contents of records in COBOL files with the lt Browse gt command Exit Browse Options Help SEARCH FIRST PREU OFFSET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 6123456789ABCDEF 666660666 36 36 36 31 36 36 26 49 44 45 4E 54 49 46 49 43 666166 IDENTIFIC Input 00000010 41 54 49 4F 4E 20 44 49 56 49 53 49 4F 4E 2E ATION DIVISION browse Arbitrary COBOL file AS 00000070 Figure 75 Browsing files with the Browse command The Browse window contains the following elements Exit Quit exit the Browse window Browse Browse the contents of records in COBOL files Options Determine the method of data input hexadecimal or character when adding new records Help Access the online help Chapter 7 File Processing 257 Key button Change the order of displayed records The order displayed depends upon which record key is selected Search button Search for a particular record First button Go to the first record inafile Prev button Go to the previous record in afile N ext
55. Linker Options button View and edit the linker options Build button Start a build of all the programs in the project Rebuild button Start a rebuild of all the programs in the project Execute button Start an execution of the project program Creating the Project File The project file registers information for project management One project file is required per project To create the project file L 2 Start P STAFF The P STAFF window is displayed Select Open from the Project menu The Open Project dialog box is displayed Enter the name of project file in the File N ame edit box Click on the OK button The project file is created After creation the Target Files dialog box automatically appears to enter the target name After creating the project file register the files Set project name PR as the project file name Chapter 6 Project Management Function 177 Registering Files For project management files managed under the project must be registered Information on registered files is saved in the project file Register the following files for the project Target file Source files Library files Other required files Registering Target Files Target files are registered in the Target Files dialog box Multiple target files can be registered To register target files 1 When anew project is created create the project file and the Target Files dialog box is displayed with project name EXE disp
56. Linking Programs This chapter describes the resources required for linking program structure linkage procedures how to use windows for linking linking with link commands and link messages 68 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Linking Sample Programs Compilation creates an object program that must be linked before it can be executed Windows 95 and Windows NT This section shows how to use WINLINK to link the Sample 1 program This section assumes the file containing the object program to be C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 OBJ To perform a link e Select WINLINK Link from the P STAFF Tools menu The WINLINK Linking Files window appears Chapter 4 Linking Programs 69 WINLINK Linking Files Commands Help P Target OK Bei Tues Cancel ess C PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE14SA f EXE Options con 2m Link m Link Object Link File OBOL32 SAM PLES SAMPLE1 Sample1 OBJ Browse List Add C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 Sar Delete Figure 28 The WINLINK Linking Files window e Select EXE in the Type box e Usethe Browse button to locate and select the object file to link in the Link File edit box e Click on the Add button The object name is displayed in the list box The executable program to be created is displayed in the Target edit box e Click on the Link button The system displays a command prompt screen showing the linker messages
57. OBJ DEF amp LIB LIB L WINLINK Linking Files Ut 4 x EXP x LIB DLL Export file 4 Import 5 DLL Library Figure 31 Linking files creating an Import Library and DLL with WINLINK Chapter 4 Linking Programs 73 e Linking Files Creating EXE ss lt 4 lt s lt 0sheseept adsense anataee sonics 1 Object 4 Import Library 3 Library Other Library file if necessary Cif necessary if necessary ee CF Ea L i l WINLINK Linking Files EXE 6 Executable file Figure 32 Linking files creating an EXE with WINLINK Notes on the above figures 1 The module definition file is generated automatically and is not specified in the WINLINK window 2 Standard libraries can be built using the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries function 3 Import libraries are required for the dynamic link structure The DLL Import library should be made beforehand 74 Chapter 4 Linking Programs The following table describes the files used by WINLINK Table 5 Files used by WINLINK FileContents FileName 1 0 Condition to Use or Format Create Object file Source file Use the object program name OBJ compiled from a COBOL source program Module Optional 16 Required to create an definition name DEF import library export file statement Required for subprograms Standard Optional library Object name LIB code library or DLL 32 Required to create an
58. Output Using Screens WORKING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Employee NO Screen definition Source program Window information Library file Executable file Figure 98 Generating a program using the presentation file module Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 331 To use the presentation file function both the screen descriptors and FORM RTSarerequired At use in Local environment 1 2 Windows 95 Windows NT 5 iskces Executable Screen definition Window file Library information file WORKING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Employee NO L ___ At use in remote environment 3 2 OK p Windows 3 1 Windows NT server Screen Window l Executable definition information file File file MeFt NET SV Figure 99 Operating a program using the presentation file module 1 Besides Windows NT the function is available with UXP DS Sun and HP UX For UXP DS FORM RTS is also required 332 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Work Procedures To perform screen input output with the presentation file module screen descriptors COBOL source programs and window information files are required The screen descriptors and COBOL source programs must be generated before compilation and window information files must be generated before execution The following is the standard work procedure of screen input output with the p
59. RUN Figure 130 Retrieving data from a table in which rows are related 1 Specifies correlation names X1 and X2 for the STOCK table in the FROM clause of the cursor declaration statement X1 522 Chapter 15 Database SQL and X2 are treated as if they are different tables The example specifies search conditions in the WHERE clause The column name is qualified with the correlation names The rows that result show products that are in the warehouse storing televisions TELEVISION Updating Data Use the UPDATE statement to update table data The following example specifies the UPDATE statement to decrement each quantity in stock column QOH of the STOCK table by 10 EXEC SQL UPDATE STOCK SET QOH QOH 0 9 END EXEC This UPDATE statement multiplies each value in column QOH of the STOCK table by 0 9 and replaces the original value with the result To update values in only rows that meet a specified condition specify a search condition in the WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement The following example changes the above UPDATE statement to decrement only the number of televisions in stock by 10 EXEC SQL UPDATE STOCK SET QOH QOH 0 9 WHERE GOODS TELEVISION END EXEC The previous method cannot update data in a table created by relating multiple tables Chapter 15 Database SQL 523 Deleting Data Use the DELETE statement to delete data The following example specifies the DELETE statemen
60. Records can also be read from the first record in the physical order they are placed in a line sequential file Line feed characters are used as record delimiters in aline sequential file For example a line sequential file can be used when handling a file created by an editor Print Files A print file is used for printing with the sequential file function there is no special file name for a print file For details of a print file refer to Chapter 8 Printing Chapter 7 File Processing 193 Relative Files Stores names and test scores for mathematics national Ni Language and English in the other of student number John Davis 100 100 100 Relative record number Mary Johns What are the results of _ 38 gt Mary Jones 66 75 52 gt Mathematics 66 student number 8 National Language 75 English 52 a Figure 65 Relative files Records can be read and updated by specifying their relative record numbers the first record is addressed by relative record number 1 in a relative file For example a relative file can be used as a work file accessed by using relative record numbers as key values 194 Chapter 7 File Processing Indexed Files Names can be easily obtained from employee numbers and vice versa Employee number Name Who is employee Record key number 100456 gt 100456 gt gt Mary Jones Record k
61. Sample Database The following three sample database tables are used in the program examples which follow STOCK table Shows product numbers GNO product names GOODS quantity in stock QOH and warehouse numbers WHNO ORDERS table Shows company numbers COMPANYNO product trade numbers GOODSN O purchase prices PRICE and order quantities OOH COMPANY table Shows company numbers CN O company names NAME telephone numbers PHONE and address ADDRESS STOCK table TELEVISION TELEVISION REFRIGERATOR REFRIGERATOR RADIO RADIO CASSETTE DECK CASSETTE DECK AIR CONDITIONER AIR CONDITIONER TELEVISION VIDEO REFRIGERATOR REFRIGERATOR CASSETTE DECK CASSETTE DECK CASSER TAPE SHAVER DRYER 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 Chapter 15 Database SQL 513 ORDERS table COMPANY NO GOODSNO PRICE COMPANY table ADAM LTD 711111 SANTA CLARA CA USA IDEA INC 423222 LONDON W C 2 ENGLAND MOON CO 1433333 NEW YORK NY USA RIVER CO 344 1212 PARIS FRANCE DRAGON CO 373 7777 SAN FRANCISCO CA USA BIG INC 391 0808 DALLAS TX USA FIRST CO 255 9944 SYDNEY AUSTRALIA 514 Chapter 15 Database SQL Retrieving Data This section explains methods for retrieving data from a database Retrieving Data from All Table Rows The following figure shows a COBOL program used to retrieve data from all rows of a database table EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 PR
62. System action or run time system action Appendix F Message Lists 641 Explanation Explanation of the message text Response Action to be taken by the programmer 1 n in message text is a parameter indicating variable information The parameter is replaced by the program name or file name in the actual message The following explains an access name or file name written for a parameter indicating variable information in message text e Access name An access name is used for connecting a program and file entity The access name corresponds to the run time environment information name specified with the file entity name at run time The access name also corresponds to the file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause e Filename A filenameis a file entity name The file name corresponds to the file identifier literal or data name specified in the ASSIGN clause is displayed if the data name is not recognized If DISK or PRINTER is specified in the ASSIGN clause the file name corresponds to the file name specified in the SELECT clause The file name specified in the SELECT clause is enclosed in parentheses in the message text JMP0001I U OPEN ERROR FILE 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response e Check whether the access name 1 corresponding to the function name SYSIN or SYSOUT is assigned correctly 642 Appendix F Message Lists e Before activating Windows start the SHARE command in MS DOS comma
63. User s Guide Related Manuals Other manuals for COBOL85 and related products Contents COBOL85 Reference M anual Detailed explanation of COBOL85 syntax open system sample programs as examples Migration Guide MF to Fujitsu Migration information related to converting COBOL Debugging M anual Usage information associated with the COBOL85 graphical programming capabilities Power COBOL Programming Guide Explanation of how to create graphical COBOL applications Power FORM Getting Started Explanation of how to create form descriptors The following products are not supported in the English language version of this product e SequeLink e MeFt NET e MeFt NET SV e BSNET e RDB 7000 Server for Windows NT e RDBII e RDBII Esql COBOL e PowerAIM COBOL85 User s Guide ix Trademarks MS DOS Visual Basic Windows are registered trademarks and Visual C Microsoft Open Database Connectivity Software Development Kit Windows 95 and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Btrieve is a trademark of Btrieve Technologies Inc NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc HP HP UX and SoftBench are trademarks of the H ewlett Packard Company Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation SequeLink is a registered trademark of TechGnOsl
64. When specifying a print character with aCHARACTER TYPE clause relate the function name indicating the size font form direction and space of a print character to the mnemonic name For function name types refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual Defining Print Files Define a print file in a file control entry For details of descriptions in a file control entry see Table 23 Information to be specified in a file control entry DATA DIVISION In DATA DIVISION define the record definitions and the definitions of data names used in the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Defining Records Define a record in file and record description entries For details of descriptions in a file description entry see Table 24 Information to be specified in the file description entry Define the following records in the record description entry Chapter 8 Printing 295 Line Records Define a record to print data edited in a program Multiple line records can be written The contents of one line record are printed sequentially from the left margin of the printable area Specify the size of aline record so that it is written within the printable area The size of a print character can be specified in the CHARACTER TYPE clause in the data description entry For contents that can be specified in the CHARACTER TYPE clause see Print Characters Control Records Two types of control records are used for printing and S control recor
65. X 5 A 2 A 1 X 5 1 EXFS 18 EXTERNAL A 01 EXFS 1S EXTERNAL a 1 X 2 es ea IC X 2 ROCEDURE DIVISION Common file F PROCEDURE DIVISION MOVE SPACE TO A gt CDE TO A E TOA lt NOVE A OPEN INPUT EXFILE tC EXFILE 4 re un Br rey oo uD EXFILE COBOL library oP FILE ee FD EXFILE 1 EXTERNAL 01 RECI PIC X 80 Figure 105 Improving program maintainability by generating data and file definitions Return Codes When control returns to calling programs from subprograms return code values can be passed with special register PROGRAM STATUS or RETURN CODE Special register PROGRAM STATUS is implicitly declared as PIC S9 9 COM P 5 and you do not have to define it in the program When a subprogram writes a value to special register PROGRAM STATUS the value is written to special register PROGRAM STATUS of the calling program Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 361 Internal Programs COBOL programs are classified into external and internal programs based on the program structure The outermost program not included in other programs is an external program Programs directly or indirectly included in an external program are internal programs An external program A can call its internal program A 1 The internal program A 1 can call another external program B or its internal program A 11 However internal programs
66. a specified object member from a REMOVE object member name specified library Press the CTRL and C keys together to cancel LIB command processing When an import library is created an export file is created under the import library name with the extension LIB changed to EXP Appendix K FCB Control Statement The following shows the specification format of the FCB control statement LPI line spacing line count line spacing line count pacing pacing LCHm line number line number CHm line number line number paper length SIZE 110 A3 A4 PORT B FORM a5 C BS LT LAND e LPI information LPI information can be sequentially specified in format of line spacing line count from the top of the page Specify 6 8 or 12 Ipi for line spacing e CH information Specify a line number for CHAN NEL 01 to CHAN NEL 12 Channel number 1 identifies the first line that can be printed 724 Appendix K FCB Control Statement e SIZE information Specify the length of paper in units of 1 10 inch The default is 110 11 inches e FORM information Specify paper in fixed size If a fixed sizeis specified the length of the paper is uniquely determined for PORT portrait or LAND landscape Appendix L Indexed File Recovery This appendix explains the indexed file recovery function and indexed file simple recovery function Indexed File Recovery Function
67. about the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing 232 Chapter 7 File Processing Input Output Error Processing This section explains input output error detection methods and execution results if input output errors occur The four input output error detection methods are e AT END specification detecting occurrence of the at end condition e INVALID KEY specification detecting occurrence of the invalid key condition e FILE STATUS clause detecting input output errors by checking l O status e Error procedures detecting input output errors AT END Specification The AT END condition occurs when all records in a file are read sequentially and no next logical record exists in the file To detect occurrence of the at end condition specify AT END inaREAD statement With AT END specified processing to be done at occurrence of the at end condition can be written A coding example of a READ statement with AT END specified is READ sequential file AT END GO TO at end processing END READ With the execution of the next READ statement after the last record in the file is read the at end condition occurs and the GO TO statement is executed Chapter 7 File Processing 233 INVALID KEY Specification In input output processing with an indexed or relative file an input output error occurs if no record with a specified key or relative record number exists in the file This is called an invalid key c
68. and item attribute of the screen reverse 1 descriptor Outputs data using underline Outputs data using underline blink and reverse 1 Outputs data using blink 1 Outputs deletion lines This value is for a printed form function Do not specify this value for a screen display function R Ouputsda tausngrevese OOS and blink 1 Don co o E and reverse 1 Blink cannot be used under this system EDIT CURSOR Before execution of the READ statement positioning of the cursor can be specified for the EDIT CURSOR special register The following table explains the values that can be specified Table 72 Values that can be specified for EDIT CURSOR Explanation Explanation Mee Does not position the cursor x Suppresses the specification of Blank the cursor position item Cursor position item only Positions the cursor Appendix F Message Lists This appendix explains messages written by the WINCOB and compile commands the COBOL85 compiler and the COBOL85 run time system N ote M essages listed in this chapter are 32 bit COBOL messages 32 bit COBOL messages are generally more descriptive and apply to both 32 and 16 bit COBOL While 16 bit users may see a slightly different message the message number will provide an easy mapping between the older 16 bit messages and the more descriptive 32 bit messages Messages Output by WINCOB and Compile Commands This section explains messages w
69. and entry information Setting Environment Variable Information Run time environment variable information is set using the Environment Variables Information edit box in the Run time Environment Setup window Adding Environment Variable Information To set environment variable information not displayed in the list box 1 Directly enter run time environment information in the edit box 2 Click on the Set button The environment variables information is added to the Environment Variables Information list box 164 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Changing Environment Variable Information To change run time environment information displayed in the Environment Variables Information list box 1 Select the run time environment information to change from the list box The selected information is displayed in the Environment Variables Information edit box Change the contents Click on the Set button The changed run time environment information is displayed in the list box Deleting Environment Variable Information To delete run time environment information displayed in the Environment Variables Information list box 1 Select the run time environment information to delete from the list box 2 Click on the Delete button The selected run time environment information is deleted from the list box Setting Entry Information Select Section Information from the Section menu in the Run time Environment Setup window The Entry I
70. and work data items For function name types refer to the COBOL85 Reference M anual Chapter 8 Printing 281 Defining Print Files The following table lists information required to specify a file control entry Table 23 Information to be specified in a file control entry WE ce eee Type Required SELECT clause File name Write the name of a file to usein a ee ee COBOL program conforming to the rules of COBOL user defined words ASSIGN clause File Write PRINTER local printer port reference name LPTn or serial printer port identifier name COMn When PRINTER is specified data is output to the system default printer Optional ORGANIZATIO Keyword Write SEQUENTIAL N clause indicating file organization FILE STATUS Data name Write the data name defined as a 2 dause byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section The input output execution result is set for this data name For value to be set see Appendix B I O Status List DATA DIVISION Inthe DATA DIVISION define record definitions and the definitions of data names specified in a file control entry Write record definitions in file and record description entries The following table lists information required to writea file description entry 282 Chapter 8 Printing Table 24 Information to be specified in a file description entry E ee Details and Use of Specification pees eee a RECORD Define the size of the pri
71. by compiler instruction statement in source program e Compiler option specified by the WC option of the COBOL32 command e Option specified for the COBOL 32 command e Compiler option in the option file specified by I option of COBOL32 command Do not specify the following options in the WC option AIMLIB FILEEXT FILELIB FORMEXT FORMLIB LIB OBJECT PRINT TEST 712 Appendix J Command Formats Linker Commands Use the linker commands to link a program and generate an executable program For details on generated files and required files for link command execution refer to Resources Required for Linking in Chapter 4 For linker command specified location and basic usage refer to Using Commands to Link in Chapter 4 m The following are linker commands e 16 LINK command LIB command IMPLIB command e 32 LINK command LIB command Appendix J Command Formats 713 LINK Command 16 This section explains the LINK command for Windows 3 1 Input Format LINK 16 option list filename list Operands At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolute or relative path name can be specified for a directory name and file name in the explanation below option list Specify LINK command options See Table 89 for the specification filename list File names can be specified following the option list The following shows
72. clause specification The file has yet to be created however The specified function is not supported 38 The OPEN statement was executed for a file for P niiancLose Lock wasted bore Logical error 39 During OPEN statement execution a file whose condition a ae attribute conflicts with the one specified in the program was assigned ae cae The OPEN statement was executed for an opened file 42 The CLOSE statement was executed for an unopened file Appendix B I O Status List 615 Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification Detailed ee Information Logical Error During sequential access or DELETE or Condition REWRITE statement execution for a file with DUPLICATES specified as the prime key the preceding input output statement was not a successful READ statement One of the following status occurred The record length during WRITE or REWRITE statement execution is greater than the maximum record length specified in the program Or an invalid numeric was specified as the record length During REWRITE statement execution the record length is not equal to that of the record to be rewritten During sequential call READ statement execution the file position indicator is undefined due to one of the following reasons The preceding START statement is unsuccessful The preceding READ statement is unsuccessful including at end condition 47 The READ or START statement was executed for a file not opened in I
73. control statements FCBxxxx 31 Chapter 5 Executing Programs 131 1 GOPT Set Run time Options GOPT list of run time options Specify run time options as a list of run time options For the format of the run time options see Format of Run time Options For example GOPT r20 c20 2 MGPRM Set the GS series Format Run time Parameter MGPRM String of run time parameter Specify a string passed from the program in quotation marks The specified string is passed to other programs in the same manner as the program is executed on the system of the GS Series For more information about the GS Series format run time parameter see A ppendix GS series Function Comparison MGPRM A2042CDE n O Ss R fat 3 o Q 3 IlconDLL Set the DLL name of an Icon Resource IconDLL DLL name of icon resource Specify the DLL name of an icon resource if no icon resource is included in the executable file For using an icon provided by COBOL85 also set the following file F3BIICON DLL 132 Chapter 5 Executing Programs 4 lconName Set the Identifier of an Icon Resource IconName icon resource identifier Specify the identifier of an icon resource when changing the icon COBOL85 provides COB85EXE SDK is required when you create icons 5 ScrnSize Set the Size of the Logical Screen for Screen Handling ScrnSize columns lineage 80 24 Specify the logical screen size
74. cursor for retrieving data from the table 2 Specifies branching to the procedure name P NEXT if there is no row to be retrieved when the embedded SQL exception declaration is specified 3 The server SV1 is connected This connection nameis CNN1 4 The server SV2 is connected This connection name is CN N2 CNN 2 is the current connection 5 Executes the OPEN statement in the server with CNN2 to enable the cursor CUR9 6 Executes the FETCH statement to fetch data row by row from the table then writes the values of each column to the corresponding host variable area Chapter 15 Database SQL 535 7 Select the current connection to CNN 1 8 Executes the IN SERT statement to insert a row into the STOCK table of the server with CNN1 9 Executes the OPEN statement in the server with CNN 1to enable the cursor CUR9 The cursor CURQ is treated as another cursor different from the cursor that was opened in the server with CNN2 10 Executes the CLOSE statement in the server with CNN 1 to disable the cursor CUR9Y 11 Select the current connection to CNN 2 Note that the cursor CURQ is still enabled in the server with CNN2 12 Executes the CLOSE statement in the server with CNN2 to disable the cursor CURY Compiling the Program Specify a database access method so that a COBOL program accessing a database using embedded SQL via an ODBC driver can be compiled with the COBOL85 compiler To enable case sensi
75. data items specified in the RECORD KEY clause and that specified in the ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clause can be up to 255 This value decreases as the number of data items specified in the RECORD KEY clause increases If MANUAL is specified in the LOCK MODE clause records cannot be locked Execute Relative File Creation to use a relative file with a COBOL program Execute the OPEN statement with OUTPUT specified to execute Relative File Creation An error message is written or O status occurs indicating that the record does not exist run time error JMP0324I I U or FS 23 if the OPEN statement with I O or EXTEND specified is used to open a relative file without Relative File Creation The WRITE statement is then executed If the disk size is insufficient the following error message is output when the CLOSE statement is executed JMPO310I I U CLOSE ERROR FILE file name or access name ERFLD 1C 746 Appendix M Using Other File Systems Appendix N A COBOL Supported Subroutine This appendix explains a COBOL supported subroutine Subroutine for Receiving the Window Handle This subroutine receives the FORM RTS window handle when linked with the presentation file edit function operating under Windows Specification Method Data definition with Windows 3 1 16 01 data name 1 PIC X 8 01 data name 2 PIC S9 4 COMP 5 With Windows 95 and WindowsNT 32 01 data name 1 PIC X 8 01 data name 2 PIC S9 9 COM
76. decimal with the sign which is not SEPARATE in COBOL from the NUMERIC type of Btrieve file Refer to the BTRIEVE Programmer s M anual for an internal form of the NUMERIC data type for Btrieve Therefore a Btrieve file should be used and the data converted into each form as either an input or output data item before 740 Appendix M Using Other File Systems writing and after reading when an external decimal item with the not SEPARATE sign is used This conversion can be done easily in COBOL85 by using a CALL statement Description Form 32 Conversion from 88consortium to COBOL is as follows Call DEC88TOFJ USING BY REFERENCE name Conversion from COBOL85 to 88consortium is as follows Call DECFJTO88 USING BY REFERENCE name Function Outline 32 At DEC88TOF the program name which is called by the CALL statement will convert an internal form of an external decimal item with the without all SEPARATE specification included in the name or the name from 88consortium into an internal form of COBOL85 At DECFJTO88 the program name which is called by the CALL statement will convert an internal form of an external decimal item with the without all SEPARATE specification included in the name or the name from COBOL85 into an internal form of 88consortium If the item is not an external decimal item using the without SEPARATE specification will not perform a conversion When the name is a group item and
77. defined as a 6 byte CONTROL alphanumeric data item in the WORKING clause STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name specify the unit control information during screen input output See Table 34 336 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Table 34 Input output processing types and specification values Processing Mode Control Information Input Blank NE AL erasing entry Change notification entry Change Al notification entry after alarm Terminal control CT Start preentry BSTR output Table 35 Attention information values and attention types Attention Information Value Attention Type Customized values 1 Value specified by user at screen definition E Clear key CL PF Menu item Attention item disability information Selection of menu item E000 E000 E000 1 Includes such items as function keys and menu items 2 This key is assigned as the for window information files For details refer to the FORM RTS online help Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 337 DATA DIVISION In DATA DIVISION presentation record definitions and data items specified in the file control entry are defined A record description statement defined in a presentation record can be fetched from screen descriptors with a COPY statement with XMDLIB specified as a library name The details of the record description statement to be expanded are explained below Defining a screen with FORN Screen de
78. directory of the run time system is correctly set in the environmental variable PATH JMP0099I U FORCED TERMINATION CODE S 1 Terminates the program 650 Appendix F Message Lists Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the previous output message If no message was written an internal error probably occurred Call your Fujitsu SE The ABEND abnormal end code is written for 1 JMP0200I E INSUFFICIENT DATA ACCEPTED FROM SYSIN Continues processing assuming that the remaining part of the inputted data area is blank Response e Prepare the number of data items that can be input by executing the ACCEPT FROM SYSIN statement Confirm that the ACCEPT statement is not executed a number of times equal to or greater than the number of data items JMP 0201A I AWAITING A REPLY After receiving response continues processing Explanation The system asks the operator to input data by using the ACCEPT statement Response Input any necessary data JMP 0202A I UST After receiving response continues processing Explanation The STOP literal statement is being executed Appendix F Message Lists 651 Response Input any character The literal specified in the STOP literal statement is written for 1 JMP0204I U STATEMENT SEQUENCE ERROR STM S1 PGM 2 LINE 3 RPT 4 Abnormally terminates the program Response Correct the execution sequence of statements for the report or detail phr
79. display without editing 20 WINCOB WC LINESIZE n Specify the maximum number of characters value resulting from conversion of alphanumeric characters displayed in the list for a line in a compiler listing Value can be specified with 80 or a 3 digit integer more than 120 The default value is 136 The source program list option information list and diagnosis message list are output with a fixed number 120 of characters regardless of the maximum number of characters specified in LIN ESI ZE The permitted maximum number of characters is 136 If a value greater than 136 is specified in LINESIZE 136 is used 21 WINCOB WC MAIN NOMAIN Specify MAIN to usea COBOL source program as a main program specify NOMAIN to usea COBOL source program as a subprogram Appendix A Compiler Options 597 Specify MAIN for the COBOL source program to be used as a main program If compiling the COBOL programs by Continuous Compilation mode or in a project click on the Main Program button 22 WINCOB WC MESSAGE NOMESSAGE To output an option information listing and to compile unit statistical information listing specify MESSAGE otherwise specify NOMESSAGE 23 WINCOB WC none STD CCVS If an ACCEPT statement where a numeric item is specified as the receiving item in the format of ACCEPT unique name FROM mnemonic name is executed specify MODE STD to move a right justified numeric data to a recei
80. during linking A DLL allows multiple applications to use the same library Ina multitasking environment such as Windows DLLs are very efficient because multiple applications can share the same DLL Import Library The import library contains information used to set a dynamic link between an active application and a DLL during application execution This library is required to create an executable file having a dynamic link structure The system copies information indicating where a required library is stored from the import library to the executable program In other words the import library provides an interface between the application and the DLL Module Definition File The contents of the module definition file depend on whether you are using Windows 95 and Windows NT or Windows 3 1 Module Definition File Contents 32 The module definition file is required to create the import library Create the file with a text editor Chapter 4 Linking Programs 77 Even if a module definition file is not specified in the WINLINK Linking Files window it is created automatically during linking The module definition file is used indirectly to create an executable file having a dynamic link structure because the import library created from information in the file must be specified The module definition statements in the module definition file define the contents of the DLL and requirements to the system The following table l
81. during program execution and to execute the statements use dynamic SQL Determining Search Conditions Dynamically The previous examples use host variables to set search conditions at execution The following explains a method of directly determining search conditions at execution Chapter 15 Database SQL 525 The following figure is a COBOL program for determining search conditions at execution through dynamic cursor declaration It is the query expression for cursor definition SELECT GNO GOODS QOH FROM STOCK WHERE GOODS REFRIGERATOR AND QOH lt 10 The ACCEPT statement is used to read the query expression at execution EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 PRODUCT NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 01 PRODUCT NAME PIC X 20 01 QUANTITY IN STOCK PIC S9 9 COMP 5 01 STMVAR PIC X 254 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P END END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR8 CURSOR FOR STMIDT END EXEC ACCEPT STMVAR FROM CONSOLE P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL PREPARE STMIDT FROM STMVAR END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR8 END EXEC P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR8 INTO PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P END EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR8 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 131 Specifying search conditions at execution 1 The SQL
82. e FLAGSW STDI Language elements that are not in the intermediate subset of the standard COBOL e FLAGSW STDH Language elements that are not in the high subset of the standard COBOL e FLAGSW RPW Language elements of the report writer function of the standard COBOL e FLAGSW SIA Language elements that are not in the range of Fujitsu System Integrated Architecture SIA Use FLAGSW SIA to create a program that will operate under another system 14 WINCOB FORM EXT extent Specify the extent of the screen and form descriptor file Any character string can be specified as the extent If a file name has no extent specify character string N one as the extent Do not specify more than one extent The following is the priority if the option is specified in duplicate 1 Compiler option FORM EXT 2 SMED_SUFFIX environment variable 32 3 Default value PMD 594 Appendix A Compiler Options 15 WINCOB FORM LIB directory name directory name If the COPY statement with IN OF XMDLIB specified is used to fetch a record definition from the screen and form descriptor specify the directory of the screen and form descriptor file If the screen and form descriptor files exist in more than one directory specify the directory names separated by a semicolon The directories are searched for in the order specified Specify directory name screen and form descriptor name within 79 bytes 16 Specify directory name scre
83. environment must be specified When compiling aC program to be linked to a COBOL program an option Gs to suppress stack checks and an option G3 to Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 373 optimize the program for 80386 processor For details refer to the Visual C on line H elp 32 Because data names used in C and COBOL are the same the underscore _ can be used for the data name Linking Programs Library FIBCOWEP LIB provided by the COBOL85 run time system includes the following functions 16 e WEP e LIBENTRY e LIBMAIN When linking C programs that call COBOL programs 16 the file specification order in the LINK command depends on whether executable files are generated by linking C programs that call COBOL programs or dynamic link libraries DLLs are generated Examples of linking C programs that call COBOL programs are shown below To link C programs that call COBOL programs link option NOD must be specified 1 Generating executable files from C programs that call COBOL programs LINK NOD Cprog OBJ Cprog EXE Cprog MAP Cimplib LIBW Cprog DEF CPROG OB C program object file name CPROG EXE Name of the executable file to be generated CPROG MAP 374 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Map file name optional CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library Refer to aC manual With Microsoft C LLIBCEW is applicable to this import librar
84. exclusive control of files Set the logical destination definition file Set the entry information file 32 Set the file used by the program AIIFileExclusive CBR_CIINF CBR_ENTRYFILE File identifier Set the input file for the ACCEPT DISPLAY function SYSIN access name Set the output file for the ACCEPT DISPLAY function SY SOUT access name Set the directory containing form overlay patterns FOVLDIR Set the extension of the form overlay pattern file OVD_SUFFIX Set the format of the form overlay pattern file FOVLTYPE Environment variables related to presentation files Set the connected product name used from the CBR_PSFILE_xxx presentation file by destination Set the information file used by the program File identifier Set the connected product name used from the File identifier presentation file by file Environment variables related to printing Specify method of calculating character arrangement CBR_PrintTextPosition coordinates 32 Specify alignment of print characters with either top or CBR_TextAlign bottom of line 32 Specify paper size 32 PRN_FormName_xxx Specify default FCB name efaultFCB Name Specify ANK character size 32 CBR _PrinterANK_ Size Environment variables related to database Set the database type linkages software 16 GSQL_CLI 16 Other environment variables Set if the Run time Environment Setup window is used GEnvSetWindow 10 Set the function key for screen handling TERMINATOR 30 Set FCB
85. far ixdfilename char far message e ixdfilename Name of the file to be recovered e message Area storing the execution result message of the indexed file simple recovery function CFURCOVS Function The following are explanations of the parameters of this function ixdfilename Specify the address of the area storing the name character string of the indexed file to be recovered The character string must end with a NULL 0x00 or blank 0x20 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery 729 message Specify the address of the area storing a message that indicates the execution result of the indexed file simple recovery function Allocate the storage area to the calling source 512 bytes required Specify 0 if a message is unnecessary Return Value The code corresponding to the message is returned as the execution result of the indexed file simple recovery function For codes and messages see Table 94 The following is an example of how to use the indexed file simple recovery function with Windows NT 32 include f3bifutc h void callcobfrcovs void char ixdfilename 512 c ixdfile 0 char message 512 CFURCOVS ixdfilename message return 730 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery Notes At creation include the following files for calling from aC program e 16 flbcfutc h e 32 f3bifutc h At compilation for calling from a C program refer to Compiling Programs in Chapter 10 A
86. file In addition records can be processed in ascending order starting from any record To process the same file with multiple record organization primary keys must be at the same position and of the same size in each record organization In the variable length record format the record key must be set at a fixed position 196 Chapter 7 File Processing Processing Files There are six types of file processing File creation Writes records to files File extension Writes records after the last record in a file Record insertion Writes records at arbitrary positions in files Record reference Reads records from files Record updating Rewrites records in files Record deletion Deletes records from files File processing depends on the file access mode There are three types of access modes Sequential access Allows serial records to be processed ina fixed order Random access Allows arbitrary records to be processed Dynamic access Allows records to be processed in sequential and random access modes Chapter 7 File Processing 197 The following table indicates the processing available with each filetype Table 17 File organization types and processing File Access Types Mode Reference Updating Record Sequential sequential file Line Sequential sequential file printfile Sequential 0 0 _ file Indexed Random file a o o Dynamic o x o Can be processed x Cannot be
87. file could not be opened a value other than 00 is set for the input output value The IF statement checks this value and the GO TO statement is executed Error Procedures You specify error procedures by writing a USE AFTER ERROR EXCEPTION statement in Declaratives in the PROCEDURE DIVISION Writing error procedures executes the processing written in the error procedures if an input output error occurs After executing error processing control is passed to the statement immediately after the input output statement with which an input output error occurred Thus a statement indicating control of processing of the file where an input output error occurred must be written immediately after the input output statement Control is not passed to the error procedures in the following Cases e AT END is specified in the READ statement with which the at end condition occurred Chapter 7 File Processing 235 e INVALID KEY is specified in the input output statement with which theinvalid key condition occurred e An input output statement is executed before the file is opened the open mode is specified Branch from error procedures to the PROCEDURE DIVISION with the GO TO statement in the following cases e An input output statement is executed for the file in which an input output error occurred e Error procedures are re executed before they are terminated PROCEDURE DIVISION DECLARATIVES error procedures SECTION USE AFTER ER
88. file name is added to the Link Object List A target name is automatically created by combining the extension specified in the Type box with the base of the object file name Method 2 Enter the name of the file to be created directly in the Target edit box If the Type is selected after a file name is entered in the Target edit box the extension of the entered file name will change to the extension of the file selected by the option button Entering Files Enter the names of files required to link in the Link Object List box by following the procedures below 94 Chapter 4 Linking Programs 1 Click on the Browse button then select the files required to link from the Browse Files dialog box Files required to link include Object file Module definition file 16 required 32 when creating aDLL Library Import library when creating an executable program having a dynamic link structure 2 Click on the OK button The selected file names are displayed in the Link File edit box Alternatively the file name s can be keyed directly into the Link File edit box 3 Click on the Add button The file names are added to the File Names list box 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 until all files to link are entered Building an Import Library In Windows 95 and Windows NT an import library and an export file are automatically created when a DLL is created To create an import library under Windows 3 1 check Building Im
89. file reference identifier ORGANIZATION IS RELATIVE ACCESS MODE IS access mode RELATIVE KEY IS relative record number storage area DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size 01 record name Contents of records 02 data name WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 relative record number storage area PIC 9 5 BINARY PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN open mode file name MOVE relative record number TO relative record number storage area READ file name REWRITE record name DELETE file name WRITE record name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name Defining Relative Files This section explains file definitions required to use relative files in a COBOL program Chapter 7 File Processing 213 File Name and File Reference Identifier As with a record sequential file specify a file name and file reference identifier for a relative file For more information about how to specify these items see Defining Record Sequential Files File Organization Specify RELATIVE in the ORGANIZATION clause Access Mode Specify one of the following access modes in the ACCESS MODE clause e Sequential access SEQUENTIAL Enables records to be processed in ascending order of the relative record numbers from the beginning of the file or a record with a specific relative record number e Random access RANDOM Enables a record with a specific relative record number to be processed e Dynamic access DYN
90. files When input and output files are defined using file identifiers use these identifiers as environment variables to set the names of input and output files 3 Execute the program Note When PowerBSORT is installed PowerBSORT will be used although the sort merge process is handled by the COBOL85 run time system Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function 415 Using Merge This section explains the types of merge processing and how to write compile link and execute a program that uses merge processing 416 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT merge file 1 ASSIGN TO SORTWKO1 SELECT input file 1 ASSIGN TO file reference identifier 1 SELECT output file 1 ASSIGN TO file reference identifier 2 DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION SD merge file 1 RECORD record size 01 merge record 1 Contents of merge record 02 merge key 1 02 data1 FD input file 1 01 input record 1 Contents of input record 02 data2 FD output file 1 01 output record 1 Contents of output record 02 data3 PROCEDURE DIVISION MERGE merge file 1 ASCENDING KEY merge key 1 DESCENDING USING input file 1 INPUT PROCEDURE IS input procedure 1 GIVING output file 1 OUTPUT PROCEDURE IS output
91. for the file changed with the environment variable operation function Therefore use the OPEN statement to start the sequence of file processing and the CLOSE statement to terminate the sequence If the area is insufficient for file creation extension record updating or insertion subsequent operation for the file is undefined If an attempt is made to write records to the file when the area is insufficient how they are stored in the file is also undefined When an indexed file is opened in OUTPUT I O or EXTEND mode it may become unusable if the program terminates abnormally before it is closed Make backup copies before executing programs that may terminate abnormally Files that became unusable can be recovered with the Recovery command of the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY A function having the same feature as the above command can be called from an application For more information see COBOL85 FILE UTILITY and Appendix L Indexed File Recovery 246 Chapter 7 File Processing COBOL85 FILE UTILITY This section explains the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY The COBOL85 FILE UTILITY allows you to use utility commands to execute file processing that can be used with COBOL85 file systems without using COBOL applications In this section files record sequential line sequential relative and indexed files handled by COBOL85 file systems are simply called COBOL files With the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY you can create COBOL files
92. function depends on the function of the selected editor Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 63 Using Commands to Compile COBOL32 Commands With COBOL32 commands you can compile from the command prompt Specification Example and Output Format COBOL32 commands return compilation information such as the results of compilation and diagnostic messages to the command prompt screen For details on the format of COBOL32 commands and the available options refer to Appendix J Command Formats The following example shows how to compile with a COBOL32 command and the output General Format A compile end message is normally written if compile option MESSAGE has not been specified If a compile error occurs the corresponding diagnostic message is generated Command Prompt gt COBOL32 M C TEST COB DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE lt TEST 1 gt TEST COB 4 JMN25 3I S USER WORD A IS UNDEFINED STATISTICS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE S PROGRAM UNIT 1 Figure 26 The compile end message 64 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Output Information When the compiler option MESSAGE has been specified the option information listing and compile unit statistical information listing are written If a compile error occurs the corresponding diagnostic message is written gt COBOL32 OPTIONS SPECIFIED AIN MESSAGE OPTIONS ESTABLISHED ALPHAL BINARY lt WORD MLBON gt OCHECK OCONF OCOPY CURRENCY lt gt ODLOAD OE
93. function keys To use a function key when executing a program define the function key with the run time environment variable TERMINATOR Data input from the screen cannot be ended by 346 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens using a function key invalidated by the run time environment variable TERMINATOR In a program information on the input function key is set for data items specified in the CRT STATUS clause in the SPECIAL NAMES paragraph For details about how to set the run time environment variable TERMINATOR refer to Setting Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 Program Specification This section explains how to write programs using the screen handling function for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION The following information can be entered in the SPECIAL NAMES paragraph e Data items for setting or receiving cursor positions in the CURSOR clause e Data items for receiving screen input output status in the CRT STATUS clause The following table lists values set for these data items Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 347 Table 38 Screen input output status values Status Key 1 Status Key 2 Meaning 1st Character 2nd Character ia me I Ox00 Oxff A user defined function key was entered A function key number is set for status key2 1 2 Ox00 Oxff A system defined function key was entered A pL OO O aione number ssa for sauske ea 1 A user defined function key is a func
94. function to move the execution start point to the first executed statement at the AT END destination to resume execution Data Name List Display Fillers are not displayed 568 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions GS Specific Functions that Cannot be Used The USE IN TRANSACTION statement cannot be used Executing the USE IN TRANSACTION statement results in a USE statement specification error and TRANSACTION statement specification error Presentation File Module Test Function The presentation file module test function executes a module test during distributed development with the GS series system A module test is executed for an application program which performs interactive processing using the presentation file function on this system For more information about how to use this function refer to the OSIV AP EF User s Guide Application Program Operating Environment This section shows the operating environment for executing the presentation file module test function The FORM created screen descriptor and FORM RTS are required for using the presentation file module test function Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 569 iE PB Text FORM Text editor editor l J l l Eo Screen Screen and COBOL source Window or printer descriptor form program information file for initial descriptor screen Compilation and Linkage l Form Presentation COBOL85 RTS file module
95. generated files and files for LIB command execution refer to Resources Required for Linking in Chapter 4 Appendix J Command Formats 715 Input Format Operands LIB 16 library name option list command list output destination new library name At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolute or relative path name can be specified for a directory name and file name in the explanation below library name Specify the library to be processed The default file name extension is LIB option list Specify the information to be posted to the LIB command For the specification see Table 90 command Specify the file to be processed following the command symbol By specifying the file name the contents of the library specified for library name can be changed a new library can be created and one module can be copied or moved from the library to another file For the command symbols and the files to be specified see Table 91 list output destination The following information is output to the file specified for list output desti nation e Public symbol lists in the library in alphabetical order e Module lists in the library 716 Appendix J Command Formats new library name Specify new library name to save a library as another library when the library contents are changed If a new library is not specifi
96. gt gt run time gt test dialog system 0 box Environment Executable file COBOL85 file in interactive DLL format deugger Figure 142 The operating environment for executing the presentation file module test function Creating Files Required for Using the Presentation File Module Test Function The following files are required for using the presentation file module test function e A screen descriptor that defined the initial screen e Other screen and form descriptors required 570 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions e Executable filein DLL format e Window information file for the screen descriptor of the initial screen e Other window and printer information files required e Environment file Before executing the presentation file module test function take the following steps to create the required files 1 Design an initial screen and creating screen and form descriptors Create a COBOL source program Compile and linking a program Create window and printer information files ui eB WN Create an environment file Designing an Initial Screen and Creating Screen and Form Descriptors The presentation file module test function performs all interactive processing through screens Before using the function determine the correspondence between screens and programs and the hierarchical structure of the screens screen transition To design the in
97. inai iaeaea 344 User Defined Function KEyS sssssssssssssssssssssssirisissnsntntnsisnnnntnnnnntununnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnn 345 Pr gram SpedficatiON g in napaea rige EAEE cine aide 346 Program EXECU OM iinit eieaa ne sanna a aE ceeded ce Ea eaaa aiaia 350 Chapter 10 Calling Subprograms Inter Program Communication ssssssss1s1s1 353 Outline of Calling Relationships ccc eseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeecsesaeeeeeesaeeessesaesaeeaetaneateeees 354 Calling Relationship FOrMS ccccccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaesaseeeeeeessessesaeseesaesaseateeees 354 Differences Among Linkage RULES ceeeeceeceeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeeteetesaetateeteteeteteatee 355 Linkage Rules and Supporting Compilers ceeeeeescteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaetaeeeteeteees 356 Calling COBOL Programs from COBOL Programs ceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeees 356 Calling Method vic tack cis Rees alc dis ees eet a kee 356 Secondary Entry PONS aisina a iaia aaia iiiaae iienaa 357 Returning Control and Exiting ProgramS ssssssessssssssssrsrsisrnrnrnrnnrsrsrnrnnnnn 357 Passing P rameter S nr aga an goaien PADET a TE n a ANEETA EAT A Nina 358 Sharning Datakit aaa aaa aaa a tt tel ae 359 Return Cod s ws secsieligecteciseete deel stieledintinedie nielie cshivenvesietnedneiesenseceleeties 360 Internal Programs rianne aa NEE EREE EEE 361 AKO A A E TAS E N TA 363 Linking C ProgramMSss npani aeaa a knit aa Eaa A a iene ane 364 Calling C Programs from COBOL ProgramMS sssssssssssssisrersrsr
98. indexed files includes examples codes and messages Appendix M Using Other File Systems Using Btrieve and RDM files Appendix I GS series Function Compares the functions available with the Comparison GS series and this COBOL85 Appendix N A COBOL Supported The subroutine for receiving a window Subroutine handle Appendix K FCB Control Statement The specification of the FCB control statement COBOL85 User s Guide V How to Use This Manual If you area first time user of this product start with Chapter 1 If you want information about the steps from COBOL program generation to execution refer to Chapter 2 through Chapter 6 If you want to know how to use various functions of COBOL85 refer to Chapter 7 through Chapter 13 vi COBOL85 User s Guide Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses the following typographic conventions Example of Convention Program name Edit Literal def ABC DEF WITH PASCAL LINKAGE ALL PARAGRAPH ID COBOL ALL PROCEDURE DIVISION ADD 1 TO POW FONTSIZE OF LABEL1 IF POW FONTSIZE OF LABEL1 gt 70 THEN MOVE 1 TOW POW FONTSIZE OF LABEL1 END IF The sheet acts as an application creation window COBOL Reference M anual Refer to Compile Options in Chapter 5 for information you supply Small capital letters are used for the name of keys and key sequences such as ENTER and CTRL R A plus sign indicates a combination of keys Ellipses i
99. information and the other for entry information The section is identified by using a section name enclosed in brackets A section continues until the next section name is found The format of the initialization file is shown below program name run time environment information entered contents program name ENTRY run time environment information entered contents 1 Section name of run time environment information This indicates the start of environment variable information Set the name of the program to execute as the section name of environment variable information Run time environment information set in the section is effective for the program defined as the section name as well as for programs called from the defined program 2 Environment variable information This defines environment variable information For the format of each environment variable information see Environment Variables Information Only one environment variable can be defined on each line 3 Entry information section name This indicates the start of entry information Define the program name plus ENTRY as the section name of entry information Chapter 5 Executing Programs 125 4 Entry information This defines entry information For the format of each entry information see Entry Information Only one entry can be defined on asingle line Entry Example of the Initialization File PROG1 EnvSetWindow USE C
100. information set in the Run time Environment Setup window is effective for the program only if it is not saved in the initialization file Run time Environment Setup Window 16 The Run time Environment Setup window is used to set run time environment information that is displayed when a COBOL program is executed The Run time Environment Setup window displays run time environment information defined in the initialization file as initial values Contents set in the Run time Environment Setup window can also be saved in the initialization file To prevent display of the Run time Environment Setup window at run time define GEnvSetWindow U N USE in the initialization file This section describes the Run time Environment Setup window For details on the format of defined run time environment information see Format of Run time Environment Information For details about how to use the window refer to the online help Chapter 5 Executing Programs 163 Runtime Environment Setup SAMPLE1 Command Section Environment Yariables Information GOPT z MGPRM lconDLL lconName COB85EXE ScrmSize 80 24 MessOutFile CnslWinSize 80 24 CnsIBufLine 100 WinCloseMsg ON EnvSetWindow USE be Delete 4 Figure 54 The Run time Environment Setup window 16 You can select the operation or font from the Command menu The Section menu allows you to switch between environment variable information
101. inter application communication functions COBCI_OPEN Establishes a connection between a client and server The server isidentified by the specified server name The server identifier is returned when the client and server are connected normally Chapter 14 Communication Functions 483 Calling Format DATA DIVISION 01 STATUS REC 05 ERRORCD PIC S9 9 COMP 5 05 DETAIL PIC 89 9 COMP 5 01 SERVERNAME REC PIC X 15 01 SERVERHD REC PIC 89 9 COMB 5 01 UNUSED REC PIC S9 9 COMP 5 VALUE 0 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL COBCI_OPEN WITH C LINKAGE USING BY REFERENCE STATUS REC BY REFERENCE SERVERNAME REC BY REFERENCE SERVERHD REC BY VALUE UNUSED REC Parameters STATUS REC An error code is returned to ERRORCD a detail code is returned to DETAIL SERVERNAME REC The client specifies the name of the server to be connected The server name must be defined in the logical destination definition file If the server name is shorter than 15 bytes the remaining bytes must be padded with spaces SERVERH D REC The server identifier is returned 484 Chapter 14 Communication Functions UNUSED REC Zero must be set for this area which is reserved for future expansion Return Value If the client is connected with the server normally the system returns 0 to special register PROGRAM STATUS Otherwise the system returns 1 to special register PROGRAM STATUS COBCI_CLOSE Disconnects a client from a server The se
102. is from left to right the external reference name 1 When writing a calling name in COBOL specify case sensitivity and specify compiler option NOALPHAL 2 represents a decimal number that indicates the number of bytes of the parameter 356 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Linkage Rules and Supporting Compilers The following table lists the correspondence between the linkage rules supported by COBOL and the compilers supporting the linkage rules Table 41 Linkage rules and supporting compilers Linkage Rules Specification ina CALL Statement ENTRY Statement or PROCEDURE DIVISION COBOL linkagerules None sis C linkage rules C LINKAGE Pascal linkagerules WITH PASCAL LINKAGE So STDCALL linkage WITH STDCALL LINKAGE Papo rules 1 A compile time W error is output and Pascal linkage rules are assumed 2 A compile time W error is output and STDCALL linkage rules are assumed Calling COBOL Programs from COBOL Programs This section explains how to call other COBOL programs subprograms from COBOL programs calling programs Calling Method To call programs from COBOL programs use the CALL statement In the CALL statement write a program name with a literal or specify a data name and set the name of a called program in this data name Called programs can be changed at program execution by specifying the data name in the CALL statement Calling programs by specif
103. is continued in the next line and is actually only a single line Example of calling JMPCINTB Static DATA As String 14 Dim ans As Long Data c test cbr amp chr 0 ans JMPCINTB 0 DATA 128 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Where the meaning of the arguments and return value of JMPCINTB areas follows JMPCINTBargumentvalue Meaning First argument value Function code Change of CBR name Ois set Second argument value Add Initialization file name string Chr 0 terminator for execution The maximum length of the string which can be specified Is 127 characters including the terminator JMPCINTB return value Meaning O O ooo O Normal termination O o 1 Insufficient work area N on call of JMPCINT2 Specified mistake of function code 1 Multiple calls i e JMPCINTB was called after it had already been called The effective initialization file name is that specified in the first execution of JMPCINTB Do not call JMPCINT2 JMPCINT3 JMPCINTC JMPCINTB more than once in the same application Behavior cannot be guaranteed on second and subsequent calls Specifying Run time Options in the Command Line Run time options are specified following identifier CBL or CBL For the format of the run time options see Format of Run time Options For example PROG1 EXE CBL r20 c20 r20 and c20 are specified as run time options Chapter 5 Executing Programs 129 Format of Run
104. is created automatically during linking The module definition statements in the module definition file define the contents of the application or DLL and requirements to the system Chapter 4 Linking Programs 79 The following table lists the module definition statements that can be used Table 7 Module definition statements 16 Description Statement STUB Specifies the MS DOS executable file used to display an alarm message when any application is ran outside the Windows environment Windows or other applications IMPORTS Specifies functions of other applications that will be called from this module HEA PSIZE Specifies the local heap size in bytes PROTMODE Sets the executable program to run in Windows protected mode only standard or 386 extended EXETYPE Sets applications to run under the Windows WINDOWS 3 0 environment This statement must not be omitted Different formats are used for the module definition file depending on whether you create an application or DLL The following examples show the module definition files created in the WINLINK Linking Files window for applications and DLL Information in the module definition file was set with the module definition file templates 80 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Module Definition File for Applications NAME SAMPLE1 EXETYPE WINDOWS 3 1 STUB COBSTUB PROTMODE DATA MULTIPLE MOVEABLE PRELOAD CODE MOVEABLE PRELOAD DISCARDABLE HEAPSIZE 1024 STACKSIZE 8
105. is used specify the directory of libraries If libraries exist in more than one directory specify the I option more than once The directories are searched for in the order they were specified A COPY statement with IN OF specified is ignored Note The l option functions the same as compiler option LIB For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options m directory name If the COPY statement with IN OF XMDLIB specified is used for fetching a record definition from screen and form descriptors specify the directory of the screen and form descriptor file If screen and form descriptor file exists in more than one directory specify the m option more than once The directories are searched for in the order specified 708 Appendix J Command Formats Note The m option functions the same as compiler option FORM LIB For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options f directory name If the COPY statement with IN OF XFDLIB specified is used for fetching a record definition from file descriptor specify the directory of the file descriptor file If file descriptor file exists in more than one directory specify the f option more than once The directories are searched for in the order specified Note The f option functions the same as the compiler option FILELIB For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options P filename Determine whether to output a
106. library files are kept When compiling a COBOL source program containing COPY statements that do not specify library names specify the directory where the libraries are kept in the compiler option LIB To associate a library name with a directory click on the Library Names button in the Compiler Options dialog box then set the library details in the Library Names dialog box Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 55 Library Name ix pubes Add Cancel Change Hels el Delete Figure 22 The Library Name dialog box The Library Name dialog box contains the following elements Library Name list box Displays the library text files and associated directories that have already been specified Add button Click to enter a library name and associated directory Change button Click to change the directory associated with the selected library D elete button Click to remove the selected library from the list box OK button Click to confirm the library settings or changes Cancel button Click to cancel any library settings or changes and return to the state before the dialog box was opened Help button Click to access the online help 56 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Adding a Library Name To specify a library name that does not appear in the Library Name list box 1 Click on the Add button The Add Library Name dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the library name entered in the COPY stat
107. machines where the server and clients operate Any number can be defined as a port number unless the number is defined in another entry A port number must be consistent in local area networks LANs that use the simplified inter application communication function For example Service name cobci Port number protocol 20000 tcp Using Windows 95 After the TCP IP protocol is installed the hosts file and the services file must be created using an editor These files are stored in the directory where Windows 95 is installed N ote the sample files hosts sam services sam are also stored in this directory Chapter 14 Communication Functions 453 Using Windows NT If the TCP IP protocol is installed the hosts files and services files are created in directory system32 drivers etc under the directory where Windows NT is installed 2 to 4 Execute COBCISRV EXE to start the server For screen operation and setup see Communication System Environment Setup Dialog Box and Simplified Inter application Communication Server Window The logical destinations have no permission for reading or writing messages immediately after they are generated Change the logical destination mode to give read write permission to these destinations The clients can then be started Only one server can be started on a machine N ote Steps 2 to 4 can be omitted by using a definition file See Starting by Using the Server Definit
108. name LD 5 dient LD name server LD name 478 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Estimating Memory This section explains how to estimate memory for the server when simplified inter application communication is used e Memory for messages stored at a logical destination A message written to a logical destination is managed with an additional control area of 160 bytes The memory required for a message is the message length 160 bytes e Memory for queuing instructions A queuing read instruction is managed in a control area of 160 bytes The memory required for a queuing read instruction is 160 bytes As with a message stored at a logical destination a queuing write instruction is managed with an additional control area of 160 bytes The memory required for a queuing write instruction is the message length 160 bytes The maximum memory required for the server depends on the following values specified in the system e System max messages Maximum number of messages e Max waiting instructions Maximum number of instructions Notes Chapter 14 Communication Functions 479 Determine the maximum memory required for the server based on the following formula Memory required for server M 160 ML WR 160 WW 160 ML where the following conditions are satisfied MM lt M MW lt WR WW e M Number of messages stored at the logical destination ML Message length bytes WR Number of q
109. of the window used by the screen handling function Specify columns and lineage in the range from 1 to 999 If columns 1 lineage exceeds 16250 an error occurs upon execution of the program 6 MessOutFile Set the Message Output File MessOutFile file name Specify the name of the file containing the contents displayed in the message box as file name When a file name is specified no message box is displayed 7 Cns IWinSize Set the Size of the Console Window CnslWinSize columns lineage 80 24 Specify the size of the console window used for the ACCEPT DISPLAY function Specify the number of columns and lines in the range from 1 to 999 The minimum and maximum values of the window size are the system values If a Chapter 5 Executing Programs 133 value outside the system value range is specified it is adjusted to the system minimum or maximum value 8 CnsIBufLine Set the Buffer Count for the Console Window CnslBufLine buffer lines 100 Specify the number of buffers for the console window used by the ACCEPT DISPLAY function Specify buffer lines in the range from 1 to 9999 If console window columns 1 buffer lines exceeds 65000 the specified value is decreased For example buffer lines can be up to 802 when the console window columns is 80 and 706 when 91 9 WinCloseMsg Set a Display Message When the Window Close WinCloseMsg ON OFF Specify whether a confirmation mes
110. organization Record Formats and Lengths The explanations of the record formats and lengths of line sequential files are the same as for record sequential files See Defining Record Sequential File Records for more information Because a record is delimited by a line feed character in a line sequential file the end of a record is always a line feed character regardless of the record format A line feed character however is not included in the record length Record Organization Define the attribute position and size of record data in the record description entries You do not have to define line feed characters in the record description entries because they are added when records are written 208 Chapter 7 File Processing The following is an example of record definitions in the variable length records format Text character string lt lt Line feed character A text character string can be up to 80 alphanumeric characters text file RECORD IS VARYING IN SIZE FROM 1 TO 80 CHARACTERS DEPENDING ON record length text record 02 text character string 03 character data PIC X OCCURS 1 TO 80 TIMES DEPENDING ON record length WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 record length PIC 9 3 BINARY Processing Line Sequential Files In a line sequential file processing creation extension and reference can be done with input output statements This section explains the types and use of input output statements in
111. path name and the relative path name can be used for the file name specified for execution environment information CBR_CI_SRVINF When the relative path name is used it becomes the relative path from the current directory when the Inter application Communication Server window is started If the specified file does not exist the Communication System Environment Set dialog box is displayed Server Definition File Description SRVIN F section Necessary information is specified by the Communication System Environment Set dialog box and the Log Acquisition Operation dialog box The start and end methods for the inter application communication server window can also be specified Chapter 14 Communication Functions 469 SysMaxMsg n rr g wn Ss g x Ss Va Specify the maximum number of system storage messages set in the Communication System Environment Set dialog box The default is 999999999 2 SysMaxWait SysMaxWait n Specify the number of system waiting instructions set in the Communication System Environment Set dialog box The default is 999999990 3 StartMode StartMode WINDOW ICON Specify how to display the screen on server startup You can have a window WINDOW or an icon ICON appear at startup 4 IconMenu IconMenu SYSDEF CLOSEONLY Specify the type of system menu that starts with the icon SYSDEF The default system menu is displayed CLOSEONLY Only Close is displayed in t
112. printer Using Special Registers Attributes of data items defined by form descriptors can be changed by using special registers There are three special registers that can be used Chapter 8 Printing 313 EDIT MODE To specify whether or not output processing should occur EDIT OPTION To specify underlines and overstrikes EDIT COLOR To specify color These special registers are modified by the data name defined by the form descriptors For example to edit the color of data name A use EDIT COLOR OF A Refer to Special Registers Used with Presentation File Module in Appendix E for the values set in special usage of each register Note A special register cannot be used by form descriptors where the item control part none is specified Additionally form descriptors where the item control part none is specified and the item control part is specified cannot be used together in a single program Program Compilation and Linkage Compilation Select the compiler option FORMLIB and specify the directory name of the form descriptors storage file Linkage There are no libraries that need to be linked 314 Chapter 8 Printing Program Execution To execute a program that uses form descriptors with a print file FORM RTS requires a printer information file For details about how to generate a printer information file see Generating Printer Information Files The following environments must be set to execu
113. procedure 1 input procedure 1 SECTION OPEN INPUT input file 1 input start READ input file 1 AT END GO TO input end MOVE input record 1 TO sort record 1 RELEASE sort record 1 GO TO input start input end CLOSE input file 1 output procedure 1 SECTION OPEN OUTPUT output file 1 output start RETURN sort file 1 AT END GO TO output end END RETURN MOVE sort record 1 TO output record 1 WRITE output record 1 GO TO outputstart output end CLOSE output file 1 END PROGRAM program name Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function 417 Types of Merge Processing The following two types of merge processing are possible L Write all records in multiple files already sorted in ascending or descending order to the output file in ascending or descending order Input file Output file Processing all records in multiple files already sorted in ascending or descending order as output data in ascending or descending order Input file Output records When merged records are written to the output file without changing the record contents merge processing type Lis normally used When an output file is not used or record contents are changed merge processing type 2 is used Program Specifications This section explains the contents of a program that uses merge for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION The following files must be defined Sort merge file A work file for merge processing mus
114. programs however cannot be called recursively 2 and they cannot call themselves 3 Program A CALL BP Program B Program C CALL D Program D CALL E Program E CALL D CALL C 6 Program F CALL F Figure 102 Calling relationship forms Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 355 Differences Among Linkage Rules COBOL85 supports the following linkage rules 1 COBOL linkage rules 2 C linkage rules 3 Pascal linkage rules 16 4 STDCALL linkage rules 32 Items 2 4 are applicable to _cdecl pascal and _stdcall supported by Microsoft C and Visual C compilers Table 40 Differences between linkage rules Linkage Rules Stacking and Restoring Stack Calling Name 1 Fetching Parameters Pointer SP and External Reference Name Rules COBOL linkage rules Parameters are Thecalling program Thecalling nameis stacked from right to restores the SP the external left and fetched reference name from left to right without modification C linkage rules The calling name with _ prefixed is the external reference name Pascal linkage rules Parameters are The called program The calling nameis 16 stacked from left to restores the SP the external right and fetched reference name from right to left without modification STDCALL linkage Parameters are The calling name rules 32 stacked from right to with _ prefixed and left and fetched HH 2 suffixed
115. sample programs using the project management function refer to Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL Chapter 6 Project Management Function 171 Resources Required for Project Management Project management uses the following files 1 Project file lt File name information tot 4 Source file 6 Library Other Libraries a PRJ re 4 2 Option file 3 COB COB LIB LIB for compilation Main gram Su gram i 5 Library file i a CBI Shiny A ee erase cies eee oct 3 Option file CBL for Link Object file xl i dee a LNI j i x DEF DBJ i Su gram a Project name Creation JbBuild Build 4p Creation Project management function ae creation BUI ooceecee cree Ve ereation 8 Object file 1O DLL OBJ OBJ a DLL Main gram Su gram i LIB j EXP Hi x EXE j 9 Import Tibrary Export file Po llExecttable file xl Compiled object files in other Language Figure 56 Files used by the Project Management function 172 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Table 13 Files used by the Project Management function File Contents FileName Condition to Use or Create Format Information for project Information saved in the project file is project management name PRJ referenced for building or rebuilding Dependent files Target names Source file names Library names Other required file names 2 Compiler options project Used to compile source programs
116. saving setting and restoring the return address for the return mechanism The exit of the PERFORM statement transfers control to the other statement generally Otherwise Appendix C Global Optimization 623 some of the machine instructions for the return mechanism turn out to be redundant The compiler then removes these redundant machine instructions Integrating Adjacent Moves If different alphanumeric move statements transfer data from contiguous items to identically contiguous items the compiler integrates these move statements into one Example 1 02 Al PIC X 32 02 A2 PIC X 16 02 Bl PIC X 32 02 B2 PIC X 16 MOVE Al TO Bl MOVE A2 TO B2 If A2 and B2 do not change between 1 and 2 and concurrently B2 is not referenced in Example 1 the compiler deletes MOVE statement 2 Then MOVE statement 1 sets A1 and A2 and B1 and B2 as one area respectively to perform a move Eliminating Unnecessary Substitutions Substitutions are eliminated for data items that are not going to be either implicitly or explicitly referenced 624 Appendix C Global Optimization Notes If the compiler option OPTIMIZE is specified the compiler generates a globally optimized object program For details refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Notes on Global Optimization The following explains notes on global optimization Use of the linkage function Some parameters for a called program share all or p
117. sequential file in variable length record format and convert it toa COBOL file Use the lt Unload gt command to input a COBOL file and convert it to a record sequential file in variable length record format Input Output Input Output Unload Load Arbitrary COBOL file Sequential file of variable Arbitrary COBOL file Length record form Figure 80 Converting files using the Load and Unload commands Chapter 7 File Processing 263 Manipulating Indexed Files You can execute the following operations for indexed files e Display attribute information with the lt Attribute gt command attribute e Index file INDEXED FILE INFORMATION x File name A Sample2 ixd Record format Fixed Maximum record length 44 Record Key Information Primary key 0 4 Alternate keyl 4 38 Block Length 1024 Block increment 16 Compress of record data Yes Key data compression i Yes Number of records 33 Number of blocks d 16 Number of empty blocks Figure 81 Displaying attribute information with the Attribute command 264 Chapter 7 File Processing The Indexed File Information window contains the following information File name Displays the index file name whose attributes follow Record format Displays the record format fixed length variable length If the maximum record length is fixed the maximum record length is displayed If the minimum record length is fixed the minimum record
118. specification The following shows the priority determined by the option specification methods 1 Using the compiler directing statement in the source file Refer to Compiler Directing Statement in Chapter 2 Using the WC option See Table 88 Using an option other than the WC option See Table 88 Using the option file See Table 88 Using the environment variable 32 Refer to Setting Up Environment Variables in Chapter 1 ui BF WN filename Specify the name of the source file to be compiled One or more file names can be specified Table 89 Compiler command options Specification Specification Format Directory of library files directory name Directory of screen and form descriptor files m directory name Directory of file descriptor files f directory name Whether to output a compiler listing file and the output P filename destination file name Directory of a compiler listing file dp directory name Use of the TRACE function Use of the CHECK function Dk Appendix J Command Formats 707 Table 89 Compiler command options cont Specification Specification Format Use of an interactive debugger Directory of a debugging information file Global optimization o o OSS A directory name Compiler option WC compiler option No space is needed before filename or directory name in the specification format directory name If the library function COPY statement
119. specify N one e f the first four characters of the name of the form overlay pattern storage file is other than KOLS specify the first four characters of the file name for run time environment information FOVLTYP For details about how to set run time environment information FOVLDIR FOVLTYPE and OVD_SUFFIX refer to Format of Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 An example of writing an initialization file is shown below Contents of an initialization file when executing program A using a form overlay pattern A FOVLDIR C FOVLDIR OVD_SUFFIX FOVLTYPE FOVL Chapter 8 Printing 303 1 Set the directory C FOVLDIR where the form overlay pattern is stored for run time environment information FOVLDIR 2 The extent of the form overlay pattern storage file is OVD 3 The first four characters of the form overlay pattern storage file are KOL6 Outputting Form Overlay Patterns For printers supporting form overlay patterns The software overlay function provided by the Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 graphic device interface GDI is supported so a form overlay pattern can be sent to printers having a Windows 95 Windows NT or Windows 3 1 printer driver For Windows 3 1 16 use a COBOL85 run time system information file COBOL85 Run time System Information File COB85RTS CBR 16 A COBOL85 run time system information file keeps information common to all the COBOL85 applicati
120. statement Usage Required Resources This section explains software and resources required for operation from GS program compilation to the module test under this system Software e COBOL85 compiler required e COBOL85 run time system required e COBOL85 debugger required e COBPRTST command program file required for presentation file module test Resources e Subschema definition file A subschema definition file is required to compile a GS program that uses network database functions A subschema definition file contains the definition information of an area for communication FCOM with a GS based advanced information management AIM system and an AIM Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 561 expansion record area UWA The definition information is fetched from the AIM directory of the host machine The extension CBL is given to the subschema name specified in the subschema name paragraph of the GS program To fetch the subschema definition file from the GS use the subschema fetch tool GETSSCH See GETSSCH TXT Compiling a GS Program Compiler Options to be Specified TEST Whenever a debugger is used specify this option AIMLIB directory name To compile a GS program using a network database specify this option The directory name of the subschema definition file must be specified for directory name GEN NOGEN To writethe FCOM and UWA expansion information to the compilation li
121. status value 10 during execution of the first READ statement The OPEN statement in I O or EXTEND mode was executed for a nonexistent file In this case the file is created Input output statements were successfully executed however the file referenced by one of the following methods exists in a non reel or unit medium OPEN statement or CLOSE statement with NO REWIND specified CLOSE statement with REEL UNIT specified ACM There was no message to be input to the specified logical destination Appendix B I O Status List 613 Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification 1 0 Detailed Status Information Value Successful The number of output messages exceeds the maximum number of messages stored at the specified logical destination AT END condition occurred in a sequentially condition accessed READ statement File end reached The first READ statement was executed for a non existent optional input file Thatis a file with the OPTIONAL clause specified was opened in INPUT mode but the file was not created AT END condition occurred in a sequentially accessed READ statement The valid digits of a read relative record number are greater than the size of the relative key item of the file Invalid key Record key order is invalid condition One of the following status occurred During sequential access the prime record key value was changed between the READ statement and subseque
122. the output procedure specified by the MERGE statement terminates merge processing The following table lists the possible values for special register SORT STATUS and their meanings Table 47 SORT STATUS values and their meanings Vale Meaning _ _ _ S O O Normal termination Abnormal termination Any input and output files used must be closed during M ERGE statement execution Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler or linkage options are required Program Execution 1 Set environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR A work file called the sort merge file is required for merge processing The sort merge file is temporarily created in the directory specified in environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR When the directory is not specified in the environment variable it is temporarily created in the directory specified in environment variable TEMP These environment variables must be set in advance 2 Assign input and output files When input and output files are defined using file identifiers use these identifiers as environment variables to set the names of input and output files 3 Execute the program 420 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions This chapter describes the system program description SD functions used to code a system program Included in this chapter are explanations of how to use pointers the ADDR and LENG f
123. the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Do the following then re execute e Stop all applications that are executing at the same time e Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary e Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary JMPO0601I I U SORT OR MERGE STATEMENT ERROR 1 2 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the value written for 1 then re execute The file information file name or access name or detailed information is written for 1 The error address is written for 2 Table 85 explains the values written for 1 674 Appendix F Message Lists Table 85 Values written for JMPO601I I U 1 1 Error Contents Programmer Response __ 51 An error occurred during input If the same error occurs when the processing for the record to be sorted program is re executed a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE 52 Memory is insufficient Modify the environment to allocate enough memory 53 An error occurred during inpu
124. the specification format object file name output file name map file name library name module definition file object filename Specify one or more object files to be linked The specified object file names must be separated by a space or plus sign The default file name extension is OBJ output file name Specify an executable file or DLL If an executable file is specified the default file name extent is EXE If DLL is specified the default file name extension is DLL 714 Appendix J Command Formats map filename Specify a map file The default file name extension is MAP library name Specify a standard object code library or import library If a standard object library is specified only the object module required for external reference is linked module definition filename Specify a module definition file The default file name extension is DEF Table 90 LINK command options 16 Specification Specification Format Prepares for debugger option _ _ Prepares for debugger option For details on the above options refer to Setting Linker Options in Chapter 4 LIB Command 16 This section explains the LIB command for Windows 3 1 The LIB command does the following e Creates library files e Deletes adds and replaces library modules e Copies and moves one module from the library to another file e Outputs library modules to the public symbol list For details on
125. this printer on the network Help Share Name NMSVR 20P Figure 87 The Printer Properties dialog box Printer name Specify a locally connected printer in the following manner PRTNAME Laser et In this example Laser et is the specified printer Specify a printer connected to a network in the following manner PRTNAME NMSVR20P Laser et Chapter 8 Printing 287 Local printer port name Serial port name Specify a local printer port name or serial port name in the following manner Example LPT1 Windows 3 1 e Specify the name of the port where the printer is connected e Specify LPTn when the port where the printer is connected is a local printer port Specify COM n when connected to a serial port n designates 1 to 9 Examples of Programs When PRINTER is Specified in the ASSIGN Clause Data is sent to the system default printer 1 Figure 88 Data flow when sent to the default printer 288 Chapter 8 Printing 1 System default printer Windows 95 Set as Default is checked for the printer Windows NT Printer is set as default using the Print M anager Windows 3 1 Printer is set as default using the control pane To send data to a printer connected to a specific port follow the method explained below When a File Identifier is Specified in the ASSIGN Clause Define the name of the output destination printer local printer port name or serial port name with
126. to the server by either of the following methods e Specify the server name e Specify DEFAULT 506 Chapter 15 Database SQL Connecting by Specifying the Server Name Before executing the program define the server information in the ODBC information file For details on the information to be defined and how to define the information see Executing the Program Specify the server name in the CONNECT statement and execute the statement This will result in the ODBC information file being searched for the specified server information If a section is found having the same name the server information is referenced in definition order to establish a connection to the server COBOL application ODBC information file DA SV1 EXEC SQL ea SQL_DATASC SRC1 CONNECT TO SV1 USER tanaka sky Reference SV2 END EXEC SQL_DATASRC SRC2 The server information in the ODBC information file is referenced at execution of the CON N ECT statement when connecting to the server Connecting by Specifying DEFAULT Before executing the program define the default connection information in the ODBC information file For details definition information and how to define the information see Executing the Program Specify DEFAULT in the CONNECT statement and execute the statement This will result in the default connection information file for ODBC to be referenced The server information is defined in the default c
127. use the extension PRE for a file name to be accessed in an application In order to use the pre image function do not access Appendix M Using Other File Systems 739 multiple Btrieve files having identical names with extensions that are unique within an application The pre image function fails to define the preimage file for files when multiple Btrieve files are accessed 16 Up to 18 files for 16bit or 20 files for 32bit can be opened in the application at the same time To use NetWare Btrieve and client format Btrieve Supported by this product together rename client format Btrieve WBTRCALL DLL to WBTRLOCL DLL For details refer to the Btrieve manuals 16 A Btrieve file created under NetWare 4 1 cannot be accessed To enable access to Btrieve files specify yes to Create Btrieve Files in Pre v6 x Format in the Btrieve setup utility For details refer to the Btrieve manuals 16 This product contains Btrieve Workstation Engine for Windows NT Windows 95 v6 15 32 and Btrieve Workstation Engine for Windows NT Windows 95 v6 10 16 For ERFLD xx and FDBK xx status codes xx hexadecimal refer to the BTRIEVE Programmer s M anual and the Btrieve for Windows NT Windows 95 Installation and Operation by Btrieve Technologies Inc External Decimal Data Form Conversion 32 The internal form of this NUMERIC differs from COBOL85 and is called 88consortium It is equivalent to the data type of an external
128. valid PROCEDURE DIVISION Execute an input output statement in the following sequence 1 OPEN statement with OUTPUT specified Starts printing 300 Chapter 8 Printing 2 WRITE statement Outputs data 3 CLOSE statement Stops printing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Use an OPEN statement once at the start of printing and a CLOSE statement once at the end of printing WRITE Statement Use a WRITE statement when creating a control or line record A line record is written in the same manner as when using a WRITE statement to create data in line mode See Program Specifications To write a control record write the mnemonic name related to the function name CTL in the ADVANCING phrase To overlay data created by a line record with a form overlay pattern write a control record with a form overlay pattern name specified To not overlay data with a form overlay pattern write a control record with a blank entered as the form overlay pattern name After a control record is written the format of the output page is set according to the contents of the control record When a control record is written however no line record can be written to the current page Thus to write a line record immediately after a control record the AFTER ADVANCING PAGE phrase must be specified FILE SECTION FD file l 01 control record 02 FOVL MOVE AAHE 3 4 Ae 3 q line Undefined gt f a gt
129. whether the file is allocated correctly 8 0x08 Command cannot be processed Do the following then re execute because the applicable storage area Stop all applications that are is insufficient executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary Check whether the drive name is correct 19 0x13 Write protected disk Check the disk 20 0x14 A disk unit is defective Confirm that the disk unit is not damaged 21 0x15 The drive cannot get ready Check the drive 15 OxOF Invalid drive name 53 0x35 The network path is not found Check the specified network path name 59 0x3B An unexpected network error Check whether the network occurred environment is set up correctly 34 0x22 The incorrect disk is in the drive Check the disk 127 Ox7F The specified procedure cannot be Check to see if the product is found correctly installed 206 OxCE The file name is too long Check the file name 1785 Ox6F9 The disk may be not formatted Check whether the disk is formatted Appendix G Writing Special Literals This appendix explains how to write literals for specifying names for example program and file names defined in the system Program Name Literal Any characters can be used for a literal specifying a program name in the PROGRAM ID paragraph CALL statement or CANCEL statement There are no config
130. 01 Screen item defined in the SCREEN section Screen Windows One screen window to perform screen input output with the screen handling function is generated per run unit Screen Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 345 windows are generated by the first ACCEPT or DISPLAY statement executed and closed when the run unit is terminated Although the size of the logical screen of this window is normally 24 lines and 80 columns it can be changed with run time environment information ScrnSize You can specify whether to close this window automatically or close after message confirmation with run time environment information WVinCloseM sg The following table lists window attributes that can be changed at execution time For details about how to specify run time environment information see Setting Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 Table 37 Changing window attributes for screen handling Run time Setting Environment Value Information Automatic WinCloseM sg Closes the window after window closing displaying a message 1 displaying a message Window size amp crnSize m n Specifies the size of a logical columns m and lines n 1 This run time environment information is also valid for console windows used with the ACCEPT DISPLAY function User Defined Function Keys The screen handling function invalidates the input of specific function keys and corresponding processing in programs to specified
131. 1 92 1 Set the program name 2 Set the application to run under Windows 3 Set protected mode 4 Set required sizes Module Definition File for DLLs LIBRARY INSATSU EXETYPE WINDOWS 3 1 STUB COBSTUB PROTMODE DATA SINGLE MOVEABLE PRELOAD CODE MOVEABLE PRELOAD DISCARDABLE EXPORTS WEP INSATSU 1 Define the module name of the DLL 2 Display an alarm message if you run a Windows application under DOS 3 Set the Windows End Procedure WEP callback function which processes the DLL before unloading the library The WEP is required and must not be omitted 4 Set the specified object name Chapter 4 Linking Programs 81 Linkage Types and Program Structure This section describes the structure of an executable program created by linking There are two types of linkage static and dynamic Static Linkage The calling program and called program are all linked during linking Dynamic Linkage The called program is linked to the calling program at run time The following shows the relationship of the program structures created by static and dynamic linkage Throughout this section the main program is the program initially run and the subprogram is the program called from the main program A program called from a subprogram is also called a subprogram Dynamic link structure Dynamic program structure Dynamic linkage Simple Structure Simple structure means that multiple o
132. 2 The server SV 1 is connected This connection name is CNN1 3 The server SV2 is connected This connection name is CN N2 4 The server SV3 is connected This connection name is CNN 3 5 The server SV4is connected This connection name is CNN4 The last connected CN N 4 is the current connection 6 The connection name CNN 4 is disconnected 7 The connection name CNN 1 is selected CNN 1 becomes the current connection 8 Any changes made in the CNN 1 are canceled 510 Chapter 15 Database SQL 9 The current connection is disconnected CNN 1is now the current connection in the example so CNN 1 is disconnected 10 Default connection is selected The default connection becomes the current connection 11 Any changes made in the default connection are saved 12 The default connection is disconnected 13 All available connections are disconnected Up to 16 servers can be connected using the CONN ECT statement at the same time The number can vary depending on the ODBC driver and the related environments Chapter 15 Database SQL 511 Manipulating Data This section explains the following data manipulations Retrieving data Updating data Deleting data Inserting data Using dynamic SQL Using variable length character strings Operating the cursor with more than one connection Also see Correspondence Between ODBC H andled Data and COBOL 85 Handled Data 512 Chapter 15 Database SQL
133. 228 Input Output Error ProCeSSinQ ccccceccecececseeeeeeeecceeaeeeeeeesesaeeaseesesaeaetaeseesaeeaseetees 232 AT END Specification cc ecececcceeseeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceesaeeaeeesesaesasaeseesaetaseeseesaetaseasieees 232 INVALID KEY SpecifiCation inanipa aa aa aa 233 FICE STATUS Clauses dtc ities netaa aeaa aa herd eE Eaa a aaaea 233 Error Pr cedUTeS iseen a a a dion gunn aeaa iiaia 234 Input Output Error Execution Results s ssssssssssesisisrersrsrsrsrsrsrnrnrnrnrnnsnsrsnsrsrsns 235 File Processi Ngina a iei eea ed a a e aa eedi aas 236 xvi COBOL85 User s Guide ASSIGNING FIlGS ierni estate tied nee adele none eaten ae dee 237 Exclusive Control Of Files ccssseccsesceseseeeeceseeeeseeeeseesesaseessensecaeeeesnesaeeeneeeeneaees 240 File Processing Results eccesesesseceeeeseeseceeeeeeseeeeasenseeseeaseensessaseeneeseetssseeaseenaeas 244 COBOL8SFILEUTIEDIY nepa a aa a E a A 246 Using the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY sssssssssssssssssrsrsrsrsrsrnsrsrsrsrsiensnnnnnnnsnsrsnsnnnnsnnns 246 COBOL85 FILE UTILITY FUNCtions 00 ee eceeeccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeetaesateeseetsetaeeaeens 251 Chapter 8 Printing een 267 Types of Printing Method 0 ceceeccceseeseeeeeeeeeceecsesaeeeeseeeseesaesaseeseessaseesesaetaseesaseetes 268 Outline of Printing M CthodS cccecceesseseeeceeeceeeeeeecseesseeaeeesesaesaseeesaetaseaseeeetaes 268 Print Characters c cves chiehi e o a a 271 Form Overlay Patternns ccccccceccseese
134. 308 required environments with presentation file module 324 using a presentation file 315 using input output statements 322 using presentation file module 316 with presentation file module 323 printing methods 268 Program executing using form overlay pattern and FCB 302 executing with WINEXEC 110 setting run time environment information 117 under Windows 3 1 16 117 program development 11 operating with GS 556 PROGRAMMING STAFF P STAFF 5 Programs executing from WINEXEC 118 writing using screen handling function 346 writing when printing forms with presentation file modules 319 PROGRAM STATUS 360 369 484 project building or rebuilding 187 project file 170 creating 176 project management procedures 173 project management function 170 Project window 175 187 P STAFF 5 R R 296 Random access 196 213 218 219 222 rebuilding 170 Record browse 256 RECORD clause 201 Record edit 258 Record reference 244 record sequential file 191 record sequential files 198 defining 199 fixed length 201 processing 202 variable length 201 Record sort 260 Record updating deletion and insertion 244 records deleting 220 231 inserting 220 231 locking 241 referring to 219 229 sorting 411 updating 219 230 reference format types 19 registering files 177 registering library files 180 registering other required files 182 registering source files 178 registering target files 1
135. 5 Executing Programs Executing a COBOL program that has been compiled and linked Chapter 10 Calling Subprograms Inter Calling subprograms from a COBOL Program Communication program Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Thesimplified input output command Statements line argument operation and environment variable operation functions using ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements Statements Sort M erge Function SD Functions used to create system programs other communication types Chapter 15 Database SQL Remote database access under ODBC Chapter 16 Distributed Development Designing and developing COBOL Support Functions programs in a distributed environment iv COBOL85 User s Guide Chapter Appendix A Compiler Options The options provided for the COBOL85 Appendix B I O Status List The values returned from input output statement execution indicating l O status COBOL85 compiler Appendix D Built in Function List The list of COBOL85 built in functions Appendix E Special Registers Used with The values set in the special registers for Screen and Form Functions screen and form functions Appendix F Message Lists Compilation and execution messages Appendix J Command Formats Compiler and linker command formats Appendix G Writing Special Literals Writing literals for Windows Appendix H High Speed File Processing Specifications for high speed file processing Appendix L Indexed File Recovery Recovering
136. 6 78 under Windows NT 32 76 module definition file 16 creating 186 module definition file 32 creating 185 module definition statements 78 under Windows NT 32 77 multiple object programs 81 N NOALPHAL 371 NULL 127 numeric data item 427 O object program 3 ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity 501 ODBC driver 502 552 ODBC environment setup 543 ODBC information file creating 537 specifications 543 ODBC Information Setup Tool 536 537 using 542 operating environment using the presentation file module with the servers 435 option file 170 ORGANIZATION 200 Output file 412 418 OUTPUT PROCEDURE 413 OUTPUT PROCEDURE output procedure name 418 OVD_SUFFIX 147 overlay patterns 11 P passing parameters 358 from C programs to COBOL programs 369 from COBOL programs to C programs 365 PERFORM statement 423 428 PERFORM statement without an AT END condition 428 pointer 422 required data items 423 using 423 pointer data item 427 pointer qualification 424 pointer qualifier 424 Power FORM 10 presentation file 436 features and uses 328 in ENVIRONMENT DIVISION 333 module test function 6 Presentation file function 328 requirements 331 presentation file module 432 435 443 data transfer 435 environment setup 440 requirements 329 requirements to print forms 317 using 434 using connected products to enable communication functions using 435 using for screen input output
137. 6 points e TYPE PC Default ANK character size is assumed to be a PC standard size Print size is 10 5 points Chapter 5 Executing Programs 143 e TYPE G Default ANK character size is brought close to the size in the SX G series Print size is 10 8 points If this environment variable is omitted the print size is 7 0 points 26 File identifier Set the File Used by the Program File identifier file name access type or file system type Specify the file identifier entered in the ASSIGN clause of the COBOL source program as the file identifier and the name of the file to be processed as file name This environment variable assigns the file in the program with the file to be processed Specify run time environment information in uppercase letters even if the file identifier was defined in lowercase letters in the program For example e Description of the ASSIGN clausein the COBOL source program ASSIGN TO OUTFILE e Name of file processed F WORK DAT e Run time environment information OUTFILE F WORK DAT Access type or file system type can be the following strings depending on the type used e BSAM Provides fast file processing e RDM Processes the RDM file RDB 7000 Server for Windows NT 144 Chapter 5 Executing Programs e BTRV Processes the Btrieve file 27 File Identifier Set the Information File Used by the Program Set the Connected Product Name Used from the Presentation File by File
138. 69 Table 20 Characteristics advantages and uses of each printing method File Type w a Characteristics Data can be printed in line mode B a B B JC Data can be overlaid with form overlay C B 1 pawn S LER Fl aL form descriptors A B Advantage Simple program coding A A A ing A B Simpleformsprinting B Ja a Existing form descriptors generated by C C oa sysems en peuse oon O O Various types of print information can C A ee ee iles A JA Use A C A Can be used suitable B Can be used C Cannot be used 1 Can be printed only when an overlay pattern name is specified in form descriptors or is specified in a printer information file For details refer to the FORM RTS HELP The following table lists related products Table 21 Related products Filetype o Power FORM J Neda FORM overlay option Needed Needed Needed FORM RTS Neded Ned Mey NET l Ne i Each printing method is outlined below 270 Chapter 8 Printing 1 Print File without a FORMAT Clause Use 1 By using a print file without a FORMAT clause data can be sent in line mode to a printer During output a logical page size line feed and page alignment can be specified For details on how to use a print file when printing data in line mode see Using Print File 1 2 Print File without a FORMAT Clause Use 2 With a print file
139. 7 File Processing If run time environment information is left blank a file assignment error occurs When Specifying a Data Name in the ASSIGN Clause Input output processing is done for a file with the name specified in the data name For example DAT T data name When the file name specified in the program is a relative path name the file having the current directory name prefixed is eligible for input output processing If the data name is left blank a file assignment error occurs Chapter 7 File Processing 239 When Writing a File Identifier Literal in the ASSIGN Clause Input output processing is done for a file with the name written as a file identifier literal For example When the file name written in the program is a relative path name the file having the current directory name prefixed is eligible for input output processing When Writing a Character String DISK in the ASSIGN Clause Input output processing is done for a file with the name specified in the SELECT clause For example 240 Chapter 7 File Processing Files under the current directory are eligible for input output processing Exclusive Control of Files Disable access during file processing by setting the exclusive mode for files or locking records in use This is called exclusive control of files This section explains the relationship between file processing and exclusive control
140. 77 RELATIVE 213 relative file 193 213 creating 218 extending 218 processing 215 relative files 211 RELATIVE KEY clause 214 relative record number 214 218 relative record numbers 193 return codes 366 ROLLBACK statement 515 run time environment information 125 entry information 119 environment variable information 119 format 129 setting 122 setting from command line 125 under Windows NT and 95 121 Run time environment information 32 setting 158 Run time Environment Setup window 125 Run time Environment Setup window 16 162 Run time Environment Setup window 32 155 run time options 128 format 166 run time system 4 S S control records 295 screen descriptors generating used by presentation file module 332 information requirements 332 Screen handling function 328 344 explanation 343 screen handling functions features and uses 328 screen input output 328 functions 328 screen window 344 work procedure of with presentation file module 332 screen input output processing required environments using presentation file module 341 screen input output status 346 values 346 screen layout 344 SCREEN section 347 screen transition 570 search conditions specifying at execution 524 SELECT clause 200 SELECTED FUNCTION clause 339 sequence number area 17 SEQUENTIAL 200 Sequential access 196 213 218 219 222 server quitting 467 server information defining 538 server operat
141. ACCEPT statement 398 default connection information 541 DELETE statement 523 Dependent Files dialog box 182 DISCONNECT statement 507 disconnecting from a server 507 DISPLAY statement 392 outputting data to a console window 388 outputting data to a file 395 DISPLAY statements 384 distributed development support functions 559 creating environment file 572 required files for using presentation file module test function 569 required operation software and resources 560 DS registers 372 Dynamic access 196 213 218 219 222 dynamic link libraries DLL 76 dynamic link library DLL creating 85 dynamic link structure 82 dynamic linkage 81 dynamic parameters specifying 529 dynamic program structure 82 dynamic SQL 524 E editor 16 embedded SQL operations 504 embedded SQL DECLARE section 515 embedded SQL keyword list 545 embedded SQL statement execution limits 554 embedded SQL statements 552 notes on executing 553 entry information 147 entry information 32 setting 160 entry point 357 primary 357 secondary 357 ENTRY statement 357 environment variable referring to value of 404 405 updating value of 404 405 environment variable information 32 changing 160 deleting 160 environment variables referring to and updating 399 referring to and updating values of 403 setting 8 setting from Command Prompt 32 123 setting from Control Panel 32 123 Windows 3 1 8 Windows NT 8
142. AMIC Enables records to be processed in sequential and random access modes 214 Chapter 7 File Processing Referencing records in sequential and random access modes is shown below Sequential access Random access Relative record number Relative record number Record with 1 Pola Adams 100 100 100 relative record Pola Adams 100 100 100 First READ 2 Cheryl Osborne 60 78 43 MuMber 2 Cheryl Osborne 60 78 43 Second READ Isabel Green 89 33 97 Third READ 3 Isabel Green 89 33 97 Records are read sequentially A specific record is read Relative Record Numbers Specify the data name where a relative record number is entered in the RELATIVE KEY clause In sequential access this clause can be omitted The relative record number of the record for this data name is entered when the record is read and the relative record number of the record to be written is entered when the record is written This data name must be defined as an unsigned numeric item in the WORKING STORAGE section Defining Relative File Records This section explains record formats lengths and organization Record Formats and Lengths The explanations of the record formats and lengths of relative files are the same as for record sequential files See Defining Record Sequential File Records for more information Chapter 7 File Processing 215 Record Organization Define the attribute position and size of record data in the r
143. ANK spaces Determines how to treat the QUOTE figurative QUOTE APOST 30 constant Specifies the type of the reserved words RSV 31 Selection of sign adjustment for signed SDS 32 Appendix A Compiler Options 583 Specifies the type of program formats SRF 34 Specifies the collating sequence of alphanumeric STD1 37 characters Specifies a tab interval TAB 38 Compares the signed external decimal item with an ZWB 42 alphanumeric item Options that relate to object program generating Compiler option N umber Specifies a method of calling the specified DLOAD 8 subprogram with the CALL literal Specifies a COBOL source program as a main MAIN 21 program or subprogram Specifies operation with the ACCEPT statement MODE 23 Determines whether to output the object programs OBJECT 27 Determines whether to create a globally optimized OPTIMIZE 28 object programs Options that relate to run time control Compiler option N umber Specifies a method of processing data having EQUALS 9 the same key in the SORT statement Selection of column truncation TRUNC 41 Options that relate to run time resources Compiler option N umber Specifies the input destination of data specified SSI N 35 in the ACCEPT statement Specifies the output destination of data specified in SSOUT 36 the DISPLAY statement Options that relate to debugging function Compiler option N umber Determines whether to use the CHECK function CHECK 4 Determines whether to use the intera
144. ARACTER TYPE IS MODE 2 MODE 3 PROCEDURE DIVISION Mmnemonic name OPEN OUTPUT file name MOVE form descriptor name TO form descri ptor name notification area MOVE item group name TO item group nam e notification area WRITE chart record name AFTER ADVANCING WRITE line record name FROM data name 4 AFTER ADVANCING FAGE WRITE control record name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name 308 Chapter 8 Printing Outline Usea chart record to print forms using partitioned form descriptors Define a partition item group designated in the form descriptors in a chart record You do not have to write the definition statement of a chart record as it can be fetched from the form descriptors with aCOBOL COPY statement As with ordinary data create a chart record with aWRITE statement The size font form direction and space of print characters can be indicated in a COBOL program and form descriptors For character settings see Print Characters and the FORM V1 3 Manual Form descriptors WRITE_chart record EZ Siomin Employee list Employee list Naber Name 10101 John mth 10102 Margaret Wilsm z 10102 Margaret Wi ison XX In a fixed partition data in a chart record is printed at a position defined in the form descriptors In a floating partition the data position can be specified from a COBOL program Figure 96 Flow of control with fo
145. BOL statement OPEN CLOSE READ WRITE REWRITE START or DELETE with which an input output error occurred is written for 1 The file name or access name of the processed file is written for 2 One of the character strings shown in Table 80 is written for 3 The error address is written for 4 Table 80 Character strings written for JMP0330I I U 3 3 Error Information AT END After a file at end condition was produced the READ statement was re executed an attempt was made to open the file NOSPACE After a no space condition was produced the WRITE statement was re executed NOT OPENED An input output statement was executed for a closed file OPEN MODE The OPEN modeis invalid POS ERROR The file position indicator is undefined JMP03401 U CONTROL RECORD FORMAT ERROR STM WRITE FILE 1 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 2 then re execute The file name or access name of the processed file is written for 1 One of the character strings shown in Table 81 is written for 2 and shows the relationship between the character strings and control record contents The error address is written for 3 666 Appendix F Message Lists Table 81 Character strings written for JMP0340I U 2 2 Field Contents Offset stack Printing format Printing surface positioning 2 Field Contents BIND Binding direction
146. C1 and D1 cannot call outside programs C and D2 other than common programs A CALL A1 Al CALL B CALL A1L r All Cl CALL C Figure 106 Calling sequence Error D1 CALL D2 D2 Error 362 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Common Programs To call an internal program from an outside internal program specify a COMMON clausein the PROGRAM ID paragraph of the called internal program The program with COMMON specified is acommon program and it can be called from internal programs not including the program with COMMON specified Program E Program E1 CALL F2 Program E2 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID E2 IS COMMON Initial Programs To place a program in the initial state whenever it is called specify an INITIAL clause in the PROGRAM ID paragraph This program is an initial program When the initial program is called the program is always placed in the initial state Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 363 Program F CALL F1 Program F1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID F1 IS INITIAL 01 DATAO1 PIC 92 VALUE 0 PROCEDURE DIVISION ADD 1 TO DATAO1 When program F1 is called the value of DATA01 is always 0 Valid Scope of Names To use data items defined by external programs in the internal program
147. CALL Bl CANCEL B1 Example 2 When a canceled subprogram is in a DLL containing other subprograms rogram A Entry information rogram B1 OPEN FILE 1 t CALL B1 CALL B2 A ENTRY FILE 1 B1 B DLL B2 B1 rogram B OPEN FILE 2 CANCEL B1 Static Linkage structure gt FILE 2 Dynamic Linkage structure gt DLL Dynamic program structure gt State of file after CANCEL sentence is executed FILE 1 Closed FILE 2 Opened 152 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Example 3 When a canceled subprogram does a dynamic call rogram A 7 Entry information rogram B1 CALL B1 OPEN FILE 1 rogram C1 A ENTRY CALL Cl OPEN FILE 2 B1 B DLL C1 C DLL B DLL C DLL CANCEL B1 Static Linkage structure gt FILE 1 FILE 2 Dynamic Linkage structure gt Dynamic program structure gt State of file after CANCEL sentence is executed FILE 1 Closed FILE 2 Opened WINEXEC WIN EXEC is used for program execution This section describes the WINEXEC window For further details on how to use the window refer to the online help Activating the WINEXEC Window 32 In P STAFF select WINEXEC from the Tools menu to activate the WINEXEC Window Chapter 5 Executing Programs 153 WINEXEC Figure 49 The WINEXEC window The WINEXEC window contains the following elements Help Access the P STAFF online help Comma
148. CMOD Copy modification module name Number of copies FID Format definition deck name FOVL Forms overlay module name Number of forms overlay fields HOP ae Control record ID LOAD Dynamic loading MODE Control mode F NO HOP LEN Control record length OFST OFST Print origin position JMP0350I U PFRM SIDE Printing surface specification ST STK SNO Copy correction start e Fr ee table for copy correction Binding width XTB Name of character array table for copy correction Forms overlay printing count PRTA Unprintable area R Reserved area not blank K N USE PROCEDURE IS RECURSIVELY CALLED Abnormally terminates the program Response If execution of an input output statement during an error procedure causes re execution of the error procedure do not let control reach the last statement of the first executed error procedure Appendix F Message Lists 667 JMP0360I U PS FILE ACCESS ERROR CODE 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response Check the contents of the destination specified in the SYMBOLIC DESTINATION clause If the contents are correct a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE The internal code indicating detailed error information is written for 1 JMP0363I U SYMBOLIC DESTINATION ERROR FILE 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response Specify the destination name in the SYM BOLIC DESTINA
149. COBOL85 User s Guide Using Variable Length Character StrinQS cccceseceeceseeeeeeceeeeesaseeseesetaseeteees 530 Operating the Cursor with More than One Connection 533 Compiling the Prograim ccsecceccceseeeeeceeteeeeeeeeecsesaeeaseecsecaeeaseeesaeeasaaeaseesesaeeaseetaes 535 Executing the Programm scccecccccseeseeeeecseeceeeecseseeaeeaeeeeeessecaesaseeesaeeaseesaseeseetaeeaseetiees 536 Constructing the Program Execution Environment s s s 536 Defining Default Connection Information ceeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeteeteees 541 Using the ODBC Information Setup TOO ccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetetateeteee 542 Maximum Length of Information Specified in the ODBC Information File 543 Preparing Linkage Software and the Hardware Environment 543 Embedded SQL Keyword LiSt ccceececcceceseeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesesaeeeeeesesaeeaeeeseesaetaneasiees 545 Correspondence Between ODBC H andled Data and COBOL85 H andled Data 548 SQLSTATE SQLCODE And SQLM SG 2 eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeecaetaeeaseeseetaeeaseetaes 550 Notes on Using the ODBC DI ivel eeecceccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesaetaseeseesaetaneetiee 552 Notes on SQL Statement SYNtAX 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeseeesaesaeseeeeaeeaeseteeneaee 552 Notes on Executing Embedded SQL StatementS eccceeeceeeseeteeeeeeteeeeeteees 553 Quantitative Limits of Embedded SQL Statement at Execution s s 554 Chapter 16 Distributed D evelopm
150. COM P 5 statement must be specified Appendix Function Comparison 693 Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification SM Function Classification SM Comparison Classification s Function outline Function outline COBOL Eipsstication Function name eel than the eel Literal National item literal National alphanumeric literal National association literal National language literal H exadecimal literal National differences hexadecimal literal among codes National code literal Other than the above Others Specification of quotation mark as a constant determined M ethod of Reference Sequence number program Aaa variable format Data definition Data All clauses that can A description be described in the data description one Data type comes fC Uf Othe T the above o es Compile option APOST QUOTE is followed This system Automatically 694 Appendix Function Comparison Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification SY Function Classification SY Classification o lt Classification Binary arithmetic expression operator unary arithmetic operator Conditional All relational expression operators that can be used expression expression Class All class conditions Other Condition name conditions condition sign cond
151. Chapter 15 Database SQL 503 Configuration of a COBOL Program with SQL The following shows the configuration of aCOBOL program with SQL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION ENVIRONMENT DIVISION DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL CONNECT END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR1 END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR1 END EXEC EXEC SQL FETCH CURI END EXEC EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR1 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT END EXEC STOP Figure 126 Configuration of a COBOL program 1 No SQL specific description 2 Declare SQLSTATE in the DECLARE section Define a host variable if necessary 3 Connect to the server 4 Declare the cursor if using one 5 Open the cursor 504 Chapter 15 Database SQL 6 Close the cursor 7 Disconnect from the server Write SQL in a COBOL program as shown in the previous figure Each SQL statement must begin with EXEC SQL SQL prefix and end with END EXEC SQL terminator The database is processed using the SQL statements written in the PROCEDURE DIVISION Operations Using Embedded SQL The following operations can be executed with embedded SQL statements Connection A client connects to a server to access a database The connection enables execution of SQL statements for accessing aserver database
152. DEF LIB IMPLIB command command 2 Module p 8 Import definition 7 Library library 1 Object file 4 Import ao file for EXE 3 Library library ee ao eee SN ger goo PS FIBCARMY LIB FIBOCIMP LIB m S C al i es TOBI i ZDEN L LIB u AEIR j hogi ll iewi J n LY Rt Be 7 T S ese eee tg a Ne 4 4 4 Yo 4 4 LINK command ae ee ee aoe DLL LST 5 DLL 6 Executable file Figure 38 Files used by the LINK command Files or libraries 1 to 6 correspond to 1 to 6 in Table 5 Files 7 and 8 are explained below e FIBCARMV LIB of 7 Arithmetic library provided by COBOL85 Always specify this library when linking COBOL programs e FIBCOWEP LIB of 7 Library provided by COBOL85 Always specify this library when building DLLs by linking COBOL programs e FI1BCCIMP LIB and LIBW LIB of 8 Run time system provided by COBOL85 and import library of Windows 3 1 Specify these files when linking COBOL programs Chapter 4 Linking Programs 105 Linker Messages This following sections describe linker messages displayed during COBOL85 operation in Windows 95 and Windows NT 32 and Windows 3 1 16 Windows 95 and Windows NT LNK1104 LNK1123 LNK1561 The following linker messages may be displayed in Windows 95 and Windows NT Explanation There is not enough space on the disk or root folder O perator response Delete files to make space Explanation An attempt was made to link Microsoft
153. DOWCLASS S1 Abnormally terminates the program Response Do the following then re execute e Confirm that the program name does not contend with another process Check whether the EXPORT statement is specified correctly in the module definition file Stop all applications that are executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary Check whether the initial file format is correct 16 JMP0093I1 U CANNOT CREATE WINDOW S1 Abnormally terminates the program Appendix F Message Lists 649 Response Do the following then re execute e Confirm that the program name does not contend with another process Check whether the stack size is large enough Stop all applications that are executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary Check whether the initial file format is correct 16 JMP0096I U RUN TIME INITIAL FILE S PATH NAME IS INVALID Abnormally terminates the program Response Check whether the path name of the initial file for execution is specified correctly JMP0097I U RUN TIME SYSTEM IS NOT INSTALLED PROPERLY FILE 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response e Confirm the file 1 is correctly installed e Confirm the run time system is correctly installed Or confirm the installation
154. Data 2 Program C i ye AN EN 1 0 aa i A data 3 EAD destination 1 lt _ Program D if TE destination 2 OPEN INPUT Fe READ destination 1 7 LOSE READ destination 2 7 CLOSE Figure 112 Outline of data transfer using the presentation file module asynchronous message communication Operating Environment To use the presentation file module use connected products to enable communication functions This section gives an example using RDB 7000 servers for Windows NT The following figure is a diagram of the operating environment using the presentation file module with the servers 436 Chapter 14 Communication Functions With Server Windows NT rServer Windows NT RDB 7000 ACM Control COBOLS5 ti run time lt l system gt Executable Executable file Message file With Client Server Windows NT Windows NT Client Windows NT Server Windows NT DB 70005 DB 7000 COBOL85 ACM Control gt run time gt system S Executable Message file kean ASS Seco N a a es aid a SS a ana a ae a Soe dia cies aia Sisie a a a Semi Figure 113 Operating environment for using the presentation file module asynchronous message communication Program Specifications This section explains the contents of a program using the presentation file module asynchronous message communication
155. Database SQL This chapter covers remote database access ODBC and explains how to write embedded SQL in a COBOL program and access a database with the ODBC driver The database SQL function accesses a database in a server from aPC dient using embedded SQL Embedded SQL is a database manipulation language written in a COBOL source program The database function enables distributed development and development of a variety of application types ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity proposed by Microsoft Corp is an application program interface for database access 502 Chapter 15 Database SQL ODBC Outline This section outlines database access with an ODBC driver from a COBOL application For an example about using the ODBC driver refer to sample program SAM PLE11 supplied with the database SQL function The ODBC driver enables access to one or more databases The following figure outlines database access using the ODBC driver Server DBNS abase Network program Server abase DBNS DBNS abase Network program Network program Network program COBOL program COBC driver MBC driver CBC driver COBOL85 Conpiler ODBC driver manager aM COBOL COBOL85 run time system E application Client Figure 125 Outline of database access using the ODBC driver
156. ED 00110 RECORD KEY IS IXDFILE RECKEY FILE STATUS IS FSDATA 00120 DATA DIVISION 00130 FILE SECTIO 00140 FD IXDFILE 00150 01 IXDFILE REC 00160 03 IXDFILE RECKEY PIC X 8 00170 03 IXDFILE DATA PIC X 20 00180 WORKING STORAGE SECTION 00190 77 IXDFILE NAME PIC X 512 00200 77 BLKFILE NAME PIC X 11 VALUE C BLKDAT 00210 77 MESSAGE AREA PIC X 512 00220 77 FSDATA PIC XX 00230 77 OPEN FSDATA PIC XX 00240 PROCEDURE DIVISION 00250 OPEN I O IXDFILE 00260 MOVE FSDATA TO OPEN FSDATA 00270 CLOSE IXDFILE 00280 EVALUATE OPEN FSDATA 00290 WHEN 00 00300 GO TO WORK START 00310 WHEN 90 00320 Fetches the file name 00330 MOVE ALL SPACE TO IXDFILE NAME 00340 DISPLAY FILEL UPON ENV NAME 00350 ACCEPT IXDFILE NAME FROM ENV VALUE 00360 Calls the indexed file recovery function 00370 CALL CFURCOV USING BY REFERENCE IXDFILE NAME 00380 BY REFERENCE BLKFILE NAME 00390 BY REFERENCE MESSAGE AREA 00400 EVALUATE TRUE 00410 WHEN PROGRAM STATUS lt 1 00420 GO TO WORK START 00430 WHEN OTHER 00440 GO TO WORK STOP 00450 END EVALUATE 00460 WHEN OTHER 00470 GO TO WORK STOP 00480 END EVALUATE 00490 WORK START 00500 OPEN I O IXDFILE 00560 CLOSE IXDFILE 00570 WORK STOP 00580 EXIT PROGRAM Appendix L Indexed File Recovery 733 Codes and Messages Table 95 Codes and messages returned by the indexed file recovery function and simple recovery function c
157. ET clause the character code system used depends on the specification of this option e STD1 ASCII EBCDIC ASCII e STD1 JIS1 EBCDIC kana e STD1 JIS2 EBCDIC lowercase letters 38 WINCOB WC 8 TAB 4 Specifies whether tabs are to be set in units of 4 columns TA B 4 or 8 columns TAB 8 Appendix A Compiler Options 607 39 WINCOB WC D D TEST directory name NOTEST To use a debugger specify TEST otherwise specify NOTEST If TEST is specified the debugging information file used with the debugger is created in the directory of the source program To create the file in another directory specify the directory name If this option is specified with OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE is displayed as the options established The program however is compiled on the assumption that NOOPTIMIZE is specified no global optimization Refer to Resources Necessary for Compilation in Chapter 3 and the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide 40 WINCOB WC TRACE n NOTRACE To use the TRACE function specify TRACE otherwise specify NOTRACE n indicates the number of the trace information items to be output Specify n with an integer 1 to 999 999 The default value is 200 If TRACE is specified processing for displaying trace information is incorporated into the object program Consequently execution performance decreases When the 608 Appendix A Compiler Options debugging function terminates speci
158. EY clause in the file control entry the primary key value first processed must be greater than the maximum primary key value in the file When DUPLICATES is specified the primary key value first processed must be equal to or greater than the maximum primary key value in the file Referencing Sequential Random and Dynamic To refer to records open the file in INPUT mode then read records with aREAD statement In sequential access specify the start position of the record to be read with aSTART statement Then start reading records from 230 Chapter 7 File Processing the specified position in ascending order of the primary or alternate key values In random access the records to be read are determined by the primary or alternate key values When OPTIONAL is specified in the SELECT clause in the file control entry the OPEN statement is successful even if the file does not exist The at end condition is satisfied with the execution of the first READ statement For information about the at end condition see Input Output Error Processing If the record with the specified key valueis not found in RANDOM or DYNAMIC access the invalid key condition is satisfied For information on the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing A START or READ statement can be executed by specifying multiple keys Updating Sequential Random and Dynamic To update records open the file in O mode then rew
159. Editing a Program Storing the Program and Quitting the Editor After creating and editing the source program store the program in afile then quit exit the editor Normally you affix the extension COB or CBL to the name of the file When using Windows 95 or Windows NT you can also use the extension COBOL Affixing the extension COB CBL or COBOL facilitates specification of the file name when compiling the program Creating Library Text You create library text fetched by the COBOL source program with COPY statements in the same manner as you create COBOL source programs However the reference format fixed variable or free for the library text does not have to be the same as the format of the COBOL source program that fetches the library text As with the COBOL source program you specify compiler options to set up the reference format for the library text However when a single program fetches several library texts the reference formats for all the library texts must be identical Normally append the extension CBL or COB to the name of the file in which the library text is to be stored When using Windows 95 or Windows NT the extension COBOL can be used Screen and form descriptors can use any method of reference format Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program 19 Program Format Each line in the COBOL source program is delimited with a line feed character in accordance with the rules governing the reference
160. FF P STAFF PROGRAM MING STAFF P STAFF provides a simple means of editing compiling linking executing debugging or maintaining programs without switching windows 6 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 COBOL85 FILE UTILITY The COBOL85 FILE UTILITY responds to utility commands without referencing the COBOL application COBOL Presentation File Module Test Function Use the presentation file module to conduct a unit test on an application to execute interactive processing when development of an application is being used with the mainframe system designated as the host GS series Note This applies only to users of the GS series WINCOB WINLINK and WINEXEC Commands The WINCOB WINLINK and WINEXEC commands activate the COBOL85 compiler linker and COBOL85 application Use these commands to enable the COBOL85 compiler linker and application to be activated from a window WINMSG Command 16 The WINMSG command opens a message file to be used with the COBOL85 error search function Only the Windows 3 1 version supports this command Simplified Inter Application Communication Simplified inter application communication provides a means for servers to exchange messages between user programs Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 7 COBOL85 Development Environment The following figure provides an overview of the COBOL85 development environment 5 DEVELOPMENT
161. IB FILELIB e Specify the directory of the file screen and form descriptors file descriptor in the environment variable FORMLIB FILELIB 32 e Store the file screen and form descriptors file descriptor in the current directory 32 When compiling from the WIN COB window the current 38 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs directory is the directory where the COBOL source program is stored e Store the file screen and form descriptors file descriptor in the same directory as the source file 16 Information Provided by the COBOL85 Compiler The COBOL85 compiler reports program compilation results as a diagnostic message The diagnostic message appears in the window when compilation terminates To store the message in a file either save the displayed message as a file or specify the compiler option PRINT before compiling Specifying the compiler option MESSAGE writes option and statistical information listings for separately compiled programs These lists indicate the compiler options and provide information on compiled programs These lists are also called compiler listings The formats of the compiler listings written when compiler option PRINT and MESSAGE specified are shown below Option Information Listing The numbers in parentheses correspond to the notes that follow these examples COBOL85 V30L10 TUE JAN 30 19 00 45 1996 0001 1 OPTIONS SPECIFIED MAIN MESSAGE TERM OPTIONS ESTABLISHED
162. IDT 1 END EXEC ACCEPT STMVAR FROM CONSOLE 2 P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL PREPARE STMIDT FROM STMVAR END EXEC ACCEPT WAREHOUSE NUMBER FROM CONSOLE EXEC SQL OPEN CUR11 USING WAREHOUSE NUMBER END EXEC P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR11 INTO PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P END EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR11 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 134 Specifying dynamic parameters 530 Chapter 15 Database SQL 1 Defines CUR11 through dynamic cursor declaration 2 Executes the ACCEPT statement to read the dynamic SELECT statement 3 Executes the PREPARE statement to correspond the statement set in the SQL statement variable STM VAR to the SQL statement identifier STMIDT 4 Reads the search condition values corresponding to dynamic parameters 5 Executes the dynamic OPEN statement to extract rows matching the search conditions from the table The values specified in the USING clause are referred to as the values of the dynamic parameters in the prepared statement The values specified in the USING clause and the dynamic parameters in the prepared statement are associated in the order they appear Executes the dynamic FETCH statement to fetch data row by row from the table and then writes the values of each column to the host variables specified in the INTO dause 7 Executes the dyna
163. ILE STATUS IS input output status 1l input output status 2 TA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD IS VARYING IN SIZE DEPENDING ON record size 01 communication record name WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 logical destination name notification area 01 processing type notification area 01 monitoring time notification area 01 priority notification area 01 input output status 1l 01 input output status 2 01 record size PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN I O file name MOVE logical destination name TO logical destination name notification area MOVE processing type TO processing type notification area MOVE monitoring time TO monitoring time notification area MOVE priority TO priority notification area WRITE communication record name READ file name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name Chapter 14 Communication Functions 435 Outline The presentation file module performs asynchronous message communication using connected product communication functions The following figure outlines data transfer through the presentation file module Program A OPEN OUTPUT WRITE destination 1 f CLOSE as A Logical t destination 1 Program B ao me Data 1 OPEN OUTPUT a WRITE destination 2 f 2 7 Logical CLOSE LJ destination 2 eee a
164. ION PROGRAM ID program name DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION O01 data name 1 01 pointer 1 POINTER 01 data name 2 02 OCCURS DEPENDING ON 01 data name 3 PIC 9 4 BINARY PROCEDURE DIVISION MOVE FUNCTION ADDR data name 1 TO pointer l MOVE FUNCTION LENG data name 2 TO data name 3 END PROGRAM program name Outline The ADDR function returns the address of a data item as a function value The LENG function returns the size of a data item or literal in bytes Program Specifications This section explains the contents for each COBOL division of a program that uses the ADDR and LENG functions ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions 427 DATA DIVISION The data names for storing functions values returned by the ADDR and LENG functions must be defined The attribute of a function value of the ADDR function is a pointer data item The attribute of a function value of the LENG function isa numeric data item PROCEDURE DIVISION The ADDR and LENG functions can be specified in such statements as the MOVE and IF statements the same as with ordinary data names Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linkage options are required Program Execution No specific environment settings are required 428 Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions Using the PERFORM Statement without an at en
165. ISION MOVE ABCDE TO PARM A LINKAGE SECTION 77 PARM B PIC X 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION USING PARM B MOVE 12345 TO PARM B returns from program B Figure 104 BY CONTENT data name in the USING phrase of the CALL statement Sharing Data By specifying the EXTERNAL clause in the data or file description entry the data area can be shared among multiple CALL B USING BY CONTENT a PARM A The contents of PARM A ABCDE remain unchanged when control 359 external programs Specifying the EXTERNAL clause gives the data or file the external attribute Data having the external attribute is external data and a file having the external attribute is an external file Note The EXTERNAL clause cannot be specified for the presentation file without OUTPUT mode Program maintainability can be improved by generating the definitions of external data or files as a COBOL library then including the data in programs with the COPY statement 360 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication rExternal program A rExternal program B SELECT EXFILE SELECT EXFILE ASSIGN TO C A DAT ASSIGN TO C A DAT ire STATUS 19 EXFS ie STATUS 19 EXFS ILE SECTION FILE SECTION 77 COPY EXFILE COPY EXFILE 7 f S Common area S k S WORKING STORAGE SECTION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 1 EXDATAO 19 EXTERNAL 01 EXDATAO 1S EXTERNAL 2 A 1
166. K SELECT datal The file name cannot be ASSIGN TO DISK specified with an absolute path name File Organization Specify SEQUENTIAL in the ORGANIZATION clause If the ORGANIZATION clause is omitted SEQUENTIAL is used as the default Chapter 7 File Processing 201 Defining Record Sequential File Records This section explains record formats lengths and organization Record Formats and Lengths Record sequential files are ether fixed or variable length The record length in the fixed length record format is the value specified in the RECORD clause or the maximum value in the record description entries if the RECORD clause is omitted In the variable length record format the length when a record is written is the length of the record The length of an output record can be set for the data name written in DEPEN DING ON data name in the RECORD clause You can obtain the record length when entering a record by using this data name Record Organization Define the attribute position and size of data in a record in record description entries 202 Chapter 7 File Processing The following are examples of record definitions A fixed length record A variable length record 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 1 to 100 bytes FD data storage file FD data storage file 01 data record RECORD IS VARYING IN SIZE 02 data 1 PIC X 100 FROM 101 TO 200 CHARACTERS 02 data 2 PIC X 100 DEPENDING ON record length data record 02 data
167. K Window Select EXE in the Type box Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name Enter the other files object file main program required for linking in the Link File list box See Entering Files Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Start linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Quit linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Chapter 4 Linking Programs 89 Creating a Library To create a library by linking object programs of multiple subprograms Activate the WINLINK Linking Files window See Activating the WINLINK Window Switch to the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window Select Building COBOL Libraries from the Commands menu Enter the COBOL library name See Entering a Target Library Name If an existing file name is entered the existing file is deleted and a new file is created Enter the other files to be included in the library in the Object File list box See Entering Files Start library building See Starting and Quitting Library Building Quit library building See Starting and Quitting Library Building Creating an Import Library WINLINK also creates an import library when it creates a DLL To create an import library Create the subprogram as a DLL Specify creation of an import library 16 For Windows 3 1 check Building Import Libraries from the command menu For Windows 95 and Windows NT the im
168. K space NSPCOM P ASP is effective for the following comparisons e National character comparison with a national item as an operand e Character comparison with a group item as an operand NSPCOMP ASP is not effective for the following comparisons e Comparison between group items that do not include any national item e Comparison between group items including an item whose attribute does not specify explicit or implicit display 600 Appendix A Compiler Options A national space is not treated as an ANK space for the following comparison even if the NSPCOMP ASP option is specified Character comparison and national character comparison done by using the INSPECT STRING or UNSTRING statement or by operating the indexed file key If NSPCOM P ASP is specified an ANK space is treated as a national space under the class condition JAPAN ESE A national space is equivalent to a 2 byte ANK space in the host code system whereas it is not in the Windows code system Thus specify NSPCOM P ASP for a COBOL program which has been used with a host to operate under this system 26 WINCOB WC NUMBER NONUMBER Specify this option to determine the value used as the line number in line information The line information identifies each line of a source program within lists generated at compile time or run time Specify NUMBER to use the value of the sequence number area of the source program specify NONUMBER to use the value generated
169. L statements are executed for the current connection To execute SQL statements for another connection use the SET CONNECTION statement to select the appropriate connection The following figure is a COBOL program that illustrates the connection to multiple servers The following example shows the selection of a connection connecting and disconnecting of these multiple servers The example has a default connection and connection to servers SV1 SV2 SV3 and SV4 as defined in the ODBC information file EXEC EXEC CONNECT TO SV1 AS CNN1 USER tanaka s END EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC SQ SQ SQ CONNECT TO SV2 AS CNN2 USER tanaka s END EXEC SQ CONNECT TO SV3 AS CNN3 USER tanaka s END EXEC SQ CONNECT TO SV4 AS CNN4 USER tanaka s END EXEC SQ SQ SQ SQ SQ So SO SO So SO Chapter 15 Database SQL 509 L CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC L L Li Li L DISCONNECT CNN4 END EXEC L SET CONNECTION CNN1 END EXEC ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC DISCONNECT CURRENT END EXEC SET CONNECTION DEFAULT END EXEC COMMIT WORK END EXEC DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC SET CONNECTION CNN2 END EXEC ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC DISCONNECT ALL END EXEC Figure 127 Example showing the connection of multiple servers selecting from them and disconnecting them 1 The default connection is enabled
170. LDB1 COBCI_READ LDB1 Message COBCI_READ LDA Lae LD2 LDB2 COBCI_WRITE LDB2 Read ikasa Wr ite COBCI_CLOSE H H COBCI_CLOSE LD Logical Destination Figure 115 Outline of simplified inter application communication Operating Procedures This section explains procedures for server and dlient operations used to execute simplified inter application communication Chapter 14 Communication Functions 451 The summary of procedures for server operation is 1 v e WN 6 Set up the operating environment Start the server Generate logical destinations Change the logical destination mode Collect logs messages are received or sent by clients display logical destination information Quit the server These steps can be performed automatically by using the definition file 452 Chapter 14 Communication Functions The details of the above steps are given below 1 Simplified inter application communication enables communication using the TCP IP protocol with the Windows socket API To use simplified inter application communication set up an environment where the Windows socket API and TCP IP protocol can be used host file setup The host name and IP address of the machine where the server operates must be defined in the host files of the machines where clients operate services file setup A service name and port number must be defined in the services files of the
171. MENT DIVISION Define a record in file and record description entries The following table lists information required to write a file description entry Chapter 8 Printing 311 Table 26 Information to be specified in a file description entry Location Information Type Details and Use of Specification Optional RECORD clause Record size Define the size of the printable area CONTROL Control record name Specify a control RECORD clause record name In arecord description entry line control and chart records can be defined For information about how to define and use line and control records see Program Specifications A record description statement defined in a chart record can be fetched from form descriptors with a COPY statement with XMDLIB specified as a library name at compile time For details on the record description statement to be expanded see Program Specifications PROCEDURE DIVISION Execute an input output statement in the following sequence 1 OPEN statement with OUTPUT specified Starts printing 2 WRITE statement Writes data 3 CLOSE statement Stops printing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Use an OPEN statement once at the start of printing and a CLOSE statement once at the end of printing WRITE Statement In aWRITE statement the line record control record and chart record can be output The output of these records makes page 1 either a fixed form page or an irregular form page In
172. MP 5 VALUE 0 00230 77 MESSAGE NON PIC S9 9 COMP 5 VALUE 0 00240 77 FSDATA PIC XxX 00250 77 OPEN FSDATA PIC XX 00260 PROCEDURE DIVISION 00270 OPEN I O IXDFILE 00280 MOVE FSDATA TO OPEN FSDATA 00290 CLOSE IXDFILE 00300 EVALUATE OPEN FSDATA 00310 WHEN 00 00320 GO TO WORK START 00330 WHEN 90 00340 Fetches the file name 00350 MOVE ALL SPACE TO IXDFILE NAME 00360 DISPLAY FILEL UPON ENV NAME 00370 ACCEPT IXDFILE NAME FROM ENV VALUE 00380 Calls the indexed file recovery function 00390 CALL CFURCOV USING BY REFERENCE IXDFILE NAME 00400 BY VALUE BLKFILE NON 00410 BY VALUE MESSAGE NON 00420 EVALUATE TRUE 00430 WHEN PROGRAM STATUS lt 1 00440 GO TO WORK START 00450 WHEN OTHER 00460 GO TO WORK STOP 00470 END EVALUATE 00480 WHEN OTHER 00490 GO TO WORK STOP 00500 END EVALUATE 00510 WORK START 00520 OPEN I O IXDFILE 00580 CLOSE IXDFILE 00590 WORK STOP 00600 EXIT PROGRAM 732 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery The following example calls the indexed file recovery function when a file for storing unrecoverable data and a message are necessary 00010 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 00020 PROGRAM ID WORK2 00030 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION 00040 CONFIGURATION SECTION 00050 SPECIAL NAMES 00060 ENVIRONMENT NAME ENV NAME 00070 ENVIRONMENT VALUE ENV VALUE 00080 INPUT OUTPUT SECTION 00090 FILE CONTROL 00100 SELECT IXDFILE ASSIGN TO FILE1 ORGANIZATION IS INDEX
173. MP LIB e LIBC LIB e KERNEL32 LIB e USER32 LIB Some examples of how to use the LINK command follow LIB Command 32 In Windows 95 and Windows NT the LIB command performs the creation of standard libraries and import libraries Refer to LIB Command in Appendix J for details of the format of the command Examples of Using the LINK and LIB commands 32 Some examples of using the LINK command and the LIB command are shown here When Linking an Object Program LINK A OBJ F3BICIMP LIB LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB USER32 LIB OUT A EXE Chapter 4 Linking Programs 103 When Creating a DLL To create an export file LIB DEF SUB DEF OUT SUB LIB MACHINE IX86 SUB OBJ To create a DLL LINK SUB OBJ SUB EXP F3BICIMP LIB LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB USER32 LIB DLL OUT SUB DLL When Creating an Executable Program with a Dynamic Link Structure To create an import library LIB DEF BBB DEF OUT BBB LIB MACHINE IX86 BBB OBJ To create a DLL LINK BBB OBJ BBB EXP F3BICIMP LIB LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB USER32 LIB DLL OUT BBB DLL To create an executable program LINK AAA OBJ F3BICIMP LIB LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB USER32 LIB BBB LIB OUT AAA EXE LINK Command 16 Windows 3 1 provides the LINK LIB and IMPLIB commands for linking 104 Chapter 4 Linking Programs 1 Object file 2 Module definition subprogram file for DLL is las oda ji OET a OBJ
174. Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows NT COBOL85 User s Guide 3 0 Co FUJITSU Third Edition March 1997 The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Fujitsu Limited 1997 Fujitsu Limited All Rights Reserved Preface COBOL85 allows you to create execute and debug COBOL programs with Microsoft Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 This manual describes the functions and operations of COBOL85 but does not detail COBOL syntax Refer to the COBOL85 Reference M anual for details on COBOL syntax Throughout this manual Windows 95 and Windows NT specific items are denoted with 32 Windows 3 1 specific items are denoted with 16 Audience This manual is for users who develop COBOL programs using COBOL85 This manual assumes users possess basic knowledge of COBOL 85 and are familiar with the appropriate Windows platform COBOL85 User s Guide iii How this Manual is Organized This manual consists of the following chapters and appendixes Chapter The operating environment and functions of COBOL85 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Writing a COBOL program em ee eee Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Compiling COBOL programs Chapter 4 Linking Programs Linking COBOL programs Chapter
175. N PROGRAMAID progmro rame ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECLAL NAMES CURSOR IS datanarre 1 CRTSTATUSIS data name 2 DATA DIVISION W ORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 data name 1 data name 1 contents O2line number PIC 9 3 O2colurareraurober PIC 9 3 01 data narme 2 data name 2 contents O2 status hey 1 PIC 9 02 status hey 2 PIC 9 o2 PIC X SCREEN SECTION O1 screeritere 1 PROCEDURE DIVISION DISPLAY scmen itera 1 ACCEPT screeritere1 ON EXCEPTION END PROGRAM program nare Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens The screen handling function displays a screen with a DISPLAY statement and inputs data from a screen with an ACCEPT statement The screen layout is defined in a screen data description entry in the SCREEN section in the DATA DIVISION A screen item defined in the SCREEN section is arranged on the screen with the line and column numbers IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAN 1D SAMPLE DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 number 1 PIC X 6 SCREEN SECTION 01 screen item 1 BLANK SCREEN 2 VALUE X Employee No 2 sereen item LINE 10 COLUNN 30 PIC X 6 USING number 1 AUTO coe DIVISION yeLine 10 LINE 10 COLUNN 10 yeColumn 10 l veColumn 30 Seredn 2 SAPLE gigs i eG digit alphanumeric character DISPLAY screen item l i ACCEPT screen item 1 1 MOVE number 1 TO Figure 1
176. ND EXEC ESCA PE EXCEPT EXCEPTION EXEC EXECUTE EXISTS EXTERNAL EXTRACT IF FALSE FETCH FIRST FLOAT FOR FOREIGN FORTRAN FOUND FROM FULL G GET GLOBAL GO GOTO GRANT GROUP H HAVING HOUR I IDENTITY IGNORE IMMEDIATE IN INCLUDE INDEX INDICATOR INITIALLY INNER INPUT INSENSITIVE INSERT INTEGER INTERSECT INTERVAL INTO IS ISOLATION Ul JOIN K KEY IL LANGUAGE LAST LEFT LENGTH LEVEL LIKE LIST LOCAL LOWER M MATCH MAX MIN MINUTE MODULE MONTH MUMPS N NAME NAMES NATIONAL NCHAR NEXT NONE NOT NULL NULLABLE NULLIF NUMERIC 0 OCTET LENGTH OF OFF ON ONLY OPEN OPTION OR ORDER OUTER OUTPUT OVERLAPS P PARTIAL PASCAL PLI POSITION PRECISION PREPARE PRESERVE PREVIOUS PRIMARY PRIOR PRIVILEGES PROCEDURE PUBLIC R RELATIVE RESTRICT REVOKE RIGHT ROLLBACK ROWS S SCALE SCHEMA SCROLL SECOND SECTION SELECT SEQUENCE SET SIZE SMALLINT SOME SQL SQLCA SQLCODE SQLERROR SQLSTATE SQLWARNING START SUBSTRING Chapter 15 Database SQL 547 SUM SYSTEM IT TABLE TEMPORARY THEN TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE_HOUR TIMEZONE_MINUTE TO TRANSACTION TRANSLATE TRANSLATION TRUE TYPE U UNION UNIQUE UNKNOWN UPDATE UPPER USAGE USER USING V VALUE VALUES VARCHAR VARIABLES VARYING VIEW w WHEN WHENEVER WH ERE WITH WORK Y YEAR 548 Chapter 15 Database SQL Correspondence Between ODBC Hand
177. NPUT or I O mode 48 The WRITE statement was executed for a file not opened in OUTPUT EXTEND sequential relative or indexed or I O relative or indexed mode 49 The REWRITE or DELETE statement was executed for a file not opened in I O mode 616 Appendix B I O Status List Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification 1 O Detailed Status Information Value Other errors These errors are other than those previously classified The following conditions are assumed 1 File information is incomplete or invalid 2 During OPEN or CLOSE statement execution an error occurred ina OPEN or CLOSE function 3 An attempt was made to execute an input output statement for a file where the CLOSE statement was unsuccessful due to input output status value 90 4 Resources such as main storage are unavailable 5 An attempt was made to execute the OPEN statement for a file not closed correctly 6 An attempt was made to write records after an error occurred due to overflow writing 7 An attempt was made to write records after a no space condition occurred 8 An invalid character is contained in a text file record 9 Some characters cannot be interpreted from a native code to the code set 10 The lock table is full 11 An error other than the above occurred This is the only information about input output operations where the error occurred 12 A system error occurred 91 No file is assigned At OPEN statement execu
178. OBOL85 FILE UTILITY Start the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY as follows Windows 95 and Windows NT Select COBFUT32 File Utility from the P STAFF Tools menu Execute COBFUT32 EXE Windows 3 1 Execute COBFUTY EXE Select an execution command from the P STAFF Utilities menu Select an execution command from the directory window of File Manager Set up an icon for the command and activate the command by double clicking on the icon Select Run from the Program M anager or File M anager menus then specify the program and parameters to run 248 Chapter 7 File Processing Selecting Commands Select the command to be executed from the Command pulldown menu on the menu bar Selecting the command displays a dialog box used to execute each command For details of each function see COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Functions Browse Print Edit Extend Sort Attribute Recovery Reorganize Copy Delete Move Figure 71 The COBOL85 FILE UTILITY window The COBOL85 FILE UTILITY contains the following commands Convert Create anew COBOL record sequential file in variable length format with data generated by text editors as input You can also convert the COBOL file back to a text file Chapter 7 File Processing 249 Load Convert COBOL file organization to another kind of file organization using a record sequential file in variable length record format as input In addition all variabl
179. ODUCT NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 01 PRODUCT NAME PIC X 20 01 QUANTITY IN STOCK PIC S9 9 COMP 5 01 WAREHOUSE NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P END END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR1 CURSOR FOR SELECT FROM STOCK END EXEC P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR1 END EXEC P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR1 INTO PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK WAREHOUSE NUMBER END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P END EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR1 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 128 Retrieving data from all rows Chapter 15 Database SQL 515 1 Specifies an embedded SQL DECLARE section in the WORKIN G STORAGE section and defines the data input areas all columns of the STOCK table as host variables Refer to the COBOL85 Reference M anual for the host variable declaration rules S Operation for an exception event can be specified by specifying the embedded SQL exception declaration The example specifies NOT FOUND as a condition Therefore the exception declaration is effective if no data is shown as the SQLSTATE value The example specifies executing P EN D procedure when there is no row fetched by the FETCH statement in 6 Operation for an exception event can also be specified by checking SQLSTATE with a COBOL
180. ON conversation information notification region P message kind notification region P logical destination notification region 1 P logical destination notification region 2 P 5 x x XX Her transmission right information notification reg reason code notification region P input output status 1 input output status 2 size of record PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN I O file name MOVE conversation information TO conversation information notification region message kind TO message kind notification region logical destination 1 O00000000W Oe NM U o om e GEA Fa aaa OXXX MOVE MOVE MOVE MOVE MOVE WRITE READ CLOSE Chapter 14 Communication Functions 443 TO logical destination notification region 1 logical destination 2 TO logical destination notification region 2 transmission right information TO transmission right information notification region reason code TO reason code notification region communication record name file name file name END PROGRAM program name Outline The presentation file module performs synchronous communication programs using the synchronous communication programs of IDCM The following figure outlines data transfer through the use of IDCM 444 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Windows 95 indows NT 0630 COBOL85 COBOL85 COBOL85 run time system ru
181. OVE key value TO key name OPEN INPUT file name MOVE key value TO key name START file name READ file name READ file name NEXT CLOSE file name CLOSE file name Procedure for file updating Procedure for file updating random access sequential access OPEN LO file name OPEN I O file name MOVE key value TO key name READ file name Editing records REWRITE record name CLOSE file name MOVE key value TO key name START file name READ file name NEXT Editing records REWRITE record name CLOSE file name Procedure for file deletion random access Procedure for file deletion sequential access OPEN L O file name MOVE key value TO key name OPEN I O file name DELETE file name MOVE key value TO key name CLOSE file name START file name READ file name NEXT DELETE record name CLOSE file name Procedure for file insertion random access OPEN I O file name Editing records MOVE key value TO key name WRITE record name CLOSE file name 228 Chapter 7 File Processing Processing Outline Creating Sequential Random and Dynamic To create an indexed file open a file in the OUTPUT mode and write records to the file with a WRITE statement If an attempt is made to create a file that already exists the file is recreated and the original file is lost Before writing a record the prima
182. P 5 Specification of the CALL statement CALL JMPBGWDH WITH C LINKAGE USING data name 1 data name 2 Interface For data name 1 specify the file identifier of the presentation file for receiving the window handle For data name 2 specify the area for storing the window handle received by the subroutine 748 Appendix N COBOL Supported Subroutine The presentation file specified for data name 1 must be specified for DSP in the SYMBOLIC DESTINATION clause and be opened Message A message is written if e Thefileis not the presentation file e The file does not exist Return Codes Special register PROGRAM STATUS is used to receive return codes from the subroutine e Return code 0 The window handle was received normally e Return code 1 The window handle could not be received Notes This subroutine cannot be used under AP EFW or with the presentation file module test function 16 The fileidentifier specified for data name 1 must correspond to a single file in therun unit If the file identifier is associated with multiple files the execution result is not guaranteed When the DLOAD option is specified at compilation of the COBOL program that calls this subroutine the following entry information must be specified as shown below 16 32 program name EN TRY program name EN TRY JMPBGWDH F1BCILNG DLL JMPBGWDH F3BIILNG DLL Appendix N COBOL Supported Subroutine 749 Refer to Entry Informat
183. P COMP 5 MSGLEN P COMP 5 MSGTYPE COMP 5 WAITTIME COMP 54 UNUSED VALUE LOW VALUE 01 BUFFER REC 01 UNUSED REC COMP 5 VALUE 0 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL COBCI_READ WITH C LINKAGE USING BY REFERENCE STATUS REC BY VALUE SERVERHD REC BY REFERENCE LDNAME REC BY REFERENCE RECEIVETYPE REC REFERENCE BUFFER REC VALUE UNUSED REC Parameters STATUS REC An error code is returned to ERRORCD a detail code is returned to DETAIL SERVERH D REC Specify the server identifier returned at calling of the COBCI_OPEN function Chapter 14 Communication Functions 487 LDNAME REC Specify the name of the client logical destination from where messages are to be read If the logical destination name is shorter than eight bytes the remaining bytes must be padded with spaces The logical destination name is specified in the Client Definition dialog box RECEIVETYPE REC For BUFFERLEN specify the length of the record area for receiving messages Up to 32 000 bytes can be specified for BUFFERLEN The length of a message read from the logical destination is returned as MSGLEN Specify a processing type for MSGTYPE The following text explains processing types e Queuing not specified Specify 0 for MSGTYPE Consequently if the system cannot read a message because no message was found at the logical destination the system returns control immediately The system returns an error code indicating that there is no message
184. PIC X 20 01 QUANTITY IN STOCK PIC 89 9 COMP 5 01 WAREHOUSE NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 NEXTFLAG PIC X 4 VALUE SPACE PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR9 CURSOR FOR SELECT FROM STOCK END EXEC EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P NEXT END EXEC P START EXEC SQL CONNECT TO SV1 AS CNN1 USER summer w43 END EXEC EXEC SQL CONNECT TO SV2 AS CNN2 USER tanaka sky END EXEC P CNN2 1 EXEC SQL OPEN CUR9 END EXEC GO TO P LOOP P NEXT IF NEXTFLAG NEXT THEN GO TO P CNN1 2 END IF Figure 136 Operating a cursor with more than one connection 534 Chapter 15 Database SQL P CNN1 1 EXEC SQL SET CONNECTION CNN1 END EXEC EXEC SQL INSERT INTO STOCK VALUES PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK WAREHOUSE NUMBER END EXEC EXEC SQL OPEN CUR9 END EXEC MOVE NEXT TO NEXTFLAG GO TO P LOOP P CNN1 2 EXEC SQL CLOSE CUR9 END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT CNN1 END EXEC P CNN2 2 EXEC SQ EXEC SQ EXEC SQ EXEC SQ P END STOP RUN P LOOP EXEC SQL FETCH CUR9 INTO PRODUCT NUMBER PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK WAREHOUSE NUMBER END EXEC SET CONNECTION CNN2 END EXEC CLOSE CUR9 END EXEC ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC DISCONNECT CURRENT END EXEC Li Li Li Li GO TO P LOOP Figure 136 Operating a cursor with more than one connection cont 1 Defines the
185. PTIMIZE For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options and Appendix C Global Optimization i filename If acompiler option is specified in an option file storing character strings as compiler options specify the name of the option file An option file can be created by selecting items from the list box using the WIN COB command The following example shows the WIN COB command specification format for creating an option file Appendix J Command Formats 711 WINCOB i path name of option file A directory name 16 Specify the directory of the SUBSCHEMA definition file which is specified in the SUBSCHEMA NAME paragraph If a SUBSCHEMA definition file exists in more than one directory specify the A option more than once The directories are searched for in the order they were specified Note The A option functions the same as compiler option AIMLIB For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options WC compiler option Specify a compiler option for the COBOL85 compiler For compiler options and their specification formats refer to Appendix A Compiler Options More than one compiler option can be specified The specified compiler options must be separated by a comma If the same compiler option is specified more than once the compiler option specified last is effective The priority level of compiler instructions is as follows e Compiler option specified
186. Program Description SD Functions Chapter 14 Communication Functions This chapter explains the presentation file module asynchronous message communication synchronous communication programs and simplified inter application communication functions provided for message communication from COBOL programs 432 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Communication Types This section explains the features and usage of the three functions provided for message communication from COBOL programs e Presentation file module asynchronous message communication e Presentation file module synchronous communication programs e Simplified inter application communication function Table 48 Differences between the presentation file module and simplified inter application communication function Communication function Communication mode Presentation File Asynchronous message communication Client Windows 3 1 Windows NT Server A Windows NT DS90 K series Synchronous communication programs Cooperate Windows 95 Windows NT DS90 HP B S family GS series SURE system B Simplified Inter application Asynchronous message communication Client Windows 95 Windows 3 1 Windows NT DS90 HP Server A Windows 95 Windows NT DS90 HP Chapter 14 Communication Functions 433 Table 48 Differences between the presentation file module and simplified inter application communication fun
187. QUALS FLAGCI gt AIN MESSAGE NCWCSTD gt NONUMBER OBJECT NOOPT IMI ZE OFLAGSW QUOTE LANGLUL lt 85 gt RSUCALL gt DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE CTEST 1 gt EST COB 4 JMN25 3I S USER WORD STATISTICS FILE NAME TEST Cco DATE AND TIME SOURCE STATEMENTS PROGRAM SIZECCODE gt CONTROL LEVEL CPU TIME HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE LINECOUNT lt 60 gt ee eee NS PCOMP lt NS P gt COB MON NOU 18 13 27 Command Prompt M WC MESSAGE TEST COB SDS NOSOURCE SRFCUAR UAR gt SSINCSYSIND SSOUTCSYSOUT gt STD1 lt JIS2 gt TABC8 gt NOTEST NOTRACE NOT RUNC ZWB A IS UNDEFINED N m k Oo n 5 RECORDS BYTES 1 LEVEL 79 SECONDS Figure 27 Listings when the compiler option MESSAGE is specified Differences in Compilation Run from WINCOB Compilation operations run by COBOL32 command differ from compilation operations run from WIN COB in the following ways e No compile progress screen is displayed when compilation is run from COBOL32 commands e To interrupt compilation fol commands low the same method as for DOS Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 65 Return Codes for COBOL32 Commands The return codes for COBOL32 commands are set according to the highest severity code when the program is compiled The relation between the highest severity code and the return code is shown below Highest Severity Return Code Code 66 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Chapter 4
188. RAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name specify the name of screen descriptors during screen input output GROUP clause Data name Specify a data name defined as an amp byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this specify the item group name to be input or output Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 335 Table 33 Information to be specified in a file control entry cont Type Optional SYMBOLIC output Specify DSP This clause can be omitted DESTINATION destination since DSP is the default value of this clause Clause FILE STATUS Data name Specify a data name defined as a 2 byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section The execution results of input output processing are set in this data name For value to be set see Appendix B I O Status List For detail information specify a 4 byte alphanumeric data item PROCESSING Data name Specify a data name defined as a 2 byte MODE clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section The processing class of screen input output processing is set in this dataname See Table 34 SELECTED Data name Specify a data name defined as a 4 byte FUNCTION alphanumeric data item in the WORKING clause STORAGE or LINKAGE section The attention information returned upon READ statement completion is set in this data name See Table 35 UNIT Data name Specify a data name
189. RAM B Figure 89 Data sent to a printer specified in the initialization file 290 Chapter 8 Printing When a File Identifier Literal is Specified in the ASSIGN Clause Data is sent to a printer specified in the file identifier literal or to a printer connected to a local or serial port specified in the file identifier literal When a printer name is specifed 32 IDENTIFICATION DIVI PROGRAM ID ENVIRO FILE CONTROL SELECT print fils ASSIGN TO PRINAME Canon LBP A40E Canon LBP A40E WRITE outree AFTER ADVANCING 2 CLOSE print file Data is sent a specified printer FILE CONTROL SELECT pring file ASSIGN TO COML COM1 N OUTPUT prcint file WRITE outrec AFTER ADVANCING CLOSE print file END PROGRAM C Data is sent to a printer o local port Figure 90 Data sent to a printer specified in the file identifier literal Chapter 8 Printing 291 When a Data Name is Specified in the ASSIGN Clause Data is sent to a printer specified in the data name or to a printer connected to a local or serial port specified in the data name A file assignment error occurs if the data name is left blank When a printer name is specified SELECT print oe sical TO PRTNAME NMSVR2ZO0 EMLBE 400DPI1 TO data name l OPEN OUTPUT print file E gutrec AFTER ADVANCING 2 CLOSE Bhs nh Lile Data is sent to a specified print When a local port name is
190. RECORD KEY Clauses Appendix F Message Lists 657 Table 78 Character strings written for JMP0310I I U 3 2 cont Error Contents KEY ESDS A sequential file was not Data specified in the allocated when specified ORGANIZATION clause KEY KSDS An indexed file was not allocated when specified KEY RRDS A relative file was not allocated when specified KEY TEXT A text file was not allocated as a print file JMP0311I I U MISSING ALLOCATION FILE 1 2 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Response Allocate the file 1 if necessary or specify the file correctly then re execute The error address is written for 2 JMP0313I I U INSUFFICIENT STORAGE AVAILABLE STM 1 FILE 2 3 Discontinues error file processing then continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity code is determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified 658 Appendix F Message Lists Response Do the following then re execute e Stop any other applications that are executing at the same time e Confirm the size of real storage and increas
191. RGE Statements Sort Merge Function 411 Types of Sort Processing The following four types of sort processing are possible 1 All records in the input file are sorted in ascending or descending order then are written to the output file Input file Output file 2 All records in the input file are sorted in ascending or descending order then are handled as output data Input file Output records 3 Specific records or data items are sorted in ascending or descending order then are written to the output file Input record Output file 4 Specific records or data items are sorted in ascending or descending order and are handled as output data Input record Output record When sorting records in the input file file to sort without changing their contents sort processing type 1 or 2 is normally used When an input file is not used or the contents of a record is changed sort processing type 3 or 4 is used When writing sorted records to the output file without processing the contents of each record sort processing type 1 or 3 is used When the output file is not used or the contents of each record is changed sort processing type 2 or 4 is used Program Specifications This section explains the contents of a program that sorts records for each COBOL division 412 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function ENVIRONMENT DIVISION The following files must be defined e Sort merge file A wor
192. ROGRAM program name Outline During program execution the values of environment variables can be referred to and updated To obtain the number of arguments use an ACCEPT statement for which amnemonic name corresponding to function name ARGUMENT NUMBER is Specified To refer to an argument value usea DISPLAY statement for which a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ARGUMENT NUMBER is specified and an ACCEPT statement for which amnemonic name corresponding to function name ARGUMENT VALUE is specified 400 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements A character string delimited with spaces or quotation marks is counted as one argument The following is an example of an input command SAMPLE M HORIUCHI 901234 SHIZUOKA Program Specifications This section explains program descriptions for each COBOL division when command line argument handling function are used ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Associate the following function names with mnemonic names e ARGUMENT NUMBER e ARGUMENT VALUE ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECIAL NAMES ARGUMENT NUMBER IS mnemonic name 1 ARGUMENT VALUE IS mnemonic name 2 DATA DIVISION Define data items to deliver values Table 44 Counts and values of arguments Contents Cs Attribute Number of arguments Unsigned integer item Argument position not required if Unsigned integer item specified with a literal Argument value Fixed length group ite
193. ROR PROCEDURE ON file l MOVE error occurrence TO file status END DECLARATIVES OPEN open mode file 1l IF file status error occurrence THEN GO TO open error processing If a file could not be opened error procedures MOVE statement of 1 are executed and control is passed to the statement IF statement of 2 immediately after the OPEN statement Input Output Error Execution Results The execution result when an input output error occurs depends on whether the AT END specification INVALID KEY specification FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are written The following table lists execution results when input output errors occur 236 Chapter 7 File Processing Error type ATEND condition or INVALID KEY condition Detected by using an executed input output statement with AT END or INVALID KEY specified Detected by using an executed input output statement without AT END or INVALID KEY specified Other input output errors With error procedures With the FILE STATUS dause Table 19 Execution results when input output errors occur Without error procedures With the FILE STATUS dause Without the FILE STATUS dause The statement written for the AT END or INVALID KEY specification is executed Error procedures are executed immediately after the input output statement in which an error occurred File Processing The statement immediately following an input output stateme
194. T Forms dialog box For example Specification of SIZE field on control record ABC Environment variable name after xxx is substituted PRN_FormName_ABC Association of environment variable name and paper size PRN_FormName ABC Letter 8 12x 11 in 24 DefaultFCB_Name Specification of default FCB name DefaultFCB_Name Default FCB name 142 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Specify the default FCB name to be used when the FCB name is set to spaces in the control record The example below demonstrates setting the default FCB name to 6LPI which has a line interval of 6 lines per inch 66 lines per page starts printing at line 1 and is 11 inches long The default FCB name in this example is FCB6LPI For example DefaultFCB_Name FCB6LPI FCB6LPI LPI 6 66 CH1 1 SIZE 110 FCB8LPI LPI 8 88 CH1 1 SIZE 110 FCBA4LD LPI 12 CH1 1 FORM A4 LAND 1 Other FCB names are accessed by using the FCB field in the control record Refer to Using Print File 2 in Chapter 8 for additional details 25 CBR_PrinterANK_Size Specification of ANK character size 32 TYPE M CBR_PrinterANK_Size TYPE PC TYPE G Specify the ANK character size in the cases where the following are NOT defined in the program e CHARACTER TYPE phrase e PRINTING POSITION phrase e print file FORMAT clause Settings are e TYPE M Default ANK character size is brought close to the size in the GS series Print size is 9
195. TE statement to perform the same processing as shown in previous figure The UPDATE statement used is specified at execution EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 STMVAR PIC X 254 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION ACCEPT STMVAR FROM CONSOLE EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL EXECUTE IMMEDIATE STMVAR END EXEC EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC STOP RUN Figure 133 Dynamically determining SQL statements 2 1 Executes the ACCEPT statement to read the UPDATE statement then writes the read data to SQL statement variable STMVAR 2 The EXECUTE IMMEDIATE statement directly executes the SQL statements written to the SQL statement variable Chapter 15 Database SQL 529 Specifying Dynamic Parameters The following a COBOL program which illustrated the specification of dynamic parameters and retrieving data from the STOCK table The example processes the SELECT statement at execution SELECT GNO GOODS FROM STOCK WHERE WHNO EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PRODUCT NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 PRODUCT NAME PIC X 20 QUANTITY IN STOCK BIC 89 9 COMP 5 WAREHOUSE NUMBER PIC S9 4 COMP 5 STMVAR PIC X 254 SOQLSTATE PIC X 5 SQLMSG PIC X 254 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION EXEC SQL WHENEVER NOT FOUND GO TO P END END EXEC EXEC SQL DECLARE CUR11 CURSOR FOR STM
196. TION clause correctly then re execute The file name or access name is written for 1 JMP0364I U CLAUSE 1 ERROR FILE 2 Abnormally terminates the program Response Specify the correct data item in the 1 clause then re execute The file name or access name is written for 2 JMP0365I U DUPLICATE FONT NAMES WERE FOUND Moats Abnormally terminates the program Response Multiple fonts indicated by 1 were installed Use the control panel font application to delete unnecessary fonts then re execute Ensure that 668 Appendix F Message Lists Windows 95 Print True Type as Graphic is checked in the printer Properties dialog box Windows 3 1 e Thesame font type is not specified for the WIN INI fonts section and WIFEMAN INI FontPackages section Mincho Gothic or Courier is generally used as the device font of the printer None of the above three fonts is specified for the WIN INI fonts section and WIFEMAN INI FontPackages section JMP0370I U INSUFFICIENT STORAGE AVAILABLE TO PERFORM SQL Abnormally terminates the program Response Do the following then re execute e Stop all applications that are executing at the same time e Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary e Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary JMP03711I U ENVIRONMENT INFORMATION FILE ERROR TO PERFORM SQL ety Abnormally terminates the program Response Specify data in
197. The Details Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed Since there are no more options to be added click on the Cancel button The Add Compiler Options dialog box closes The Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed Option File OK CAFSC PCOBOLS2 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 DEFAULT CBI Cancel Compiler Options Help Change Delete ite Library Names Other Compiler Options E Figure 7 The Compiler Options dialog box with MAIN specified Verify that MAIN appears in the Compiler Options list box of the Compiler Options dialog box then click on the OK button The Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 27 Compiler Options dialog box closes and the WIN COB window is displayed Click on the Compile button in the WIN COB window Compilation starts and a window showing compilation progress is displayed COBOL Samplel cob SAMPLE1 r Quit Figure 8 The compilation progress dialog box 28 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Compilation ends Compiler messages are displayed in the P STAFF window PROGRAMMING STAFF File Edit Search Project Tools Window Help 7 Message STATISTICS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE I PROGRAM UNIT 1 Figure 9 The PROGRAMMING STAFF window Verify that compilation completed normally and then click on the Cancel button in the WIN COB window The WIN COB window closes Click on Exit in the File menu to close the P STAFF window Compilation of the sample prog
198. VANCING CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program nam e Chapter 8 Printing 293 Outline Use a control record to employ a form overlay pattern with a print file As with ordinary data a control record is created with a WRITE statement If a control record is created with a form overlay pattern name specified the data and form overlay pattern are overlaid on the subsequent page The size font form direction and space of a print character are defined with a COBOL program and form overlay pattern For character settings see Print Characters and also refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual WRITE controL record Employee list WRITE Line record Number Name 10101 John Sith 101091 John Snith 1010 Margaret Hlan 1002 Margaret Wilsm Form overlay pattern KOL5SNREC Employee list Data is overlaid Naber Name Figure 92 Defining print characters Program Specifications This section details program descriptions in COBOL divisions when forms are printed with form overlay patterns 294 Chapter 8 Printing ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Inthe ENVIRONMENT DIVISION write the relation between the function name and mnemonic name and define a print file Relating the Function Name to the Mnemonic Name To enter acontrol record to the function name CTL relate the mnemonic name Specify this mnemonic name in the WRITE statement when creating the control record
199. Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 Module Definition File 32 The module definition file is required to create the import library To create the module definition file templates 1 Select Create M odule Definition Files from the Project menu in the P STAFF window 186 Chapter 6 Project Management Function 2 Build or rebuild the project A module definition file having the DLL name DEF is created in the same folder as DLL and is added to the project file Assign the name target name DEF to module definition files The EXPORTS module definition statement in the DLL is automatically set with the file name of the source file and object file depending on the target excluding their extension If the program identifier differs from the file name modify the value of EXPORTS Module Definition File 16 The module definition file used under Windows 3 1 is required for linking The template for a module definition file can be created when using the project To create the module definition file 1 Select Create M odule Definition Files from the Project menu in the P STAFF window 2 Select Template of Module Definition File from the Project menu in the P STAFF window 3 Select the target as EXE or DLL A dialog for creating templates appears Set the required information Build or rebuild the project A module definition file containing the contents specified in Step 4 and with a target name DEF is added to the pro
200. Windows operating system Version 3 1 objects with the 32 bit linker O perator response Use 32 bit Objects Explanation An attempt was made to create an executable program EXE by compiling the main program without the compiler option MAIN O perator response Specify the compiler option MAIN before compiling the main program 106 Chapter 4 Linking Programs LNK2001 LNK2005 LNK4006 Explanation Nointernal name of the export routine is defined in the EXPORTS definitions in the module definition file No internal name of the export routine is set in the library or object file O perator response Make sure that the export name in the EXPORTS statement of the module definition file is set in the library or object file Explanation Tried to make a single executable file from two or more programs compiled with the MAIN option O perator response Specify only the MAIN compiler option for the main program Explanation EXPORTS is duplicated in the module definition file Theinternal name of existent data was found in the library or object file O perator response M ake sure that the export name in the EXPORTS statement of the module definition file is duplicated in the library or object file Chapter 4 Linking Programs 107 Linker Messages 16 L1052 L1081 L1082 L1101 The following linker messages may be displayed in Windows 3 1 Explanation Too many libraries were linked O pe
201. _APL CBR_PSFILE_DSP a Figure 52 The COBOL Environment Variables Keywords dialog box 2 Select the environment variable to add from the list box then click on the Selection button The selected information is displayed in the Environment Variables Information edit box 3 Complete the information required by the environment variable 4 Click on the Set button The changed information is added to the Environment Variables Information list box 160 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Changing Environment Variable Information To change the environment variable information or environment variables displayed in the Environment Variables Information list box 1 Select the environment variable information or environment variables to change from the list box The selected information is displayed in the Environment Variables Information edit box Change the contents 3 Click on the Set button The changed environment variable information or environment variables are displayed in the Environment Variables Information list box Deleting Environment Variable Information To delete environment variable information or environment variables from the Environment Variables Information list box 1 Select the environment variable information or environment variables to delete from the list box 2 Click on the Delete button The selected environment variable information or environment variables are deleted from the list box Sett
202. a COBOL program The client was disconnected To resume from the server communication restart operation from connection ate OPEN with the supported in Windows Windows Socket V1 1 Sockets V1 1 3844 The client was forci ae Re eS ae saersegnerce 1 higher detected systems engineer SE 498 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 56 Windows Sockets function error codes Description in WINSOCK H Error Explanation Code WSAEMFILE A new socket identifier cannot be generated because all permitted socket identifiers are in use Quit unnecessary communication connections then re execute processing WSAENOTSOCK 10038 Data other than socket identifiers is specified in the socket function WSAEPROTONOSUPPORT 10043 The specified protocol is not supported Check whether the TCP IP operating environment is set up correctly WSAESOCKTNOSUPPORT 10044 The specified socket type is not supported by this address family Check whether the TCP IP operating environment is set up correctly WSAEAFNOSUPPORT 10047 The specified address family is not supported Check whether the TCP IP operating environment is set up correctly WASEADDRNOTAVAIL The client could not be connected with the server Check whether the remote machine name specified in the client definition fileis defined in the hosts file correctly WSAENETDOWN 10050 The network subsystem failed Activate the network WSAENETUNREACH The host wh
203. a fixed form page the layout and chart record are defined by form 312 Chapter 8 Printing descriptors and the line record can be printed The irregular form page is not defined by form descriptors therefore only the line record can be printed because it acts in the same manner as the print FORMAT phrase none file When the chart record and the line record exist together on a fixed form page the form descriptors defining the chart record should be set in the CONTROL RECORD phrase of the file description paragraph When the control record has a blank immediately after the execution of an OPEN statement and the form descriptor name is output the page becomes an irregular form page In order to become a fixed form page the form descriptors defining the chart record should be set in the FORMAT phrase of the file control description paragraph The fixed or irregular form of these pages is maintained on subsequent pages as long as a WRITE statement changing the form of the page is not executed Pages can be changed if new form descriptors are added In this instance AFTER ADVANCING is specified for a WRITE statement immediately after the output of the control record See Program Specifications for the ADVANCING specification of a WRITE statement When executing a WRITE statement without the AFTER ADVANCING PAGE phrase the first print line is not validated In this case printing is started from the first printable line of the
204. a page of output data can be overlaid with a form overlay pattern or print information can be specified with a FCB When specifying that a page of output data be overlaid with a form overlay pattern use a control record When specifying print information with a FCB write a FCB control statement in an initialization file For details on form overlay patterns see Form Overlay Patterns For details on FCB see Forms Control Buffers FCB For how to use print files see Using Print File 2 3 Print File with a FORMAT Clause For a print file with a FORMAT clause specify the FORMAT clause in file definitions in a program By using a print file with a FORMAT clause data in forms can be printed with partitioned form descriptors At this time the attributes of items defined in the form descriptors can be changed by using a special register during program execution Forms can be printed with the form overlay patterns described above and FCB FORM RTS is required however to print forms using a print file with a FORMAT clause Chapter 8 Printing 271 For details on form descriptors see Form Descriptors For details on print files with form descriptors see Using Print Files with Form Descriptors 4 Presentation File With a presentation file data in forms defined in the form descriptors can be printed As with the print file with aFORMAT clause the attributes of items defined in the form descriptors ca
205. aT Disable access by locking records in use This is called exclusive control of files For details of exclusive control of files see Exclusive Control of Files 198 Chapter 7 File Processing Using Record Sequential Files This section explains how to define record sequential files and process and define records IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO file reference identifier ORGANIZATION IS SEQUENTIAL DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size O1 record name Contents of records 02 data name PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN open mode file name READ file name REWRITE record name WRITE record name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name Chapter 7 File Processing 199 Defining Record Sequential Files This section explains the file definitions required to use record sequential files in a COBOL program File Name and File Reference Identifier Determine file names in conformance to the rules of COBOL user defined words then write them in the SELECT clause Determine a file reference identifier then write them in the ASSIGN clause For the file reference identifier specify a file identifier file identifier literal data name or character string DISK Use the file reference identifier to associate the file name specified in the SELECT clause with the file o
206. ably occurred See Error Codes API error A probable cause of the error is insufficient memory or disk resources Review the operating environment Internal conflict Contact a Fujitsu systems engineer SE Quitting a Server To quit or exit a server select End server from the Logical destination operation menu All messages stored in a logical destination will be deleted when End server is selected and the acquisition of the log is stopped Starting by Using a Server Definition File The inter application communication server can be started by creating a server definition file which reads information on each logical destination Creating a Server Definition File Use an editor to create a server definition file N ote If you change information on logical destinations create new logical destinations change log file names etc do not update this file after starting the inter application communication server Specifying a Server Definition File If the execution environment information CBR_Cl_SRVINF is not specified when the COBCISRV EXE is started the 468 Chapter 14 Communication Functions COBSVINF INI file in the directory where COBCISRV EXE is stored will be used If the execution environment information CBR_Cl_SRVINF is specified it will then be used Use the AUTOEXEC BAT file in Windows 95 to set the execution environment information and use the System in the Control Panel in Windows NT The full
207. aienisi aiai ai daa ai ai 712 Appendix K FCB Control Statement ssssssssssssnsunnnnunnnnunannunannnnannnnunannnnannnnannnnannnnannna 723 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery sssssssssssusunnnnunnnnunnnnnnannnnannnnannnnunannnnannnnannnnannnnnnann 725 Indexed File Recovery FUNCTION sssesssssesssissssssssssnsisiisisrsrsrsinrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 725 xxii COBOL85 User s Guide NOLES iscdisheaziedte teh ordeteceneatshs cpdoddaewndliedsorcccvee RT E R tveiedasvee dreads 730 Examples of Calling from COBOL ccccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaetaseeseetetaeeneeaey 730 Codes and Messages 0 eeeeeecececeeceneeseeeeeeeesenecaesansansaeseeassensensaseeneeeneeneetaseaneeneaeas 733 Appendix M Using Other File SyStemMS ssssssssssisrssssssonnnnnnannnnnnnannnnanannnnnnananannananan ana 735 Btrieve Fil rscisceuseciseioaie ts dinredaninaatinel a a a a i aiea 735 RDM Feee a a a a e a n a a a 743 Appendix N A COBOL Supported Subroutine 747 Subroutine for Receiving the Window Handle sssssssssesesssrsssssisrssnsssirierersres 747 NOOS oduan A ra A A ER 748 Subroutine for Receiving the Instance Handle sssesssesessssssssrsrssnrsrirrerereres 750 COBOL85 Users Guide xxiii xxiv COBOL85 Users Guide Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 This chapter explains the functions of COBOL85 and its operating environment If you are unfamiliar with COBOL85 you should read this chapter before using the product This chapter also details
208. ait for aSQL statement to execute before returning to the application The timeout range must be between 0 and 4294967285 seconds The default is 0 meaning that there is not timeout limit Operation of the timeout can vary depending on the ODBC driver If errors occur for timeout the specification should be removed Specify the cursor concurrency Concurrency is the ability of more than one user to use the same data at the same time The default is READ_ONLY Refer to the next table for more information Operation for the cursor concurrency mode can vary depending on the ODBC driver NOTE The ODBC Information Setup Tool cannot be used to set SQL_QUERY_TIMEOUT and G8QL_CONCURRENCY This information must be manually placed in the COBOL85 CBR file using a text editor 540 Chapter 15 Database SQL Table 58 Operation for the cursor concurrency mode of SQL_CONCURRENCY 32 READ_ONLY FETCH statement is allowed No position UPDATE and DELETE statements are allowed LOCK FETCH position NO When processing FETCH UPDATE and CONCURRENCY position UPDATE and position DELETE position DELETE statements statements are the table is locked and allowed operations from sever or other cients wait until operation is complete ROWVER CONCURRENCY FETCH statement using same data is allowed When processing position UPDATE or DELETE statements and a row is changed the transaction containing the update or delete operation fail
209. ame OPEN I O file name Setting relative record numbers DELETE file name CLOSE file name 217 218 Chapter 7 File Processing Enter the relative record number for the data name specified in the RELATIVE KEY clause for example MOVE 1 to data name The execution orders of input output statements for creation extension insertion reference updating and deletion are as follows Processing Outline Creating Sequential Random and Dynamic To create a relative file open a filein OUTPUT mode then write records to the file with a WRITE statement Records are written with the record length specified in the WRITE statement In sequential access relative record numbers 1 2 3 are set in the order the records are written In random or dynamic access records are written at the positions specified by the relative record numbers If an attempt is made to create a file that already exists the file is recreated and the original file is lost Extending Sequential To extend a relative file open a filein EXTEND mode then write records sequentially with a WRITE statement When writing to files in this mode records are added to the end of the last record in the file The relative record number of the record to be written is incremented by one from the maximum relative record number in the file The file can be extended only in sequential access mode Chapter 7 File Processi
210. arameter For example ABCDE is specified as the GS series format run time parameter Note This method is applicable only to users of the GS series Specifying the Initialization File Name e When COBOL is the main program Specify the initialization file following identifier CBR or CBR e When C isthe main program Call the following function immediately after JMPCINT2 is called int JMPCINTC int 0 void amp param Chapter 5 Executing Programs 127 Param entry count 4 entry initialization file name 1 8 1 Pointer to a NULL terminated string containing the initialization file name including path name may be omitted The maximum length of the string which can be specified is 127 characters including the terminator JMPCINTC return value POU Normaltermination termination re Specified mistake of Andion code Multiple calls i e JMPCINTC was called after it had already been called The effective initialization file name is that specified in the first execution of JMPCINTC e When Visual Basic is the main program Make the declarations described below Call JMPCINTB immediately after the call to JMPCINT2 Description in DECLARE phrase Private Declare Sub JMPCINT2 Lib F3BIPRCT DLL Private Declare Sub JMPCINT3 Lib F3BIPRCT DLL Private Declare Function Sub JMPCINTB Lib F3BIPRCT DLL Alias JMPCINTB 8 ByVal a As Long ByVal D As String As long Note this line
211. arning error The program can be Not affected executed normally However check whether the execution results are as expected 640 Appendix F Message Lists E ERROR U Recoverable There is an error but Affected 1 error processing is continued according to the appropriate assumption Unrecoverable The system stops Not affected 2 UNRECOVERABLE error program execution and performs termination processing 1 If an E level message output a return code is set when the COBOL execution unit terminates The E level message return code is assumed to be 12 It is compared to the value in special register PROGRAM STATUS and the larger value is set as the return code 2 The program terminates abnormally Message text explains the error conditions The following explains an error address written for a parameter indicating variable information in the message text e error address The place where the error was detected is displayed in the following form When either compile option TRACE or CHECK is specified Statement number COPY modification value line number Verb number For cases except those mentioned above PGM External program name ADR nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn Application address where the error is detected The following explains messages written by the COBOL85 run time system system action and programmer response in the following format message number message text 1
212. art of a storage area for example CALL SUBPROG USING A A or CALL SUBPROG USING A B whereA and B share part of the area If the content of the area is overwritten by the called program the optimization of the called program may not lead to the expected result So do not specify the compiler option OPTIMIZE for such a program No execution of the global optimization The compiler does not perform global optimization on the following programs Programs that do not define the items and index names having the attributes to target by global optimization Programs using the segmentation function segmentation module Programs specifying a compiler option TEST Less effective global optimization Appendix C Global Optimization 625 Global optimization is less effective on the following programs Programs mainly performing I O operations and programs that usually do not use the CPU Program using no numeric items but only alphanumeric items Programs referencing nondeclaratives from declaratives Programs referencing declaratives from nondeclaratives Programs specifying the compiler option TRUNC For details refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Notes on Debugging Since global optimization causes the deletion shifting and modification of one or more statements a program interruption for example data exception can occur a different number of times or at a different location If the program is int
213. ase indicated in the message then re execute The type of statement INITIATE GENERATE or TERMINATE is written for 1 The outermost program name is written for 2 The statement number copy qualification value line number verb number is written for 3 The report name or data name detail phrase name is written for 4 JMP0206I W SCREEN ITEM SIZE IS LARGER THAN LOGICAL SCREEN The screen item is displayed partially Response Specify a logical screen size large enough to display the entire item JMP0207I U LOGICAL SCREEN SIZE IS TOO LARGE Abnormally terminates the program Response Specify the logical screen size so that column count 1 line count is equal to no more than 16 250 then re execute JMP0208I E INVALID NUMERICAL VALUE ACCEPTED Writes zero to the receive data item then continues processing 652 Appendix F Message Lists Response Specify a value for the numeric item of the ACCEPT statement correctly then re execute JMP03011I E 1 2 OPENED BY 3 IS NOT CLOSED Terminates the program without performing close processing for the file Response Correct the program 3 so that the CLOSE statement is executed for the file 1 before termination of the program 3 The open mode of the file 1 is written for 2 JMP0302I U CLOSE ERROR DURING PROGRAM TERMINATION PGM 1 FILE 2 Abnormally terminates the program Response Check and eliminate the cause of the error If ano
214. assed between COBOL and C programs are optional The following table lists the basic correspondence of data items between COBOL and C programs 370 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication For the COBOL internal format refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual For the C internal expression format refer to C language manuals Table 42 Correspondence between COBOL data items and C data types COBOL Dataltem C DataType COBOL Coding Example C Declaration Example Alphabetic or char char 77A PIC X char A alphanumeric array typeor struct 01B PIC X 20 char B 20 structure type External decimal char array 77 C PIC S9 5 SIGN IS char C 6 6 bytes 1 type or struct LEADING SEPARATE structure type long int 77 E PIC S9 9 COMP 5 long int E 4 bytes Group item 3 char char O01 FGRP Struct array type or 02 F1 PIC S9 4 COMP 5 short int struct 02 F2 PIC X 4 F1 char structure F2 4 type FGRP Internal floating float 01 G COMP 1 float G point single precision double 01H COMP 2 float H double precision 1 The internal format of COBOL external decimal items are character strings consisting of characters indicating signs and numeric characters In the C program therefore these are treated as character data but not as numeric data To handle external decimal items as numeric data in the C program the data type must be converted in the C program 2 Binary items are applicabl
215. ata name 1 49 data name 2 PIC S9 m BINARY 49 data name 3 PIC X n or 01 data name 1 1 49 data name 2 PIC S9 m BINARY 49 data name 3 PIC N n m 4or9 1 lt n lt 254 550 Chapter 15 Database SQL SQLSTATE SQLCODE and SQLMSG This section describes information which is shown in the notification area of the COBOL ODBC driver manager ODBC driver or DBMS if an SQL statement is executed using ODBC The following table explains information posted as SQLSTATE SQLCODE and SQLMSG Table 62 SQLSTATE SQLCODE and SQLMSG information Value Posted Explanation Programmer Response 5alphanumeric Error or warning during CHECK SQLCODE and characters execution of an SQL SQLMSG and take action statement if error is detected For SQLSTATE information Refer to the ODBC SDK manual Negativeinteger Error or warning during Check the cause of the other than 0 execution of an SQL error according to the statement ODBC environment such as ODBC or DBMS manual and take corrective action on the error SQLMSG Blank no Normal termination output Message The message explains an Check the cause of the character string error or warning posted error according to the during execution of an SQL displayed message and statement take corrective action on the error Chapter 15 Database SQL 551 The following describes errors which might be detected by COBOL during execution of an enbedded SQL statement The info
216. ated By checking the SORT STATUS value after the SORT statement is executed COBOL program execution can continue even if sort processing terminates abnormally Setting 16 in SORT STATUS in the input or output procedure specified by the SORT statement terminates sort processing The following table lists the valid values for special register SORT STATUS and their meanings Table 46 SORT STATUS values and their meanings Value Meaning o O oo Noma temna Abnormal termination Any input and output files used must be closed during SORT statement execution Program Compilation and Linkage Compiler option EQUALS must be specified as required 414 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function When more than one record has the same sort key value in sort processing EQUALS guarantees that the records are written in the same order as they are read Note Using this compiler option degrades performance Program Execution Execute the program that uses sort as follows 1 Set environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR A work file called the sort merge file is required for sort processing The sort merge file is temporarily created in the directory specified in environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR When the directory is not specified in the environment variable it is temporarily created in the directory specified in environment variable TEMP These environment variables must be set in advance 2 Assign input and output
217. ation COBPRTST EXE Start program SAMPLE COBPRTST EXE The command to execute the presentation file module test SAM PLE The program name of the DLL form which starts in the presentation file module test Activating the COBPRTST Dialog Box from the COBOL85 Debugger Click on the OK button in the Start Debugging dialog box Specify the required setup items when the COBPRTST dialog box is displayed See Activating the COBPRTST Dialog Box See also Presentation File Module Test Dialog Boxes Operation Using the COBOL85 Interactive Debugger Specify a breakpoint with the debugger then execute the program while manipulating data contents See Executing a GS Program If a run time message is written during execution of the presentation file module test function refer to the help information Select Help in the COBPRTST dialog box COBPRTST Dialog Box This section explains how to use the COBPRTST dialog box and COBPRTST Update dialog box that are used with the presentation file module test function Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Using the COBPRTST Dialog Box Use the COBPRTST dialog box to specify information for a presentation file module test The following figure shows the COBPRTST dialog box Starting Name OK Cancel Environment Information File m di Help Browse Update Figure 143 The COBPRTST dialog box The COBPRTST dialog
218. ator response Specify the compiler option MAIN before compiling the main program Chapter 5 Executing Programs This chapter describes the procedures for executing programs setting run time environment information and operating windows for execution 110 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Executing Sample Programs This section shows how to execute the program in Sample 1 with WINEXEC in Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows NT Throughout this section assume the run time information to be C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 EXE Select WIN EXEC from the Tools menu of the P STAFF window The WIN EXEC window appears a WINEXEC Help Command Line COBOL32 SAM PLES SAMPLE1 Sample1 exe ee List Execute Delete ddi Figure 39 The WINEXEC window Chapter 5 Executing Programs 111 e Enter the name of the file to execute SAM PLE1 EXE in the Command Line edit box e Click on the Execute button The Run time Environment Setup window is displayed Runtime Environment Setup SAMPLE1 Fa Command Section Selection Environment Setup Help OK Cancel r Environment Variables Information __ List Delete lconName COBS5EXE ScmSize 80 24 CnslwinSize 80 24 CnslBufLine 100 WinCloseMsg 0N EnvSetwindow USE AlIFileE xclusive NO CBR_PrintT extPosition TYPE1 CBR_TextAlign BOTTOM di Save Figure 40 The Run
219. ause Access Mode Specify one of the following access modes in the ACCESS MODE clause e Sequential access SEQUENTIAL Enables records to be processed in ascending key order from the beginning of the file or a record with a specific key e Random access RANDOM Enables a record with a specific key to be processed e Dynamic access DYNAMIC Enables records to be processed in sequential and random access modes Referencing records in sequential and random access modes is shown in the following examples Chapter 7 File Processing 223 Sequential Access Processing is EEY stated tram anplovee 200001 rourbe 200001 Start 200001 Tack Trav et 200021 Arnie Bullock 200100 Ellen Godon 200001 Jack Traven 200021 Arrie Bullock 200100 Ellen Gordan a Data is read sequentially from employee number 200001 Random Access VY 200001 Tack Tray en Whois employee mmber 20002 7 71200021 200021 Arnie Bullock Annie Bullods 200100 Ellen Gadon es Data corresponding to employee number 200021 is fetched Primary and Alternate Keys Keys are classified into primary record keys primary keys and alternate record keys alternate keys The number of keys positions in records and sizes are determined during file creation and cannot be changed once determined Records in the file are in logical ascending order of the primary keys and specific records can be selected with the primary key
220. ause DISK specified in the ASSIGN clause LOCK MODE clause Other than the above CODE SET clause BLOCK CONTAINS clause No functional meaning for this system The program that was operating with the GS series operates as before Appendix Function Comparison 697 Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification S amp Y Function Classification S amp Y Classification Classification aaa file Indexed file File definition Input output statement Environment definition Comparison Function outline Function outline ee than the ee WITH LOCK specified in an input output statement UNLOCK statement eee ei above frenundae RERUN clause Data name specified in the ASSIGN clause DISK specified in the ASSIGN clause LOCK MODE clause Permission to form Can be used asingle key with with this multiple data items system under given conditions Other than the above 698 Appendix Function Comparison Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont unction Classification _____ omparison Remarks Indexed file Filedefinition CODE SETdause D BLOCK No functional CONTAINS clause meaning for this system The program that was operating with the GS series operates as before Input output WITH LOCK statement specified in an input output statement UNLOCK
221. based on data generated with text editors and manipulate COBOL files and records such as display edit and sort Other operations for COBOL files include copying moving and deleting files converting file organization and reorganizing recovering and displaying attributes of indexed files These utilities can be easily operated by selecting menus in the window Using the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY This section explains how to use the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Setting Up Environments 1 Specify the name of the path containing the COBOL run time system for environment variable PATH 2 Specify the directory to generate a temporary work file for environment variable TEM P with a path name beginning with a drive name When the Recovery command is executed with these utilities a temporary work file UTY nnnn TM P Chapter 7 File Processing 247 nnnn indicates alphanumeric characters of the same size as the file to be processed is generated under the specified directory Specify the directory to generate a sort work file for environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR with a path name beginning with a drive name When the Sort command is executed with these utilities a temporary file SRTnnnn TM P nnnn indicates alphanumeric characters is generated under the specified directory If environment variable BSORT_TMPDIR is not specified a sort work file is generated under the directory specified by environment variable TEMP Activating the C
222. bject programs are linked to a single executable program by a static linkage Therefore the 82 Chapter 4 Linking Programs main program and subprograms are all loaded to virtual storage at the beginning of execution thus allowing programs to call subprograms efficiently You need all subprograms during linking when you create an executable file having a simple structure Dynamic Link Structure Dynamic link structure means that the main program object program and the import library containing subprogram information are dynamically linked to a single executable program Unlike the simple structure no subprograms are linked to the executable file for the dynamic link structure Subprograms are loaded to virtual storage when the main program is loaded Programs are loaded by the dynamic linker of the system using subprogram information created in the executable file during dynamic linking To create an executable file having the dynamic link structure the import library containing all subprograms called by the program is required during linking Dynamic Program Structure Dynamic program structure uses only the main program object program as an executable program in a dynamic link Therefore unlike the dynamic link structure no subprogram information is included in the executable program With dynamic program structure subprograms are loaded by the calling program from the COBOL85 run time system For this reason the loading
223. box contains the following elements Starting N ame edit box Specify the screen descriptor name of the initial screen File edit box Specify the environment file name which enables the start option An environment file is created by the file name specified here Browse button Click to browse available files U pdate button 577 578 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Click to update or change information on an environment file When you select this button the COBPRTST Update dialog box is displayed OK button Click to begin the presentation file module test Cancel button Click to interrupt or quit the presentation file module test Help button Click to access the presentation file module test function online help Using the COBPRTST Update Dialog Box To change environment file information use the COBPRTST Update dialog box To display this dialog box click on the Update button in the COBPRTST dialog box The following figure shows the COBPRTST Update dialog box Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 579 COBPRTST Update CBANAME Figure 144 The COBPRTST Update dialog box 580 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions The COBPRTST U pdate dialog box contains the following elements Option List Displays the options which can be specified Change options by clicking on the name of the option Option Contents edit box Displays the values set
224. button Go to the next record in a file Last button Go to the last record in the file Note Characters that cannot be displayed such as national characters are displayed with periods This is the same for browsing editing and printing records Refer to the online help for additional details 258 Chapter 7 File Processing Editing Records Update insert and delete records within COBOL files using the lt Edit gt command im EDIT Loix Exit Browse Edit Options Help KEY SEARCH FIRST PREU NEXT LAST UPDATE Insert Delete LENGTH OFFSET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0123456789ABCDEF 00000000 36 30 30 31 30 36 20 49 44 45 4E 54 49 46 49 43 660160 IDENTIFIC Input 00000010 41 54 49 4F 4E 20 44 49 56 49 53 49 4F 4E 2E ATION DIVISION dit Arbitrary COBOL file 00000070 Figure 76 Updating inserting or deleting records with the Edit command The Edit window contains the following elements Exit Quit exit the Edit window Browse Browse the content of records in COBOL files Edit Edit a record Options Determine the method of data input hexadecimal or character when adding new records Chapter 7 File Processing 259 Help Access the online help Key button Change the order of displayed records The order displayed depends upon which record key is selected Search button Search for a particular record First button Go to the first record in a file Prev butto
225. by the compiler NUMBER If the sequence number area includes a nonnumeric character or if the sequence number is not in ascending order the line number is changed to the previously correct sequence number 1 NONUMBER Line numbers are assigned in ascending order starting from 1 The increment between successive line numbers is 1 Appendix A Compiler Options 601 If NUMBER is specified a sequence number including identical values consecutively is not regarded as an error If NUMBER is specified the error search function cannot be used 27 WINCOB WC D OBJECT directory name NOOBJECT Specify OBJECT to generate an object program otherwise specify NOOBJECT If an object program is outputted the file is usually created in the directory of the source program To create the file in another directory specify the directory name Refer to Resources Necessary for Compilation in Chapter 3 28 WINCOB WC OPTIMIZE NOOPTIMIZE Specify OPTIMIZE to generate a global optimized object program otherwise specify NOOPTIMIZE If this option is specified with TEST OPTIMIZE is displayed as the options established The program however is compiled on the assumption that NOOPTIMIZE is specified No global optimization See Appendix C Global Optimization 602 Appendix A Compiler Options 29 WINCOB PRINT directory name Specify this option to generate a compiler listing If a compiler listing is output
226. byte item control field if the contents of form descriptors need to be changed with a special register ina COBOL program The item control field is information appended to data items defined in form descriptors and is classified into three input output options e Sharable 3 bytes e Non sharable 5 bytes e None When a special register in a COBOL program is used 5 bytes must be specified Program Specifications This section explains how to write programs when printing forms with the presentation file module for each COBOL division 320 Chapter 8 Printing ENVIRONMENT DIVISION ENVIRONMENT DIVISION defines a presentation file In the presentation file as with defining an ordinary file writea file control entry in the FILE CONTROL paragraph of the IN PUT OUTPUT section The following table lists the contents to be written in the file control entry These information values can be determined regardless of the contents of form descriptors generated with FORM or Power FORM Table 28 Information to be specified in a file control entry ie fe el ee Type Required SELECT clause File name Write the name of a file to use in a COBOL a program conforming to the rules of COBOL user defined words ASSIGN clause File Specify this item in the format of GS file reference identifier This file identifier is the identifier environment variable to set the path name of the printer information file used by the connection p
227. cannot be used in an ACCEPT statement PROCEDURE DIVISION At program execution an input file is opened with the first ACCEPT statement and an output file is opened with the first DISPLAY statement of the program With subsequent ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements data is read or output only The input and output files are closed upon termination of program execution The input file is opened in input mode and used in share mode Records are not locked during read The output file is opened in output mode and used in exclusive mode Line feed characters are not handled as data After a file is opened after executing the first ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements the input output destination cannot be changed with the environment variable operation function Inputting Data Use an ACCEPT statement to input data from a file Data at the byte immediately before the line feed character is handled as one record Input data is read by record Input data is stored in a data name specified in an ACCEPT statement for the length 80 alphanumeric characters if defined as 01 input data PIC X 80 defined for the data name If the length of input data is less than that of data to be stored the next record is read and linked to the previously read data In this case line feed characters are not treated as data Records are read until the entered data satisfies the specified length Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 395 Inpu
228. cess is terminated Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function Sort rearranges the records in a file according to a certain sequence while merge integrates the records in multiple files into one file This chapter describes the sort merge function looking at the types of sort and merge processing 408 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function Outline of Sort and Merge Processing This section outlines sort and merge processing Sort Sort means that records in a file are rearranged in ascending or descending order using record information as a sort key The records are rearranged according to the attribute of the program key item Input file Output file 0130 Record 4 0040 Record 2 0110 Record 3 0020 Sorting in Record 1 ascending order Sort key Figure 110 Sorting records Merge Merge means that records in multiple files with records sorted in ascending or descending order are integrated into one file Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function 409 File 1 Qutput file Record 1 Record 2 Record 1 Record 3 Record 4 Record 2 Input file 2 Record 3 Record 5 Record 4 Record 5 Merge key Figure 111 Merging records Using Sort This section explains the types of sort processing and how to write compile and link a program that uses sort processing
229. ch column to the corresponding host variable area To retrieve the values of a column in ascending or descending order specify the ORDER BY clause at the end of the query expression in 2 Executes the CLOSE statement to disable the virtual table created in 4 The virtual table can no longer be referenced by executing SQL statements unless the OPEN statement is executed again Executes the ROLLBACK statement to terminate the transaction 8 Executes the DISCONNECT statement to disconnect the server 518 Chapter 15 Database SQL Retrieving Data from a Single Row The following are program examples for retrieving the data of individual or multiple rows Use the SELECT statement if retrieving the data for only one row No cursor is used in this case and cursor declaration and processing using the OPEN FETCH and CLOSE statements is unnecessary The following is the SELECT statement used to retrieve the product name where the quantity in stock for the product is 200 as noted in the STOCK table EXEC SQL SELECT GOODS QOH INTO PRODUCT NAME QUANTITY IN STOCK FROM STOCK WHERE GNO 200 END EXEC If a set function is specified as the select list value expression the SELECT statement obtains the radix of the table the number of rows and the maximum minimum average and summation total of the specified value expression The following is the SELECT statement used to retrieve the maximum minimum and avera
230. cifications User ID 32 bytes The maximum length depends on the specification of the data source used for establishing the connection Refer to the ODBC manual for more information about the ODBC driver environment 32 bytes 32 bytes a S 32 bytes ee Use the ODBC Information Setup Tool to set up a password The password must be encrypted Do not edit the password with an editor Preparing Linkage Software and the Hardware Environment Prepare the linkage software and hardware environment for a COBOL application program to access a server database through ODBC using the following procedures Setting Up the ODBC Environment e Install ODBC in the Windows system If the ODBC environment is installed in the Windows system for the first time use the ODBC setup supported with the ODBC driver e ODBC is added to the Windows control pane Install the ODBC driver then create a data source Start the ODBC 544 Chapter 15 Database SQL control panel usually in a Windows control panel group then set it up The ODBC driver is installed and the data source is defined e Prepare the ODBC driver environment An ODBC driver is designed to assume the environment where it operates For information on the ODBC driver environment refer to the manual and help information of the ODBC driver The help information can be referenced by starting the ODBC control panel Confirming a Connection with the Data Source A database usually suppo
231. cify function names in the CALL statement of COBOL When the return statement is executed in the called C program control returns immediately after the CALL statement of COBOL Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 365 Passing Parameters TO pass parameters from COBOL programs to C programs specify data names in the USING clause of the CALL statement The parameters to be passed to the C program are the area addresses or the values of the data names Specify parameters in the USING clause of the CALL statement The relation between the description of the USING clause and the contents of parameters is explained below When BY REFERENCE Data Name is Specified Area Address The actual argument value that the COBOL program passes to the C program is the area address of the specified data name Declare a pointer having a data type corresponding to the attribute of the parameter to be passed as adummy argument in the C program For correspondence between COBOL and C data types see Table 42 When BY CONTENT Data Name or Literal is Specified Area Address The actual argument value that the COBOL program passes to the C program is the address of the area containing the value of the specified data name Declare a pointer having the data type corresponding to the attribute of the parameter to be passed as a dummy argument in the C program Changing the contents of the area pointed to by the actual argument in the C
232. compiled in the Source File edit box either by entering it directly from the keyboard or selecting it using the Browse button Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 47 e To specify the file names to be used for continuous multiple compilation Aswith single compilation specify the name of each file to be compiled in the Source File edit box Click on the Add button Setting Compiler Options You specify compiler options by selecting the Options button and setting the options in the displayed Compiler Options dialog box See Compiler Options Dialog Box Specify the source file name before setting up the compiler options Specifying the Main Program To specify amain program the compiler option MAIN must be specified There are levels of priority for the compiler option MAIN depending on whether the option was selected for single or continuous compilation The priority for compiler option MAIN is as follows 1 Specified by acompiler directing statement 2 Specified by clicking on the Main button 3 Specified in the Compiler Options dialog box To specify the main program for single compilation specify the compiler option MAIN from the Add Compiler Options dialog box 48 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs To specify the main program for continuous compilation select the Main button in the WIN COB Continuous Compilation mode window 1 Select the file name to be compiled as the main program from the Compilation
233. compiler listing file and specify the file name If the file name is not specified the file is output to the directory of the source file If the P option is specified with the dp option the file linked with the directory specified in the dp option is the final compilation list file Do not specify an absolute path name for filename dp directory name A compiler listing file is usually under the directory of the source file Specify the dp option to define a new directory for the compilation list file Note The dp option functions the same as compiler option PRINT For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Dr Specify the Dr option to use the TRACE function Appendix J Command Formats 709 For details on using the TRACE function refer to the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide If the Dr option is specified processing for displaying trace information is incorporated into the object program Consequently execution performance lowers When the debug function terminates recompile the program without the Dr option specified Note The Dr option functions the same as compiler option TRACE For further information refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Dk To use the CHECK function specify the Dk option For details on using the CHECK function refer to the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide If the Dk option is specified processing for checking subscripts indexes
234. compiler option must be delimited by a comma e A compiler directing statement indicates the starting position of each separately compiled program The compiler options specified in the compiler directing statement apply only to the corresponding separately compiled programs in the compiler directing statement Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program 21 For example 000100 OPTIONS MAIN APOST 000200 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION Do not use a tab as a separator in an G OPTION S compiler directing statement The compiler option values that can be specified in the compiler directing statement are restricted For details refer to Appendix A Compiler Options 22 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program Chapter 3 Compiling Programs This chapter explains how to compile programs using the sample programs provided as examples It describes the resources required for compilation and gives a sample compilation procedure This chapter also explains how to correct compile errors and use commands to run the compiler 24 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Compiling Sample Programs This section explains the steps required to compile the sample programs located in the SAMPLES directory in the directory where the COBOL85 compiler is installed Each sample file is stored separately Windows 95 and Windows NT In the following explanation it is assumed the sample program is stored in C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1
235. compiler options that specify a directory name cannot be specified in the WC command option 1 16 WINCOB AIMLIB directory name directory name Specify the directory of the subschema definition file that is specified in the SUBSCH EMA NAME paragraph If a subschema definition file exists in more than one directory specify the directory names separating them by a semicolon The directories are searched for in the order they were specified If the option is specified in duplicate the directory search sequence is as follows 1 Directories specified in the A option 2 Directories specified in the compiler option AIMLIB 2 WINCOB WC ALPHAL NOALPHAL Specify ALPHAL to treat user defined words with lowercase letters in the source program as uppercase letters Otherwise specify NOALPHAL ALPHAL treats character constants as follows 586 Appendix A Compiler Options Program name constant Uppercase and lowercase letters are treated as uppercase letters Constants other than program name Constants are treated as written The constant specified for a program called by a statement is included as written in the program name constant 3 WINCOB WC WORDI MLBON BINARY MLBOFF BYTE BINARY WORD assigns the elementary item of binary data to an area length of 2 4 or 8 words BINARY BYTE assigns the elementary item of binary data to an area length of 1 to 8 bytes The area length is determine
236. create a new project file the Target Files dialog box is displayed If an existing project file is opened the Project window appears To change project information select a button in the Project window See Project Window 3 Register the target file name to be created by the project then click on the OK button See Registering Target Files The Dependent Files dialog box is displayed 4 Register a source program managed under the project See Registering Source Files 5 Select the main program from source programs registered in Step 4 See Setting the Main Program If you are creating a DLL do not select a main program 6 Register libraries See Registering Library Files 174 Chapter 6 Project Management Function 10 11 12 is Register any other required files See Registering Other Required Files End registration After all registration has been completed click on the OK button in the Dependent Files dialog box Registered file names are displayed in the Project window Set compiler options See Setting Compiler Options Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Build or rebuild the project See Building and Rebuilding the Project If an error is detected modify the file contents The contents of the files registered to a program COBOL source programs library text and module definition statements can be modified by using an editor Double c
237. ction cont Presentation File Simplified Inter application Program definition Presentation file description Communication Communication record description record description OPEN statement Call function of READ statement simple application WRITE statement communication CLOSE statement apparatus ability by CALL statement Required RDB 7000 Server for IDCM None product s Windows NT BS NET C Use Use for message When decentralized At message communication development communication with between mutual COBOL unit systems by communication of real time is done A The application can be started in the server system B Cannot cooperate with the COBOL application C Cannot cooperate with a Windows client 434 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Using Presentation File Module Asynchronous Message Communication This section explains how to use the presentation file module for asynchronous message communication and describes the operating environment and creation of COBOL source programs IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO GS file identifier SYMBOLIC DESTINATION IS ACM DESTINATION 1 IS logical destination name notification area PROCESSING MODE IS processing type notification area PROCESSING TIME IS monitoring time notification area MESSAGE CLASS IS priority notification area F
238. ctive debugger TEST 39 Determines whether to use the TRACE function TRACE 40 584 Appendix A Compiler Options Compiler Option Specification Formats This section explains the compiler option specification formats The compiler options are listed in alphabetical order There are three methods of specifying a compiler option L 2 3 Using the Compiler Options dialog box Using the WC command option Using the compiler directing statement OPTION S in the source program Priority 3 2 1 If a compiler option is specified in the compiler directing statement of the source program some separately compiled programs may not be specified depending on the specification of the compiler option Symbols shown with compiler option specification formats are WIN COB The compiler option can be specified on the WIN COB compiler option specification screen option file WC The compiler option can be specified in the WC command option The compiler option can be specified in the compiler directing statement F The compiler option can be specified if the directory name is omitted Appendix A Compiler Options 585 Specify the absolute path name or relative path name for a directory name and file name If a relative path name is specified the directory name of the source file to be compiled is prefixed When compiling from WIN COB the source file to be compiled will be stored in the current directory The
239. ctory name of the libraries LIB 18 582 Appendix A Compiler Options decimal items Options that relate to compile listings Compiler option N umber Determines whether to output a message indicating CONF 5 incompatibility between the old and new standards Displays library text COPY 6 Specifies the level of a diagnostic message FLAG 12 Displays FCOM and UWA GEN 16 Specifies the number of lines in a page of a LINECOUNT 19 compiler listings Specifies the number of characters on aline of a LINESIZE 20 compiler listings Determines whether to output the option MESSAGE 22 information listing and compile unit statistical information listing Specifies the sequence number area of a source NUMBER 26 program Determines whether to output compiler listings PRINT 29 and specifies the output destination of each compiler listing Determines whether to output a source SOURCE 33 program listing Options that relate to source program interpretation Compiler option Number Determines how to treat the user defined words of ALPHAL 2 lowercase letters in the source program Determines how to treat binary items BINARY 3 Determines how to treat currency symbols CURRENCY 7 Determines whether to display a message FLAGSW 13 for the language elements in COBOL syntax Specifies the ANSI COBOL standard LANGLVL 17 Specifies a character set of national NCW 24 user defined words Determines how to treat the national spaces NSPCOMP 25 and
240. d Condition Outline This section explains how to use the PERFORM statement without an at end condition IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name PROCEDURE DIVISION PERFORM WITH NO LIMIT DE Soss EXIT PERFORM END IF END PERFORM END PROGRAM program name When using a conventional PERFORM statement to determine the at end condition during repeat processing complex program specifications are required Using the PERFORM statement without an at end condition simplifies program specifications Program Specifications This section explains the contents of each division of a COBOL program that uses the PERFORM statement without an at end condition ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions 429 DATA DIVISION No specifications are required PROCEDURE DIVISION WITH NO LIMIT must be specified for the PERFORM statement to eliminate an at end condition For repeat processing executed by the PERFORM statement a statement determining the at end condition and a statement to exit repeat processing must be specified If a statement for exiting repeat processing is not specified processing continues infinitely in an infinite loop Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linkage options are required Program Execution No specific environment settings are required 430 Chapter 13 System
241. d by the number of PIC digits How to treat the high order end bit of an unsigned binary item can also be specified e BINARY WORD MLBON The high order end bit is treated as a sign e BINARY WORD MLBOFF The high order end bit is treated as anumeric value If BBNARY BYTE is specified the high order end bit is treated as a numeric value The following table shows the relationship between the number of declared digits and the area length Appendix A Compiler Options 587 Table 64 Length of Assigned Area from Number of PIC Digits N umber of PIC Digits Assigned Area Length uns BINARY EYTE BINARYOYORD A wje N BRIN 17 18 4 WINCOB WC CHECK n NOCHECK To use the CHECK function specify CH ECK otherwise specify NOCHECK n indicates the number of times a message is displayed Specify n with an integer 0 to 999 999 The default value is 1 While the CHECK function isin use program processing continues until a message is displayed up to n times However the program may fail to operate as expected if an error occurs for example area destruction If O is specified for n program processing continues regardless of the number of times a message is displayed If CHECK is specified the above check processing is incorporated into the object program Consequently execution performance is decreased When the debugging function terminates specify NOCHECK then recompile the program Refer to Using t
242. d ficationS issiria ienaa iieiaei eni ienei na dinenda idani iea 424 Program Compilation and LiINKAQE cccsceeeesesseeceesssssesesersseesesaesensaeesaees 425 Program EXecution ccccccscsscsssssscsessssceceessesceecaeseessessassaeseeseessaesaeseesenseaesarsensaneas 425 Using the ADDR and LENG Functions eeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeaseeeeetaetesaeeaee 426 QUIN Goi avi eniai aeaa aaia ea iiaa a eana iiaia aeaa eaaa dieas 426 Program SpecifiCatiOns ccccccccecseeeeeeeseceeseeeceecseeaeeeeeecsesaeeeseesesaetateeteetetaseetee 426 Program Compilation and LiINKAQE cccscecsecssssecesssessssesersseesassaesenseeseates 427 Progra EXCCUUON n taent ies a e aE a a a iaa a a Eea a 427 Using the PERFORM Statement without an at end Condition s es 428 QUUING earasaid aE AA AEAEE E A EE EE 428 Program SpecificationS s sseseseseesesrerersrsrsrsistntntnrututnnnnrntntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 428 Program Compilation and LiINKAQGE cccscecesssscssserssssseseserssessaesrserseeseaees 429 Programy EXQCUUION secav css dicavcctudcuvcccadieveeduccuuecsidiaveadeeiisie died a aaant aa aT ieda Eaa 429 Chapter 14 Communication FUNnCHONS sssssssssssnensnnnnununanannnananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananananananan 431 COBOL85 User s Guide xix Communication TY PES ce eeeeceeeteeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesecaesaeeassecsesaetaeeaesaesasaeeaseessesaeeateetaes 432 Using Presentation File Module Asynchronous M essage Communication
243. d for linking in the File Names list box See Entering Files Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Start linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Quit linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Chapter 4 Linking Programs 85 Creating a DLL To create a DLL by linking a subprogram object program Activate the WINLINK Linking Files window See Activating the WINLINK Window Select DLL in the Type box Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name Do not enter any object files created by specifying compiler option MAIN during compilation Enter the other files object file module definition file required for linking in the Link File list box See Entering Files Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Start linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Quit linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Creating an Executable Program with a Simple Structure The COBOL object program must be compiled from a COBOL source program containing no dynamic CALL statements those using data names to specify the called program name or be compiled after specifying the compiler option NODLOAD To create an executable program having a simple structure by linking a COBOL object program that calls a subprogram Create the subprogram as an object program or library See Procedures for Creating a Library Activate the WINLINK Linking Files wind
244. d printer information files For the file creation method refer to the FORM RTS online help Creating an Environment File An environment file contains the start options of the presentation file module test function An environment file can be created by using the COBPRTST dialog box or the editor 572 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions The following example represents a diagram of the coding format for creating an environment file with the editor START Screen and form descriptors name START CBRNAME D COBOL COBOL85 CBR Initialization file name full path name ICONNAME D ICON TEST DLL Icon DLL name full path name ICONID 1 Icon resource ID DSPNAME D SCREEN DSPFILE Window information file name full path name ENDKEY F001 Attention value of the END key RETKEY F002 Attention value of the RETURN key 1 section name The section name identifies screens operating with the presentation file module test function Specify a screen descriptor name of the initial screen 2 CBRNAME COBOL initialization file name If aCOBOL application program is to be started specify the initialization file name COBOL85 CBR for COBOL execution 3 ICONNAME icon DLL name Specify ICON NAME to change the icon of the presentation file module test function The full path name of the icon DLL module file must be specified 4 ICONID icon resource ID Specify a number as an ID for the icon resource stored in the ico
245. dexed file function Indexed files The following table lists the characteristics of each file Table 16 File organization types and characteristics File Types Record Line Relative File Indexed File Sequential Sequential File File Record Record storage sequence Relative Record key processing record value number medium Floppy disk Floppy disk Floppy disk Floppy disk example Work file File organization is determined when a file is generated and cannot be changed Before generating a file therefore fully understand the characteristics of the file and be careful to select the file organization that most agrees with its use Each file organization is explained below Chapter 7 File Processing 191 Record Sequential Files Processed sequentially from first record Record 1 Record 2 Ns Record n Figure 63 Record sequential files In arecord sequential file records are read and updated in order starting with the first record in the file A record sequential file is the easiest to create and maintain Record sequential files are generally used to store data sequentially and maintain a large amount of data 192 Chapter 7 File Processing Line Sequential Files File is processed by an editor LJ o 001 Ballpoint pen 002 Pencil Processed sequentially from first record 003 Eraser lt Line feed character Figure 64 Line sequential files
246. dom or dynamic access the invalid key condition is 220 Chapter 7 File Processing satisfied For information on the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing The record length cannot be changed even in the variable length record format Deleting Sequential Random and Dynamic To delete records open the file in O mode In sequential access read records with a READ statement then delete them with a DELETE statement Executing the DELETE statement deletes the records read by the last READ statement In random access specify the relative record number of the record to be deleted then execute the DELETE statement If the record with the specified relative record number is not found in random or dynamic access the invalid key condition is satisfied For information on the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing Inserting Random and Dynamic To insert records open the file in O mode Specify the relative record number of the insertion position then execute a WRITE statement The record is inserted at the position of the specified relative record number If the record with the specified relative record number already exists the invalid key condition is satisfied For information about the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing Chapter 7 File Processing 221 Using Indexed Files This section explains how to define and process files and def
247. ds The format of each control record is shown below For detailed explanations of the record areas and areas not explained in this manual refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual As printer functions vary by model refer to the users guide for each printer specified Control Record Offset 0 2 3 7 10 13 17 25 Tl 1 FOWLJ E FCB FORMAT ID 55 5T 60 62 G4 65 66 T 52 E PRT FORM SIZE HOPPER SIDE PRT AREA BIND BIND 6a 70 71 75 79 a3 ST 91 100 g BIND BIND WIDTH OFFSET OFFSET OPFSET OFFSET RS 296 Chapter 8 Printing conmo SS POSRECID PICK VALUE SSS om PIC Xa VALUE SSCS FCB PCX a e oo O M T O e a ooo o esmo fosmo CK OCCURS e SSCSCSC S ewon Pc owon eos V C oa S PIC OCCURSATIMES _ orrs Ce Perov oR O FOVL Specify the name of the form overlay pattern to use If an overlay group is specified a single overlay is performed by using the first overlay pattern in the group R Specify the number of times 0 to 255 that the form overlay pattern is printed With this system the same value as the number of copies is assumed C Specify the number of copies 0 to 255 for each page 03 M 3 3 3 a a E OBFORMAT ID PICX 8 FORMATID Los E Chapter 8 Printing 297 FCB Specify the applicable FCB name Cannot be specified at the same time as FORMAT ID FORMAT ID
248. e Interface For data name specify the area for storing the instance handle received by the subroutine The instance handle is stored in data name Notes When the DLOAD option is specified for a compilation of the COBOL program by which this subroutine is called the following entry information will be needed Refer to Chapter 5 Entry Information for the method of specifying entry information program name EN TRY JMPBWIN S F3BIPRCT DLL Index AIIFileExclusive 134 CBR_CIINF 136 CBR_ENTRYFILE 136 CBR_PSFILE_xxx 136 CnslBufLine 133 CnslFont 134 CnsIWinSize 132 EnvSetWindow 133 GOPT 131 IconDLL 131 IconName 132 MessOutFile 132 MGPRM 131 NoMessage 137 ODBC_Inf 135 PrinterFontName 134 ScrnFont 134 ScrnSize 132 WinCloseMsg 133 A ACCEPT statement inputting data from a console window 388 inputting data from a file 394 ACCEPT statements 384 ACCEPT DISPLAY function 384 386 using 392 ACCESS MODE clause 213 ADDR function 422 using 426 alternate keys 195 alternate record keys 223 area A 17 area address 365 area B 17 argument value referring to 399 401 ARGUMENT NUMBER 399 arguments obtaining number of 399 401 ARGUMENT VALUE 399 ASSIGN clause 199 200 237 specifying a data name 238 specifying a file identifier 237 when writing character string 239 when writing file identifier literal 239 AT END 232 defined 232 B
249. e logical screen for used by the program screen handling CnslWinSize Set the size of console SYSIN access name Set the input file for window the ACCEPT DISPLAY function CnslBufLine Set the buffers count SYSOUT access Set the output file for window DISPLAY function WinCloseM sg Set a display message TERMINATOR Set the function keys a closes MessOutFile Set the message File identifier Set the information file output file used by the program Chapter 5 Executing Programs 121 Table 9 Types of run time environment information cont Run time Environment Description Run time Description Information Environment Information GEnvSetWindow Set whether the FCBxXxxx Set FCB control Run time statements window is used PrinterFontN ame Set the font used for FOVLDIR Set the directory overlay patterns CnslFont Set the console Set the extension of window font the form overlay amp crnFont Set the font used for Set the format of screen handling the form overlay ODBC_Inf Set the ODBC PRN_FormN ame xxx 3 Form name CBR_PrintTextPosition 3 Method of efaultFCB Name Name of default 2 calculating character FCB arrangement coordinates CBR_TextA lign 32 Matching the top CBR_PrinterANK_Siz amp Sizeof ANK and bottom when 32 character arranging character lines SQL_CLI 16 Set database linkage G SequeLink_Inf 16 software information file information file i i aaa Entry information anes epee Subprogra
250. e usea REWRITE statement To write records to a file use a WRITE statement File creation OPEN OUPUT file name Editing records Setting relative record numbers WRITE record name CLOSE file name Sequential access File extension Chapter 7 File Processing Execution Order of Input Output Statements Random access File insertion OPEN EXTEND file name Editing records WRITE record name CLOSE file name File reference OPEN I O file name Editing records Setting relative record numbers WRITE record name CLOSE file name File reference OPEN INPUT file name Editing records Setting relative record numbers START file name READ file name NEXT CLOSE file name OPEN INPUT file name Setting relative record numbers READ file name CLOSE file name File updating File updating OPEN LO file name Setting relative record numbers START file name READ file name NEXT Editing records REWRITE file name NEXT CLOSE file name File deletion OPEN I O file name Setting relative record numbers READ file name Editing records CLOSE file name REWRITE record name NEXT File deletion OPEN LO file name Setting relative record numbers START file name READ file name NEXT Editing records DELETE file name NEXT CLOSE file n
251. e write is acceptable The default is RDWR Note A linein the server definition file which starts with a semicolon is interpreted as a comment Chapter 14 Communication Functions 473 The following is an example of a server definition file SRVINF Number of System maximum storage message SysMaxMsg 100 Number of System waiting instruction SysMaxWait 50 Screen display when server starts StartMode ICON System menu when starts with icon conMenu Movement when Windows is ended EndMode AUTO Presence of log acquisition LOog YES Log kind LogType TRACE Log file name LogFileName LOGDATA TXT LDINF Logical destination name number of maximum storage message number of maximum priority level logical destination mode LD1 100 9 READ LD2 WRITE LD3 500 LD4 Client Operation Window This section explains the procedure for operating the logical destination definition file creation utility in a cient window 474 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Logical Destination Definition File Creation Utility Start the logical destination definition file creation utility 16 COBCIU16 EXE 32 COBCIU32 EXE specify the name of the definition file to be created in the Select Definition File dialog box then click on the OK button If the specified file does not exist a new file is created If an existing file is specified information is appended to the file Th
252. e COBOL information program The item control field is information appended to data items defined in screen descriptors and is classified into three options e Sharable 3 bytes e Non sharable 5 bytes e None for input and output Program Specification This section explains how to use the presentation file module for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION The presentation file is defined in the ENVIRON MENT DIVISION 334 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens To define the presentation file specify a file control entry in the FILE CONTROL paragraph of the INPUT OUTPUT section This is the same as when you define an ordinary file The following table lists the contents to be written in the file control entry These values can be determined regardless of the definition contents of screen descriptors generated with FORM Table 33 Information to be specified in a file control entry Rene Ne eee n Type Required SELECT clause Filename Specifies the presentation file name to be used in the COBOL program This file name must conform to the COBOL user defined word rules ASSIGN clause File Specify this item in the format of GS file reference identifier This fileidentifier is the identifier environment variable to set the path name of the printer information file used by FORM RTSat execution FORMAT Data name_ Specify adata name defined as an 8 amp byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STO
253. e Client Definition dialog box is displayed Client Definition Setting Contents Cancel Server name Set Te t elp SERVERT x Delete Server machine name fietm2221 LD Information Client LD name Server LD name Associate LD MvLD2 L02 Ta 10 LD list MYLD1 LD1 a MYLD2 LD2 Figure 123 The Client Definition dialog box Chapter 14 Communication Functions 475 The Client Definition dialog box contains the following elements Server name Specify a logical name for the server that sends messages to or receives messages from a client You can specify any server name The server name can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters in length Server machine name Specify the host name of the machine at which the server is operating The server machine name can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters in length Client LD name Specify the logical destination name of the client The client logical destination name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters in length Server LD name Specify the logical destination name of the server to be connected to the client logical destination The server logical destination name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters in length Specify the server name then specify the server machine name client logical destination name and server logical destination name If information server machine name client logical destination name or server lo
254. e Data dialog box opens and you can change the data if necessary 5 Close the Data dialog box at the completion of data setup then resume program execution 566 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Ee NDBTO01 exe COBOL85 Debugger lO x File Edit View Search Continue Debug Option Window Help sl Ol S Bel Seles Bie lel Sl SEI G NDBTO01 cob 8 PROCEDURE DIVISION 9 DECLARATIVES Data x 10 DECL SECTION PAGENO OF FCOM i ii USE FOR pB excep Dsaname 12 DANI Program name Nosto Close 13 DISPLAY USE F e 14 END DECLARATIVES Type Category Binary Length 4 Help 15 DISPLAY NDB 16 SREADY Eo 17 FIND CURRENT Value 18 GET CURRENT Offset rea 00000000 000000000 Data name Display Modify Watch E NDBTESTI Cancel Gutput cg v 4 5 Display format Automatic Hexadecimal For Help press F1 Reached NDB statement 12 13 EQUAL Figure 141 Windows at completion of data setup READY Statement If the READY statement is not specified in a program and EXTERNAL is not specified in the subschema name paragraph FCOM and UWA aredefined as item names only and no areas are allocated If the program is executed in this condition areas not allocated operation is not guaranteed To execute the program normally specify linkage section allocation in the debugger for the 01 level items of FCOM and UWA The debug
255. e GS series M series and COBOL85 for Windows Refer to Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions for a definition of GS series terms The following symbols are used in the Comparison column of Table 88 A Can be used in the same manner as the GS series B Can be used under given conditions in the same manner as the GS series C Cannot be used with the GS series The function is specific to this system or incompatible with the GS series D Compilation can be done but the function is disabled during execution E Can be used but the function works differently than when it works with the GS series F Cannot be used with this system 692 Appendix Function Comparison Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system Function Classification Comparison Classification Function outline Character set All types of characters that can be used in the program COBOL words User defined All types of user word defined words underscore _ character has a Figurative All figurative constant constants that can be used in the program Special register SHIFT IN SHIFT OUT SORT CORE SIZE SORT MESSAGE PROGRAM STATUS RETURN CODE above Function name SYSPUNCH STAC KER O1 to 12 CSP S01 S02 SYSPCH BUSHU S OKAKU ON YOMI KUN YOMI CHANNELO2to12 C02 to C12 specific function in this The attributes are different GS series S9 4 BINARY This system S9 9
256. e OBJECT program compilation Compiler source filename When compiler PRINT listings LST listings is output 10 Compile Is displayed message N otes 1 The extension COB or COBOL may be used instead of CBL The system searches the extension for the file to be compiled in the following order e CBL e COB e COBOL 32 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 37 2 Each extension can be changed to any character string by using the compiler option FORM EXT FILEEXT or environment variable SMED_SUFFIX FFD_SUFFIX Refer to Setting Up Environment Variables in Chapter 1 and Appendix A Compiler Options 3 When COPY statements have been entered without IN OF in the COBOL source program either e Specify the directory of the library text file in compiler option LIB e Store the library text file in the current directory 32 When compiling from the WIN COB window the current directory is the directory where the COBOL source program is stored e Store the library text files in the same directory as the source file 16 When COPY statements have been entered with IN OF in the COBOL source program e Associate the storage directory of the library text file with the library specified by IN OF Failure to create an association with the library causes a compile error to occur during compilation 4 Specify the directory of the file screen and form descriptors file descriptor in the compiler option FORML
257. e a 1 The simple recovery function does not return the message 2 Thesimple recovery function does not return the code and message 734 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery Appendix M Using Other File Systems This appendix explains how to use COBOL85 with the following file systems e Btrieve e RDM Btrieve File A Btrieve file can also be used just like a file system as a sequential file or indexed file supported by COBOL85 The Btrieve file access function is supported within the scope of functions supported by the COBOL file system Btrieve specific functions however are not supported This section explains how to use the Btrieve file with COBOL85 For details on how to use the Btrieve file refer to Btrieve manuals Specifying File Environment Specify a filereference identifier in the ASSIGN clause of the file control entry to determine whether to use the COBOL file system or Btrieve Record Manager 736 Appendix M Using Other File Systems If a file identifier literal is specified as the file referenceidentifier specify the file identifier literal in the following format mo specification Path nae fe rarce l ETEY FILE NAME Specify the file name or path name of the input output target file NO SPECIFICATION The COBOL file system is used BTRV The Btrieve Record M anager is used If a data name is specified as the filereference identifier use the file identifier literal format to specify
258. e executable client file Server Operation Windows This section explains procedures for operating server windows e Communication System Environment Setup dialog box e Simplified Inter application Communication Server window See Log Collection for the server error display format and response to server errors Communication System Environment Setup Dialog Box Start the server specify the maximum number of system messages and maximum waiting instructions in the Communication System Environment Setup dialog box then click on the OK button Chapter 14 Communication Functions 455 Communication System Environment Setup System max messages OK Cancel Max waiting instructions 999 iie Help Figure 116 The Communication System Environment Setup dialog box The server can be used The Simplified Inter application Communication Server window is displayed e System max messages 0 to 999999999 Specify the maximum number of messages that can be stored in the server If the default or 0 is specified the system uses the maximum value For the value to be specified see Estimating Memory e Max waiting instructions 0 to 999999999 Specify the maximum number of read and write instructions from clients that can be queued in the server If the default or 0 is specified the system uses the maximum value For the value to be specified see Estimating Memory 456 Chapter 14 Communica
259. e execution of the WRITE statement the display color of a data item can be specified for the EDIT COLOR special register The following table explains the values that can be specified Table 70 Values that can be specified for EDIT COLOR Explanation Explanation Does not change the previous Outputs data in dark gray Blank information M Outputs data according to the K Outputs data in dark blue color attribute of the screen descriptor Outputs data in non display Hoe Outputs data in dark red mode B Outputs data in blue J Outputs data in dark pink R Outputs data in red I Outputs data in dark turquoise _ P Outputs data in pink C Outputs data in dark yellow Outputs data in turquoise D Outputs data in gray Outputs data in yellow Outputs data in white brightness 1 i ee ae ae brightness 1 1 High brightness cannot be distinguished from low brightness under this system EDIT OPTION Before execution of the WRITE statement attributes of a data item can be specified for the EDIT OPTION special register The following table explains the values that can be specified 634 Appendix E Special Registers Used with Presentation File Function Table 71 Values that can be specified for EDIT OPTION Does not change the previous Outputs data without using Blank information any underline blink or reverse M Outputs data according to the ny Outputs data using blink
260. e it if necessary e Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary The COBOL statement OPEN CLOSE START READ WRITE REWRITE or DELETE that caused the virtual storage to become insufficient is written for 1 The file name or access name of the processed file is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 JMP0320I I U INPUT OUTPUT ERROR STM 1 FILE 2 S 3 4 Discontinues error file processing then continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity code is determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 3 The COBOL statement START READ WRITE REWRITE or DELETE that caused the input output error is written for 1 The file name or access name of the processed file is written for 2 One of the character strings shown in Table 79 is written for 3 The error address is written for 4 Appendix F Message Lists 659 Table 79 Character strings written for JMP0320I I U 3 3 ErrorContents Programmer Response ALTD LEN The record length specified in Do not change the length of an the REWRITE statement is existing record when updating different from the length of an the record existing record BLKED FILE The file cannot be used because
261. e length records of a sequential file can be added to an arbitrary COBOL file Unload Convert COBOL file organization to variable length records in asequential file using an arbitrary COBOL file as input Browse Browse the content of records in COBOL files Print Print the records in COBOL files Edit Edit the contents of records from COBOL files Extend Add variable length records in a sequential file to existing arbitrary COBOL files Sort Sort records of an arbitrary COBOL file and place the results in avariable length record sequential file Attribute Display attribute information record length record key information etc of an index file excluding the record contents 250 Chapter 7 File Processing Recovery Recover corrupt index files Reorganize Reduce file size by deleting empty blocks in index files Copy Copy afile Delete Delete a file M ove Move a file to another location Quitting the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Select Exit on the menu bar As with file processing using COBOL programs file processing using the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY depends on file organization For example since record and line sequential files are processed in sequential access records are processed only in a fixed order or cannot be inserted or deleted See File Organization Types and Processing A system error can occur during execution of the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY If an error occurs an error code decimal
262. e online help Add button 254 Chapter 7 File Processing Add new records to the file The following describes other items which are found in this example of an Extend window Line sequential file Illustrates the attributes of the displayed file Record length 120 120 Illustrates the record length maximum record length HEX MODE Illustrates the hexadecimal data input method Character string under OFFSET and 0 1 E F The position offset of the data record is illustrated by the hexadecimal The position of the cursor offset in the data record is Ox00000008 which left 00000000 of 8 of the cursor line and the cursor was added Two character strings under 0 1 E F The data record is displayed by a hexadecimal every one byte Character string under 0123456789A BCD EF The data record is displayed by a one byte character mark Note Characters that cannot be displayed such as national characters are displayed with periods This is the same for browsing editing and printing records Refer to the online help for additional details Chapter 7 File Processing 255 Adding records from another file Use the lt Convert gt lt Load extend gt or lt Unload gt lt Load extend gt commands to add the contents of other files to existing COBOL files Input Output Input Output Convert Load Expand Text file Sequential file of variable Arbitrary COBOL file Pe parts ete bes ss
263. e or relative path name can be specified for a directory name and file name in the explanation below Appendix J Command Formats 719 filename list The following shows the specification format object filename Specify one or more object files to be linked The specified object file names must be separated by a blank or tab library name Specify a standard object code library import library or export file If a standard object library is specified only the object module required for external reference is linked The following files must be specified e COBOL import library e LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB USER32 LIB option list Specify LINK command options For the specification see Table 93 Table 93 LINK command options 32 Preparing for use of the COBOL85 interactive debugger DEBUG DEBUGTYPE COFF Name of the output main file 720 Appendix J Command Formats LIB Command 32 This section explains the LIB command for Windows 95 and Windows NT Use the LIB command to create a standard library or import library For details on generated files and files for LIB command execution refer to Resources Required for Linking in Chapter 4 Input Format When Creating a Library File Operands LIB 32 filename list option list At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolute or relative path name can be specified
264. e processing and outlines each type of processing Using Input Output Statements OPEN CLOSE DELETE READ START REWRITE and WRITE statements are used to process indexed files OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement only once at the beginning of file processing and a CLOSE statement only once at the end of file processing The open mode specified in the OPEN statement depends on the kind of file processing For example for creation use the OPEN statement in the OUTPUT mode OUTPUT specified Other Statements To delete records from a file use a DELETE statement To read records in a file use a READ statement To indicate a record for which processing is to be started use a START statement To update records in a file usea REWRITE statement To write records to a file use a WRITE statement Chapter 7 File Processing 227 Execution Order of Input Output Statements The execution order of input output statements for creating extending referencing updating deleting and inserting are as follows Procedure for file creation Procedure for file extension OPEN OUTPUT file name sequential access Editing records OPEN EXTEND file name MOVE prime key value TO Editing records WRITE record name CLOSE file name prime key name WRITE record name CLOSE file name Procedure for file reference Procedure for file reference sequential access random access OPEN INPUT file name M
265. e to short int or long int of the C program depending on the number of digits as follows Up to 4digits short int 5to 9digits long int A binary item with a fraction part is converted to a floating point item then passed Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 371 Program COB Function C WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 H PIC 9V9 COMP 5 01 FLOAT COMP 1 long int C float h PROCEDURE DIVISION MOVE H TO FLOAT CALL C WITH C LINKAGE return 0 USING FLOAT 3 When declaring group items as structure note the storage boundary of variables included in the structure To align the data item storage boundary with COBOL specify the SYNCHRONIZED clause in the data description entry For details refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual For C variable storage boundary alignment refer to C language manuals Compiling Programs When calling aC program with the CALL statement with a literal specified and if the program is compiled with compiler option ALPHAL specified the desired program may not be called since the program name is always treated as being uppercase Specify compiler option NOALPHAL when compiling programs For example CALL abc When compiler option NOALPHAL is specified program abc is called upon execution of the CALL statement When compiler option ALPHAL is valid program ABC is called upon execution of the CALL statement MOVE abc TO A CALL A
266. ea and line feed character are written at record write Extending To extend a line sequential file open a filein EXTEN D mode then write records sequentially to the file with a WRITE statement Records are added to the end of the last record in the file Referencing To refer to records open the file in INPUT mode then read records in the file from the first record by using a READ statement When OPTIONAL is specified in the SELECT clausein the file control entry the OPEN statement is successful even if the file does not exist and the at end condition is satisfied upon execution of the first READ statement For information on the at end condition see Input Output Error Processing If the size of a read record is greater than the record length data with the same length as the record length is set in the record area when aREAD statement is executed The continuation of the Chapter 7 File Processing 211 data of the same record is then set in the record area when the next READ statement is executed If the size of data to be set is smaller than the record length spaces are written to the remaining portions of the record area Using Relative Files This section explains how to define and process files and how to define records for relative files 212 Chapter 7 File Processing IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO
267. ebugging Guide for more details When an application consists of several programs use the project management function for developing and maintaining the application Refer to Chapter 6 Project Management Function 10 When a program contained within a project managed application has been corrected re create the application In this case execute the rebuild command Refer to Chapter 6 Project Management Function 11 To process a COBOL file execute the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Refer to COBOL85 FILE UTILITY in Chapter 7 COMPILE and LINK can be done without relying on P STAFF Refer to Using Commands to Compile in Chapter 3 Using Commands to Link in Chapter 4 and Appendix J Command Formats 14 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program This chapter explains how to create and edit a program how to create library text and the program format and describes compiler directing statements 16 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program Creating the Program You create COBOL source programs and library text with editors This section explains how to create the COBOL source program and library text Creating and Editing a COBOL Source Program Simply you create a COBOL source program by e Activating the editor e Creating and entering text e Storing the program Activating the Editor To display the edit screen activate the editor Creating and Editin
268. ecord description entries You do not have to define the area to set the relative record number Profile record Record definitions in Data Division 01 profile record Data item attribute 02 fullname PIC X 20 full name 20 alphanumeric items 02 age PIC 9 3 age 3 unsigned numeric items 02 height PIC 9 3 height 3 unsigned numeric items 02 weight PIC9 3 weight 3 unsigned numeric items Processing Relative Files In relative file processing creation extension insertion reference updating and deletion is done with input output statements This section explains the types of input output statements used in relative file processing and outlines each type of processing Using Input Output Statements OPEN CLOSE DELETE READ START REWRITE and WRITE statements are used for input and output in relative file processing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement only once at the beginning of file processing and a CLOSE statement only once at the end of file processing 216 Chapter 7 File Processing The open mode specified in the OPEN statement depends on the kind of file processing For example for creation use the OPEN statement in the OUTPUT mode OUTPUT specified Other Statements To delete records from a file use a DELETE statement To read records in a file use a READ statement To indicate a record for which processing is to be started use a START statement To update records in a fil
269. ed For information about how to use the tool refer to the online help Chapter 8 Printing 305 The establishment of the order classification Printer Name Order classification AI O F sequence Cancel ESC Page Graphic Device Interface A present order Delet LaserJet Graphic Device Interface A Figure 94 The establishment of the order of classification dialog box When printing with a form overlay pattern is done in other than the graphic device interface GDI mode a blank sheet of paper may be ejected depending on the printer In this case if the printer can control Print Without Data on the printer operation panel reset it to Print Without Data Programs Using FCB When FCB is used with a print file write an FCB control statement in the initialization file For the specification format of an FCB control statement see Forms Control Buffers FCB For details of an FCB control statement refer to Appendix K FCB Control Statement An error occurs if an FCB name is specified in the control record but no applicable FCB control statement is found in the initialization file An example of an FCB control statement is shown below Contents of the initialization file when executing program A with FCB1 set as the FCB name A FCBFCB1 LPI 6 1 12 4 6 1 12 2 6 1 306 Chapter 8 Printing The output format of one page set by a FCB control stateme
270. ed Table 67 Values that can be specified for EDIT MODE Explanation Explanation Blank processing value dae atonal aaen EPR data National data items only A Outputs the data as Outputs OLE objects alphanumeric data N ational data items only 632 Appendix E Special Registers Used with Presentation File Function EDIT STATUS Before execution of the READ statement the input mode of a data item can be specified for the EDIT STATUS special register The input results are posted after execution of the READ statement The following table explains the values that can be specified Table 68 Values that can be specified for EDIT STATUS Explanation Explanation Applies input processing i Enables selection status perce E Blank X Does not apply input processing Ea not Basain un input processing and enables selection status 2 o inputnignigeina oa input highlighting The following table explains return ues Table 69 Values returned to EDIT STATUS Explanation Explanation E The input data contains an error S The item has been selected Only when an item is selected for input the ID card Aa The data was inputted as U The data was not changed Blank national data N ational data items only A The data was inputted as alphanumeric data N ational data items only Appendix E Special Registers Used with Presentation File Function 633 EDIT COLOR Befor
271. ed the contents of the current library are updated The original contents are saved in a file with which the current library name extension is changed to BAK Table 91 LIB command options 16 Specification Specification Format Changing or setting alibrary page size PAGESIZE n Whether to distinguish uppercase letters from YN 1 lowercase letters PAGESIZE n For n specify a value 16 to 32 or 768 raised to the power of 2 The default page size of a new library is 16 bytes UN 1 Specify N to distinguish uppercase letters from lowercase letters Otherwise specify 1 The default is l If a library is created with N specified a mark is given to the library indicating creation with N specified If any of the libraries to be linked was created with N specified the output library is treated as a library created with N specified Appendix J Command Formats 717 Table 92 Command symbols Symbol File Specified Addition of Specify name of the object file to be added The object file extension LIB must be specified module extension cannot be assigned to the object module name Replacement of Specify name of the object module to be replaced A path module or extension cannot be assigned to the object module name To replace a module the object file name extension must be OB and the file must be in the current directory Module copy to Specify name of the object module to be copied The copy
272. eduction rate Date operation CURRENT DATE Obtains the current date and time and the difference between Greenwich Mean Time the day of the year DAY OF INTEGER Obtains the year and day corresponding to the day of the year corresponding to the date IN TEGER OF DAY Obtains the day of the year corresponding to the year and day WHEN COMPILED Obtains the date and time the program was compiled Appendix D Intrinsic Function List 629 Table 66 COBOL85 Intrinsic Functions cont Arithmetic SQRT Obtains the approximate value of a LOG10 MEAN Obtains average values MEDIAN Obtains medians MIDRANGE Obtains the average values of the maximum and minimum RANGE Obtains the difference between the maximum and minimum VARIANCE function sine cosine tangent an inverse cosine MOD Obtains a specified value in specified modulus Obtains remainders STAN DARD DEVIATION Obtains standard deviations 630 Appendix D Intrinsic Function List Appendix E Special Registers Used with Screen and Form Functions This appendix explains the values of special registers used with screen and form functions Some functions cannot be used depending on the FORM RTS version and level For details refer to the FORM RTS online help EDIT MODE Before execution of the WRITE statement the output mode of a data item can be specified for the EDIT MODE special register The following table explains the values that can be specifi
273. eeceeceeceeceecsesaeeeeeeeessecaesaeeesaeeaseesesaetaseesaseeeas 275 Forms Control Buffers FCB cc ccccccscccsssscssscsssesesseessceessseeuseeusseeueseesesseeesseeasaes 276 FOFMDESCriPtors ii n d aaae aa e tdi ie ini inlet dented lend 277 Using Print File Liisanne ana iaa ae ee dae iea Eai aiia E naiai idan 278 OaE E E E E rer eeerrerfeepe erect rr terme tereereee 279 Program SpecifiCatiOns cccccccessseeeeecteceeeeeeceecaesseeeeeecsesaseaseessesaeeaseeseetetaeeeseee 280 Program EXGcutl ON wii itete dash nee Pai ai A es Si aes 283 Examples Of Programs csccccssecessesceseeeeeeeeeesecaeeeneensecaseanasseeseeaseaneennesaseaneanas 287 Using Print File 2c enean aeai a E aa Ea aaah aa aaa Ea aA etaa 292 QUUING aea arana ea ee ea oa ae eee hoes 293 Program SpecifiCatiOns ccccccccesseeseeeceeceeeeeeeeecaeeaeeeseecsesaseeseessetaesaseeteesaetaaeateee 293 Programm EXecUt ON sieni enei ideia ie aaeeei aeeai Eara a aa Eaa iaiia ainiai 302 Using Print Files with Form Descriptors ssssssesesssrsrsrsrsrsissnsnsnrnrnsnnnrersrsrsrsrnnnnnnns 307 Qut ING se oe tenets eai ra ai e E EN E AE TE dene te ate 308 Program Sped fication Snina n aa a aa aa anion 308 Program Execution eiennenn iaaa dence nena 314 Using Presentation Files Printing FOrMS cscccsssssscsssssssessessrssessssessessseaes 315 OUTING Hr E ee ile ae re a Se hah Mok at Mende oth Tee 316 Work PFOCCOU ES i 2seccteetescbeleecel iota rdetieantedee deste ented adh satia
274. efault or 0 is specified the system uses the value specified for System max messages in the Communication System Environment Setup dialog box Priority 3 to 9 Specify the number of priority levels in which messages can be stored at the logical destination to be generated If the default or a value from 0 to 2 is specified the system assumes 9 Deleting a Logical Destination To delete a logical destination select Delete logical destination from the Logical destination operation menu select the logical destination to be deleted in the Delete Logical Destination dialog box then click on the OK button The following are the requirements for deleting a logical destination e Thelogical destination contains no messages 458 Chapter 14 Communication Functions e Inactive is specified for the read and write attributes If Purge Message button is clicked the message stored in the selected logical destination can be deleted Other logical destinations can be deleted continuously by pressing the Delete button LD Name Current Waitings OK Delete Purge Message rE Help Figure 119 The Delete Logical Destination dialog box The Delete Logical Destination dialog box contains the following elements LD name Displays the logical destination name Current Displays the number of the messages stored in a logical destination Waitings Displays the number of the instructions waiting in a logical destinatio
275. eft 168 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Chapter 6 Project Management This chapter describes the project management function details resources needed for the function and explains procedures for using it Additionally this chapter describes the project window 170 Chapter 6 Project Management Function What is the Project Management Function This section outlines the project management function PROGRAM MING STAFF provides a project management function for COBOL85 application development and maintenance The project management function manages target COBOL85 applications consisting of multiple files COBOL source programs and libraries as a single project Information on dependent files is stored in the project file and the compiler and linker options are saved in the option file If the project file or option file managed under the project is updated the project management function can automatically recompile and relink files dependent on the updated file This operation is called building or making The project manager can also recompile and relink all programs registered in the project to renew applications called rebuilding Use the project management function e To process all steps from compilation to execution of a program in one operation e Tocall a subprogram or use a program library Sample programs using the project management function are provided with COBOL85 For compiling linking and executing
276. ement of the COBOL source program and the directory name of the library storage file Add Library Name ix Leay Nane coPvor Cancel Folder Help C Mtsc pcobol32 samples Figure 23 The Add Library Name dialog box 3 Click on the OK button To cancel the specified details click on the Cancel button The Add Library Name dialog closes Closing the dialog box without clicking on the OK button looses the specified details 4 Thespecified library name and associated directory appears in the Library Names list box in the Library Name dialog box Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 57 Changing a Library Name To change the directory associated with a library displayed in the Library Name list box 1 Select the library for which the associated directory is to be changed from the Library N ame list box then click on the Change button The Modify Library s Directory dialog box is displayed Library Name COPYDT Folder Cancel C tsc peobol32 sampled Browse Help Figure 24 The Modify Library s Directory dialog box Change the directory name 3 After changing the directory name click on the OK button The Modify Library s Directory dialog box closes 4 Thenew directory name is displayed in the Library Name list box in the Library Name dialog box Deleting a Library Name To delete a library name displayed in the Library Name list box 1 Select the library name to be deleted f
277. en ODBC Handled Data and COBOL85 H andled Data for more information Data contents are assured for only the defined data correspondence as specified Some data types may not be handled by COBOL as host variables depending on the ODBC driver specification PROCEDURE DIVISION Embedded SQL statements that can be used and the statement specification method are different between ODBC drivers If embedded SQL statements are specified in the COBOL source program refer to product manuals as well as the COBOL specification for e ODBC driver e Software and hardware related to the ODBC driver e Database management system Chapter 15 Database SQL 553 Use the COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements to terminate transactions Otherwise the operation may not be assured Before using the DISCONNECT statement to terminate a connection execute the COM MIT or ROLLBACK statement to terminate the transaction The SQL descriptor area cannot be used Therefore do not specify the following embedded SQL statements e INTO and USING clauses in which a descriptor name is specified e SQL statements for the descriptor area ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR GET DESCRIPTOR SET DESCRIPTOR and DESCRIBE statements You cannot specify the DEALLOCATE PREPARE statement You cannot specify any SQL statement for data definition DDL When using adynamic SQL statement such as the PREPARE EXECUTE or EXECUTE IMMEDIATE statement NOT FOUND specif
278. en and form descriptor name within 126 bytes 32 If the option is specified in duplicate the directory search sequence is as follows 1 Directories specified in the m option 2 Directories specified in the compiler option FORMLIB 3 Directories specified in the FORMLIB environment variable 32 16 WINCOB WC GEN noe Specify GEN to display the communication area with AIM DBMS FCOM and the AIM expansion record area UWA in the source program listing Otherwise specify NOGEN Appendix A Compiler Options 595 17 WINCOB WC 85 LANGLVL 74 f 68 Specify a standard for an item where source program interpretation is different between the old and new COBOL standards e LANGLVL 85 85 ANSI COBOL e LANGLVL 74 74ANSI COBOL e LANGLVL 68 68 ANSI COBOL 18 WINCOB LIB directory name directory name If the source text manipulation function COPY statement is used specify the directory of libraries If libraries exist in more than one directory specify the directory names separated by a semicolon The directories are searched for in the order specified The following is the priority if the option is specified in duplicate 1 I option 2 Compiler option LIB 596 Appendix A Compiler Options 19 WINCOB WC LINECOUNT n Specify the number of lines in a page of a compiler listing n can be specified with an integer of up to 3 digits The default value is 60 If a value Oto 12 is specified
279. ent specified on a command line activated from the system Environment Variable Handling Function This section explains how to refer to and update the values of environment variables Environment variables explained in this section indicate run time environment information set at program execution IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECIAL NAMES ENV IRONMENT NAME IS mnemonic name 1 ENVIRONMENT VALUE IS mnemonic name 2 DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 data name 1 01 data name 2 PROCEDURE DIVISION DISPLAY nonnumeric literal UPON mnemonic name 1 data name 1 ACCEPT data name 2 FROM mnemonic name 2 ON EXCEPTION DISPLAY nonnumeric literal UPON mnemonic name 1 data name 1 DISPLAY data name 2 UPON mnemonic name 2 ON EXCEPTION END PROGRAM program name Outline During program execution the values of environment variables can be referred to and updated 404 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements To refer to the value of an environment variable use a DISPLAY statement where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRONMENT NAME is specified and an ACCEPT statement for which a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON M ENT VALUE is specified To update the value of an environment variable use a DISPLAY statement where a mnemonic name correspondi
280. ent Support Functions sssssssssssssssinrsnssasannnnnanas 555 Outline of Distributed DeVElOPMeNt eee eceeceeeceeteeeeeeeeetaeeeeeetaeeaetaseeteetaeeateateeees 556 Scope of Distributed Development FUNCCIONS ceeeceeeseeteeseeeteetaeeeteeeeetaeeateetaes 557 Distributed Development Support FUNCHIONS 00 cece eteeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeetetateeteees 559 Target Language CONSUrUCt eeecceceeseeseceeeeeeeeeeseseeseaeeaesaeseeseastaesaeseeseaesaeeeeseeseaees 559 Usage ninin aiie iae a a a aa Ta ae a a Eaa AE A AA a 560 Presentation File Module Test Function sssssssssssesesrsrsrsrsrsrsrssnsnrnrnrusnnnersnnrsrsnnnnnnnns 568 Operating Environment ssesesesrsrsrsrsrsissssssisitnisisisisistststntnnnnnnnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 568 Creating Files Required for Using the Presentation File Module Test Function569 Using the Presentation File Module Test FUnoOn sssssssssssssssrsrersrsrerersrsrssns 573 COBPRTST Dialog BOX ccceccsceeeeseeseseeeseeeeeeseeecaesesecseeesaeeecaseeeesseeesaseesaseneesates 577 Appendix A Compiler O ptiOnS sssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnununnnunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnanannnnnnnnanan 581 List of Compiler Options s ssssssssssssssssssssssssssnsnsnsnnneusnnnsnsnsrntnnntnsntntneneunnnnnnnnnnnnenenene 581 Compiler Option Specification Formats s ssssssessssssssssrnnrsrerersrsrsrsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn s 584 Appendix B 1 O Status LiSt ssssssssssnsusnnnunnnnunannnnunnnnannnnnnannnnannnnannnnanannnnannnnan
281. ent information name must be unique The name must be different from a run time environment information name file identifier used with another file Refer to ACCEPT DISPLAY Function in Chapter 11 36 WINCOB WC run time environment information name SSOUT SY SOUT Specifies the data output destination of the DISPLAY statement for ACCEPT DISPLAY function e SSOUT run time environment information name A file is used as the data output destination At run time specify the path name of the run time environment information name e SSOUT SYSOUT The console window is used as the data output destination The run time environment information name can be specified with up to 8 uppercase letters and numeric characters beginning with an uppercase letter A to Z The run time environment information name must be unique The name must be different from a run time environment information name file identifier used with another file Refer to ACCEPT DISPLAY Function in Chapter 11 606 Appendix A Compiler Options 37 WINCOB WC ASCII STD1 JIS1 JIS2 To determine how to treat an alphanumeric code standard code of a 1 byte characters specified for EBCDIC in the ALPHABET clause specify this option Specify ASCII to treat the alphanumeric code as an ASCII code specify JIS1 to treat it as a JIS 8 bit code specify JIS2 to treat it as aJIS 7 bit Roman character code EBCDIC is specified in the ALPHAB
282. environment variable PATH Set the name of the printer information file with the file identifier as an environment variable name When a printer information file is specified with a relative path name it is retrieved in the following sequence Directory set for environment variable MEFTDIR 2 Current directory e When using MeFt NET 32 Add the directory containing MeFt NET SV to environment variable PATH Set the printer information file name with the file identifier as an environment variable name The actual printer information file must be prepared for Windows 3 1 Specify an environment variable indicating that MeFt NET is used as a connector There are two specification methods e Set MEFTNET for the connector name with the file identifier as an environment variable name e Set MEFTNET for environment variable CBR_PSFILE_PRT For details on how to set MEFTNET refer to Format of Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 Chapter 8 Printing 325 Examples of how to print forms with the presentation file module are shown below Contents of the ASSIGN clause in a COBOL program ASSIGN TO GS PRIFILE Contents of the initialization file COBOL85 CBR When using FORM RTS PRTFILE MEFPRC When using MeFt NET 32 PRTFILE MEFPRC MEFTNET Assign a printer information file to the file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of aCOBOL program In the example using FORM RTS the pri
283. environment variables 32 adding 158 Environment Variables Keywords dialog box 159 environment variables handling function 404 Environment Variables List dialog box 32 158 ENVIRONMENT NAME 404 ENVIRONMENT VALUE 404 epilogue codes 372 EQUALS 413 Error procedures 232 defined 234 error input output 232 detection methods 232 execution results 235 EXCLUSIVE 240 exclusive mode 240 242 executable files 75 executable program creating dynamic link structure 86 creating dynamic program structure 88 creating simple structure 85 linking single object 84 executable programs executing with WINEXEC 117 EXECUTE statement 526 executing a subprogram 357 executing application programs 188 EXIT PROGRAM statement 357 EXPORTS 186 EXTERNAL clause 359 external program 361 F F option 118 FCBxxxx 146 FCOM 566 file access mode 196 file control entry contents to be written 334 contents to be written in 320 file control entry defining print file in 294 File creation 244 252 file descriptor specifying storage location 10 File extension 244 253 File manipulation 260 file organization types and characteristics 190 File organization conversion 262 File print 262 file processing 196 results 244 FILE STATUS 232 244 FILE STATUS clause 233 File identifier 138 139 141 142 143 144 file reference identifier 199 file reference identifier 310 files assigning 237 files exclusive c
284. er application Exchanges data between applications communication An overview of the programs and utilities follows WIN COB command Activates the COBOL85 compiler COBOL presentation file module Activates a COBOL presentation file test 16 module test function 4 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 COBOL85 Compiler The COBOL85 compiler compiles a COBOL source program to create an object program The compiler provides the following service functions Output compiler listings Checks standards and specifications Global optimization The tag jump between a compile message and the editor error search function Provides linkage with FORM screen and form descriptors and Power FORM form descriptors Specify these functions in accordance with the compiler options COBOL85 Run time System When you execute an application program created with COBOL85 the COBOL run time system is called and operated COBOL85 Interactive Debugger You debug COBOL85 applications created under Windows 95 Windows NT or Windows 3 1 with the COBOL85 interactive debugger The debugger is started by a simple operation from a window and can Interrupt and restart program execution Reference and change the contents of a data area Interrupt when changing the value of a data area Display the execution route of a program 16 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 5 e Display the call route of a program e Rerun the debugging operation PROGRAMMING STA
285. ere the client was operating could not be connected with the host where the server was operating Check whether the network is defined correctly WSA ECON NABORTED Connection was rejected because of a time out or other error or processing ended abnormally Check whether the client and server are operating normally This error may be caused by interference during communication or by a LAN card error Chapter 14 Communication Functions 499 Table 56 Windows Sockets function error codes cont Description in WINSOCK H Error Explanation Code WSAECONNRESET The client or server was reset WSAENOBUFS The communication buffer space is insufficient Increase the communication buffer space or reduce communication traffic WSAEISCONN 1056 The client is already connected with the server WSAENOTCONN 10057 The client it not connected with the server WSAESHUTDOWN 10058 The client was disconnected from the server WSA ETIM EDOUT 10060 A timeout was detected because the dient was not connected with the server within the specified time Check whether the server is active and whether the machine where the server is operating is connected to the LAN eee whether the server is active WSAEDISCON 10101 The client or server was disconnected WSANO_DATA 11004 Service name cobci is not defined in the services file Define the service name cobci in the services file 500 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Chapter 15
286. error hexadecimal information then call your Fujitsu SE RRN gt R KEY When the READ or WRITE Specify a size of the relative key statement is executed for item large enough to store the sequential processing the maximum relative record relative record number exceeds number of the file the maximum value of the relative key item 1 If ERRCD 90xx is output while Form RTS is used refer to the Form RTS HELP for xx 2 If a message is output showing error information FDBK 101 when a print file without the FORMAT clause specified is executed ensure the following Only the required number of printer drivers are installed The FCB control statement is less than 2 048 bytes All the specified forms overlay patterns are correct The spool area is large enough Confirm the disk capacity of the environment variable TMP directory Stop all other applications that are executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary All the registered forms overlay pattern names are correct If no problems are found in the above checks a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE e For Btrieve file error codes refer to the Btrieve Manual issued by NOVELL Inc e See System Error Codes for details on character strings indicating errors in the file message text other than the above JMP03211I U
287. errupted while data items are begin written in those data items may not actually be set With compiler option NOTRUNC the program may not operate properly if the internal or external decimal item is to be recursively defined For details refer to Appendix A Compiler Options 626 Appendix C Global Optimization Appendix D Intrinsic Function List The following table lists the Intrinsic functions that can be used with COBOL85 Table 66 COBOL85 Intrinsic Functions Classification Explanation Length LENGTH Obtains the length of a data item or literal Size Obtains the maximum value Obtains the minimum value maximum value minimum value lowercase characters uppercase characters NUMVAL Converts numeric characters to numeric values NUMVAL C Converts numeric characters including a comma and currency sign to numeric values 628 Appendix D Intrinsic Function List Table 66 COBOL85 Intrinsic Functions cont Character Obtains a character at a specified operation position in the collating sequence of a program Obtains the ordinal position of a specified character in the collating sequence of a program Numeric value INTEGER Obtains the maximum integer INTEGER PART RANDOM Calculation of ANNUITY Obtains the approximate value of interest rate the equal payment rate to 1 the principal according to the rate of interest and the period PRESENT VALUE Obtains the current price according to the r
288. es execution of the sample program Chapter 5 Executing Programs 117 Execution Procedures Executable programs compiled and linked from COBOL programs can be executed in the same manner as normal Windows applications with the WINEXEC command This section describes how to run COBOL programs The applications work with e Windows 95 e Windows NT Version 3 51 both server and workstation versions e Windows 3 1 Before Executing COBOL Programs Before executing COBOL programs you must set run time environment information COBOL85 calls resources and data to be assigned for executing COBOL program run time environment information For information about setting the run time environment see Setting Run time Environment Information Before Executing COBOL Programs 16 Before executing a COBOL program under Windows 3 1 ensure that SHARE was loaded in MS DOS command mode to enabled This allows file sharing and exclusive systems to be included before running Windows The format of the SHARE command is shown below SHARE L 50 F 2048 118 Chapter 5 Executing Programs The L option sets exclusive control option for files and records Use the value determined from the following expression as standard when executing a COBOL program When executing multiple COBOL programs at the same time also for different execution units add the value determined for each program Value to be entered 20 number of files
289. es with the Reorganize command Chapter 8 Printing This chapter explains how to print data by line or form and provides information about types of printing methods print characters form overlay patterns forms control buffers FCB and form descriptors 268 Chapter 8 Printing Types of Printing Methods Usea print file or presentation file to print data from a COBOL program This section outlines how to print data using these files and explains print character types form overlay patterns forms control buffers FCB and form descriptors The print function you use depends on the printer being used Refer to the user manual for each specific printer Outline of Printing Methods There are two types of print files files with aFORMAT clause and those without a FORMAT clause Use a print file without a FORMAT clause to print data in line mode line by line Use 1 overlay data line by line with a form overlay pattern and print data by setting print information with an FCB Use 2 By using a print file with a FORMAT clause data in forms with form descriptors can be printed This chapter classifies print and presentation files in the following groups 1 Print file without a FORMAT clause Use 1 2 Print file without a FORMAT clause Use 2 3 Print file with a FORMAT clause 4 Presentation file The following table lists the characteristics advantages and uses of printing methods 1 to 4 Chapter 8 Printing 2
290. ese functions used in an application is shown below IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID Program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION DATA DIVISION ORKING STORAGE SECTION STATUS RE 05 ERROR 05 DETAIL SERVERNAME REC SERVERHD REC UNUSED REC LDNAME REC BUFFER REC RECEIVETYPE REC BUFFERLEN MSGLEN MSGTYPE WAITTIME UNUSED 01 SENDTYPE REC MSGLEN PRIORITY MSGTYPE WAITTIME UNUSED DIVIS PROCEDURE ON Connect with server CALL COBCI_OPEN Read message CALL COBCI_READ Write message CALL COBCI_WRITE Disconnect from server USING PIC S9 9 PIC S9 9 PIC X 15 PIC S9 9 PIC S9 9 PIC X 8 PIC X n PIC S9 9 P PIC S9 9 REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE VALUE Li REF VALUE REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE VALUE ERENCE Li Li ERENCE VALUE REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE VALUE Li Li 9 COMP 5 COMP 5 VALUE 0 COMP 5 C S9 9 COMP 5 COMP 5 COMP 5 VALUE LOW VALUE COMP 5 COMP 5 COMP 5 COMP 5 4 COMP 5 STATUS REC SERVERNAME REC SERERHD REC UNUSED REC STATUS REC SERVERHD REC LDNAME REC RECEIVETYPE REC BUFFER REC UNUSED REC STATUS REC SERVERHD REC LDNAME REC SENDTYPE REC BUFFER REC UNUSED REC 482 Chapter 14 Communication Functions CALL COBCI_CLOSE USING BY REFERENCE STATUS REC BY VALUE SERVERHD REC BY VALUE UNUSED REC END PROGRAM Program name Figure 124 An example of simplified
291. esigned with FORM or Power FORM form descriptors are generated COBOL85 enables data items defined in the form descriptors to be included in a program so that forms can be printed with values set in the data items Form overlay patterns can be included in form descriptors 278 Chapter 8 Printing FORM RTSis required when printing forms using form descriptors FORM RTS requires a printer information file For details of printer information files refer to the FORM RTS online help For information on how to generate form descriptors refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual For information about printing forms by using form descriptors see Using Print Files with Form Descriptors or Using Presentation Files Printing Forms Using Print File 1 This section explains how to print data in line mode using a print file without a FORMAT clause For asample of a program using a print file refer to the Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL guide Outline IDEN TIFIC ATION DIVISION PREOGEAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPEC TIAL HAMES functian name IS mnemonic name INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTEROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO PRINTER SRGANIZATION 18 SEQUENTIAL FILE STATUS 15 input output sta tus DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name REC ORD record size LIN AGE I lagical page configuration pecificatiaon 0l record name CHARACTER TYPE 1s MODE 2 Con
292. estart compilation See Correcting a Compile Error 7 Quit compilation See Starting and Quitting Compilation e To continue compilation close the message and repeat the operation from Step 2 e To quit compilation click on the Cancel button 32 or select Exit 16 in the WINCOB window When a compile ends normally an object program is created The object program has to be linked before it can be executed Linking is explained in Chapter 4 Linking Programs Compiling Several Source Files To compile several files consecutively with WIN COB 1 Activate the WIN COB window See Activating the WIN COB Window 2 Specify continuous compilation See Specifying Continuous Compilation 3 Specify the names of the source files to be compiled in the WIN COB Continuous Compilation mode List box See Specifying a File Name for continuous compilation 4 Establish the compiler options See Setting Up Compiler Options Select and establish compiler options and a library name separately for each directory of files selected from the list box 42 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Establishing a library name See Setting a Library Name Select and establish compiler options and a library name separately for each directory of files sad ected from the list box When running continuous compilation the same compiler options must be specified for source files in the same directory To s
293. euing specified Forced execution specified DATA DIVISION NT Blank If there is no data at the logical destination the system posts 0A as the input output status If there is not data at the logical destination the system follows the monitoring time specification and waits until data is written If the maximum amount of data is written to the logical destination the system cancels write processing and posts 9G as the input output status If the maximum amount of data is written to the logical destination the system follows the monitoring time specification and waits until data has been read If the maximum amount of data has been written to the logical destination the system writes data exceeding the maximum amount and posts 0B as the input output status Write the record definition to be used for communication and the data definition specified in the file control entry PROCEDURE DIVISION Use input output statements for communication processing in the same manner as for general file processing e OPEN statement Starts message send receive processing e READ and WRITE statements Send and receive messages e CLOSE statement Quits message send receive processing 440 Chapter 14 Communication Functions OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement to start message send receive processing Execute a CLOSE statement to quit message send receive processing READ and WRITE Statements To
294. expression is displayed in the error message Refer to the system error code explanation or System Error Codes in Appendix F Chapter 7 File Processing 251 COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Functions The COBOL85 FILE UTILITY provide the functions given below In quotation marks are commands lt gt indicates a command name and indicates its use is optional to use the functions For more information about how to operate the dialog box refer to the online help 252 Chapter 7 File Processing Creating Files Create anew COBOL file with data generated by text editors as input using the lt Convert gt lt Load gt commands Figure 72 Creating a file with the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY When an error occurs with extended specification the contents of existing files are lost if the check box of Make BACKUP is not selected Chapter 7 File Processing 253 Adding Records Add records to existing COBOL files with the lt Extend gt command EXTEND Exit Browse Edit Options Help B 14 2 0123456789ABCDEF Input 8 Extend ane Arbitrary COBOL file 00000670 GG OG OO GG OG OG OG 8G Figure 73 Adding records with the Extend command The Extend window contains the following elements Exit Quit exit the Extend window Browse Browse the content of records in COBOL files Edit Edit a record Option Determine the method of data input hexadecimal or character when adding new records Help Access th
295. ey What is the employee gt Kate Smith gt gt 100789 number of Kate Smith Figure 66 Indexed files Records can be read and updated by specifying the values of items record keys in an indexed file Use an indexed file as a master file when retrieving information associated with the values of items in a record Designing Records This section explains the types and characteristics of record formats and the record keys of indexed files Chapter 7 File Processing 195 Record Formats There are two types of record formats fixed length and variable length e Fixed length record In a fixed length record all records in a file contain the same number of character positions e Variable length record In a variable length record records contain a varying number of character positions The record size is determined when a record is placed in a file Because each record can be written with the required size the variable length record format is useful if you want to minimize the file capacity Record Keys of Indexed Files When designing a record in an indexed file a record key must be determined Multiple record keys can be specified for an item in the record There are primary record keys primary keys and alternate record keys alternate keys Records in the file are stored in the ascending order of primary record keys Specifying a primary or alternate key determines which record is processed in the
296. f lines on one page line space and column start position can be changed When an FCB name is specified with an control record or when the default FCB name is specified in the initialization file DefaultFCB_Name FCBxxx FCB information can be specified externally Specify the FCB information in the initialization file as follows FCBxxx FCB control statement xxx is the FCB name specified in the control record or FCB name part of xxx specified for execution environment information DefaultFCB_N ame FCBxxx For details of the syntax of a FCB control statement see Appendix K FCB Control Statement The default value of the control record FCB name is 6 lpi x 11 inches 66 lines Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number Channel number 01 Line number 02 Line number 03 Line number 04 Line number 05 Line number 06 Line number 07 Line number 08 Line number 09 Line number 10 Line number 11 Line number 12 Line number Chapter 8 Printing 4 10 16 22 28 34 8 46 66 52 58 64 Refer to Format of Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 for details on specifying the default FCB name Refer to Using Print File 2 for details on specifying control records Form Descriptors When forms are d
297. f the Run time Environment Setup window Adding Environment Variable Information To add specified or new environment variables use the procedures that follow Adding Currently Set Environment Variables 1 Select Environment Variables from the Environment Setup menu in the Run time Environment Setup window The Environment Variables List dialog box is displayed Environment Variables List xj Environment variable name CMDLINE wIN COMSPEC C 0S WINS5 COMMAN LIB C FSC PCOBOL32 C FSC PCC PATH C 50S WINSS C 0S WIN95 Help PROMPT p q TEMP C 40S WINS5S TEMP TMP C TEMP a 4 Cancel wi Figure 51 The Environment Variables List dialog box 2 Select the environment variable to add from the list box then click on the Selection button The selected variable is displayed in the Environment Variables Information edit box 3 If necessary modify the contents of the selected variable Chapter 5 Executing Programs 159 4 Click on the Set button The changed information is added to the Environment Variables Information list box Adding New Environment Variables 1 Select Keyword from the Environment Setup menu in the Run time Environment Setup window The COBOL Environment Variables Keywords dialog box is displayed COBOL Environment Yariables Keywords E3 Keyword CBR_DPCLIB_ Int CBR_ENTRYFILE CBR Bint CBR_CIINF Cancel __ He Printer amp NK_Size CBR_PSFILE_ACM CBR_PSFILE
298. f the actual input output medium How you associate the file name in the SELECT clause to the file of the actual input output medium depends on what is specified for the filereference identifier The recommended method to determine what to specify for the filereference identifier is e When the file name of the input output medium is determined at COBOL program generation and is not subsequently changed specify a file identifier literal or character string DISK e When the file name of the actual input output medium is undetermined at COBOL program generation or to determine the file name at every program execution specify a file identifier 200 Chapter 7 File Processing e To determine the file namein a program specify a data name e Ifthe file is temporary and will be unnecessary after the program terminates specify character string DISK Files can be processed at high speed in record sequential or line sequential files For the specification method refer to Appendix H High speed File Processing The following table lists description examples of SELECT and ASSIGN clauses Table 18 Description examples of SELECT and ASSIGN clauses Name File identifier SELECT file 1 Must be related to the actual ne ASSIGN TO INFILE input output medium at program execution Data name SELECT file 2 The data name must be ASSIGN TO data name defined in the WORKING STORAGE section in the DATA DIVISION ASSIGN TO c dat DIS
299. f the server U se the ODBC Information Setup Tool to encrypt the password N ote Specify both user IDs and passwords N either can be omitted 542 Chapter 15 Database SQL Using the ODBC Information Setup Tool The ODBC information setup tool allows you to set information in the ODBC information file in order to access remote databases via ODBC The following functions are provided in ODBC information setup tool e Select an ODBC information file e Setserver information e Set default connection information To use the ODBC information setup tool follow the steps below Refer to the online help for additional details 1 Start the ODBC information setup tool Use the SQLODBCS EXE to start the ODBC information setup tool 2 Select an ODBC information file Specify an ODBC information file to set up connection information If a file does not exist create one with a text editor 3 Setup the server information Use the CON NECT statement or select default connection information to set the server name 4 Setup the default connection information Use the CONNECT statement with the DEFAULT specification to set default connection information Server name user ID and password Chapter 15 Database SQL 543 Maximum Length of Information Specified in the ODBC Information File The following table shows the maximum length of information specified in an ODBC information file Table 60 ODBC information file spe
300. file 224 An error occurred during write to a If the same error occurs when the temporary file for sorting and program is re executed a system error merging probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE A sort merge program error occurred Other A PowerSORT error occurred while Refer to the PowerSORT online help using PowerSORT Do the following then re execute e Stop all applications that are executing at the same time e Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary e Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary JIMP0608I I U RELEASE STATEMENT CAN NOT BE EXECUTED IN OUTPUT PROCEDURE 1 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Correct the program The error address is written for 1 JMP0609I I U RETURN STATEMENT CAN NOT BE EXECUTED IN INPUT PROCEDURE 1 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows 676 Appendix F Message Lists l SORT STATUS is referred to for file definition U SORT STATUS is not referred to Response Correct the program The error address is written for 1 JMP0612I I U RETURN STATEMENT CAN NOT BE EXECUTED AFTER AT END
301. for a directory name and file name in the explanation below filename list Specify one or more object files Existing libraries can also be specified option list Specify the information to be posted to the LIB command For the specification see Table 93 Appendix J Command Formats 721 Input Format When Creating an Import Library LIB 32 DEF module definition filename Operands MACHINE IX86 OUT import library name option list object filename list At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolute or relative path name can be specified for a directory name and file name in the explanation below DEF The DEF option specifies a module definition file for creating an import library Specify the module definition file following the colon MACHINE The MACHINE option specifies the type of the CPU that executes the program OUT The OUT option specifies the import library to be created option list Specify the information to be posted to the LIB command For the specification see Table 93 object filename list Specify the object file for creating an import library 722 Appendix J Command Formats Table 94 LIB command options 32 Specification Specification Format Specification o O Copying a specified object member from a EXTRACT object member name specified library Deleting
302. for a selected option Browse button Click to browse available files Change button Click to change data in the Option Contents edit box for the selected option OK button Click to change the execution environment and return to the presentation file module test dialog Cancel button Click to return to the presentation file module test dialog without changing the execution environment Help button Click to access the presentation file module test function online help Appendix A Compiler Options This appendix explains the COBOL85 compiler options The first section lists compiler options Review the list to verify the compiler option to be specified then specify the option in the compiler option format as shown in the second section List of Compiler Options This section lists compiler options The numbers in the compiler option list correspond to the numbers of the compiler option specification formats in the second section Options that relate to compile time resources Compiler option Number Specifies the directory of a subschema AIMLIB 1 definition file 16 Specifies the extension of a file containing the file FILEEXT 10 descriptor Specifies the directory name of a file containing the FILELIB 11 file descriptor Specifies the extension of the screen and form FORM EXT 14 descriptor file Specifies the directory name of a file containing the FORMLIB 15 screen and form descriptor Specifies the dire
303. for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required DATA DIVISION In the DATA DIVISION define data items to store input data and items to set output data Define the data items with one of the following attributes e Group item e Alphabetic item 388 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements e Alphanumeric item e Binary item e Internal decimal item e External decimal item e Alphanumeric edited item e Numeric edited item e National item e National edited item National item and national edited item cannot be used in an ACCEPT statement PROCEDURE DIVISION Usean ACCEPT statement to input data from a console window Input data is stored in a data name specified in an ACCEPT statement for the length 80 alphanumeric characters if defined as O1 input data PIC X 80 defined for the data name If the length of input data is less than that of data to be stored the input request is repeated For character data the input request is repeated until the entered data satisfies the specified length For numeric data the input request is repeated until the Enter or Return key is pressed Usea DISPLAY statement to output data to a console window When a data name is specified in a DISPLAY statement data stored in the data name is output When anonnumeric literal is specified in a DISPLAY statement a specified character string is output Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 389 Pro
304. format There are three types of reference formats fixed variable and free You specify the type with a compiler option before compiling the program The line feed character that delimits each line is not regarded as part of the line Fixed Format In a fixed format each line in the COBOL source program has a fixed length of 80 bytes Column position 1 6 7 8 12 72 73 80 Indicator area Program identification number area Variable Format In a variable format each line in the COBOL source program can be up to 251 bytes long Column position lt 251 1 6 7 8 12 lt Area A Indicator area 20 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program Free Format In a free format you do not need to distinguish between the sequence number area the indicator area Area A Area B or the program identification number area Each line can be up to 251 bytes long Column position 1 lt 251 aa Compiler Directing Statement A compiler directing statement indicates the compiler options Normally compiler options are specified in the Compiler Options dialog box of the WIN COB window that runs compilation but the options can also be defined within the source program The description format for the compiler directing statement is shown below OPTIONS compiler option compiler option e Enter GOPTIONS starting at column 8 e Enter at least one space between GOPTIONS and the compiler options e Each
305. from the client To connect a client and server use the CONNECT statement See Connecting to a Server Selecting a connection To select connections use the SET CONNECTION statement See Selecting a Connection Manipulating data To manipulate data use the SELECT INSERT UPDATE and DELETE statements If the cursor is defined the FETCH statement can be used to fetch data These statements can be executed dynamically See Manipulating Data For the correspondence between data handled in COBOL85 and ODBC see Correspondence Between ODBC H andled Data and COBOL85 H andled Data Chapter 15 Database SQL 505 e Transaction processing Consistency of database data manipulation is ensured within transaction units A transaction starts when the first SQL statement is executed and terminates when the COM MIT or ROLLBACK statement is executed e Disconnection To disconnect a program from the server use the DISCONNECT statement Before executing the DISCONNECT statement terminate the transaction See Disconnecting from a Server The following sections provide examples of the above operations Connection This section explains methods for connecting disconnecting and selecting a server connection Connecting to a Server To connect a client to a server usethe CONNECT statement The following steps should be used for Client Server connection 1 Define server information 2 Connect
306. function of the system is used The program structure is determined by the format of the CALL statement options specified at compilation and type of link The following table lists the relationship between the program Chapter 4 Linking Programs 83 structure CALL statement compiler options and link types For compiler option DLOAD refer to Appendix A Compiler Options Table 8 Relationship between program structure CALL statement compiler options and linkage types Option Structure Option eee structure Dynamic link CALL program name iak Dynamic CALL data name Dynamic program linkage structure CALL program name DLOAD CALL data name coexisting CALL program name DLOAD 84 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Link Procedures Object programs compiled from COBOL source programs COBOL object programs can be linked through window operation with the WINLINK command or from the command prompt with link commands This section describes the procedures for linking with the WINLINK command Linking with commands is explained in Using Commands to Link Linking a Single Object Program To create an executable program that does not call any subprograms Activate the WINLINK Linking Files window See Activating the WINLINK Window Select EXE in the Type box Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name Enter the other files object file module definition file require
307. fy NOTRACE then recompile the program Refer to Using the TRACE Function in the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide 41 WINCOB WC TRUNC NOTRUNC Specify a method of truncating high order digits when a number is moved with a binary item as a receiving item TRUNC The high order digits of the result value are truncated according to the specification of the PICTURE clause of the receiving item The result value after truncation is stored in the receiving item If this option is specified with the compiler option OPTIMIZE the high order digits of a variable moved from an external decimal item or internal decimal item through optimization are also truncated Digits are truncated as explained above only if the number of digits in the integer part of the sending item is greater than that of the receiving item NOTRUNC The execution speed of the object program is of top priority If the execution is faster without truncation than with truncation digits are not truncated For example specification in the PICTURE clause Moving S999VP 3 digits in the integer part to S99V 99 2 digits in the integer part Truncation Moving SPV 999 0 digit in the integer part to S99V 99 2 digits in the integer part No truncation Appendix A Compiler Options 609 If TRUNC is specified the value to be set into the integer area of the sending item depends on the hardware If NOTRUNC is specified the program must be designed so tha
308. fy entry information other than the entry description section of the initialization file COBOL85 CBR create an entry information file and specify it in the run time environment CBR_ENTRYFILE entry See Entry Information The order of precedence for entry information is as follows 1 Specification in the Run time Environment Setup window 2 Specification in the initialization file 3 Specification in the entry information file 19 CBR_PSFILE_xxx Set the Connected Product Name Used from the Presentation File by Destination CBR_PSFILE_xxx connected product name For xxx specify the destination name described in the SYMBOLIC DESTINATION clause of the presentation file xxx can be one of the following DSP PRT ACM APL Chapter 5 Executing Programs 137 For the connected product name enter a string indicating the associated product name to be used The following table shows the strings that can be specified Table 11 Supported CBR_PSFILE strings Specification in Product Used String Specified SYMBOLIC DESTINATION Clause DSP or SYMBOLIC FORM RTS MEFT or omitted DESTINATION clause may be omitted MeFt NET MEFTNET PRT FORM RTS MEFT or omitted MeFt NET MEFTNET ACM BSN ET RDB 7000 ACM Server for Windows NT IDCM IDCM or omitted If a connected product name is specified as a file identifier in the presentation file refer to No 26 the specified connected product name is not effective If no connec
309. g 1 information Response Check whether the area is large enough to create a file The debug function name is written for 1 Appendix F Message Lists 679 JMP0770I W DEBUGGER CANNOT BE ACTIVE TEST OPTION IGNORED 1 2 3 Ignores the compiler option TEST and continues processing Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 2 then re execute The name of the error program is written for 1 The following explains the character strings written for 2 MEMORY SHORTAGE The memory is insufficient FILE NOT FOUND The 1 file is not found PATH NOT FOUND The search path is not found PATH NOT SET No search path was specified LOADING ERROR Loading failed ue error code Load Library function error code was written for 3 JMP0820I E U SUBSCRIPT INDEX IS OUT OF RANGE PGM S1 LINE 2 OPD 3 4 E level Uses the subscript or index value as is then continues processing U level Aborts the program Response Specify a correct value for the subscript or index indicated in the message then re execute The outermost program name is written for 1 The statement number line information copy qualification value line number verb number is written for 2 The operand name is written for 3 The number of dimensions is written for 4 680 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0821I E U REFERENCE MODIFIER IS OUT OF RANGE PGM 1 LINE 2 OPD 3 E leve
310. g message Information detected by the compiler W WARNING Warning error The object program has been generated H owever check whether the compilation results are as expected E ERROR Recoverable error The object program has 1 been generated An error e g compiler option error has occurred not been generated UNRECOVERABLE halted e inenumber The line number of the line containing an error is displayed Messages indicating the same error information are displayed collectively In this case more than one line number is displayed e messagetext Explains the error conditions Appendix F Message Lists 639 Messages Produced by the COBOL85 Run time System This section explains messages written by the COBOL85 run time system The following shows the message format message number message text e message number The message number is displayed as shown below JMP Prefix indicates a run time system message nnnn Message serial number i Characters to indicate severity and response required Operator response is unnecessary A Operator response is necessary w Severity code See Table 74 Table 75 Meaning of severity codes in execution time message and their effect on return codes Severity Code Level Meaning Effect on Return Code INFORMATION Transmitting Information detected by Not affected message the run time system The program can be executed normally W WARNING W
311. g the Program You format COBOL source programs using the COBOL reference format Enter the line number COBOL statement and procedure name in the positions stipulated in the reference format Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program 17 Enter the line number COBOL statement and procedure identifier in the edit screen as shown in the following example Column position 12345678901234567890 000001 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 000002 PROGRAM ID PROG1 000012 01 A PIC X 5 VALUE AB D 000021 DISPLAY A 1 Sequence number area columns 1 to 6 Specify the line number in the sequence number area The line number can be omitted 2 Indicator area column 7 Use the indicator area when continuing a line or to change a line to a comment line In all other cases be sure to enter a space 3 Area A columns 8 to 11 Normally COBOL divisions sections paragraphs and end program headers are described in this area Data items whose level number is 77 or 01 are also described in this area 4 Area B column 12 and on Normally COBOL statements comment entries and data items whose level number is not 77 or O1 are described in this area 5 Line feed character end of line Enter a line feed character at the end of each line 6 TAB character A TAB character can be specified as the nonnumeric literal in a COBOL source program The TAB character takes up 1 byte within the non numeric literal 18 Chapter 2 Creating and
312. ge of the purchase prices in the ORDERS table EXEC SQL SELECT MAX PRICE MIN PRICE AVG PRICE INTO MAX VALUE MIN VALUE AVG VALUE FROM ORDERS END EXEC The results are set in the host variables MA X VA LUE MIN VALUE and AVG VALUE Chapter 15 Database SQL 519 Retrieving Data from Related Tables Retrieving Data from a Table Created by Relating Different Tables Data can be retrieved from a table created by relating different tables The tables are related according to their column values The following example relates three tables of the sample database in order to retrieve data The example specifies TELEVISION asa target product name and retrieves the names of companies which deal with the specified product and the order quantity of each company The STOCK and ORDERS tables are related according to the product numbers column GN O and product trade numbers column GOODSN O The ORDERS and COMPANY tables are related according to the company numbers column COMPANYNO and company numbers column CNO The following shows the query expression SELECT NAME OOH FROM STOCK ORDERS COMPANY WHERE GOODS TELEVISION AND GNO GOODSNO AND COMPANYNO CNO 520 Chapter 15 Database SQL Rows that meet the search conditions are derived from the table created by relating three tables ecg 21 erate eve eV oe Yielding the results of the query expression NAME _ OOH_ IDEA INC MOON CO
313. ger allocates FCOM and UWA areas when linkage section allocation is executed Consequently the program Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 567 can be executed in the same manner as when the READY statement is specified USE Statement Execution The USE procedure is used for branching processing if an error occurs in a system for processing the presentation file or network database function called by the application This system cannot branch processing to the USE procedure during execution because it has no system for processing the presentation file or network database function To execute the USE procedure specify a breakpoint to suspend execution Then use the debugger move to execution start point function to move the execution start point to the first instruction of the USE procedure to resume execution Executing the Presentation File Function To execute the presentation file function assign adummy file name non existent file name to the file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of the file control entry AT END Specification No actual input target file or database exists for statements with AT END specified Consequently AT END conditions are not produced and processing never branches to a statement at the AT END destination To execute a statement at the AT END destination specify a breakpoint for the first executed statement for NOT AT END then use the debugger move to execution start point
314. gical destination name is already defined for the specified server name the information is displayed Only one server machine name can be specified for a server name Client logical destination names and server logical destination names however can be specified for a server name Verify that the selected server name is correct then register a new server name by clicking on the Associate LD button 476 Chapter 14 Communication Functions If alogical destination and its opponent logical destination are both applied to an already registered server name use the Delete button in the Logical Destination Information group box to select the correct logical destination To delete all the information server machine name client logical destination name and server logical destination name of the specified server click on the Delete button in the Setting Contents group box If the specified file does not exist a new file is created If an existing file is specified information is appended to the file Chapter 14 Communication Functions 477 The following is an example of creating a logical destination definition file with this utility SERVERNAME_DEF_LIST SERVER1 SERVERNAME SERVER2 SERVERNAME SERVER3 SERVERNAME SERVER1 HOSTNM SRV1 SERVER1 LD MYLD1 LD MYLD2 LD2 MYLD3 LD3 SERVER2 SERVER2 SERVER3 SERVER3 LD 1 server name SERVERNAME 2 Server name 3 GHOSTNM server machine 4 server
315. gns in workarea which are not SEPARATE is converted from 88consortium form into COBOL85 form Appendix M Using Other File Systems 743 RDM File An RDM file can be used just like a file system as a sequential file relative file or indexed file supported by COBOL85 This section explains how to use the RDM file with COBOL85 Specifying File Environment A file reference identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of the file control entry determines whether to use the COBOL file system or RDM file system If a file identifier literal is specified as the file reference identifier specify the file identifier literal in the following format oT EDM fpath rarcue file nane FILE NAME Specify the file name or path name of the input output target file NO SPECIFICATION The COBOL file system is used RDM The RDM file system is used If a data name is specified as the filereference identifier use the file identifier literal format to specify the file with the data name specified If the character string DISK is specified as the file reference identifier the RDM file system cannot be used The COBOL file system is used 744 Appendix M Using Other File Systems If a file identifier is specified as the filereference identifier specify the same data as specified in the file identifier literal format for the environment variable that defines the file identifier as the environment variable name The environ
316. gram Compilation and Linkage Do not specify compiler options SSIN and SSOUT Program Execution Execute programs like ordinary programs Data input is requested on a console window when an ACCEPT statement in a program is executed Enter data as required Input data is set for the data item for the length 80 bytes specified in an ACCEPT statement If the length of input data is less than that of the data item the input request is repeated For character data the input request is repeated until the entered data satisfies the specified length For numeric data the input request is repeated until the Enter or Return key is pressed When a DISPLAY statement in the program is executed data is output to the console window To associate data at one entry with one ACCEPT statement use function name CON SOLE When function name CONSOLE is used space is filled if the length of input data is less than that of the data item 390 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements IDENT PROG ENVIR CONF SPEC CO DATA WORK 01 PROCE A D E END P Writing Messa FICATION DIVISION RAM ID A ONMENT DIVISION GURATION SECTION AL NAMES NSOLE IS CONS DIVISION NG STORAGE SECTION data PIC X 80 DURE DIVISION CCEPT data 1l FROM CONS SPLAY data 1 UPON CONS XIT PROGRAM ROGRAM A ges to Message Boxes This section explains how to write messages to message boxes IDENT PROG ENVIR CONF
317. gth PIC 9 4 BINARY 03 parameter character string 05 character 1 PIC X OCCURS 1 TO 100 TIMES DEPENDING ON parameter length PROCEDURE DIVISION USING parameter Execution method and result with M series host Input command CALL X9999 A LOAD A ABDCE Parameter contents fo Jala cl o Initialization file for getting same results with M series host The contents of the initialization file A MGPRM ABCDE If a program uses a function specific to the GS series special processing is required for operating the program under this system To substitute another resource and operate a program using the communication function execute input output statements for the sequential file Check the contents of the sequential file to determine whether the program operates as expected Notes Appendix Function Comparison 703 If skipping a non executable statement by using an interactive debugger and the file to be processed or the subprogram does not exist use the interactive debugger to skip input output and CALL statements For details on how to use the interactive debugger see the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide If a hexadecimal non numeric literal and national hexadecimal nonnumeric literal are used in the program take the code into consideration If the presentation file function is used the expansion format of a presentation file record fetched from a screen and form descriptors this syste
318. h print inch This is done when the resolution cannot be divided using the character interval CPI and space between lines DPI In method 1 the character stores only with the number of dots rounded by the top and left If method 1 can t be used then method 2 can be used as an alternate Coordinates for arranging printed characters can be specified with environment variable CBR_PrintTextPosition when the FORMAT clause is omitted from the file control entry Refer to Chapter 5 Format of Run time Environment Information on the method of specifying the arrangement coordinates of print characters with CBR_PrintT extPosition Form Overlay Patterns A form overlay pattern is used to set fixed sections in forms in advance such as ruled lines and headers Forms can be printed by overlaying a page of output data with a form overlay pattern A form overlay pattern is generated from a screen image with the FORM overlay option A form overlay pattern can be shared with multiple programs and form overlay patterns generated by other systems can also be used For more information about how to generate form overlay patterns refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual For printing forms when using form overlay patterns see Using Print File 2 276 Chapter 8 Printing Forms Control Buffers FCB A forms control buffer FCB defines the number of lines on one page line space and column start position By using an FCB the number o
319. hapter 11 describes fetching command line arguments and environment variable handling 384 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements ACCEPT DISPLAY Function Outline This section explains how the ACCEPT DISPLAY function inputs and outputs data with ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements For a sample program using the ACCEPT DISPLAY function refer to the Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL guide With the ACCEPT DISPLAY function data is input and output with console windows message boxes and files Additionally the current date and time can be read from the system Use the ACCEPT statement to input data and use the DISPLAY statement to output data Input output destination IDENTIFICATION DIVISION Display unit PROGRAN 1D A console window x DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 output data PIC X 80 01 input data PIC X 80 01 current date PIC 9 6 x PROCEDURE DIVISION Enter data ACCEPT input data lt Data is output ae output data Enter the current date S REI current date FROM DATE Figure 107 The ACCEPT DISPLAY function Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 385 Input Output Destination Types and Specification Methods The input output destination of data depends on e ACCEPT statement FROM specification e DISPLAY statement UPON specification e Compiler option specifications e Setting of run time environment information The following table l
320. he CHECK Function in the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide for more information 588 Appendix A Compiler Options 5 WINCOB WC 68 CONF 74 OBS NOCONF Specify CONF to indicate incompatibility between the old and new COBOL standards otherwise specify NOCONF If CONF is specified an incompatible item is indicated by l leva diagnostic messages e CONF 68 Indicate items that is interpreted differently between 68 ANSI COBOL and 85 ANSI COBOL e CONF 74 Indicate items that is interpreted differently between 74 ANSI COBOL and 85 ANSI COBOL e CONF OBS Indicates obsolete language elements and functions The compiler options CON F 68 and CON F 74 are effective only if the compiler option LANGLVL 85 is specified CONF is effective when a program created according to the existing standard is changed to 85 ANSI COBOL Appendix A Compiler Options 589 6 WINCOB WC COPY NOCOPY To display library text incorporated by the COPY statement in the source program listing specify COPY otherwise specify NOCOPY COPY is only effective when the compiler option SOURCE is specified 7 WINCOB WC CURRENCY currency symbol Specify CURREN CY to use for a character used as a currency symbol specify CURREN CY currency symbol to use another symbol If CU RREN CY currency symbol is specified refer to the CURRENCY SIGN clause explained in the COBOL85 Reference Manual for the c
321. he ODBC information file e If DEFAULT is specified in the CONNECT statement specify a fixed character string indicating the definition of default connection information in the ODBC information file e To define the data source name of each server specified in the ODBC information file specify the data source name defined in the Windows system ODBC control panel Setting Runtime Environment Information To select the ODBC environment as client server linkage software specify the information shown below in the Runtime Environment Information and is reflected in the initialization file COBOL85 CBR The file can also be edited ODBC_Inf specification of the ODBC information file name ODBC_Inf C DBMSACS INF Specify the file name that the COBOL85 run time system will refer when using ODBC See Creating an ODBC Information File for more information Creating an ODBC Information File An ODBC information file mainly contains information for connecting a client and server Use the CONNECT statement to specify the connection Use the ODBC Information Setup Tool to create an ODBC information file See Using the ODBC Information Setup Tool for more information The contents of an ODBC information file is classified into server information and default connection information 538 Chapter 15 Database SQL Defining Server Information The following table defines server information Table 57 How to define server i
322. he compiler used 10 Indicates the time required for compilation 11 Indicates the highest severity code among output diagnostic message codes Compiling a COBOL Source Program There are two methods to compile a COBOL source program One method involves running WINCOB commands from a window and the other method involves running the compiler from the command line This section explains the procedure for compiling the program using the WIN COB window For details on how to compile the program using the commands see Using Commands to Compile A source program containing several compilation units within one file cannot be compiled Compiling a Single Source File To compile files 1 Activate the WIN COB window See Activating the WIN COB Window Specify the name of the source file to be compiled in the File Name edit box See Specifying a File Name for single compilation Establish the compiler options See Setting Up Compiler Options Specify the name of the source file before establishing the compiler options Establish the library name See Setting a Library Name Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 41 Start compilation See Starting and Quitting Compilation 6 Correct any compile errors When compilation terminates a compile message appears in the window of P STAFF editor When a compile error is detected correct the program by using the error search function then r
323. he records from the file by using aREAD statement then rewrite them by using a REWRITE statement When a REWRITE statement is executed records read by the last READ statement are updated The record length cannot be changed even in the variable length record format 206 Chapter 7 File Processing Using Line Sequential Files This section explains how to define files and records and process files IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO file reference identifier ORGANIZATION IS LINE SEQUENTIAL DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size 01 record name Contents of records 02 data name PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN open mode file name READ file name WRITE record name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name Defining Line Sequential Files This section explains the file definitions required to use line sequential files in aCOBOL program Chapter 7 File Processing 207 File Name and File Reference Identifier As with a record sequential file specify a file name and file reference identifier for a line sequential file For more information about specifying these items see Defining Record Sequential Files File Organization Specify LINE SEQUENTIAL in the ORGANIZATION clause Defining Line Sequential File Records This section explains record formats lengths and
324. he system menu In this instance you cannot change from an icon to a window Only when ICON is specified in StartM ode can you change from an icon to a window 470 Chapter 14 Communication Functions 5 EndMode EndMode MANUAL AUTO Specify the action of the Inter application Communication Server window when Windows is shut down MANUAL Displays a message which states that the Inter application Communication Server window is still running after ending Windows After the Inter application Communication Server window is ended Windows should be shut down again AUTO ThelInter application Communication Server window ends with Windows shutdown No message is displayed 6 Log Log YES NO Specify whether or not to acquire the log Specify either YES or NO 7 LogType LogType ERROR TRACE Specify the log type set in the Log Acquisition Operation dialog box ERROR Specify the error log TRACE Specify the trace log Only when YES is specified for Log will this item will become effective Chapter 14 Communication Functions 471 8 LogFileName LogFileName XXXXXXXX XXX Specify the log file name set in the Log Acquisition Operation dialog box The full path name and the relative path name can be used for the log file name When the relative path name is used it becomes a relative path from the current directory The default is COBCISRV LOG Only when YES is specified f
325. heck the file assigned to the access name 1 JMP0018I U CLOSE ERROR FILE 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response Check the file assigned to the access name 1 JMP0019I U EXTERNAL DATA ATTRIBUTE ERROR DATA 1 PGM 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Response Confirm that the program 2 in which the error was detected and the program 3 which defined the EXTERNAL data 1 Appendix F Message Lists 645 have the same 1 definition A data name is usually written for 1 If no data name is defined eg FILLER the file definition number that appeared in the source program is written JMP0020I U INVALID ENTRY INFORMATION PGM 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response 16 Check whether the correspondence between the DLL name program name and secondary entry point name of the called program 1 is correctly defined in the initial file for execution 32 Check whether the entry information DLL name program name and the second entry point name of the called program is correctly defined in the entry information file specified for CBR_ENTRYFILE or in the initialization file for execution JMP0022I U EXTERNAL FILE ATTRIBUTE ERROR FILE 1 PGM 2 3 4 Abnormally terminates the program Response Confirm that the program 2 in which the error was detected and the program 3 that is first defined the EXTERNAL file 1 have the same 1 definition A file name is usua
326. hen Using Screen and Form Descriptors 32 SMED_SUFFIX NONE Specifying N one indicates there is no extension FORMLIB E FORM Specifies the storage location for screen and form descriptors When Using the File Descriptor 32 FFD_SUFFIX NONE Specifying N one indicates there is no extension FILELIB E FILE Specifies the storage location for the file descriptor Related Products COBOL85 supports the following products Table 3 Related products Name of Product FORM Design screen and form layouts Power FORM Design form layouts FORM overlay option Design overlay pattern descriptors FORM RTS Process input output of screens and forms An overview of each product is given below FORM and Power FORM FORM designs screens and forms to be displayed and printed by the COBOL program Use FORM interactively to design the layout of screens and forms Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 11 Power FORM designs the forms to be printed by the COBOL program Use Power FORM interactively to design the layout of forms FORM Overlay Option The FORM overlay option is a FORM product for designing the overlay pattern to be printed by aCOBOL program You can interactively design the layout of the overlay pattern FORM RTS FORM RTS sometimes referred to as M eFt is used implicitly when a program that reads and writes screens and forms is executed FORM RTS edits the format after receiving a screen or form I O request from
327. her the error specified message and buffer lengths are correct specified priority level is correct 2837 Monitoring time error Check whether the specified monitoring time is correct 2838 Server name error Check whether the specified server name is correct 2839 3105 3016 Server identifier error Check whether the server is connected and if the specified server identifier is correct The logical destination Check whether the logical definition file is not definition file is correctly specified correctly specified in CBR_CIINF The logical destination Check whether the data in definition file contains the logical destination incorrect specification definition file is correct and whether the server machine name host name specified in GHOSTNM is defined in the hosts file correctly Chapter 14 Communication Functions 497 Table 55 Error codes of simplified inter application communication functions cont Error Detail Explanation Response C Code Code 13 XXXX An error occurred during If this error occurs the communication between dient is disconnected from systems Detail code XXXX the server To resume Windows Sockets function communication restart error code See Table 56 operation from connection coBeI_ OPEN with the o ieee oe insufficient environment kamia The COBOL environment is Check whether simplified not established 16 inter application communication is used via
328. hin the reference range This check can be made by specifying the CHECK option e f aparameter was specified for transferring data via the CALL statement confirm that the sender and receiver have the same parameter attributes Especially check the length attribute e If afileis used confirm that the record is referenced in the correct length For example if the maximum record length is used instead of the actual record length and the remaining portion is filled with spaces the record is referenced incorrectly JMP0012I U INTERNAL PROGRAM IS RECURSIVELY CALLED IN PROGRAM 1 Abnormally terminates the program Explanation The internal program included in the outermost program 1 was Called and the internal program is re called before it terminates before execution of the STOP RUN or EXIT PROGRAM statement 644 Appendix F Message Lists Response Check the CALL statement in the called program JMP0015I U CANNOT CALL PROGRAM 1 2 Abnormally terminates the program Response e Eliminate the cause of the error according to the error code written for 2 then re execute 16 Refer to Error Codes of the Load Library function 32 Refer to Visual C on line help information a If no error code is written for 2 check whether the entry point 1 specified in the CALL statement exists in the DLL 16 JMP0016I U READ WRITE ERROR FILE S 1 Abnormally terminates the program Response C
329. his case a statement 3 specified for ON EXCEPTION is executed To update the value of an environment variable first specify the environment variable name to be updated with a DISPLAY statement 4 where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON MENT NAME is specified Then update the value of the environment variable with a DISPLAY statement 5 where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON MENT VALUE is specified If the name of the environment variable to be updated has not been specified or the area to set the value of the environment variable cannot be assigned an exception condition occurs In this case a statement 6 specified for ON EXCEPTION is executed 406 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements DISPLAY TMP1 UPON environment variable name ACCEPT value of TMP1 FROM environment variable value ON EXCEPTION MOVE occurrence of error TO END ACCEPT DISPLAY TMP2 UPON environment variable name DISPLAY value of TMP2 UPON environment variable value ON EXCEPTION MOVE occurrence of error TO END DISPLAY The lengths of environment variables cannot be obtained Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linker options are required Program Execution Execute programs as ordinary programs The value of an environment variable changed during program execution is valid only in the process being executed by the program but is invalid for programs after the pro
330. how to establish a development environment set environment variables and outlines the procedure for developing a program 2 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 COBOL85 Functions This section explains the COBOL functions and the various utilities provided by COBOL85 COBOL Functions COBOL85 has the following COBOL functions Nucleus Sequential file Relative file Indexed file Inter program communication Sort merge Source text manipulation Presentation file Database SQL System program description SD Screen handling Command line argument handling Environment variable operation Report writer Built in function Floating point number Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 3 For information about how to write COBOL statements to use these functions refer to the COBOL85 Reference M anual Programs and Utilities Provided by COBOL85 COBOL85 provides the following programs and utilities for developing programs under Windows 95 Windows NT or Windows 3 1 Table 1 COBOL85 programs and utilities Name COBOL85 compiler Compiles a described program using COBOL85 COBOL85 run time system Executes a COBOL85 application COBOL85 interactive debugger Allows you to debug a COBOL85 application STAFF environment COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Processes a COBOL85 file WINLINK command Activates the linker WIN EXEC command Activates a COBOL85 application WINMSG command 16 Activates the error search function Simplified int
331. i FORMAL easten ionn anna annaran aniran anaa aianei adstare aated iiaii 19 Fixed FOr s senceslesceluectececedcnuehodeesecesshcenstetesdedensdesyencdesandaentesvelsaetneeeveenuetoveesveedst 19 Variable FORMAL fii detec E eet eh tities en Neen 19 Free ForMalina sca scasavede val yea heh seeds ast a a a a aa a a E e Ea 20 Compiler Directing Statement sesesesssssrsrersrsrsrssstsrsrssnensntnenensununnnannnsnntnnnnnenenennnna 20 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs e eee 23 Compiling Sample Prograins c cceeecceceseeseeeeeeeeceeseeeseecsecaeeaeeessesaesaseaseesetaeeaseasiees 24 Windows 95 and Windows NT eeeeceeceeeeseeseeeeeecaeeeeeeesecaeeaeeeseesaesaseeteetaetaeeateeees 24 Windows 3 1 eis dite needed Reet a aa a iea eaa a 29 Resources Necessary for Compilation oe ee eee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetaeeaeeetetaetaseeteetsetaeeateetees 34 Files Used by the COBOL85 Compiler ceeececsseeeeeseeeteeeseeeeeecesaeeaseetsesaeeaeeetaes 34 Information Provided by the COBOL85 Compile eceeeeceeceesteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 38 Compiling a COBOL Source Program cececceeseeseeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeecaesaseaseeseesaetateetees 40 Compiling a Single Source File cesses sseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeecaetaeeesesaetaseeseesaesaeeateeees 40 Compiling Several Source FIlCS 0 eeeceececesseeeeeeeecaeeeeeeesecaesaseeseesaesaseeseessetaseateeees 41 WINCOB MAO a a ee EAA a aes 43 Activating the WIN COB Window 32 s esssssssssssssrssssrsrssrsrssrsrsrnrnsrnr
332. ib LIBW Cprog DEF CPROG OB C program object file name LIBENTRY OB Name of the initialization function to be dynamically linked CPROG DLL Name of the DLL to be generated CPROG MAP Map file name optional CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library Refer to C manuals With Microsoft C LDLLCEW is applicable to this import library 376 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication LIBW LIB Windows function import library name CPROG DEF C program module definition file name 4 Generating DLLs from COBOL programs and C programs that call COBOL programs LINK NOD COB OBJ Cprog OBJ F1IBCOWEP OBJ COB DLL COB MAP F1BCCIMP FIBCARMV Cimplib LIBW COB DEF COB OB COBOL program object file name CPROG OB C program object file name FIBCOWEP LIB Name of the initialization function to be dynamically linked COB DLL Name of the DLL to be generated COB MAP Map file name optional FIBCCIMP LIB FIBCARMV LIB COBOL run time system import library name CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library LIBW LIB Windows function import library name Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 377 COB DEF COBOL program module definition file name To generate the DLL except for the following cases link FIBCOWEP LIB which contains the DLL initialization function LibM ain and the termination function WEP e TheC program provides DLL initialization and ter
333. ication in the WHENEVER clauseis not available Details on the embedded SQL statement syntax comply with the database specification and the specification of the database related products Notes on Executing Embedded SQL Statements Embedded SQL statements that can be used and the methods of specifying the statements are different between ODBC drivers If embedded SQL statements are specified in the COBOL source program refer to product manuals as well as the COBOL specification for e ODBC driver 554 Chapter 15 Database SQL e Software and hardware related to ODBC driver e Database management system To quit transactions use the COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements otherwise the operation may not be guaranteed Before using the DISCONNECT statement to terminate a connection execute the COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements to terminate the transaction If X 00 is stored as a value in character data the storage and fetch results are not assured Details on the embedded SQL statement syntax comply with the database specification and the specification of the database related products Quantitative Limits of Embedded SQL Statement at Execution An embedded SQL statement can be up to 4 096 bytes in length The maximum length may be shorter depending on the ODBC driver environment For example the maximum length of an embedded SQL statement may be shorter than 4 096 bytes because of the maximum length of data transferred by the soft
334. ick on the Browse button the Browse Files dialog box is displayed Select the library required by the dependent source file selected in Step 1 4 Click on the OK button The library file name is displayed in the File edit box of the Library Files dialog box 5 Click on the Add button The library file name is added to the Library Files list box 6 After all library files are registered click on the OK button The Dependent Files dialog box is redisplayed 7 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 for all source programs using the library 182 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Registering Other Required Files Other required files are registered in the Dependent Files dialog box The file selection process in the Dependent Files dialog box is the same as for source files Register required files to the project after determining the type of link and program structure The following files can be registered to the project e Module definition file Required when creating a DLL See Creating the Module Definition File e Objectfile Object files created in COBOL or other language can be specified e Import library An import library created by the project is required when executable programs have a dynamic link structure The import library must have the name DLL name LIB When a DLL is created an import library target name LIB is created If this file already exists the existing fileis replaced with a new one e Other librarie
335. ify the name of a non existent file Changing Environment File Contents To change environment file contents specify the environment file name then click on the Update button The COBPRTST Update Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 575 dialog box is displayed Change environment file contents See Using the COBPRTST Update Dialog Box Starting a Presentation File Module Test Click on the OK button at completion of input to the COBPRTST dialog box The presentation file module test is executed Quitting a Presentation File Module Test Click on the Cancel button Using the COBOL85 Interactive Debugger If a presentation file is used with a function specific to GS host and is destined for ACM APL TRM CMD or WST the COBOL85 interactive debugger is required to assist in processing If the file is executed without the debugger a message is outputted indicating host specific functions cannot be executed under this system The program is forcibly terminated This section explains how to start processing with the COBOL85 interactive debugger Activating the COBOL85 Interactive Debugger Select WINSVD from the Tools menu of the P STAFF window Refer to the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide for additional details 576 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Debugging Open the Start Debugging dialog box To use the presentation file module test function specify the following Applic
336. ify the required setup items Start Debugging x Application Source Descriptor Debugging Information Batch Debugging Application I SNDB NDBTP TC3CONNT EXE Browse Execution time option Start program Cancel Help Figure 139 The Start Debugging dialog box Application tab selected Set the application name in the A pplication edit box Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 565 Start Debugging x Application Source Descriptor Debugging Information Batch Debugging Source file storage folders Browse Copy library storage folders o O OE Browse Subschema descriptor file storage folders IANDB NDBTPSAIMLIB Browse Cancel Help Figure 140 The Start Debugging dialog box Source tab selected Set the Subschema descriptor file storage folder directory in the Subschema descriptor file storage folders edit box 3 Click on the OK button The program is executed then the debugger screen is displayed 4 Thedebugger automatically suspends program execution when a statement using a GS specific function is executed It displays the Data Name List dialog box that shows the data names related to the network database function and presentation file function Selected when the program is executed You can confirm the content of the data or open it by selecting the data name and clicking on the Display Modify button Th
337. ile must be the same as the fileidentifier defined in the program Specify an environment variable indicating that MeFt NET is used as a connector There are the following two specification methods e Set MEFTNET for the connector name with the file identifier as an environment variable name 342 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens e Set MEFTNET for environment variable CBR_PSFILE_PRT For details on how to set MEFTNET see Environment Variables in Chapter 5 The following example shows how to perform screen input output with the presentation file module Contents of the ASSIGN clause in a COBOL program Contents of the initialization file When using FORM RTS DSPFILE C DIR1 MEFWRC When using MeFt NET 32 DSPFILE MEFWRC MEF TNET Assign a window information file to the fileidentifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of aCOBOL program Display File Input Interruption When M eFt is called from other applications the system waits for input and the display can be interrupted This is true only when M eFt is used Refer to COBOL Supported Subroutine in Appendix N for details Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 343 Using the Screen Handling Function This section explains how to perform screen input output using the screen handling function For sample programs using the screen handling function refer to the Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL guide IDENTIFICATION DIVISIO
338. in procedures for processing using the presentation file module test function Note When the display file unit test function is used add the directory where FORM RTSis stored to the environmental variable PATH Activating the COBPRTST Dialog Box If the presentation file is destined for PRT or DSP activate the COBPRTST dialog box This section explains the procedure for using the COBPRTST dialog box 574 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions How to Activate the COBPRTST Dialog Box Use the COBPRTST command to execute a presentation file module test The COBPRTST dialog box can be activated as follows e Customize the COBPRTST command in the PROGRAM MING STAFF Utility menu and select it from the drop down menu to start Windows 95 or Windows NT Execute COBPRTST EXE Windows 3 1 e Select COBPRTST EXE in the File M anager directory window e Define COBPRTST EXE asa program icon in Program Manager then double click on the icon e Select the Run command from the Program M anager menu or File Manager and enter the COBPRTST command in command form Specifying an Activation Name Specify the screen descriptor name of the initial screen in the Invocation N ame text box of the COBPRTST dialog box See Using the COBPRTST Dialog Box Specifying an Environment File Name Specify an environment file name in the Environment File text box of the COBPRTST dialog box To create a new environment file spec
339. ine records for indexed files IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO file reference identifier ORGANIZATION IS INDEXED ACCESS MODE IS access mode RECORD KEY IS prime key name 1 prime key name n WITH DUPLICATES ALTERNATE RECORD KEY IS alternate record key name 1 alternate key name n WITH DUPLICATES DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size 01 record name Contents of records 02 prime key name 1 02 prime key name n 02 alternate key name 1 02 alternate key name n 02 data other than keys PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN open mode file name MOVE prime key value TO prime key name n MOVE alternate key value TO alternate key name n READ file name REWRITE record name DELETE file name START file name WRITE record name CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name 222 Chapter 7 File Processing Defining Indexed Files This section explains the file definitions required to use indexed files in aCOBOL program File Name and File Reference Identifier As with a record sequential file specify a file name and file reference identifier for an indexed file For more information about how to specify these items see Defining Record Sequential Files File Organization Specify INDEXED in the ORGANIZATION cl
340. ing Entry Information Select Section Information from the Section Selection menu in the Run time Environment Setup window The Entry Information list box is displayed Enter the required entry information and add it to the List by clicking on the Set button Chapter 5 Executing Programs 161 Entry information can also be set without using the Run time Environment Setup window Create an entry information file and specify the entry information file name in the environment variable CBR_ENTRY FILE For the format see Format of Run time Environment Information Saving to the Initialization File When the Save button is clicked the information in the list box is saved in the initialization file Saving in the initialization file means that the same run time environment information can be used the next time the program is executed Saving modifies the existing information Setting Printers When using a printer printer information can be set Select Printer from the Environment Setup menu of the Run time Environment Setup window then set required information in the Printer N ame Selection dialog box Printer Name Selection Printer Name FUJITSU FMLBP 7 Cancel Help Figure 53 The Printer Name Selection dialog box 162 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Exiting the Run time Environment Setup Window Click on the OK button to close the Run time Environment Setup window and start the program Run time environment
341. ing that the system completed linking is displayed in the message box Make sure that linking has completed successfully then close the message box This completes linking of the sample program M ake sure that an executable program SAM PLE1 EXE is created in the directory containing the sample program in this example C FSC PCOBOL16 SAMPLES SAMPLE Resources Required for Linking Object programs compiled from COBOL source programs are usually linked using WINLINK WINLINK allows you to create libraries import libraries dynamic link libraries DLLs and executable files through simple screen operations This section briefly describes the files required for linking You must take into account the type of link required and the program structure See Linkage Types and Program Structure Before linking using WINLINK the work disk drive must be set in environment variable TMP This following examples illustrate the files used and created by WINLINK 72 Chapter 4 Linking Programs r Building COBOL Libraries 22222222 r errr rere errr ener 1 Object files OBJ ee OBJ ie L Lb tL WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries L LIB 3 Library Figure 30 Building COBOL libraries with WINLINK c Linking Files Creating an Import Library and DLL 7 777 7 777 5 1 Object 2 Module 3 Library Other Library file definition file if necessary if necessary
342. ining Form Overlay Patterns FOVLDIR directory name Specify the directory containing form overlay patterns by using an absolute path name If omitted no form overlay patterns are printed Only one directory can be specified in directory name 33 OVD_SUFFIX Set the Extension of the Form Overlay Pattern File OVD_SUFFIX extension Specify an extension string in extension if the default extension of the form overlay pattern file OVD is not used When the file name has no extension specify N one 34 FOVLTYPE Set the Format of the Form Overlay Pattern File FOVLTYPE format Specify the first four characters of the form overlay pattern file name if they are not KOL5 default Entry Information Information about program entry points is required only for programs having dynamic program structure Entry information can be placed in either e The initialization file for execution COBOL85 CBR e A file whose name is given in the CBR_ENTRYFILE environment variable 148 Chapter 5 Executing Programs See Environment Variables for details on the CBR_ENTRYFILE variable Entry Information for Separately Linked Subprograms Subprogram name DLL file name Relates the name used in the COBOL CALL statement to the name of the DLL file containing the subprogram Entry statements are grouped under the tag main program ENTRY For example Program call relations Entry information A ENTRY 1 Pr
343. inter after executing input output statements of O Figure 85 Print lines with AFTER ADVANCING When writing WRITE A FROM B definethe CHARACTER TYPE clause for B but not for A If the CHARACTER TYPE clause is defined for both A and B only the specification of B is valid Program Compilation and Linkage There are no required compiler and linker options Program Execution First assign a printer Assigning a printer depends on the contents of descriptions in the ASSIGN clause in the file control entry This section explains how to specify a printer in a program or initialization file and gives the relation between the contents of descriptions in the ASSIGN clause and the output destination by using examples 284 Chapter 8 Printing If the destination of a print file is other than a printer contents are not assured Specifying a Printer A printer can be specified by the following methods e Printer name e Local printer port name LPTn or Serial port name COMn Where n is a number from 1 9 Windows 95 Use the information in the Details tab of the Printer Properties dialog box to obtain the printer name To access the Details tab click on the Start button and then select Settings gt Printers Highlight a printer and select Properties from the File menu Click on the Details tab The Printer Properties dialog box with the Details tab selected is shown below Chapter 8 Printing 285 HP La
344. ion for more details 5 Logs can be collected and logical destination information can be displayed during client execution For screen operation and setup see Simplified Inter application Communication Server Window 6 to 9 Switch the logical destination mode back to the original mode The logical destinations no longer have permission for reading and writing messages Delete the messages and logical destinations then quit the server The procedure for client operation 1 Set up the operating environment Define the information in the hosts files and services files See step 1 of the procedure for server operation 2 Create a logical destination definition file 454 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Start the logical destination definition file creation utility 16 COBCIU16 EXE 32 COBCIU 32 EXE to create a logical destination definition file For the screen operation and setup see Logical Destination Definition File Creation Utility 3 Start the program A client requires information regarding the logical destination definition file at run time Therefore specify CBR_CIIN F definition filename in the initial file for COBOL execution or in the Run time Environment Setup window Windows 95 and Windows NT are designed so that the definition file name can be directly specified in the environment variable The definition file name can be specified with the relative path from the directory containing th
345. ion in Chapter 5 for details on specifying entry information Using the Subroutine from an Application pplication A OPEN Presentation file CALL JMPBGWDH 5 READ Presentation file 2 gt gt S o B CALL psy _cancely read K Figure 145 A sample application using the window handle subroutine 1 The window handle acquired according to the window handle acquisition subroutine is notified of application B Delivery of the data between processes 2 READ statement of the display file is executed and enters the state of the waiting for input from the screen 3 The window handle notified from application A is specified for the function of FORM RTS and the input interruption of the screen is ordered 4 The input completion is notified to interrupt the input waiting for the screen and to have been done to application A compulsorily The input interruption is notified of application B 9E is notified of the I O state value of READ sentence of the display file and 9E5A is notified of detailed information 750 Appendix N COBOL Supported Subroutine Subroutine for Receiving the Instance Handle The instance handle of the windows COBOL application can be received Specification Method Data definition 01 data name 02 data name 1 PIC S9 9 COMP 5 02 FILLER PIC X 12 Specification of the CALL statement CALL JMPBWINS WITH C LINKAGE USING data nam
346. ion 343 UWA 566 V variable format 19 variable length character string 530 variable length character string data 530 variable length record 195 W WINCOB 6 window attributes changing for screen handling 345 window information file generating to perform input output processing 340 WINEXEC 6 152 WINLINK 6 71 90 files used by 71 using 68 70 WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window 98 WINLINK Linking Files window 91 WINLINK window activating 90 WINMSG 16 6 WITH LOCK 240
347. ion 451 server windows operating 454 SET CONNECTION statement 507 setting compiler options 183 setting the main program 180 SHARE 117 share mode 242 SIA COBOL syntax 555 simple structure 81 simplified inter application communication error codes 493 simplified inter application communication 6 449 client server procedures 451 functions 480 using 449 simplified inter application communication function 432 Simplified Inter application Communication Server window 456 displaying information 461 sort 408 types 411 sort processing 414 SORT statement 412 Sort merge file 412 414 417 419 SORT STATUS 418 source program creating 16 reference format 19 special registers input output 339 SQL statements 508 determining dynamically 526 SQLCODE 550 SQLMSG 550 SQLSTATE 515 550 SS registers 372 SSIN 396 SSOUT 396 stack checks 372 static linkage 81 STOP RUN statement 357 subprograms returning control from 357 subschema name paragraph 566 SYSERR 391 392 SYSIN access name 145 SYSOUT access name 145 system program description SD functions 421 422 T TAB character 17 TERMINATOR 146 345 TRANSACTION management statement 559 Types of Input Output Using Screens 328 U UPDATE statement 522 UPON clause 392 USE FOR DB EXCEPTION statement 560 USE FOR DEAD LOCK statement 560 USE procedure 567 USING clause 365 USING input file name 412 Using the Screen Handling Funct
348. ion The message in the highest priority level is first read Messages in the same priority level are read in the order they were written A priority level can be specified in the range from 1 highest to 9 If the specified priority level does not exist at the server logical destination the message is stored in the priority level nearest to the one specified A negative value cannot be specified Chapter 14 Communication Functions 491 Specify a processing type for MSGTYPE The following text explains processing types e Queuing not specified Specify 0 for MSGTY PE Consequently if a message cannot be written because the logical destination has no free space the system immediately returns control The system returns an error code indicating no free space e Queuing specified Specify 1 for MSGTY PE Consequently the system waits until messages up to the maximum number of instructions specified in the system have been written to the logical destination Monitoring time can be specified for WAITTIME at the same time The specified monitoring time must bein the range from 0 to 999999999 seconds If O is specified infinite wait time is assumed Note Again this depends on the maximum number of instructions specified in the system If the logical destination fails to make free space within the specified time the system returns the error code e Forced execution specified Specify 2 for MSGTY PE Consequently more messages
349. is written for s2 Appendix F Message Lists 637 Number of users exceeded the specified maximum Compilation terminated Response Start processing when the number of users becomes smaller than the specified maximum Error occurred in LANPACK environment Sst Compilation terminated Response Check and eliminate the cause of the error The character string indicating the error information is written for s See Table 72 Table 72 Error information Character String Error Information Programmer Response SETERR The environment variable for Check if LAN PACK is installed LAN PACK is not specified correctly correctly NOUSFILE The control file for LAN PACK is not found OTHERERR Other error The error is probably caused by LANPACK Collect the error information and call your Fujitsu SE Messages Produced by the COBOL85 Compiler This section explains messages written by the COBOL85 compiler The following shows the message format message number line number message text e message number e message number is displayed as shown below 638 Appendix F Message Lists JMNnnnnI S JMN Prefix indicates a COBOL compiler message nnnn Message serial number I Indicates that operator response is not required S Indicates the severity code See Table 73 Table 74 Severity codes of messages output by the COBOL85 compiler Severity Code Level S Meaning i Return Code INFORMATION Transmittin
350. ists the module definition statements that can be used Table 6 Module definition statements 32 Module Description Statement Defines the module name of an application SECTIONS Sets the attribute of a specific section EXPORTS Specifies the PROGRAM ID and ENTRY names VERSION Embeds the version number The module definition file must contain the following statements e LIBRARY STACKSIZE Specifies the stack size in bytes e EXPORTS When the file is created automatically the specified object name is set as EXPORTS 78 Chapter 4 Linking Programs The following figure shows the contents of the module definition file created from the WINLINK Linking Files window t PROGRAMMING STAFF BE File Edit Search Project Tools Window Help 7 C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLE S SAMPLE 5 Printprc def Module Definition File for PRINTPRC DLL LIBRARY The name of the dynamic link library is required LIBRARY PRINTPRC EXPORTS PROGRAM ID and ENTRY name are required NOTICE In the DEF file creating function of PROGRAMMING STAFF the object name is specified for EXPORTS statement Please change to a correct name EXPORTS PRINTPRC Figure 33 A module definition file created by WINLINK Module Definition File Contents 16 The module definition file used under Windows 3 1 is required for linking Create the file with a text editor Even if no module definition file is specified in the WINLINK Linking Files window it
351. ists the relationship between these specifications and input output destinations Table 41 Input output destinations of the ACCEPT DISPLAY function FROM or UPON Compile Option tobe Run time Input Output D estination Specification Specified Environment Information Setting None or function None Enter afilename Display unit console window name for the run time SYSIN SYSOUT SSIN run time environment File 2 1 environment information name information name SSOUT run time environment information name Function name Enter a blank for Display unit message box SYSERR MessOutFile Enter afilename File for M essOutFile Function name Display unit console window CONSOLE 1 386 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 1 1 and 3 cannot both be used simultaneously in the program through its complete execution The direction specified in the first ACCEPT or DISPLAY statement executed in the program becomes effective 2 When SYSIN and SYSOUT are specified for compiler options SSIN and SSOUT as environment variable names the input source and output destinations are system standard input and output Reading Writing Data with Console Windows This section explains how to write compile link and execute programs and provides an example of the simplest coding using console windows IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 data name PROCEDURE
352. itial screen use FORM to create a screen descriptor of the initial screen Create more screen and form descriptors if they are required for application programs For how to use FORM refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual To split a screen define a split procedure To define a split procedure select split procedure definition during creation of the screen descriptor Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 571 Split procedure definition defines operation according to input data field input value or attention type for any data item of the screen descriptor For details on the split procedure refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual Creating a COBOL Source Program Use the editor to create a COBOL source program A knowledge of COBOL85 and presentation file interface is required for creating a COBOL source program For details refer to the COBOL Reference M anual FORM V1 3 Manual and the FORM RTS online heap Compiling and Linking a Program See Distributed Development Support Functions for the procedure for compiling and linking a program The program to be used with the presentation file module test function must be created in DLL format Creating a Window and Printer Information Files The presentation file module test function needs the window information file for the initial screen If screens and forms are to be used with application programs create the additional window information files an
353. ition switch status condition Nucleus Environment SUBSCH EMA Operation can definition NAME paragraph be checked with the Basic instruction Appendix Function Comparison 695 Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification SM Function Classification SM Classification Lessee a file Environment definition File definition Comparison Function outline APPLY WRITE ONLY clause MULTIPLE FILE TAPE clause RERUN clause PASSWORD clause RESERVE AREA cause Data name specified in the ASSIGN clause DISK specified in the ASSIGN clause PRINTER specified in the ASSIGN clause LOCK MODE clause Other than the above No functional meaning for this system The program that was operating with the GS series operates as before BLOCK CONTAINS clause ae than the ae CODE SET clause 696 Appendix Function Comparison Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Comparison Function outline Function outline Function Classification sS amp Y Function Classification sS amp Y Classification Classification p file Input output statement Line fee file eae file Environment definition File definition WITH LOCK specified in an input output statement UNLOCK statement above RERUN clause Data name specified in the ASSIGN cl
354. izing PERFORM statements Integrating adjacent moves Eliminating unnecessary substitutions 620 Appendix C Global Optimization Removing a Common Expression For arithmetic or conversion processing if possible the previous results are reserved and used without additional execution of arithmetic or conversion processing Example 1 I PIC S99 BINARY J PIC S99 BINARY K PIC S99 BINARY REC 1 02 AQ OCCURS 25 TIMES O3 A PIC XX OCCURS 10 TIMES 02 BO OCCURS 35 TIMES 03 B PIC XX OCCURS 10 TIMES MOVE SPACE TO A Clg lt MOVE SPACE TO B I K If does not change in value between 1 and 2 in Example 1 the address calculation formula for A I J A 22 1 20 J 2 and the address calculation formula for B I K B 22 1 20 K 2 will have I 20 in common Therefore COBOL optimizes the latter to use the result of the former A is assumed to indicate the address A 1 1 here Appendix C Global Optimization 621 Example 2 Z1 DISPLAY Z2 DISPLAY Bl BINARY B2 BINARY COMPUTE Z1 COMPUTE Z2 In Example 2 B1 and B2 remain unchanged between 1 and 2 B1 B2 becomes common and 2 is optimized so it uses results of 1 Shifting an Invariant For arithmetic or conversion processing done within a loop the processing can be performed outside the loop if the same results would be obtained regardless of whether the processing is done within or outside the loop Example 1 PIC S9 4 BINARY
355. ject file Assign the name target name DEF to module definition files The EXPORTS module definition statement in DLL is automatically set with the file name of the source file and object file depending on the target excluding their extension If the Chapter 6 Project Management Function 187 program identifier differs from the file name modify the value of EXPORTS Building and Rebuilding the Project You must either build or rebuild the project when any file registered to the project is updated or when you change compiler or linker options To build or rebuild the project click on the Build or Rebuild button in the Project window Compile errors can be corrected by jumping to the editor from the message window The following table lists system processing executed with Build Rebuilding means that the system recompiles and relinks all registered programs Table 14 Build processing Update C ontents Building COBOL source program 1 Recompile the updated program 2 Relink dependent on the updated Library file 1 Recompile all programs defining the library 2 Relink all programs dependent on the programs recompiled in 1 Modifying File Contents Contents of files registered to programs COBOL source programs library text and module definition statements can be modified by using an editor To open the editor double click on a file name displayed in the Project window Refer to Using the P STAFF Editor in
356. k file for sort processing must be defined The ASSIGN clause is assumed as a comment up to 8 alphanumeric characters must be specified in it e Input file Define the same way as for ordinary file processing if required e Output file Define the same way as for ordinary file processing if required When performing merge processing within the same program define only one sort merge file DATA DIVISION Define the records of files defined in the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION PROCEDURE DIVISION The SORT statement is used for sort processing The contents of the SORT statement differ depending on what is used for input output e For fileinput USING input filename must be specified e For record input INPUT PROCEDURE input procedure name must be specified Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function 413 e For file output GIVING output file name must be specified e For record output OUTPUT PROCEDURE output procedure name must be specified The input procedure specified in INPUT PROCEDURE can pass records to be sorted one by one with the RELEASE statement The output procedure specified in OUTPUT PROCEDURE can receive sorted records one by one with the RETURN statement Multiple sort keys can be specified When all records are sorted the sort result is set in special register SORT STATUS Special register SORT STATUS need not be defined in the COBOL program since it is automatically gener
357. l Performs reference modification with an incorrect value then continues processing U level Aborts the program Response Correct the program so that reference modification of the data item indicated in the message is performed within the specified range The outermost program name is written for 1 The statement number line information copy qualification value linenumber verb number is written for 2 The operand name is written for 3 JMP0822I E U ODO OBJECT VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE PGM 1 LINE 2 OPD 3 ODO 4 E level Uses the object value specified in the OCCURS DEPEN DING ON clauseas is then continues processing U level Aborts the program Explanation The object value specified in the OCCURS DEPEN DING ON clause is not within the permitted range Response Specify a correct value for the object in the OCCURS DEPENDING ON clause indicated in the message then re execute The outermost program name is written for 1 The statement number line information copy qualification value line number verb number is written for 2 The name of the operand that refers to the data including the OCCURS DEPEN DING outermost program name ON clause is written for 3 The object name specified in the OCCURS DEPEN DING ON clause is written for 4 Appendix F Message Lists 681 JMP0899I1 U LOGICAL ERROR Abnormally terminates the programs Response The program or dynamic area may be damaged because of a prog
358. lation This section explains the WINCOB window For further details about using the window refer to the online help Activating the WINCOB Window 32 The WIN COB window can be started by either e Selecting WIN COB from the Tools menu of the P STAFF window or e Executing WINCOB EXE The WIN COB Standard Compilation mode window is displayed t WINCOB on Mode Help Source File Options m Eor Compile Figure 18 The WINCOB window in Standard Compilation mode The WIN COB window contains the following elements M ode 44 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Specify whether a single program standard or multiple programs continuous are to be compiled Help Access the online help Source file edit box Specify the COBOL source file to be compiled Browse button Click to browse directories to sdect a COBOL source file OK button Click to start compilation Cancel button Click to close the WIN COB window Options button Click to specify compile options Compile button Click to start compilation Specify the COBOL source program to be compiled by either entering it in the source file edit box or by using the Browse button to select a file Specifying Continuous Compilation To compile more than one program select Continuous compilation from the Mode menu in the WINCOB window The WIN COB window expands to include the continuous compilation options Specify the file names t
359. layed in the File edit box For an existing project file select the Files button in the Project window The Dependent Files dialog box is displayed Click on the Set button and the Target Files dialog box is displayed 178 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Target Files Ed m Target Files File ie Cancel Browse Hel bie Add e OBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 S ample5 EXE OBOL32 SAMPLES SSAMPLE5 Printpre DLL Update ul Delete E Figure 58 The Target Files dialog box 2 Enter anamein the File edit box and click on the Add button To update select a target name to update from the Target Files list box enter the file name in the File edit box and click on the Update button 3 Repeat Step 2 until all target files have been registered 4 After all target files have been registered click on the OK button The Dependent Files dialog box is displayed Registering Source Files Source files are registered in the Dependent Files dialog box To register source files 1 For anew project click on the OK button in the Target Files dialog box For an existing project file click on the Files button on the Project window Chapter 6 Project Management Function 179 Dependent Files Figure 59 The Dependent Files dialog box Select a file from Targets 3 Click on the Browse button the Browse Files dialog box is displayed and you can select the source files required for the ta
360. le control entry cont oo i ee Information Details and Use of Specification Type Optional FILE STATUS Data name Specify a data name defined as a 2 byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The execution results of input output processing must be specified for this data name See Appendix B I O Status List for the value to be specified Specify a 4 byte alphanumeric data item for detailed information SESSION Data name Specify a data name defined as a 1 byte CONTROL numeric item in the WORKING clause STORAGE section or LINKAGE section Input output processing priority 1 9 must be specified for this name when communication starts A value of 1 specifies the highest priority If the default or 0 is specified the system assumes the lowest level of specified logical destination MESSAGE Data name Specify a data name defined as a 1 byte MODE clause numeric item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section Input output processing priority 1 9 must be specified for this name when communication starts A value of 1 specifies the highest priority If the default or 0 is specified the system assumes the lowest level of specified logical destination Optional Chapter 14 Communication Functions 447 Table 51 Information to be specified in the file control entry cont DESTINATION 1 clause DESTINATION 2 clause MESSAGE OWNER clause MESSAGE CODE clau
361. led Data and COBOL85 Handled Data COBOL85 handles the ODBC data corresponding definitions listed in the following table To understand how an ODBC driver handles ODBC SQL data refer to ODBC driver users guide and online help Data contents can only be assured when data correspondence as defined in the following table is used Table 61 Correspondence between ODBC and COBOL85 data handling Arithmetic Data ODBC SQL Data Type COBOL 85 Description Binary SQL_SMALLINT SMALLINT PIC S9 4 BINARY or PIC S9 4 COMP 5 SQL_INTEGER INTEGER PICS9 9 BINARY or PIC S9 9 COMP 5 Decimal SQ DECIMAL DECIMAL SQL_NUMERIC NUMERIC Internal floating SQL_REAL REAL COMP 1 point SQL_DOUBLE FLOAT COMP 2 PIC S 9p PACKED DECIMAL or PIC S9 amp p V9 q PACKED DECIMAL 1 lt p lt 15 1 lt q p q lt 18 PIC S p PIC S9 p VXq SIGN IS LEADING SEPARATE CHARACTER TRAILING 1 lt p lt 15 1 lt q p q lt 18 Character Data Chapter 15 Database SQL 549 ODBC SQL Data Type COBOL85 Description Fixed length SQL_CHAR CHAR Variable SQL_VARCHAR VCHAR 1 Depends on the database that supports national character data and the database related products 2 Specify the number of characters for the variable length of character data PIC X n 1 lt n lt 254 PIC N n 1 lt n lt 127 1 01 data name 1 49 data name 2 PIC S9 m COMP 5 49 data name 3 PIC X n m 4or9 1 lt n lt 254 01 d
362. length is not displayed If the maximum record length is variable the maximum record length is displayed If the minimum record length is variable the minimum record length is displayed Record key information Displays key information for the index file The format of the key information is the same as the format of key information specified when the index file is created by the Load command Refer to the online help for more details Block length Displays the length of one block in the index file Block increment Displays block increments in the index file Compress of record data Displays whether or not the stored record data is compressed Chapter 7 File Processing 265 Key data compression Displays whether or not the stored key data is compressed Number of records Displays the number of records in the index file Number of blocks Displays the number of blocks in the index file Number of empty blocks Displays the number of unused blocks in the index file e Recover corrupt indexed files with the lt Recovery gt command r Recovered file name Browse Cancel Unrecoverable data store file name Help Browse Figure 82 Recovering corrupt files with the Recovery command 266 Chapter 7 File Processing e Reorganize delete empty blocks indexed files with the lt Reorganize gt command REORGANIZE _ i Ts Figure 83 Reorganizing indexed fil
363. licking on a file name displayed in the Project window opens the P STAFF editor edit screen See Modifying File Contents Execute the program Click on the Execute button to execute the created application program from the Project window See Executing Application Programs Chapter 6 Project Management Function 175 Project Window The Project window is displayed when the project file is opened In the Project window you can e Edit the project file Register files set compiler options and set linker options e Build and rebuild the project e Edit registered files e Execute created application programs Th Fies Heedgeertea Build E Rebula P execute EQ CAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLES SAMPLES EXE CAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLESSPRINTPRC LIB BB C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 SAMPLE5 COB O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 S_REC CBL OCAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLESSPRINTPRC DLL O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 PRINTPRC COB O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 S_REC CBL i C FSC PCOBOL32 S4MPLES SAMPLES PRINTPRC DEF re i Figure 57 The Project window File names registered in the project are displayed Each fileis marked with a small icon that indicates its designated category 176 Chapter 6 Project Management Function The Project Window contains the following elements Files button Edit the dependent files list Compiler Options button Display enter and edit the compiler options
364. line sequential file processing and outlines the processing Using Input Output Statements OPEN CLOSE READ and WRITE statements are used in line sequential file processing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Execute an OPEN statement only once at the beginning of file processing and a CLOSE statement only once at the end of file processing Chapter 7 File Processing 209 The open mode specified in the OPEN statement depends on the kind of file processing For example for creation use the OPEN statement in the OUTPUT mode OUTPUT specified Other Statements To read records in a file use a READ statement To write records to afile use a WRITE statement Execution Order of Input Output Statements The execution order of input output statements for creating referencing and extending are as follows For file creation OPEN OUTPUT file name Editing records WRITE record name CLOSE file name For file extension OPEN EXTEND file name Editing records WRITE record name CLOSE file name For record reference OPEN INPUT file name READ file name CLOSE file name 210 Chapter 7 File Processing Processing Outline Creating To create a line sequential file open a filein OUTPUT mode then write records to the file with a WRITE statement If an attempt was made to create a file that already exists the file is recreated and the original file are lost The contents of the record ar
365. list box Multiple files can be selected 2 Click on the Main button The small icon next to the selected file turns red The setting of Main or Subprogram in the WIN COB Continuous Compilation mode window takes priority over the setting in the Options dialog box When selecting files from the compilation list failure to click on the M ain button causes the selected file name to be regarded as a subprogram Be sure to set up the file as the main program by clicking on the Main button Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 49 Starting and Quitting Compilation To start compilation click on the Compile button Compilation starts and a window showing compilation progress is displayed COBOL Samplel cob SAMPLE1 r Quit Figure 20 The compilation progress window N ote The countdown begins at number 9 Click on the Quit button to interrupt the compile When compilation ends a compile message appears in the window of P STAFF editor If a compile error is detected correct the program by using the error search function See Correcting a Compile Error To quit compilation click on the Cancel button to close the WIN COB window 50 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Compiler Options Dialog Box This section explains how to set the compiler options and library names You must define the source file name to be compiled in the WINCOB window before setting the compiler options To set compiler options click on
366. lly written for 1 If the file name cannot be written the file definition number that appeared in the source program is written One of the character strings shown in Table 75 is written for 4 Table 76 Character strings written for JMP0022I U 4 646 Appendix F Message Lists Common file organizations ACCESS M ODE ACCESS NAME FILE ORG LOCK MODE MAXRL MINRL OPTIONAL REC MODE Appendix F Message Lists 647 Relative Indexed file 4 ErrorContents _ ___ o o O KEY LEN_ REL ATR_ KEY LEN Key length REL ATR Attribute of the relative key item REL COL Column count of the relative key item REL KEY Presence or absence of RELATIVE KEY clause specification REL LEN Length of the relative key item REL NAME Name of the relative key item Print file Error Contents 4 ErrorContents o O ADVANCING Presence or absence of the WRITE statement in which ROMANS ADVANCING igata o nwn CHAR TYPE Presence or absence of specification of how to write the ANPE CHARACTER Type ause for formata o S LINAGE Presence or absence of specification of the LIN AGE dause 648 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0026I1 W NO ON EXCEPTION STATEMENT EXISTS WHEN EXCEPTION OCCURRED ON 2 1 STATEMENT Continues processing Response Specify the ON EXCEPTION clause in the 2 statement ACCEPT or DISPLAY statement corresponding to the 1 function name ARGUMENT VALUE or ENVIRON MENT VALUE JMP0092I U CANNOT REGISTER WIN
367. m Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Create an import library 16 For Windows 3 1 check Building Import Libraries in the Command menu Start linking the subprogram See Starting and Quitting Linking The DLL the import library DLL name LIB and export file of the subprogram are created If the import library already exists a message will be displayed Then create the executable for the main program Select EXE in the Type box Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name Enter the other files required to link the main program in the File Names list box See Entering Files Object file Main program Module definition file Import library created when you started linking the program Set linker options See Setting Linker Options Start linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Quit linking See Starting and Quitting Linking 88 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Creating an Executable Program with a Dynamic Program Structure The COBOL object program used here must be compiled from a COBOL source program containing CALL statements in data name specification or be compiled after specifying the compiler option DLOAD To create an executable program having a dynamic program structure by linking a COBOL object program that calls a subprogram Create the subprogram as a DLL Activate the WINLINK Linking Files window See Activating the WINLIN
368. m or format descriptor GS series is different when the COBOL source program is compiled If a function name CHANNELO2 to CHANNEL12 or C02 to C12 is used the FCB control statement is required The FCB control statement format used with the global server ADJUST is also used under this system 704 Appendix Function Comparison Appendix J Command Formats This appendix explains compiler commands and linker commands The command formats differ between Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 Compiler Commands Use the compiler commands to compile a COBOL source program and to generate an object program For details on generated files and files required for compiler command execution refer to Resources N ecessary for Compilation in Chapter 3 For compiler command specified location and basic usage refer to Using Commands to Compile also in Chapter 3 The following are compiler commands e 16 COBOL command e 32 COBOL command or COBOL32 command Input Format COBOL option list filename COBOL 32 32 option list filename Operands At least one space is needed between the command name and each operand Items enclosed in and can be omitted An absolute or relative path name can be specified for a directory name and file name in the explanation below 706 Appendix J Command Formats option list Specify the information to be posted to the COBOL85 compiler See Table 88 for the
369. m name DLL filename Secondary entry Subprogram name point name Subprogram name2 Subprogramname TS Windows 95 and Windows NT can have run time environment information as environment variables you can set up COBOL environment variable information directly in the user environment variables 122 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Windows NT can also use COBOL run time environment variables and user environment variables for COBOL execution with the initialization file and the Run time Environment Setup window Information in the initialization file is reflected in user s environment variables upon execution of aCOBOL program then reset when the program ends How to Set Run time Environment Information Run time environment information can be set as follows By editing AUTOEXEC BAT with a text editor Windows 95 or from the System control panel Windows NT From the command prompt in the same manner as normal environment variables 32 In the initialization file In the Run time Environment Setup window From the command line If run time environment information is duplicated precedence is given in the following order 1 ui eB WN Run time Environment Setup window Command line Initialization file Command prompt 32 AUTOEXEC BAT System of Control Panel Windows NT Chapter 5 Executing Programs 123 Setting in AUTOEXEC BAT Windows 95 Environment variables can be set when the operating system starts b
370. m or alphanumeric data item Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 401 The following is a definition example of data items DATADIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 number of arguments PIC 9 2 BINARY 01 argument position PIC 9 2 BINARY 01 argument value 02 argument value PIC X 10 OCCURS 1 TO 10 TIMES DEPENDING ON number of arguments PROCEDURE DIVISION To obtain the number of arguments use an ACCEPT statement where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ARGUMENT NUMBER is specified To refer to an argument value first specify the argument position with DISPLAY statement 1 corresponding to function name ARGUMENT NUM BER Then fetch the value with an ACCEPT statement 2 corresponding to function name ARGUMENT VALUE If the position of a non existing argument is specified for example 4 is specified although there are only three arguments an exception condition occurs and the statement 3 specified for ON EXCEPTION is executed At the start of program execution when a DISPLAY statement is not executed the argument position is 1 For each subsequent execution of the ACCEPT statement the argument position is moved to the next argument For argument positioning 0 to 99 can be specified O is the command itself DISPLAY 5 UPON mnemonic name 1 ACCEPT argument value 5 FROM mnemonic name 2 ON EXCEPTION MOVE 5 TO error number GO TO ERROR PROCESS END ACCEPT If an argument val
371. mation OPEN reg OPEN req ee T CLOSE req Bae eee eee READ req Parameters of the COBCI_READ function server logical destination name buffer length processing type and monitoring time Parameters of the COBCI_WRITE function server logical destination name message length priority processing type and monitoring time Error code rtn displayed in decimal 1 detail code detail displayed in decimal 1 Error code rtn displayed in decimal 1 detail code detail displayed in decimal 1 Error code rtn displayed in decimal 1 detail code detail displayed in decimal 1 Error code rtn displayed in decimal 1 detail code detail displayed in decimal 1 Communication error Windows Sockets function name error code err displayed error content API error Windows function name error code err displayed in decimal 2 error content Internal conflict 1 See Error Codes 2 See the Windows function error codes Only communication errors API errors and internal conflicts are output as error information The information from 3 to 6 is not always output Chapter 14 Communication Functions 467 The following table lists the responses to errors Table 54 Error responses Event Response S O Communication error Take action according to the corresponding error code See the Windows Sockets function error codes If the error value is 0 a dient communication error has prob
372. mation 3 Click on the OK button 184 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Compiler Options LIB C fsc pcobol32 samples sample5 SRF FREE FREE Figure 62 The Compiler Options dialog box In this example the compiler option MAIN is not effective even when specified because MAIN in the main program takes precedence When using libraries always set the compiler option LIB The same compiler option must be set for all registered targets Compiler options set here are effective in the project only These compiler options are not effective when programs are compiled from the WINCOB window Chapter 6 Project Management Function 185 Setting Linker Options Different linker option screens are provided for Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows 3 1 For details on the Linker Options dialog box refer to Setting Linker Options in Chapter 4 The linker options are saved in the option file project name LN 1 1 Click on the Linker Options button on the Project window The Linker Options dialog box is displayed 2 Set the required information 3 Click on the OK button When the compiler option TEST is specified linker options are automatically set In this case linker options for debugging need not be set 32 Creating the Module Definition File The module definition file can be created by building or rebuilding the project The procedures to follow differ depending on whether you are using
373. mation from the system or the character string NONE if the system sends no error information 2 System information 3 Control block address at which the error was detected 4 ERR or REQ 5 The following is set as the internal error information If 4is ERR Error detected location If 4is REQ Processing code 672 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0410I U STOP RUN STATEMENT MUST NOT BE EXECUTED USING JMPCINT2 Abnormally terminates the program Response Replace the STOP RUN statement in the application program with the EXIT PROGRAM statement JMP0420I I CANNOT OBTAIN WINDOW HANDLE Loi 62 Returns 1 Response Eliminate the cause of the error then re execute The character string indicating the error information is written for 1 See Table 84 Table 84 Character strings written for JMP0420I I 1 1 Error Contents Programmer Response Si ACC ERROR A window handle allocation error Check for and eliminate the cause occurred of the error according to the FORM RTS code written for 2 1 EE P ete environment Po ee file identifier is invalid identifier NON FILE The file corresponding to the Specify the file identifier correctly specified file identifier does not or check if the file was opened exist normally 1 Refer to the FORM RTS online help Appendix F Message Lists 673 JMPO0600I I U INSUFFICIENT STORAGE AVAILABLE TO PERFORM SORT OR MERGE STATEMENT Continues program processing if
374. me xe Outline CLOSE item group name file name TO item group name notification area chart record name ROGRAM program name The presentation file module prints forms in the forms format defined with Power FORM form descriptors Form descriptors are generated with a screen image Data items defined in form descriptors can be included ina COBOL pro gram at compile time by using aCOBOL COPY Chapter 8 Printing 317 statement Thus you do not have to write data item definitions for printing forms in a COBOL program The attributes of output data defined in form descriptors can be changed during execution of a program by using a COBOL special register Form descriptors Employee list 01 chart record 02 employee OCCURS 2 TIMES 03 FILLER PIC X 5 03 number PIC 9 6 03 FILLER PIC X 5 03 name PIC X 20 Execute WRITE chart record 101234 Jack London aed 105678 Anne Miller Execute MOVE TO EDIT OPTION OF number 2 WRITE chart record Employee list eit bes Number 101a34 Jak London 1667 fme Miller i ANSE Employee list Number 101234 dack London as56r2 Anne Miller ms HX A deletion line is printed Figure 97 Using a COBOL special register to change output data Work Procedures To print forms with the presentation file module
375. ment data items in an item group set for the data name specified in a GROUP clause are eligible for printing By setting a valuein a special register before executing a WRITE Chapter 8 Printing 323 statement the data item attributes can be changed For details about how to use a special register see Program Specifications Program Compilation and Linkage Compiling Select compiler option FORM LIB and specify the path name to the directory of the file containing form descriptors Linking There are no libraries that need to be linked Generating Printer Information Files This section describes how to print forms with the presentation file module For details on printer information files and how to generate them refer to the FORM RTS online help The following table lists information to be entered in a printer information file Table 30 Information to be entered in a printer information file Information Type Details and Use of Specification device printer device MEDDIR Specify the path name to the directory containing form descriptors MEDSUF Specify the extension of form descriptor files When the specification of the extension is omitted the default value of FORM RTS is used 324 Chapter 8 Printing Program Execution The following environments must be set to execute a program that prints forms with the presentation file module e When using FORM RTS Add the directory containing FORM RTS to
376. ment variable handl ing Concantenation expression GS series specifications Presentation file CMD TRM Network DB DML System control specific to AIM Communication file specific to AIM Relational DB AQL ESP II presentation file Chart file RDB indexed file Sequential organization file Relative organization file Direct organization file Indexed organization file National sort merge Range of common function Figure 137 Scope of GS series functions and COBOL85 functions Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 559 Distributed Development Support Functions The distributed development support functions support the environment for operating the following two host specific functions The environment enables operation from compilation to module testing under this system e Presentation file function e Network database function For the presentation file module test function used with the presentation file function see Presentation File Module Test Function Target Language Construct This section shows the language construct of host specific functions used as support functions Presentation File Destination APL CMD TRM or WST Network Database Database manipulation language DML e F DB EXCEPTION statement 560 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions System Control e TRANSACTION management statement e USE FOR DB EXCEPTION statement e USE FOR DEAD LOCK
377. ment variable specification format is w specificatior environrcert varisble path narne file narce EDM To use the extended function of the RDM file specify the following environment variable in addition to the above specification CRDB_XLIB_OVR file name RDM character stringindicating extended function Function Outline If the function is more enhanced than COBOL file system functions check the key item attributes of indexed files alphanumeric data item national item external decimal item internal decimal item binary item Unlike the COBOL file system the following restrictions are placed on use of then RDM file system e DISK cannot be specified as the file reference identifier e Filesharing and exclusive use of records cannot be specified in the program e Variable length records cannot be used e An optional file can be used in only input open mode No file creation Appendix M Using Other File Systems 745 The following table shows the differences between quantitative restrictions for the COBOL file system COBOL and RDM file system RDM Table 97 COBOL File System and RDM File System Limits Description TC COBOL RDM Maximum number of data items specified in the RECORD KEY 254 Clause 254 128 255 55 Maximum length of all data items specified in the RECORD KEY ieee ee clause eed Ga RECORD KEY clause gt o RECORD KEY clause 1 The total of the number of
378. mic CLOSE statement to disable the specified cursor and the table corresponding to the cursor Using Variable Length Character Strings This section explains how to use variable length character strings as the host variables of a COBOL program To operate variable length character string data the length of the character string is needed H ost variables of a variable length character string type are defined as the following items e Signed binary item for storing the character string length information Chapter 15 Database SQL 531 e Group item an alphanumeric item or national item for storing character strings The following figure illustrates retrieving an address from the COMPANY table The host variable used as the search condition and the host variable used for storing variable length character string data EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END COMPANY NAME PIC X 20 TELEPHONE NUMBER TELEPHONE NUMBER LENGTH P S9 4 COMP 5 TELEPHONE NUMBER STRING X 20 ADDRESS ADDRESS LENGTH C S9 9 COMP 5 ADDRESS STRING C X 30 SOQLSTATE C X 5 EXEC SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION DISPLAY Retrieves company according to telephone number DISPLAY Input telephone number gt WITH NO ADVANCING ACCEPT TELEPHONE NUMBER STRING FROM CONSOLE INSPECT TELEPHONE NUMBER STRING TALLYING TELEPHONE NUMBER LENGTH FOR CHARACTERS BEFORE SPACE EXEC SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC EXEC SQL SELECT NAME ADDRESS INTO
379. mination functions e Microsoft C V7 0 or later is used To link FIBCOWEP LIB specify it in the object field on the command line When linking C programs that call COBOL programs 32 the file specification order in the LINK command depends on whether executable files are generated by linking C programs that call COBOL programs or dynamic link libraries DLLs are generated Examples of linking C programs that call COBOL programs are shown below 1 Generating executable files from C programs that call COBOL programs CPROG OB C program object file name CPROG EXE Name of the executable file to be generated CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library Refer to C manuals F3BICIMP LIB is required to call JMPCINT2 or JMPCINT3 378 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 2 Generating executable files from COBOL programs and C programs that call the COBOL programs LINK COB OBJ Cprog OBJ F3BICIMP LIB COB EXP LIBC LIB KERNEL32 LIB OUT COB BXE COB OB COBOL program object file name COB EXE Name of the executable file to be generated F3BICIMP LIB COBOL run time system import library COB EXP COBOL program export file generated by the LIB command LIBC LIB KERN EL32 LIB USER32 LIB C run time library import library name required by COBOL To generate an executable file by linking a COBOL program to a C program the import library of the run time library COBOL run time system of the prog
380. mon program 362 communication input output statements 439 448 record definition 448 Communication System Environment Setup dialog box 454 communication ACM 441 compiler functions 4 compiler directing statement 20 description format 20 CONNECT statement 505 connecting multiple servers 507 CONSOLE 389 console window generating 386 console windows changing attributes of 386 reading writing data using 386 COPY statement 18 Create Logical Destination dialog box 456 creating a COBOL source program 16 CRT STATUS clause 346 cursor operating with more than one connection 533 D data correspondence between ODBC handled data and COBOLS85 handled data 548 deleting 523 input output destinations 385 inserting 523 updating 522 data correspondence 548 DATA DIVISION 310 in print files 281 data items defining to deliver values 400 defining to store input data 393 defining to store output data 393 data manipulation 511 data sharing 359 data types 552 data input output using ACCEPT DISPLAY function 384 database compiling the program 535 connection confirmation 544 retrieving data 514 retrieving data by relating different tables 519 retrieving data from a single row 518 retrieving data from a table where rows are related 521 retrieving data from all rows 514 sample 512 database access with an ODBC driver 502 Database manipulation language DML 559 date and time setting 398 using
381. n OK button Chapter 14 Communication Functions 459 Click to delete selected logical destinations and close the Delete Logical Destination dialog box Cancel button Click to cancel any deletions selected and return to the state before the Delete Logical Destination dialog box was opened D elete button Click to continuously delete other logical destinations Purge M essage button Click to delete the messages stored in the selected logical destination Help button Click to access the online help Changing a Logical Destination Mode To change the mode of a logical destination select Change mode from the Logical Destination Operation menu then change the read and write attributes of the logical destination in the Change Mode of Logical Destination dialog box Select a logical destination name from the list box select either Active or Inactive for the read and write attributes then click on the OK button The logical destination attributes are changed You can change the mode of another logical destinations by clicking the Change button 460 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Change Mode of Logical Destination LD Name Read Write LD1 Act Act Cancel LD3 Change Help Read Write amp Active Active C Inactive C Inactive Figure 120 The Change Mode of Logical Destination dialog box The Change M ode of Logical Destination dialog box contains the following element
382. n Go to the previous record in a file N ext button Go to the next record in afile Last button Go to the last record in the file Update button Update a record Insert button Insert a new record D elete button Delete a record Length button Change the length of a record 260 Chapter 7 File Processing Note If the maximum record length of an indexed file is 16 kilobytes or more the file cannot be opened with the Edit command Sorting Records Sort records in COBOL files with the lt Sort gt command Figure 77 Sorting records in COBOL files with the Sort command A record sequential file with variable length record format is generated Manipulating COBOL files Copy delete and move COBOL files with the lt M ove gt lt Copy gt and lt Delete gt commands Chapter 7 File Processing 261 Figure 78 Manipulating COBOL files with the Copy and Move commands 262 Chapter 7 File Processing Printing Files Print the contents of COBOL files with the lt Print gt command m Input OK Browse Bincal ddd Organization Record format PRINTER f SEQ VAR v LSEG C FIX Help C REL Record length C XD 7 Figure 79 Printing COBOL files with the Print command Converting File Types Convert COBOL file to another kind of file organization using the lt _oad gt or lt Unload gt commands Use the lt oad gt command to input a record
383. n be changed by using a special register during program execution Before using a presentation file the file must be defined and a presentation record must be created with a WRITE statement When a chart record is output forms in the format defined in the form descriptors are printed The attributes of output data defined in the form descriptors can then be changed For more information about how to use presentation files when printing forms see Using Presentation Files Printing Forms Print Characters The size font form direction and space of print characters can be specified in the CHARACTER TYPE clause of a data description entry MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 and a mnemonic name and print mode name can be specified in a CHARACTER TYPE clause MODE 1 MODE 2 and MODE 3 designate 12 point 9 point and 7 point print characters When amnemonic name is set data is printed with the size font form direction and space of a print character indicated by a function name That function name is related to a mnemonic name with a function name clause in the SPECIAL NAMES paragraph 272 Chapter 8 Printing Available Available When a print mode name is set data is printed with the size font form direction and space of a print character defined ina PRINTING MODE clause in the Special N ames paragraph For details about how to writea CHARACTER TYPE clause and how to define a mnemonic name and print mode name refer t
384. n then re execute System Error Codes This section explains system error codes The meanings of the error codes are different between Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 Windows NT See the error code table for each system e With Windows 3 1 See Table 86 e With Windows 95 Windows NT See Table 87 Appendix F Message Lists 683 Error Codes 16 Table 86 System error codes 16 ODE Explanation Programmer Response 1 0x01 Invalid function code Before activating Windows confirm that the SHARE command is active in MS DOS command mode oe The number of files to be opened is Specify the correct value for the oe ie large SHARE command option 5 0x05 Access cannot be made Check if the file is allocated correctly or specify the correct value for the SHARE command option 15 Ox0F Invalid drive name Allocate the file to a drive that can be used 20 0x14 A disk unit is defective Confirm that the disk unit is not damaged 36 0x24 The shared buffer is full Specify a larger value for the L operand of the SHARE command Refer to Chapter 5 for more information about the SHARE command 684 Appendix F Message Lists Error Codes 32 Table 87 System error codes 32 CODE Explanation Programmer Response 2 0x02 The specified file cannot be found Check to see if the product is correctly installed 4 0x04 The file cannot be accessed Check the run time environment 5 0x05 Access cannot be made Check
385. n DLL module The default value is 1 ADU BWNE 5 DSPNAME window information file name Specify the window information file name to change the environment information of the screen descriptor 6 ENDKEY END key value To change the EN D key value specify the item literal value specified in the attention definition of the screen descriptor The default is F002 F2 key 7 RETKEY RETURN key value To change the RETURN key value specify the item literal value specified in the attention definition of the screen descriptor The default is F003 F3 key Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 573 Using the Presentation File Module Test Function A program execution method is determined by the destination of the presentation file The following are presentation file destinations e PRT or DSP e ACM APL TRM CMD or WST With destination PRT or DSP processing can be performed only by the presentation file module test function A module test can be executed by directly starting the COBPRTST dialog box Processing can also be done by using the COBOL85 interactive debugger With the other destinations a function specific to GS host is used The COBOL85 interactive debugger is required to assist in processing In this case activate the COBOL85 interactive debugger then the COBPRTST dialog box Execute a test while rewriting data items or record contents according to the test types The following sections expla
386. n time system run time system IDCM IDCM Family roval Server IDCH IDCH COBOL85 run time system COBOL85 BOL Application Figure 114 Outline of data transfer using the presentation file module synchronous communication programs Note Refer to the IDCM User s Guide for the types of networks that can be connected Chapter 14 Communication Functions 445 Program Specifications This section explains the contents of a program using the presentation file module synchronous communication programs ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Define a presentation file in the same manner as you define a general file Write a file control entry in the file control paragraph of the input output section The following table lists the information to be specified in the file control entry Table 51 Information to be specified in the file control entry Information Type Details and Use of Specification i SELECT clause Filename Specify the file name used in COBOL program The file name must comply with the COBOL user defined words rules ASSIGN clause File reference identifier Specify in the GS file identifier format This file identifier is used as run time environment information for specifying the connected product name at run time SYMBOLIC Destination type Specify APL DESTINATION cause 446 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 51 Information to be specified in the fi
387. name CBI during building or rebuilding This file must be created for project management by project management name LNI building or rebuilding program name COB i 5 library text Used to compile source programs name CBL during building or rebuilding object code libraries name LIB building or rebuilding 7 Module definition target Required to link during building or statement required name DEF rebuilding for subprograms management uring building or rebuilding Required to create the import library or O _ Created automatically if omitted name OB building or rebuilding a compiled successfully Chapter 6 Project Management Function 173 Table 13 Files used by the Project Management function cont File Contents FileName I O Condition to Use or Create Format Import library target name LIB Used to create an executable file saving opine emer weamaneincaruawe oo O Created when building or rebuilding 10 Dynamic link target Used to create an executable program library DLL name DLL with a dynamic link structure O Created when building or rebuilding 11 Executable program target Created when building or rebuilding name EXE Project Management Procedures This section describes the procedures for project management 1 Select Open from the Project menu in the P STAFF window The Open Project dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the project file name See Creating the Project File To
388. nananannnnnnananannnnnnnananananananannnnanananann ana 635 Messages Output by WIN COB and Compile CommandS seeeseeseeeee 635 Messages Produced by the COBOL85 Compiler ccccessssscsessssesssessesseeaees 637 Messages Produced by the COBOL85 Run time System s es 639 System Error CodeS ea a a a Aa ate ee eee ed N aa aa aa 682 Appendix G Writing Special LiteralS ssssssssssusnnnunnnnunannunannununnnnunnnnnnannnnannnnannnnannnn 685 Program Name Literal ccccecccssseseeecceceeeeeeeeecaeeaeeeseessesaseaseessesaesaseeseesetaseatsee 685 T amp tName Literalki nann his Oe eae BA a a ee 685 File Identifier Literal 2 cceecesssseeeeeesceseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeneensecaseaneasesseeaseeneentessseaneentees 686 Appendix H High Speed File Processing sssssssssssssususnnnnnnnnnnnnnununununannnananannnnnnnnnnnnan 689 Specification M Gthods ccccecscesseseeeesecseeeeeeceecsesaeeeeeecsesaesaseessecaesaseeseesesaeeaseetaes 689 Notes reao a eaea aa aaa adaa a a a eaa aes 690 Appendix I GS series Function Comparison ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnananananannnnnnnnnnannn 691 Checking Program Operation ccececcseesceseeeeeeseeeeeeeseecsesaeeeseessesaeeaseeseetsetaseaseeees 701 Notesi iieaoe norae tare a aaea naaa Eae aaae aeaa Naa aaa Ea a aeiia eaa 703 AppendixJ Command FOrmMatS s sssssssssssnsnnnnnnnnununnnunnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananananannnnnnnnnnnnan 705 Compiler COMMANA Sine naaran a aaaea a Aae aaa aaa eect oie 705 Linker Comma S
389. nd Line edit box Specify the name of the file to be executed Browse button Click to select a file to be included in the link List list box Displays a list of the most recently executed programs Delete button Click to remove the selected file s from the List 154 Chapter 5 Executing Programs OK button Click to start execution and close the WINEXEC window Cancel button Click to close the WIN EXEC window without performing an execution Execute button Click to start execution and keep the WIN EXEC window open for further execution Activating the WINEXEC Window 16 Activate the WINEXEC window for Windows 3 1 by one of the following methods e Select WIN EXEC from the Utilities menu of P STAFF e Select WINEXEC EXE in the File Manager directory window e Define WINEXEC EXE as an icon then double click on the icon e Select the Execute command from Program Manager or File Manager then enter the WINEXEC command in the proper command form The following sections describe how to use the WIN EXEC window Entering a File Name Enter the name of the file to execute in the Command Line edit box using either of the following methods e Enter or use the Browse button to select the name of the file to execute Chapter 5 Executing Programs 155 e Select the name of the file to execute from the List to re execute a program that was already executed The List displays up to the last ten files that were executed S
390. nd mode 16 JMP0002I U PROGRAM 1 IS RECURSIVELY CALLED Abnormally terminates the program Explanation The program 1 was called and is recalled before it terminates before execution of the STOP RUN or EXIT PROGRAM statement Response Check the CALL statement in the called program JMP0007I W INVALID OPTION 1 Ignores the run time option 1 and continues processing If the specified run time option is SWITCH the SWITCH run time option is enabled as follows e If the digit count of the number in the specified numeric part is smaller than eight the number is written left justified e If the digit count is greater than eight the high order eight digits are valid Response Specify the correct run time option then re execute JMP0009I U INSUFFICIENT STORAGE AVAILABLE Abnormally terminates the program Response Do the following then re execute e Stop all applications that are executing at the same time e Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Appendix F Message Lists 643 e Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary JMP0010I U LIBRARY WORK AREA IS BROKEN Abnormally terminates the program Explanation The work area of the COBOL85 run time system is broken Response Check the program as follows e If an item including a subscript index reference modification or OCCURS DEPENDING ON clauseis referred to confirm that the item is wit
391. nd the original contents are lost e File extension Extends an existing file upon execution of a WRITE statement If an attempt is made to extend a file not existing at program execution optional file a new fileis generated upon execution of an OPEN statement e Record reference Does not change the contents of the file With an optional file the at end condition occurs with the first READ statement e Record updating deletion and insertion Changes the contents of an existing file with the execution of aREWRITE DELETE or WRITE statement With an optional file a new file is generated with the execution of an OPEN statement Since no data exists in this file however the at end condition occurs with the first READ statement When a program is terminated without executing a CLOSE statement files are closed unconditionally If the unconditional close fails a message is output and files become unusable even though they are open A file can be assigned with the file identifier as a run time environment information name If so an input output statement is executed for the file assigned with the file identifier even if the file assignment destination is changed with the environment variable operation function while the file is open When an OPEN statement is executed after the file assigned with the file identifier is closed with a CLOSE statement subsequent Chapter 7 File Processing 245 input output statements are executed
392. ndicate the item immediately preceding can be specified repeatedly Names of pulldown menus and options appear with the initial letter capitalized omitted delimited by is to be selected Commands statements clauses and options you enter or select appear in uppercase Program section names and some proper names also appear in uppercase Defaults are underlined This font is used for examples of program code Italics are occasionally used for emphasis References to other publications or sections within publications are in quotation marks COBOL85 User s Guide vii Differences Between Operating Systems Windows 95 and Windows NT are occasionally denoted with 32 Windows 3 1 is occasionally denoted with 16 COBOL85 supports the following operating systems e Windows 95 Operating System e Windows NT Workstation Operating System 3 5 e Windows NT Server Network Operating System 3 5 e Windows Operating System 3 1 We have tried to make all of our examples position sensitive However given the restrictions of the size of the page in some examples we have not been able to accomplish this You should be aware that COBOL85 is a position sensitive language The term national language or national in this manual indicates double byte character languages such as Japanese Korean or Chinese Functions that are only available in the national language version of this system are indicated by XXXXXX viii COBOL85
393. ndow e Enter the name of the file to execute SAM PLE1 EXE in the Command Line edit box e Click on the Execute button The Run time Environment Setup window is displayed Runtime Environment Setup SAMPLE1 Command Section Environment Yariables Information lconName COB85EXE ScrmSize 80 24 MessOutFile CnslWinSize 80 24 CnsIBufLine 100 WinCloseMsg ON EnvSetWindow USE 4 Figure 44 The Run time Environment Setup window Chapter 5 Executing Programs 115 e For Example 1 there is no information to set Click on the Run button in the Run time Environment Setup window The system starts executing the program e For Example 1 the system inputs or outputs data using the COBOL ACCEPT DISPLAY function A console window is displayed Enter a lowercase letter then press the ENTER key A lowercase letter is displayed along with corresponding text In the following example cobol85 is displayed based on the specified letter c Console SAMPLE1 ENTER ONE CHARACTER OF ALPHABETIC LOWER gt Figure 45 The COBOL85 console window 116 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Console SAMPLE1 ENTER ONE CHARACTER OF ALPHABETIC LOWER gt c cobol85 x The console window is closed Figure 46 The COBOL85 console window and message window e Check the results then click on the OK button in the message window The message window and console window close This complet
394. nformation Information Name Definition Remarks Server Name Server Name Connect Sentence server name or default connection information GSQL_DATASCR Data source name Specify the data source name defined added on the Windows system ee ODBC control pand SQL_ACCESS MODE Access mode Specify an access mode for the data READ_ONLY source The default is READ_ONLY READ _WRITE To enable the read only mode specify READ ONLY To enable the read write mode specify READ_WRITE Operation in the specified mode can vary READ_WRITE based on the capabilities of the ODBC driver GSQL_COMMIT_MODE Commit mode Specify a commit mode operation of MANUAL transaction for the data source AUTO The default is MANUAL If MANUAL is specified SQL operation is determined by specifying the COMMIT or ROLLBACK statement in the COBOL source program If AUTO is specified operation is determined each time an SQL statement is executed regardless of the specification in the COBOL source program If AUTO is specified SQL statement processing is reflected into the database at execution of the SQL statement As a result the database cannot be restored to the original status with a ROLLBACK statement Manual should be specified to avoid this problem BQL_QUERY_TIMEOUT 32 Timeout seconds SQL_CONCURREN CY 32 Cursor concurrency mode READ_ONLY LOCK ROWVER VALUES Chapter 15 Database SQL 539 Specify the number of seconds to w
395. nformation about operation environments refer to Operation Environments in Chapter 9 because they are the same as when executing screen input output with a presentation file 316 Chapter 8 Printing ENTIFICAT PROGRAM IRONMEN INPUT OU T iE CONT ELECT SSIGN 1 TION DIVISION D program name l DIVISION PUT SECTION TROL file name TO GS file reference code W PRT RMAT IT ILE S1 DATA DIVISI IC DESTINATION IS Is form descriptor name notification area Is item group name notification area OCESSING MODE IS processing type notification area CONTROL IS special control information notification area TATUS IS input output status 1 input output status 2 ON Hj H E E SECT FD o1 o1 PROCEDURE TION file name COPY form descriptor name OF XMDLIB Expanding a COPY statement 01 chart record name 02 data name 1 WORKING STORAGE SECTION form descriptor name notification area item group name notification area processing type notification area special control information notification area input output status 1 input output status 2 DIVISION OPEN OUTPUT file name output specification TO EDIT MODE emphasis specification TO EDIT OPTION OF data name color TO EDIT COLOR OF data name form descriptor name TO form descriptor name notification area ees oe aaaqaaa PS Pe PS PS PS PS eg OV Oe OF data na
396. nformation list box is displayed in the window Select the required entry information Chapter 5 Executing Programs 165 Runtime Environment Setup SAMPLE1 Command Section Entry Information Delete Figure 55 The Run time Environment Setup window with changed Entry Information Saving to the Initialization File Click on the Save button to save current information information displayed in the list box in the initialization file Because information is saved in the initialization file the same run time environment information can be used when executing the program at another time Saving modifies the existing information Exiting from the Run time Environment Setup Window Clicking on the Run button causes the system to close the Run time Environment Setup window and start executing the program Run time environment information set in the Run time Environment Setup window is effective for the program only if it is not saved in the initialization file 166 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Format of Run time Options Run time options specify information or operations to COBOL programs at run time Define run time options depending on the functions used in the COBOL program or the options specified when compiling the COBOL source program Run time options can be entered e inthe text editor Windows 95 e inthecontrol panel system Windows NT e inthe initialization file e inthe Run time Environment Se
397. ng 219 Referencing Sequential Random and Dynamic To refer to records open the file in INPUT mode then read records with aREAD statement In sequential access specify the start position of the record to be read with aSTART statement then read records sequentially from the specified record in order of the relative record numbers In random access the record with the relative record number specified at execution of the READ statement is read When OPTIONAL is specified in the SELECT clause in the file control entry the OPEN statement is successful even if the file does not exist The at end condition is satisfied with the execution of the first READ statement For information on the at end condition see Input Output Error Processing If the record with the specified relative record number is not found in random or dynamic access the invalid key condition is satisfied For information on the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing Updating Sequential Random and Dynamic To update records open the file in O mode In sequential access read records with a READ statement then update them with a REWRITE statement Executing the REWRITE statement updates the records read by the last READ statement In random access specify the relative record number of the record to be updated then execute the REWRITE statement If the record with the specified relative record number is not found in ran
398. ng Other File Systems Table 96 COBOL File System and Btrieve Limits COBOL Maximum record length 32 760 4 090 fixed length 32 760 variable length Maximum number of data items specified in 24 16bits the RECORD KEY clause 119 32bits the RECORD KEY clause Ses i in the ALTERNATE RECORD KEY Clause 118 32bits MeALTERNATERECORDKEY Cause the ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clause 1 The total of the number of data items specified in the RECORD KEY clause and that specified in the ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clause can be up to N 24 for 16bits and 119 for 32bits This value decreases as the number of data items specified in the RECORD KEY Clause increases NOTES A record key must be within an area of 1 024 bytes from the beginning of the record 16 A record key must be within an area of 4 088 bytes from the beginning of the record 32 The length of a fixed length record and the minimum length of a variable length record must be in the range 4 to 4 088 bytes If a variable length record is used the Btrieve Record Manager requires 4 bytes for the overhead If a duplicated key per item is used the Btrieve Record Manager requires 8 bytes for the overhead The length of a fixed length record and the minimum length of a variable length record are decreased by 4 or 8 bytes If arecord with a file position indicator defined is deleted by the DELETE statement with random access the file position indicator is undefined Do not
399. ng instruction Displays the maximum number of read and write instructions that can be queued in the server LD name Displays the names of generated logical destinations Read Displays the read attribute of each logical destination Act indicates that read is enabled indicates that read is disabled Write Displays the write attribute of each logical destination A ct indicates that write is enabled indicates that write is disabled Priority Displays the number of priority levels where messages can be stored at each logical destination M ax messages Displays the maximum number of messages that can be stored at each logical destination Chapter 14 Communication Functions 463 Current Displays the current number of messages that are stored at each logical destination Waiting Displays the number of read and write instructions that are queued at each logical destination Log Collection To collect logs select Operate from the Logging menu The Logging Operation dialog box is displayed Current status No log Start logging m Log type Endicaama Cancel C Gettrace log Help File name i siSY Browse Figure 122 The Logging Operation dialog box Acquire the log according to the following procedure 1 Specify the name of the file for log collection 2 Select either Get error log or Get trace log 3 Click on the Start logging button Log collection s
400. ng int C agrp agrp short int b Function C typedef struct char aitem1 10 char aitem2 20 agrp long int C agrp agrp short int b Function C typedef struct char aitem1 10 char aitem2 20 agrp long int C agrp agrp short int b return 0 367 368 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication When aC program of the short int type is called C function values written to the PROGRAM STATUS special register are referred to as follows return value storage area PIC S9 9 COMP 5 REDEFINES return value storage area 02 function value PIC S9 4 COMP 5 02 PIC 9 4 COMP 5 CALL Cprog USING PARAM1 PARAM2 MOVE PROGRAM STATUS TO return value storage area IF function value 0 THEN The attribute of the PROGRAM STATUS special register is applicable to the C long int type After aC program of the short int type is called therefore the values of special register PROGRAM STATUS if referred to as they are cannot be referred to as correct function values Calling COBOL Programs from C Programs This section explains how to call COBOL programs from C programs Calling Method To call COBOL programs from C programs specify COBOL program names in the C function calling format When the EXIT PROGRAM statement is executed in the called COBOL program control returns immediately after the C program function call When the main program C p
401. ng table lists the files used by the COBOL85 compiler Table 4 Files used by the COBOL85 compiler File Contents_ File Name Format 1 Source Any Normally use Required programs the extension COB CBL or COBOL 2 Library text library text Follow the LIB name CBL 1 specification method when compiling a source program that uses the COPY statement gt 3 Screen and screen and form Follow the FORMLIB form descriptor PMD 2 specification FORM EXT descriptors method when compiling a source program that uses screen and form descriptors 4 Filedescriptor filedescriptor FFD Follow the FILELIB 2 specification FILEEXT method when compiling a source program that uses a file descriptor gt 4 36 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Table 4 Files used by the COBOL85 compiler cont File Contents File Name Format strings Any name Refer to indicating Appendix J compiler options compiler options stored in a file using the WINCOB window or COBOL 32 command 5 Character DEFAULT CBI or 7 When specifying B When compiler options are set up in the Compiler Options dialog box for the WIN COB window COBOL85 COBOL85 was Information COBOL 85 CBI I O Created in the used by the directory which installed compiler 7 Object source file program name OB completes normally Debugging source file When the compiler TEST information name SVD option TEST is specified When the sourc
402. ng to function name ENVIRONMENT NAME is specified and a DISPLAY statement where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON M ENT VALUE is specified Programs Specifications This section explains program descriptions for each COBOL division when using the environment variables handling function ENVIRONMENT DIVISION Associate the following function names with mnemonic names e ENVIRONMENT NAME e ENVIRONMENT VALUE DATA DIVISION Define data items to deliver values Table 45 Attributes of environment variables Contents Name of an environment variable not required if specified Fixed length group item or alphanumeric with a literal data item Value of an environment variable not required if specified Fixed length group item or alphanumeric with a literal data item Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 405 PROCEDURE DIVISION To refer to the value of an environment variable first specify the environment variable name to be referred to with a DISPLAY statement 1 where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON MENT NAME is specified Then refer to the value of the environment variable with an ACCEPT statement 2 where a mnemonic name corresponding to function name ENVIRON MENT VALUE is specified If the name of the environment variable to be referred to has not been specified or the name of a non existing environment variable has been specified an exception condition occurs In t
403. nnnannnnanann 611 Appendix C Global Optimization ssssssssssssnsusnnunununnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnanananannnnannnnnnnan 619 Optimization ias erei ia a a Eaa ienaa eaea 619 Removing a Common EXpresSS On s sssssssssssssssssssiisrstntnesrsrsrsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 620 Shifting an Invariant sssssesssssssseesrsresisirssisistntnnntntununnnnnstnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 621 Optimizing an Induction Variable ssssesesesssssrsrsisissssssrsrsssrsnnsnsrsrsrsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 622 Optimizing a PERFORM Statement cccccccccceeseeseeeeeeceeeeeeeecseeesaesaeeeteessesaeeeeees 622 COBOL85 User s Guide xxi Integrating Adjacent MOVES cecccececeeeseseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeesecaeeaseessetaesaseeesaesaseetaseeeas 623 Eliminating Unnecessary Substitutions eeeceeeseeteeeeeetteteeeeetetaetaeeeteetsetaetaneeees 623 Notes ia ved ceca cinactaiea ce eee ai aea eaa E CEANA RETE ATEA EAEAN AREA EEE VAATES aA aae 624 Appendix D Intrinsic Function LiSt ssssssssssssusannusannnnannnnnunannnannnnannnnanannanannnnan nananana 627 Appendix E Special Registers Used with Screen and Form Functions sss 631 EDIT M OD Ez ha a aa aaae aaa a aaae a Kanea aana Taoa 631 EDIT STATUS ain dik da nthe A a a a a aaa a e a i 632 EDIT COLOR aaisa mea eaa aaia Wa nate tat a A Aaea aaa aie 633 EDIT2OPTION iinne sah Hens bees sad a a a a e i Ea aT AER Ai 633 EDIT GU RSOR iaa a A A a r E 634 Appendix F M essage LiStS sssssssisrssssssonsanannnnnnnnnnn
404. nostic message displayed in the message window to the line where the compile error was detected in the edit window of the COBOL source program The edit window of the COBOL source program automatically opens at the first tag jump so you do not have to activate the editor beforehand Using the error search function automates the search for faulty statements making program correction highly efficient Compile Messages When compilation terminates a compile message appears in the window of the P STAFF editor 32 or the WINMSG window 16 To save the compile message as a file save the file from the window When compiler option MESSAGE has been specified the compile message consists of the option information listing the diagnostic message listing and the compile unit statistical listing 60 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Using Error Search This section explains how to use error search and the P STAFF editor Error Search Procedures 1 Compile from the WIN COB or P STAFF editor window 2 When compilation has ended a message appears on the P STAFF editor If the message already exists open the P STAFF editor to display the message 3 Movethe cursor to the line of the diagnostic message and press the F11 key or select Tag J ump from the Search menu The COBOL source program is displayed and the cursor moves to the line causing the message PROGRAMMING STAFF lolx File Edit Search Project Tools Window Help 1 Me
405. nslWinSize 80 24 Cns1lBufLine 100 WinCloseMsg ON IconName COB8 5EXE PROG1 ENTRY SUB1 SUB1 DLL ENTRY 1 PROG1 Do not insert any spaces between the brackets and section name Saving the information set in the Run time Environment Setup window modifies the contents of the initialization file Setting in the Run time Environment Setup Window Setting run time environment information in the Run time Environment Setup window allows you to easily change information for every test See Run time Environment Setup Window If the information is not saved in the initialization file the run time environment information set in the Run time Environment Setup window is only effective for that execution of the program Setting from the Command Line This approach specifies run time environment information as arguments of a command when starting a program from the command prompt You can specify the run time parameter in the GS series M host format run time environment information 126 Chapter 5 Executing Programs name M GPRM initialization file and run time options run time environment information name GOPT The format is shown below executable file name run time parameter CBR initialization file name CBL run time option CBR and CBL can bein any order Specifying the Run time Parameter in the GS series Format The first argument following the command name is the GS series format run time p
406. nsnsrnnrsrnnsrnns 43 Specifying Continuous Compilation s ssssssssssssssssssssssssnsnnsnsiersrsrsrsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 44 Speatying a File NaMe ripening aa a aa a a aak 46 Setting Compiler OPtion s ssssssssssssssssssrsrsrsnsrsrsrsrstststntnnnnntnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenene 47 Specifying the M ain Prograrm seccccecesesseeeeeceeseeeeeeeeecseeaseeseessecaesaseeseetsesaeeateeees 47 COBOL85 User s Guide xiii Starting and Quitting Compilation eee eee ee eteee eee teeeeeeteeeeetaeeaeeeseetetaeeeeeaees 49 Compiler Options Dialog BOX cceeeeescececeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeaseessesaesaeeaesaetananeaseeeas 50 Setting Compiler OPtion 0 eee ccceeeecseeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeesecaetaseeseesaeseeseesaeeetaeeaseetaes 50 Setting a Library N AIMe nn eeeeeeccceseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeenecseeaeeaseessecaesaseessaesaseeseseetsesaeeaseetaes 54 Correcting a Compile Error oo eeeeseseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeaseesseseeseesesaetanaeeaseeees 59 Compile Messages ss aczein hese einen ed eed aes 59 Using Error Search eieaa n alive didi chinese eee does 60 Using Commands to COMPIle cceeeeseseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaesaeaeeaseesseseeseeseetaeeaseataes 63 COBOL 32 Command Sis i Sevan tyne aan avian avi 63 Chapter 4 Linking Programs sssssssssssnsnsannnnannnannunnnnnnnunnnnnnannnnannnnannnannnnnnnannanannanannnnan nnna 67 Linking Sample Programs cceccccsseseneeseeeeeeeeeeeecseeaeeaeeecsecaesaeaseeesaesa
407. nt in which an error occurred is executed An l levea message is output then the statement immediately following an input output statement in which an error occurred is executed A U level message is output and the program terminates abnormally A U level message is output and the program terminates abnormally This section explains file assignment file processing results exclusive control of files and methods for improving file processing Chapter 7 File Processing 237 Assigning Files The method of file input output processing at program execution is determined by the contents of the ASSIGN clause in the file control entry The relation between the contents of the ASSIGN clause and files is explained below When Specifying a File Identifier in the ASSIGN Clause Set the name of a file for input output processing at program execution with a file identifier as the run time environment information name For details about how to set run time environment information refer to Setting Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 The following is an example of setting run time environment information by using an initialization file When a lowercase file identifier is specified in the ASSIGN clause e A compiler error occurs if a file is compiled with compiler option NOALPHAL specified e When setting run time environment information use uppercase letters 238 Chapter
408. nt REWRITE statement During random access or dynamic access of a file with DUPLICATES specified as the prime key the prime record key value was changed between the READ statement and subsequent REWRITE or DELETE statement During sequential access prime record key values are not in ascending order at WRITE statement execution During WRITE or REWRITE statement execution the value of prime record key or alternate record key to be written already exist ina file However DUPLICATES is specified in the prime record key or alternate record key 614 Appendix B I O Status List Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification Detailed Sauls Information ue Invalid Key The record was not found Condition During START statement or random access READ REWRITE or DELETE statement execution the record having the specified key value does not exist in the file Relative record number 0 was specified for a relative file One of the following status occurred Area shortage occurred during WRITE statement execution During WRITE statement execution the specified key is out of the key range After overflow writing an attempt was made to execute the WRITE statement again Permanent error condition he sie Penna Fl error occurred aae ince at error i AM shortage occurred during WRITE statement execution The OPEN statement in INPUT I O or EXTEND mode was executed for a file without the OPTIONAL
409. nt and screen handling function operate windows with an ACCEPT or DISPLAY statement but use different windows With this system function keys PF10 and PF17 to PF24 are invalid regardless of the specification of the run time environment variable TERMINATOR Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 351 Windows used with the screen handling function cannot be minimized The size of a logical screen must not be smaller than the sizes of data items defined in the screen items Input items are always underlined An error occurs when a program is executed if a logical screen set for run time environment information ScrnSize is number of columns 1 x number of lines gt 16 250 352 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Chapter 10 Calling Subprograms Inter Program Communication This chapter explains how to call programs from other programs or inter program communication Chapter 10 contains an outline of calling relationships including relation forms and linkages rules and describes how COBOL programs call COBOL and other language programs such as C and Visual Basic 354 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication Outline of Calling Relationships This section outlines program calling relationships Calling Relationship Forms COBOL programs can call other programs or can be called from other programs as shown in the following figure 1 even if the other programs are coded in other languages COBOL
410. nt before executing the COBOL program Using ACM Communication ACM communication is used through the presentation file module ACM communication can also be used from COBOL programs by using the CALL statement to call an ACM supported COBOL subroutine 442 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Using Presentation File Module Synchronous Communication Programs This section explains how to use the presentation file module for synchronous communication programs describes the operating environment and the creation of COBOL source programs and provides instructions on how to communicate between programs IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO GS file identifier SYMBOLIC DESTINATION IS APL SESSION CONTROL IS conversation information notification region DAT F FD MESSAGE DESTINAT DESTINAT MESSAGE MESSAGE MODE S message kind notification region TION 1 IS logical destination 1l TION 2 IS logical destination 2 OWNER IS transmission right information notification region CODE S reason code notification region PROCESS x WO NG CONTRO L IS extended message control information region FILE STATUS IS input output status 1 input output status 2 A DIVISION LE SECTION file name RECORD IS VARYING IN SIZE DEPENDING ON record size NG STORAGE SECTI
411. nt is shown below et 6 lp 1 line nie 12 lpi 4 Lines 1 inch es amp lif line sis l2 lpi 2 Lines ras 6 lpi l line n 6 lp for sukeequent lines oo Figure 95 Format of an FCB control statement Chapter 8 Printing 307 Using Print Files with Form Descriptors This section explains how to use partitioned form descriptors by using a print file with aFORMAT clause IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECIAL NAMES function name IS mnemonic name INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO file reference identifier ORGANIZATION IS SEQUENTIAL FORMAT IS form descri ptor name notification area GROUP IS item group nam e notification area FILE STATUS IS input output status 1 input output status 2 DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size CONTROL RECORD IS control record name MODE 1 0l line record name CHARACTER TYPE IS MODE 2 Contents of line record MODE 3 02 data name n mnemonic name 0l control record name Contents of control record 02 data name 2 COPY form descriptor name OF XMDLIB p Expanding aCOPY statement 7 101 chart record name 02 data name 3 WORKING STORAGE SECTION 0l form descriptor name notification area PIC X 8 Ol item group nam e notification area PIC X 8 01 input output status 1 PIC X 2 01 input output status 2 PIC X 4 MODE 1 01 data name 4 CH
412. ntable area Clause LINAGE clause Logical page Define the number of lines per page top configuration and bottom margins and the footing area starting position When a data name is specified in this clause the data can be changed in the program PROCEDURE DIVISION Execute an input output statement in the following sequence 1 OPEN statement with OUTPUT specified Starts printing 2 WRITE statement Outputs data 3 CLOSE statement Stops printing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Use an OPEN statement once at the start of printing and a CLOSE statement once at the end of printing WRITE Statement One WRITE statement writes one line of data Specify PAGE in the ADVANCING phrase of the WRITE statement for page alignment When the number of lines is written the page is advanced by the specified number of lines The AFTER ADVANCING and BEFORE ADVANCING phrases are used to specify whether data is output before or after page alignment or a line feed When the ADVANCING phrase is omitted AFTER ADVANCING Lis the default Chapter 8 Printing 283 Control of print lines with AFTER ADVANCING phraseis shown in the following example OPEN file l WRITE record 1 AFTER ADVANCING PAGE WRITE record 2 AFTER ADVANCING 2 WRITE record 3 AFTER ADVANCING PAGE WRITE record 4 CLOSE file 1 Boeoue Undefined record 1 Undefined gt E D O Line number pointers of the pr
413. nter information file is retrieved from the directory set for environment variable MEFTNETDIR because the file is assigned with a relative path specification 326 Chapter 8 Printing Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens This chapter explains how to display screens and enter data from the displayed screens Chapter 9 also describes how to use presentation files work procedures and the screen handling function 328 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Types of Input Output Using Screens A COBOL program allows you to display a screen where you can enter data This is referred to as screen input output The following two types of screen input output functions are provided e Presentation file function e Screen handling function The following table lists the features and uses of the presentation file and screen handling functions Table 31 The features and uses of the presentation file and screen handling functions Feature and Use Presentation File Function Screen Handling Function screen image using FORM collection of lines Number of screens Defines the number of nn ee Se E Changing screen Enabled Enabled attributes during program execution Program Presentation file definition Screen definition specification Presentation record definition ACCEPT statement contents OPEN statement DISPLAY statement READ statement WRITE statement CLOSE statement Related products FORM screen definition
414. o the COBOL85 Reference M anual The sizes fonts forms and directions of available print characters and spaces defined according to the sizes and forms of print characters are explained below sizes 3 0 to 300 0 points Character size can be specified in units of 0 1 point When a raster type device font fixed size is selected data is printed with a point character size of a font mounted on each printer If character size specification is omitted and execution environment information CBR_PrinterAN K_Size is specified the character size will be the default of the executing platform If no character size is specified the default is 7 0 points Refer to Format of Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 Specify a font with run time environment information PrinterFontN ame If the run time environment information is omitted CourierN ew is normally selected If an outline font or a TrueType font is specified for run time environment information the print format is a scaleable font and data can be printed with 3 0 to 300 0 points in units of 0 1 point Fonts Fonts used are MINCHOU MINCHOU HANKAKU GOTHIC and GOTHIC HANKAKU The default font is GOTHIC Chapter 8 Printing 273 By using a print file without a FORMAT clause if the font name is set for run time environment information PrinterFontN ame data is printed with the character font of the specified font name If the font name is omitted Cou
415. o check the length attribute If a file is used confirm that the correct record length is referenced For example if SPACE clear processing is performed with the maximum record length instead of the actual record length when a variable length input file is used the record length referenced is incorrect JMP0702I U LIA IS BROKEN Abnormally terminates the program Response See JM PO7O1I U JMP07031I U RCB IS BROKEN Abnormally terminates the program Response See JM PO7O1I U 678 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0704I U DEBUG TABLE IS BROKEN Abnormally terminates the program Response See JMPO7O1I U JMP0705I1 W INSUFFICIENT STORAGE AVAILABLE FUNC 1 Cancels the 1 function then continues processing Response Do the following then re execute Stop all applications that are executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary The character string indicating the function is written for 1 TRACE Trace function COUNT Count function 16 JMP0724I W FILE CAN NOT BE OPENED FILE 1 2 OPTION IGNORED Continues processing without outputting 2 information Response Check whether the file is allocated correctly The access name is written for 1 The debug function name is written for 2 JMP0725I1 W FILE CAN NOT BE OPENED 1 OPTION IGNORED Continues processing without outputtin
416. o compile in the WIN COB Continuous Compilation mode window Chapter 3 Compiling Programs t WINCOB BE Mode Help Source File 7 Cancel TOwse i Options List Add Figure 19 The WINCOB window in Continuous Compilation mode The WIN COB Continuous Compilation mode window contains the following elements M ode Specify whether a single program standard or multiple programs continuous are to be compiled Help Access the online help Source file edit box Specify the COBOL source file to be added to the List List list box List of COBOL source files to be compiled Browse button Click to browse directories to sdect a COBOL source file Add button Click to add the Source File to the List 46 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs D elete button Click to remove the selected file s from the List Main button Click to indicate that the selected file is a main program Sub button Click to indicate that the selected file is a sub program OK button Click to start compilation Cancel button Click to close the WIN COB window Options button Click to specify compile options Compile button Click to start compilation Specifying a File Name The method of specifying a file name differs for single compilation and continuous compilation Both methods are explained below To specify the file name to be used for standard single compilation Specify the name of the file to be
417. o continue adding compiler options repeat the procedure from Step 2 When all the compiler options to be added are set click on the Cancel button The Add Compiler Options dialog box closes and the Compiler Options dialog box is displayed The compiler options which were set are listed in the Compiler Options list box in the Compiler Options dialog box Changing a Compiler Option To change the details of a compiler option listed in the Compiler Options list box 1 4 Select the compiler option whose setup details are to be changed from the Compiler Options list box then click on the Change button The Details Compiler Options dialog box is displayed Change the settings After all modifications have been made click on the OK button To cancel the change to the compiler setup click on the Cancel button The Compiler Options dialog doses The changed details of the compiler option are listed in the Compiler Options list box in the Compiler Options dialog box 54 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Deleting a Compiler Option To delete a compiler option that appears in the Compiler Options list box 1 Select the compiler option to be deleted from the Compiler Options list box 2 Click on the Delete button Setting a Library Name When compiling a COBOL source program containing COPY statements that specify library names use the Library Names button to associate the library names with the directories where the
418. o the online help for details Opens saves and closes a file specifies the font and sets compiler options and runs compilation valid only for currently open files 62 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Edit Find Allows you to cut and paste copy and delete specify a range and control the line number Finds and replaces moves the cursor and controls tag jump and back tag jump When the line number is renumbered the new number overwrites any characters in the first six columns Alternative Editors You can direct P STAFF to use an editor other than the P STAFF editor To do this 1 From the File menu click Customize Editor and click Set from the cascading menu The Customize Editor dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command line of the editor to be used and click the OK button Note All open P STAFF editor windows will be closed when the customize editor function is selected The reason for this is to provide a clean break from using the P STAFF editor to using the newly configured editor 3 To return to using the P STAFF editor click on Customize Editor in the File menu and click on Reset from the cascading menu Compiler messages created by the Project M ake function or by compiling using WIN COB are displayed using the editor specified with the Customize Editor function Note When other editors are selected the error message search function of P STAFF cannot be used The presence of the tag jump
419. of files Setting Files in Exclusive Mode When a file is opened in exclusive mode other users cannot access the file A file is opened in exclusive mode in the following cases An OPEN statement is executed for a file with EXCLUSIVE specified in the LOCK MODE clause in the file control entry An OPEN statement in other than INPUT mode is executed for a file without the LOCK MODE clause specified in the file control entry An OPEN statement with WITH LOCK specified is executed An OPEN statement in the OUTPUT mode is executed Chapter 7 File Processing 241 The following is an example of exclusive control of files IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAN 1D B ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file 2 ASSIGN TO data name FILE STATUS 1 FS IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAN 1D A ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file 1 ASSIGN TO DATAT LOCK MODE 18 EXCLUSIVE WORKING STORAGE SECTION OPEN 1 0 file 1 01 data name PIC X 12 D1 N PIC X0 NOVE DATAI TO data name Failed OPEN 1 0 file 2 vo D IF FS 93 THEN 3 MOVE DATA TO data name OPEN 1 0 file Exclusive Node a Figure 69 Exclusive control of a file File DATA 1 is opened in exclusive mode 2 If an attempt is made to execute an OPEN statement for file DATA 1 that is already in use in exclusive mode by program A the attempt fails 3 I O status value 93 error cau
420. ogram B z gt Program C B B DLL C C DLL CALL C 4 DLL D D DLL CALL D 4 gt ae D DLL DLL Entry Information for Secondary Entry Points When a subprogram contains multiple entry points the secondary entry points need to be associated with the primary entry point The format is Secondary entry name Primary entry name The secondary entry name is the name defined in the ENTRY statement of the COBOL source program The primary entry name is the name defined in the PROGRA M ID paragraph Chapter 5 Executing Programs 149 For example Program call relations Entry information rogram A A ENTRY B B DLL ia hate gt Program B CALL Bl y gt C C DLL gt ENTRY B1 B1 B CALL C F Program C Cl CALL Cl F gt ENTRY C1 DLL DLL If entry information is not specified the system adds the extension DLL to the program name specified in the CALL statement as the DLL file name Entry Information for Subprograms Linked in the Same DLL When subprograms are linked together in a single DLL the first program name is mapped to the DLL file name as documented above and the subsequent programs are mapped to the first program The format is Sub program name 2 Sub program name Where sub program name is the PROGRAM ID name of the first program in the DLL and sub program name 2 is the PROGRAM ID name of a subsequent program linked in the same DLL
421. ommunication 353 INVALID KEY 232 defined 233 item control field input output options 319 options 333 K keys record 195 L option 118 LENG function 422 using 426 LIB 184 library building 100 creating by linking 89 entering object files 100 Library Name edit box 100 library text creating 18 line feed character 17 LINE SEQUENTIAL 207 line sequential file 192 processing 208 line sequential files 206 LINK command 102 373 linkage rules and supporting compilers 356 differences of 355 linker messages 105 under Windows 3 1 16 107 Linker Options under Windows NT 32 95 linking examples of C programs that call COBOL programs 377 host program 562 object programs using commands 101 required files 71 starting 97 through window operation 84 under Windows 3 1 16 103 using WINLINK command 84 linking C programs 373 LOCK MODE clause 240 Logging Operation dialog box 463 logical destination changing mode 459 creating 456 deleting 457 logical destination definition file creation utility 474 logs collecting 463 making 170 memory 478 merge 408 415 types 417 MERGE statement 418 message sending 392 message boxes 390 message communication 432 message file 6 message transfer 449 messages outputting to message boxes 390 M host 125 573 mnemonic name 271 module definition file 185 applications 80 DLL 80 formats 79 required statements 77 under Windows 3 1 1
422. on run time environments within one system Use a text editor to change the contents of a COBOL85 run time system information file The PRINTERSEQUENCE section is entered in a COBOL85 run time system information file The PRINTERSEQUENCE section defines a printer name and a mode setting for the printer hardware setting 304 Chapter 8 Printing The specification format of the PRINTERSEQUENCE section is shown below PRINTERSEQUENCE printer name mode type printer name mode type 1 2 Optional 1 Printer name Specify the printer name displayed on the Windows Control Panel 2 Modetype Specify the mode set for the printer hardware setting The mode type is indicated by a blank character or a uppercase alphabetic character COBOL85 supports the following printer modes orders LIPS III 2 For the modes orders supported by the printer refer to the manual included with the printer If the printer name is omitted FM is assumed as the mode order 1 To usea form overlay pattern utilizing image printing with a printer supporting the FM sequence specify F for the mode type 2 Theresult of a form overlay pattern output in the graphic device interface GDI mode depends on the printer specification Print a form overlay pattern in FM mode using a printer supporting the FM sequence This improves performance and printing quality compared to when the graphic device interface GDI mode is us
423. ondition To detect occurrence of the invalid key condition specify INVALID KEY in the READ WRITE REWRITE START and DELETE statements With INVALID KEY specified processing to be done upon the occurrence of an invalid key condition can be written A coding example of a READ statement with INVALID KEY specification is MOVE Z TO primary key READ indexed file INVALID KEY GO TO invalid key processing END READ If no record with primary key value Z is present in the file the invalid key condition occurs and the GO TO statement is executed FILE STATUS Clause When a FILE STATUS clause is written in the file control entry the I O status is posted to the data name specified in the FILE STATUS clause upon execution of the input output statement By writing a statement IF or EVALUATE statement to check the contents I O status value of this data name input output errors can be detected If no I O status value is checked after the input output statement program execution continues even if an input output error occurs Subsequent operation is undefined 234 Chapter 7 File Processing For I O status values to be posted refer to Appendix B I O Status List A coding example of a FILE STATUS clauseis SELECT file 1 FILE STATUS IS input output status WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 input output status PIC X 2 OPEN file 1l IF input output status NOT 00 THEN GO TO open error processing If a
424. onnection information The ODBC information file Chapter 15 Database SQL 507 is searched for the server information If the server information is found it is referenced when connecting to the server The default connection information is referenced at execution of the CONNECT statement COBOL application ODBC information file SV1 EXEC SQL SQL DATASC SRC1 CONNECT TO DEFAULT SQL_DEFAULT INF END EXEC Reference SQL_SERVER SV1 SQL_USERID tanaka SQL_PASSWORD The SV 1 information defined in the default connection information is referenced to connect the server Disconnecting from a Server To disconnect a client from a server use the DISCONNECT statement Specify the connection to be terminated in the DISCONNECT statement The connection name DEFAULT CURRENT or ALL can be specified in the DISCONNECT statement For the DISCONNECT statement specification see Figure 127 Selecting a Connection To select the available connections use the SET CONNECTION statement More than one server can be connected by executing the CONNECT statement for each database to be connected If an application connects more than one server a server for which SQL statements are to be executed must be defined 508 Chapter 15 Database SQL If more than one CONNECT statement is executed the server connected with the last CONNECT statement will be used as the current server current connection SQ
425. ontrol of 240 fixed format 19 fixed length record 195 FORM 10 277 329 form control buffer FCB 276 form descriptors 277 generating used by presentation file module 318 FORM overlay option 11 form overlay pattern 275 programs using 302 form overlay patterns printer orders 303 FORM RTS 11 formatting source programs 16 FORMLIB 340 FOVLDIR 147 FOVLTYPE 147 free format 20 FROM specification 398 function key defining 350 using when executing a program 345 function names associating with mnemonic names 400 G GIVING output file name 413 418 GLOBAL clause 363 GS series format run time parameter 126 HOPPER 298 host program executing 562 linking 562 host specific functions language construct used as support functions 559 I control records 295 import library 76 building under Windows NT 94 creating 89 INDEXED 222 indexed file 194 creating 228 extending 229 processing 226 record key 195 Indexed file manipulation 263 indexed files required file definitions 222 using 221 indicator area 17 INITIAL clause 362 initial program 362 initial state 362 initialization file 123 creating 536 modifying contents of 125 section types 124 initialization file 32 161 Input file 412 417 INPUT PROCEDURE 412 Input output processing executing 338 input output statements 215 337 execution orders 218 INSERT statement 523 internal program 361 calling 362 inter program c
426. opened concurrently N umber of files 2 for index files only number of records exclusively controlled or locked The F option sets the number of files to be opened To open many files concurrently enter a large value To execute COBOL programs specify a value of 2048 or more depending on the length of the path name of files to be opened Once loaded the SHARE command cannot be selected again If any SHARE option must be changed restart the system then execute the SHARE command with the revised command line Executing COBOL Programs COBOL programs can be executed from the WINEXEC window or with a batch file This section describes how to use the WINEXEC window to execute COBOL programs 1 Activate the WINEXEC window See Activating the WINEXEC Window 2 Enter the name of the file to be executed in the Command Line edit box See Entering a File N ame 3 When any argument is specified directly type it in the Command Line edit box in the same command line form 4 Start execution by selecting the Execute button in the WINEXEC window Chapter 5 Executing Programs 119 5 Toreexecute a program already executed double click on the file name displayed in the History list box 6 Set the run time environment information When a COBOL program is executed the Run time Environment Setup window appears Set run time environment information if necessary then close the Run time Environment Setup window See
427. or Log will this item will become effective LDINF section Necessary information is specified by the Logical Destination Creation dialog box and the Logical Destination Mode Change dialog box Specify this section in the following manner logical destination name number of maximum storage message number of maximum priority level logical destination mode If information regarding the number of maximum storage messages is omitted should still be specified 1 Logical destination name Specify the logical destination name set in the Logical Destination Creation dialog box The logical destination name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length There is no default 472 Chapter 14 Communication Functions 2 Number of maximum storage messages Specify the number of maximum storage messages set in the Logical Destination Creation dialog box The default is the maximum number of system storage messages SysM axM sg 3 Number of maximum priority level Specify the maximum priority level number set in the Logical Destination Creation dialog box The default is 9 4 Logical destination mode Specify each logical destination mode set in the Logical Destination Mode Change dialog box When the server is started each logical destination will be set in the mode according to its specification RDWR Read write is acceptable READ Read is acceptable write is not WRITE Read is not acceptabl
428. ow See Activating the WINLINK Window 86 Chapter 4 Linking Programs e Select EXE in the Type box e Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name e Enter the other files required for linking in the File Names list box See Entering Files Object file Module definition file Subprogram created in Step 1 Object file when the subprogram is an object program Library when the subprogram is a library e Set linker options See Setting Linker Options e Start linking See Starting and Quitting Linking e Quit linking See Starting and Quitting Linking Creating an Executable Program with a Dynamic Link Structure The COBOL object program must be compiled from a COBOL source program containing no dynamic CALL statements those using data names to specify the called program name or be compiled after specifying the compiler option NODLOAD To create an executable program having a dynamic link structure by linking a COBOL object program that calls a subprogram e Activate the WINLINK Linking Files window See Activating the WINLINK Window e First create a DLL from the subprogram Select DLL in the Type box Enter the target name See Entering the Target Name Chapter 4 Linking Programs 87 Enter the other files required to link the subprogram in the File Names list box See Entering Files Object file Subprogram Module definition file Subprogra
429. pecify a data name defined as an 8 amp byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section Use this data name to set the name of the item group defined in the form descriptor 310 Chapter 8 Printing Table 25 Information to be specified in a file control entry cont Type Optional Data name Write the data name defined as a 2 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section The input output execution result is set for this data name For value to be set see A ppendix B 1 O Status List For detail information specify a 4 bytes alphanumeric data item How you assign a printer information file at execution time depends on whether a file identifier file identifier literal or data name is specified for a file reference identifier What you specify for a file reference identifier depends on when the name of the printer information file is determined Specify a file identifier literal if the name of the printer information file is determined during COBOL program generation and not changed afterwards Specify a file identifier if the name of the printer information file is undetermined during COBOL program generation or it is to be determined every program execution time Specify a data name to determine the name of the printer information file in a program DATA DIVISION Inthe DATA DIVISION define record definitions and the definitions of data used in the ENVIRON
430. pecify different compiler options enter a compiler directing statement within the COBOL source program Refer to Compiler Directing Statement in Chapter 2 Specify the main program See Specifying the Main Program The options set up at this step have priority over options specified at the dialog box even if MAIN was specified Start compilation When compilation of one file ends start compilation of the next file See Starting and Quitting Compilation Correct any compile errors When compilation ends a compile message appears in the window When a compile error is detected a compile message for all files appears in the window after continuous compilation ends Correct the program by using the error search function then restart compilation See Correcting a Compile Error Quit compilation See Starting and Quitting Compilation To continue compilation close the message and repeat compilation from Step 3 To quit compilation click on the Cancel button 32 or select Exit 16 in the WINCOB window If no errors are found in the COBOL source program and compilation ends normally an object program is created The object program cannot be run as it is The object program must be linked to make it executable When compilation ends Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 43 link the program For details on linking refer to Chapter 4 Linking Programs WINCOB Window The WIN COB window runs compi
431. phabetic character from A to Z is regarded as a port name When the drive name is omitted the current drive will be used Appendix G Writing Special Literals 687 port name A port name can be specified for sequential files only If a port name is specified specification of a path name and file reference name is invalid To specify a printer with a port name use port name LPT1 LPT2 or LPT3 path name Specify the directory storing the file in the following format directory name directory name If a path name is omitted the current directory is used filename Specify a file name extension Specify any character string for identifying the type of the file For example e AA COBOL A DAT e LPT1 e B TXT 688 Appendix G Writing Special Literals Appendix H High Speed File Processing Record sequential files and line sequential files can be accessed faster by specifying an available range This appendix explains methods of specification for high speed file processing and notes on high speed file processing Specification Methods This section explains methods of specification for high speed file processing The specification methods apply to both record sequential files and line sequential files When defining a file identifier as a filereference identifier in the program specify BSA M following the filename to be allocated upon setting of environment variable information Refe
432. ple e Compiler option SSIN SSIN IN FILE e Nameof input file of ACCEPT statement A INDATA TXT e Run time environment information INFILE A INDATA TXT 29 SYSOUT Access Name Set the Output File for the ACCEPT DISPLAY Function SYSOUT access name file name Specify the environment variable name specified in the compiler option SSOUT as SYSOUT access name Specify the name of the file used as the data output destination when the DISPLAY statement of the ACCEPT DISPLAY function is run 146 Chapter 5 Executing Programs For example e Compiler option SSOUT SSOUT OUTFILE Name of output file of DISPLAY statement A OUTDATA TXT Run time environment information OUTFILE A OUTDATA TXT 30 TERMINATOR Set the Function Keys for Screen Handling TERMINATOR keyword keyword Specify the PF1 to PF24 keys in keywords in the form of PFmm PFnn a range from mm to nn where nn represents 01 to 24 and 01 to 09 equal to 1 to 9 indicates that the function keys specified in the keyword are disabled as input For example TERMINATOR PF1 PF3 PF4 PF24 31 FCBxxxx Set FCB Control Statements FCBxxxx FCB control statement Specify the FCB name specified in the control record in xxxx and an FCB control statement in FCB control statement For the format of the FCB control statement refer to Appendix K FCB Control Statement Chapter 5 Executing Programs 147 32 FOVLDIR Set the Directory Conta
433. port Library in the WINLINK Linking Files Command menu Setting Linker Options Different Linker Options screens are used for 32 Windows 95 and Windows NT and 16 Windows 3 1 Chapter 4 Linking Programs 95 Windows 95 and Windows NT Linker options are set using the Linker Options dialog box displayed by clicking the Options button in the WINLINK Linking Files window A main link option Debugging is excluded is automatically set See the LINK command options table in Appendix J Linker Options x Linker Options 2e Cancel Help Figure 35 The Linker Options dialog box The Linker Options dialog box contains the following elements Linker Options edit box Enter link options Delimit multiple options with one or more spaces D ebug button Click to include linker debug options in the Linker Options edit box OK button Click when finished specifying linker options Cancel button Click to cancel any linker option settings or changes and return to the state before the dialog box was opened Help button Click to access the online help 96 Chapter 4 Linking Programs Windows 3 1 Linker Options E Tico MV NOD M NOE T iM OK Cancel Figure 36 The Linker Options dialog box The Linker Options dialog box contains the following elements co Prepares for debugger operation Use this option when compiler option TEST was specified during compilation of sou
434. port library is created automatically Start linking After linking the following files are created 90 Chapter 4 Linking Programs DLL Import library of subprogram DLL name LIB Export file 32 If an import library already exists an alarm message is displayed WINLINK WINLINK isa utility that links programs compiled by COBOL85 to create executable programs and DLLs libraries and import libraries WINLINK provides two windows e WINLINK Linking Files window Creates import libraries DLLs and executable programs e WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window Creates libraries Switch these windows by selecting the Commands menu on the menu bar in each window For details about how to use the windows refer to the online help Activating the WINLINK Window To activate the WINLINK window do one of the following e Select WINLINK from the Tools menu in P STAFF 32 e Select WINLINK EXE in the File M anager directory window 16 Chapter 4 Linking Programs 91 WINLINK Linking Files Window The WINLINK Linking Files window is used to create import libraries DLLs and executable programs by linking Use the menu bar to exit the window set linker options or switch between windows Select the target type as either EXE or DLL The following sections describe how to use the window S WINLINK Linking Files Commands Help m Target Target Cancel a Options Link
435. pper to be used to feed forms The following values can be specified e P1 hopper 1 e P2 hopper 2 e S sub hopper e P arbitrary hopper The hopper cannot be changed by an application using the I control record because the system automatically selects a hopper according to the form size specified 32 SIDE Specify a print side The following values can be specified e F single sided printing e B double sided printing Single sided printing is output however even when B is specified PRT AREA Specify whether the unprintable area is set L or not set N This specification has no effect however if the form descriptors are not used Chapter 8 Printing 299 BIND Specify the binding direction when multiple pages are outputted sequentially WIDTH Specify the binding width from 0 through 9999 unit 1 1440 inch OFFSET Specify the offset from 0 through 9999 unit 1 1440 inch RSV Area used by the system Enter a blank S Control Record control record OffsetO 2 3 6 13 17 21 SIOR SW N FOVL 1 FOVL 1 FoOWL 2 FOYL t O1 S CONTROL REC 03 REC ID PIC Hie WALUE 31 03 MM PIC mil VALUE 0 03 FIC W35 03 N FIC ofS 03 FOVL n PIC Hed ESY Area used by the system Enter a blank H Set the number of form overlay pattern names to be specified FoYL n Seta form overlay pattern name With this system only the form overlay pattem name specified at the beginning is
436. program does not change contents of the data name of the COBOL program When BY VALUE Data Name is Specified Contents of the Area The actual argument value that the COBOL program passes to the C program is the contents of the specified data name Changing the contents of the actual argument in the C program 366 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication does not change contents of the data name of the COBOL program Return Codes Function Values Use the PROGRAM STATUS special register to receive return codes function values from C programs C function values must be of the long int type Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication C Call Rules Program COB WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 AGRP 02 AITEM1 PIC X 10 02 AITEM2 PIC X 20 77 B PIC S9 4 COMP 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL C WITH C LINKAGE USING AGRP B IF PROGRAM STATUS 0 Pascal Call Rules 16 Program COB WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 AGRP 02 AITEM1 PIC X 10 02 AITEM2 PIC X 20 77 B PIC S9 4 COMP 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL C WITH C LINKAGE USING AGRP B IF PROGRAM STATUS 0 STDCALL Call Rules 32 Program COB WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 AGRP 02 AITEM1 PIC X 10 02 AITEM2 PIC X 20 77 B PIC S9 4 COMP 5 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL C WITH C LINKAGE USING AGRP B IF PROGRAM STATUS 0 Function C typedef struct char aitem1 10 char aitem2 20 agrp lo
437. ptor specify the directory of the file containing the file descriptor If a file containing the file descriptor exists in more than one directory specify the directory names separated by a semicolon The directories are searched for in the order specified Specify directory name file descriptor name within 79 bytes 16 Specify directory name file descriptor name within 126 bytes 32 If the option is specified in duplicate the directory search sequence is as follows 1 Directories specified in the f option 2 Directories specified in the compiler option FILELIB 3 Directories specified in the FILELIB environment variable 32 592 Appendix A Compiler Options 12 WINCOB WC FLAG WS E Specify the diagnostic messages to be displayed e FLAG I Displays all diagnostic messages e FLAG W Displays diagnostic messages of only W level or higher e FLAG E Displays diagnostic messages of only E level or higher The diagnostic message specified in the compiler option CONF is displayed regardless of the FLAG specification 13 WINCOB WC STDM STDI LRPW FLAGSW STDH SIA NOFLAGSW To display a message indicating a language construct in COBOL syntax specify FLA GSW otherwise specify NOFLAGSW The following are language constructs that can be indicated e FLAGSW STDM Language elements that are not in the minimum subset of the standard COBOL Appendix A Compiler Options 593
438. r 2 FREE The run time library could not Eliminate the cause of the error according to be loaded the detail code Load Library function error code written for 2 JMP0373I I 1 ERROR STM 2 SERVER 3 4 Continues program processing Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the error code written for 4 then re execute The type of the client interface is written for 1 The error SQL statement is written for 2 The name of the error server is written for 3 For the error code refer to the error code manual of the client interface JMP0374I U UNRECOGNIZABLE SQL STATEMENT WAS FOUND Abnormally terminates the program Response Delete the SQL statement that cannot be used then re execute For SQL statements that cannot be used see the requirements for each database environment and notes on the environment Appendix F Message Lists 671 JMP0392I U THE NETWORK DATABASE FUNCTION CANNOT BE USED Abnormally terminates the program Response e Change the program so that it does not use functions specific to GS series hosts e To use distributed development support functions re execute under the debugger 16 JMP04001 U ACCESS ENVIRONMENT ERROR OCCURRED SYS 1 FILE 2 BLK 3 4 5 Abnormally terminates the program Response A system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE The following information is written for 1 to 5 1 Error infor
439. r Contents Check Item in Program 3 CONTAINS clause CODE SET clause INV COLSEQ The collating sequence is invalid Alphabet name specified in the PROGRAM COLLATING SEQUENCE clause INV DELMTR The record delimiter is invalid Data specified in the ORGANIZATION RECORD and RECORD DELIMITER clauses INV KEYDUP Determination of whether to Presence or absence of specify a key in duplicate specification of the RECORD DUPLICATES is incorrect KEY ALTERNATE RECORD KEY and DUPLICATES clauses INV KEYLEN The key length of the allocated Data name length specified in the file conflicts with the definition RECORD KEY and ALTERNATE in the program RECORD KEY clauses INV KEYSTR The key structure is invalid Data name length and data name count specified in the RECORD KEY and ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clauses or the relative position in the record of the data name specified in the clauses INV LRECL The record length of the allocated Data specified in the file conflicts with the definition ORGANIZATION clause in the program Record length specified in the RECORD CONTAINS clause INV RKP The relative key position of the Relative position in the record of assigned file conflicts with the the data name specified in the definition in the program RECORD KEY and ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clauses KEY ATTR The key attribute of the allocated Data name attribute specified in file conflicts with the definition the RECORD KEY and in the program ALTERNATE
440. r to Environment Variables in Chapter 5 for details on setting environment variables information file identifier path name file name BSAM When defining a data name as a file reference identifier in the program specify BSA M following the filename to be allocated at definition of the data name in the program MOVE path name file name BSAM TO data name When defining a file identifier literal as a file reference identifier in the program specify BSAM following the filename to be allocated at definition of the file identifier literal in the program ASSIGN TO path name file name BSAM 690 Appendix H High Speed File Processing Notes Records cannot be updated REWRITE statement cannot be executed If a record is updated an error occurs during execution Record sequential files only If files are shared and you want to permit file sharing among different processes all files must bein shared mode and opened with INPUT specified Operation is not guaranteed if a file is opened without specifying INPUT File sharing is not permitted in the same process Operation is not guaranteed if a file is shared with in the same process High speed file processing cannot be used if DISK is specified as the filereference identifier If a record read from a line sequential file includes a tab the tab code is not replaced by a blank Appendix I GS series Function Comparison Table 88 compares functions between th
441. r to access an indexed file requiring recovery 2 If a message is generated showing error information ERFLD 101 when a print file without the FORMAT clause specified is executed ensure the following Only the required number of printer drivers are installed The FCB control statement is less than 2 048 bytes All the specified forms overlay patterns are correct All the registered forms overlay pattern names are correct The spool area is large enough Confirm the disk capacity of the environment variable TMP directory Stop all other applications that are executing at the same time Confirm the size of real storage and increase it if necessary Confirm the size of virtual storage and increase it if necessary If no problems are found in the above checks a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE For Btrieve file error codes refer to the Btrieve Manual issued by NOVELL Inc See System Error Codes for details on character strings indicating errors in the file message text other than that above 3 If ERRCD 90xx is output while FORM RTS is used refer to the FORM RTS online help for XX 656 Appendix F Message Lists If any of the character strings shown in Table 77 are displayed eliminate any conflicts between the file or record definition in the program and the attribute of the file to be processed Table 78 Character strings written for JMP0310I I U 3 2 Erro
442. ram error Check for the cause of the error in the same manner as when JM PO7OLI U is written JMP0901I E FUNCTION 1 ERROR ARGUMENT ABSOLUTE VALUE IS MORE THAN 3 53E 15 Returns 0 then continues processing Response Specify the absolute value of the argument within the calculation enabled range then re execute The name of the error function SIN or COS is written for 1 JMP0902I E FUNCTION 1 ERROR ARGUMENT ABSOLUTE VALUE IS MORE THAN 1 0 Returns 0 then continues processing Response Specify the absolute value of the argument that can be stored in the definition area then re execute The name of the error function ASIN or ACOS is written for 1 JMP0903I E FUNCTION 1 ERROR ARGUMENT VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE Returns 0 then continues processing Response Specify the value of the argument that can be stored in the definition area then re execute The name of the error function LOG LOG10 ANNUITY FACTORIAL RANDOM SQRT or TAN is written for 1 682 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0904I E FUNCTION 1 ERROR ARGUMENT VALUE IS INVALID Returns 0 then continues processing Response Specify the value of the argument that satisfies the condition of each function then re execute The name of the error function is written for 1 JMP0905I E FUNCTION ANNUITY ERROR ARITHMETIC EXCEPTION Returns 0 then continues processing Response Specify the value of the argument that does not cause zero divisio
443. ram having the WinM ain function must be specified first For example when a COBOL program has the WinM ain function when compiled with compiler option MAIN specified specify the import library of the COBOL run time system prior to that of the C run time library Doing so prevents the startup routine provided by the import library of the C run time library from being linked to the COBOL program Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 379 3 Generating DLLs from C programs that call COBOL programs Generating aC program export file LIB DEF Cprog DEF OUT Cprog LIB MACHINE 1X86 Generating a COBOL program import library LIB DEF COB DEF OUT COB LIB MACHINE 1X86 Generating a DLL LINK Cprog OBJ Cprog EXP COB LIB Cimplib DLL OUT Cprog DLL CPROG DEF C program module definition file name CPROG LIB C program import library name COB DEF COBOL program module definition file name COB LIB COBOL program import library name CPROG OB C program object file name CPROG DLL Name of the DLL to be generated CPROG EXP C program export file CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library Refer to C manuals 380 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 4 Generating DLLs from COBOL programs and C programs that call the COBOL programs Generating an export file LIB DEF COB DEF OUT COB LIB MACHINE 1X86 Generating a DLL LINK COB OBJ F3BICIMP LIB
444. ram is now complete Verify that the object program SAM PLE1 OB was created in the same directory C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE1in this example as the directory where the sample program was stored If compilation does not complete normally the program may not have been installed properly Verify that the program was installed properly Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 29 Windows 3 1 In the following explanation it is assumed the sample program is stored in C FSC PCOBOL16 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 COB Double click on the PROGRAM MING STAFF icon The PROGRAM MING STAFF P STAFF window opens Select WIN COB from the Utility menu in the P STAFF window The WINCOB window opens Click on the Browse button and navigate to the directory where the sample program is stored Alternatively you can specify the file name in the edit box by entering it directly WINCOB Exit Options Mode Help File Name 3 Compile C FSC PCOBOL1 6 SAMPLES SAMPLE 1 SAMPLE1 COB Figure 10 The WINCOB window Select Options in the WIN COB window The Compiler Options dialog box is displayed 30 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Compiler Options CAFSC PCOBOL1 6 SAMPLE S SAMPLE1 DEFAULT CBI OK Compiler Options Other Compiler Options Po Figure 11 The Compiler Options dialog box Click on the Add button The Add Compiler Options dialog box containing a list of available options is displayed Compiler Op
445. rator response Link libraries to reduce the number of libraries Usea module requiring less libraries Explanation There is not enough space on the disk or root directory O perator response Delete files to make space Movefiles to make space Explanation The directory containing COBSTUB EXE was not set in the environment variable PATH O perator response Set the install directory of the COBOL system in the environment variable PATH Explanation An attempt was made to link Windows NT objects with the Windows 3 1 linker O perator response Use the Windows NT linker 108 Chapter 4 Linking Programs L2022 L2023 L4038 Explanation Nointernal name of the export routine is defined in the EXPORTS definitions in the module definition file No internal name of the export routine is set in the library or object file O perator response Make sure that the export name in the EXPORTS statement of the module definition file is set in the library or object file Explanation EXPORTS is duplicated in the module definition file The internal name of existent data was found in the library or object file O perator response M ake sure that the export name in the EXPORTS statement in the module definition file is duplicated in the library or object file Explanation An attempt was made to create an executable program EXE by compiling the main program without the compiler option MAIN O per
446. rce programs NOD Restricts the linker to use only standard libraries Always use this option when linking object programs compiled by the COBOL85 compiler NOE Disables the library extended dictionary M Outputs a list of public symbols to the map file Options Allows direct key entry of other linker options OK button Click when finished specifying linker options Cancel button Chapter 4 Linking Programs 97 Click to cancel any linker option settings or changes and return to the state before the dialog box was opened Starting and Quitting Linking After all information required for linking has been set start linking To start linking select the Link button The system brings up acommand prompt window that displays the linker messages 32 A link message is displayed in the message window 16 A link exit message is displayed in the command prompt window Makesure that linking has completed successfully then close the command prompt window 32 A link exit message is displayed in the message window M ake sure that linking has completed successfully then close the message box 16 If alink error occurs see Linker M essages and take action To continue linking repeat the procedure from the entering a target name step To quit linking click on the Cancel button in the WINLINK Linking Files window This closes the window Please note the following points as they are causes of common link er
447. rd name CLOSE file name For file extension OPEN EXTEND file name Editing records WRITE record name CLOSE file name 204 Chapter 7 File Processing For record reference OPEN INPUT file name READ file name CLOSE file name For record updating OPEN I O file name READ file name Editing records REWRITE record name CLOSE file name Processing Outline Creating To generate a record sequential file open a file in OUTPUT mode then write records to the file with a WRITE statement If an attempt was made to generate a file that already exists the file is regenerated and the original contents are lost Extending To extend a record sequential file open a file in EXTEN D mode then write records to the file with a WRITE statement Records are added to the end of the last record in the file Referencing To refer to records open the file in INPUT mode then read records in the file from the first record with a READ statement When OPTIONAL is specified in the SELECT clause in the file control entry the OPEN statement is successful even if the file does not exist during execution of the OPEN statement and the Chapter 7 File Processing 205 at end condition is satisfied upon execution of the first READ statement For information on the at end condition see Input Output Error Processing Updating To update records open the file in O mode read t
448. rd number does not exceed the maximum value permitted for the relative key item when records are written in sequential processing Alternatively correct the program by using the INVALID KEY clauseso that processing for an invalid key condition is performed The error COBOL statement WRITE is written for 1 The file name or access name of the error file is written for 2 The error address is written for 4 JMP03281 I U DEPENDING ON OBJECT VALUE IS OUT OF RANGE STM WRITE FILE 1 2 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Response Correct the program so that the DEPENDING ON valueis defined in the specified range The file name or access name of the error file is written for 1 The error address is written for 2 JMP0330I I U STATEMENT SEQUENCE ERROR STM S1 FILE 2 3 4 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition Appendix F Message Lists 665 U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 3 then re execute The CO
449. re development kit for additional details Using Simplified Inter application Communication Outline This section explains how to use simplified inter application communication For more information about how to use simplified inter application communication refer to the sample programs in the Getting Started with Fujitsu COBOL guide Simplified inter application communication is used to transfer messages between programs Messages are transferred between programs through the logical destination of a communication system process called a server that controls messages It generates logical destinations for storing messages in the server 450 Chapter 14 Communication Functions A user send receive program is called a client Before starting the client connect a client logical destination local logical destination to a server logical destination remote logical destination Consequently if read write processing is specified for the client logical destination data is read from or written to the connected server logical destination A server can be operated under Windows 95 and Windows NT and a client can be operated under Windows 95 Windows 3 1 and Windows NT The following figure outlines simplified inter application communication Windows 95 Windows NT Windows 3 1 Windows 95 Windows NT Client A Server Client B COBCI_OPEN Wite Read COBCI_OPEN COBCI_WRITE LDA1L LDA LD1
450. rectory When using COBOL85 When using screen and form descriptors Required Required directory name STAFF directory name STAFF SMED_SUFFIX FORMLIB Extension of screen and form descriptors any character string Directory name of the file storing screen and form descriptors When changing the extension PMD of screen and form descriptors When using screen and form descriptors Optional Optional Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 9 Table 2 Setting environment variables cont Setup Timing Environment Details Conditions Variable At compilation FFD_SUFFIX Extension of file 32 descriptor any character string FILELIB Directory name of file storing the file descriptor At linking LIB COBOL85 install directory Directory name of the file to be combined when linking TMP Working directory name to be used at linking At execution BSORT_TMPDIR Working directory name MEFTDIR Directory name of window information file and printer information file TEMP Working directory name When changing the extension FFD of the file descriptor When using the file descriptor When linking When linking When using the sort merge function When using the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY When using screen and form descriptors When using the sort merge function When using the COBOL85 FILE UTILITY Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional 10 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 W
451. resentation file module 1 Generate screen descriptors with FORM 2 Generate COBOL source programs with a text editor 3 Compile and link COBOL source programs to generate executable programs Generate window information files with a text editor 5 Execute the programs Generating Screen Descriptors This section describes how to generate screen descriptors used by the presentation file module For detailed FORM functions and how to use FORM refer to the FORM V1 3 Manual The following table lists information to be entered for screen descriptors Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 333 Table 32 Information to be entered for screen descriptors Information Type Details and Use of Specification Required File name Specify the name of a file in which screen descriptor is stored Definition size Specify the screen size with the numbers of lines and columns Descriptors format Specify the free format Data item Specifies the area for screen input output The item name specified here is used as a data name in the COBOL program specifications Item group Groups one or more items displayed or entered once per input output group The group name specified here is used in the COBOL program specifications Optional Item control field Specify a 5 byte item control field if the contents of screen descriptors need to be changed with a special register in a COBOL program Attention Specifies to decide an input key in th
452. rget 4 Click on the OK button The selected source file is displayed in the File edit box of the Dependent Files dialog box 5 Click on the Add button The selected source file is added to the Dependent Files list box 6 When the added source file is the main program set the main program See Setting the Main Program 7 Repeat Steps 2 to 6 for all targets 180 Chapter 6 Project Management Function Setting the Main Program When the source file registered is the main program the file must be set as the main program To set the main program select the file to be used as the main program from the files in the Dependent Files list box then click on the Main Program button The small icon next to the selected file turns red Registering Library Files Source file libraries are registered in the Library Files dialog box To register alibrary file 1 Select the source file of the program defining the library from the Dependent Files list box of the Dependent Files dialog box 2 Click on the Libraries button The Library Files dialog box is displayed Chapter 6 Project Management Function 181 Library Files x Dependent Source File OK C A FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 Printpre cob one m Libraries Help Eile FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLES S_rec cbl Browse List Add ep FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 S_rec cbl Delete Po I Figure 60 The Library Files dialog box 3 Cl
453. rierN ew is used as the default For a print file with a FORMAT clause and presentation file refer to the FORM RTS online help Available Print Character Forms Print character forms are em size and em size tall and wide double size en size and en size tall and wide and double size The default form is em size Orientation of Print Characters Characters are printed horizontally Print Character Spaces The following table lists soaces determined according to the sizes and forms of print characters Character spaces of 0 01 to 24 00 cpi are specified in units of 0 01 cpi The default space is 10 0 cpi 274 Chapter 8 Printing Table 22 Relationship between print character sizes forms and character spaces Unit cp Character Form Character i abe En Size i i i Pp 12 bain BOERE 9 point g point o point AFEZEAE EIENEN 9 point TRALEE g point e 9 point N N Wj v u N a2 point d point For the meanings of the codes for character sizes refer to the COBOL 85 Reference M anual EEE Arrangement coordinates of print characters There are two methods for calculating the print coordinates when printing forms using the FORMAT phrase Chapter 8 Printing 275 1 Dividing the print resolution character interval with the space between the lines DPI and then arranging characters while rounding off the remainder 2 Arrange the characters in coordinates and corrected the result for eac
454. riptors name must be set for a data name specified ina FORMAT clause and an item group name be set for a data name specified ina GROUP clause Data items in an item group set for a data name specified ina GROUP clause are eligible for input output By setting values in special registers before executing a WRITE or READ statement the attributes of data items in presentation records can be changed For values to be set for special registers refer to Special Registers Used with the Presentation File Module in Appendix E If an error is found in input data while executing aREAD statement and a re input request order has been defined in Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 339 screen descriptors screen display and input editing to enable re input are repeated until the error is cleared When no error is found or no re input request order has been defined the input edit result is posted to a COBOL program In addition attention information is posted to a data name specified in a SELECTED FUNCTION clause After executing a READ statement the input result is returned to special register EDIT STATUS For the values to be set refer to Special Registers Used with the Presentation File Module in Appendix E How to Use Special Registers The attributes of data items defined with screen descriptors can be changed with special registers M ultiple screen descriptors with control fields that have different sizes cannot coexis
455. rite records in the file In sequential access records read with the last READ statement are updated In random access the primary key records with the specified key values are updated If the record with the specified key valueis not found in RANDOM or DYNAMIC access the invalid key condition is satisfied For information on the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing The contents of primary keys cannot be changed The contents of alternate keys however can be changed Chapter 7 File Processing 231 Deleting Sequential Random and Dynamic To delete records open the file in O mode then delete records from the file In sequential access records read with the last READ statement are deleted In random access the primary key records with the specified key values are deleted If the record with the specified key value is not found in random or dynamic access the invalid key condition is satisfied For information about the invalid key condition see Input Output Error Processing Inserting Random and Dynamic To insert records open the file in O mode then insert records in the file The record insertion position is determined by the primary key value When DUPLICATES is not specified in the RECORD KEY or ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clause in the file control entry and the record with the specified key value already exists the invalid key condition is satisfied For information
456. ritten by the WINCOB and compile commands system action programmer response and parameters A variable character string is expressed as s in the messages below s is an invalid source file name Compilation terminated Response Specify the correct file name then re execute An invalid suboption is specified for s Compilation terminated Response Specify the correct sub option then re execute P option is missing s option is ignored Ignores the option s and continues compilation 636 Appendix F Message Lists Response To enable the option s specify it with the P option then re execute Source file name is missing Compilation terminated Response Specify the name of the file to be compiled then re execute s is not a COBOL85 Compiler option Compilation terminated Response Specify the correct option then re execute Argument of Ss is not specified Compilation terminated Response Specify the argument for the option s correctly then re execute s was not found Compilation terminated Response Specify the correct file name then re execute The file name is z S S t System error s1 occurred on s2 Terminates compilation abnormally Response Check and eliminate the cause of the error System error code errno OxXXX XXX expressed in hexadecimal is written for s1 The name of the processing in which the system error occurred
457. rm descriptors Program Specifications This section explains how to write programs that use form descriptors in a print file with aFORMAT clause Chapter 8 Printing 309 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION In the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION write the relation between the function name and mnemonic name print characters are indicated in the program and define a print file Relating the Function Name to the Mnemonic Name To specify a print character with aCHARACTER TYPE clause relate the function name indicating the size form direction and space of a print character to the mnemonic name For function name types and type styles refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual Defining Print Files Define a print file in a file control entry The following table lists information required to write a file control entry Table 25 Information to be specified in a file control entry a sc eee ee Type Required SELECT File name Write the name of a file to use in a COBOL clause program conforming to the rules of COBOL user defined words ASSIGN File Write a fileidentifier file identifier literal or data dause reference name Use a file reference code to assign a printer identifier information file to be used by Form RTS at execution time FORMAT Data name Specify a data name defined as an 8 byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section Use this data name to set the form descriptor name GROUP Data name S
458. rmation is posted as SQLSTATE SQLCODE and SQLMSG Table 63 SQLSTATE SQLCODE and SQLMSG error information The connection has been A connection name must established with the same not be specified for more connection name than one connection Specify a unique name for each connection The number of connections The number of connections exceeds the maximum exceeds the maximum specified in the COBOL system Decrease the number of connections The maximum number of connections can vary depending on the ODBC environment Refer to the ODBC environment manual and take action The specified connection SQL statements cannot be does not exist executed because the connection is not active Check the SQL statement sequence in the program and take corrective action on the error The cursor is not opened The cursor is not ready Check the sequence of SQL statements using the cursor and take corrective action for the error The prepared statement is Check the sequence of not prepared dynamic SQL statements and take corrective action for the error 552 Chapter 15 Database SQL Notes on Using the ODBC Driver This section explains usage notes for ODBC drivers Pay special attention to this section since it covers important usage information Notes on SQL Statement Syntax DATA DIVISION The correspondence between ODBC data types and host variable data types is defined for COBOL85 See Correspondence Betwe
459. roduct at execution FORMAT dause Data name Specify a data name defined as an 8 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name specify the name of form descriptors during forms printing GROUP clause Data name Specify a data name defined as an 8 amp byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name specify the iten group name to be output during forms printing SYMBOLIC Specification Specify PRT DESTINATION of the output Clause destination Chapter 8 Printing 321 Table 28 Information to be specified in a file control entry cont M Information Details and Use of Specification Type Optional FILE STATUS Data name Write the data name defined as a 2 byte clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section The input output execution result is set for this data name For value to be set see Appendix B I O Status List For detail information specify a 4 byte alphanumeric data item PROCESSING Data name Specify the data name defined as a 2 byte MODE clause alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name set in input output processing type during forms input output See Table 29 UNIT Data name Specify the data name defined as a 6 byte CONTROL alphanumeric data item in the WORKING dause STORAGE or LINKAGE section For this data name set the control informa
460. rogram calls aCOBOL program call JMPCINT2 before calling the first COBOL program and call JMPCINT3 after calling the last COBOL program JMPCINT2isa subroutine that initializes COBOL programs JMPCINT3 isa subroutine that terminates COBOL programs Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 369 Calling COBOL programs without calling JMPCINT2 and JMPCINT3 may degrade performance because COBOL program run time environments are initialized and terminated every time COBOL programs are called Passing Parameters To pass arguments from C programs to COBOL programs specify actual arguments with C function calls The values of actual arguments that can be passed from C programs to COBOL programs must be storage addresses With COBOL programs by specifying data names in the USING clause of the PROCEDURE DIVISION header or the ENTRY statement the contents of the area at the address specified for an actual argument are received A CONST type specifier can be designated in the declaration or definition of a variable at the address specified by an actual argument When this happens do not change the contents of the area at the address specified by the actual argument Return Codes Function Values Values set to special register PROGRAM STATUS are passed to C programs as function values C programs receive the function values as the long int type Correspondence of Data Types The combination of the attributes of data p
461. rom the Library Name list box 2 Click on the Delete button 58 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Quitting Library Name Setup When setup of a library name is completed click on the OK button in the Library Name dialog box The Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed Storing Setup Options When setup of compiler options and library names are completed click on the OK button in the Compiler Options dialog box to save the details in the options file The options file creates the file name DEFAULT CBI in the same directory as the source file specified in the WINCOB window If the file DEFAULT CBI already exists the file is updated with the new details To cancel setup before new options have been stored click on the Cancel button or close the dialog without clicking on the OK button When running continuous compilation the same compiler options must be specified for source files being stored in the same directory To specify different compiler options enter a compiling directive statement within the COBOL source program Refer to Compiler Directing Statement in Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 59 Correcting a Compile Error If acompile error is detected after compilation is activated from the WINCOB window a compile message diagnostic message is displayed in the relevant window of the P STAFF editor when compilation terminates The error search function causes the display to tag jump from the diag
462. ronment Setup window 32 The Run time Environment Setup window contains the following elements Command Provides the functions available on the Set Delete Save and OK buttons and the option to configure the Console Screen and Printer fonts Section Selection Switches the display between environment variables and entry information Environment Setup Cancel Provides access to lists of the current environment variables COBOL environment variables and printer names Values can be selected from these lists for inclusion in the Environment Variables Information Chapter 5 Executing Programs 157 Help Access the online help Environment Variables Information edit box Information is entered and edited in this box then set into the list of environment variables to be used for this execution List list box Displays the environment variables that will be used in this execution Set button Click to register the contents of the edit box in the List D elete button Click to remove the currently selected item s from the List Save button Click to save the information in the List to the initialization file COBOL85 CBR for usein multiple executions OK button Click to continue execution Cancel button Click to discontinue execution 158 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Setting Environment Variable Information Environment information is set using the Environment Variables Information edit box o
463. rors e Always use the linker corresponding to the object e Do not create an executable program only from object programs containing the compiler option NOMAIN that is no compiler option MAIN was used during compilation e Do not create an executable program from multiple programs containing the compiler option MAIN 98 Chapter 4 Linking Programs WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries Window Use the WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window to link multiple object programs to a library WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries Figure 37 The WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window The WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries window contains the following elements Commands Switches the window between linking files mode and building COBOL libraries mode Help Accesses the online help Chapter 4 Linking Programs 99 COBOL Library File edit box Specify the name of the library file to be created COBOL Library File Browse button Click to select the name of a library file to be created Object File edit box Specify the name of a file to be added to the List Do not enter programs containing compiler option MAIN Link Object List Displays a list of input files to include in the link Link Object Browse button Click to select a file to be included in the link Add button Click to add the file in the Object File edit box to the List D elete button Click to remove the selected file s from the List OK button
464. rrect the program by using the FILE STATUS or INVALID KEY clause so that the program checks an attempt to access a non existent record The error COBOL statement READ REWRITE START or DELETE is written for 1 The file name or access name of the error file is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 JMP0325I I U BOUNDARY VIOLATION ERROR STM 1 FILE 2 3 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Response Increase the size of the file space then re execute The error COBOL statement WRITE REWRITE READ START or CLOSE is written for 1 The file name or access name of the error file is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 JMP0326I U NO SPACE CONDITION STM 1 FILE 2 3 Abnormally terminates the program Response Increase the size of the file space then re execute The error COBOL statement WRITE REWRITE READ START or CLOSE is written for 1 The file name or access name of the error file is written for 2 The error address is written for 3 664 Appendix F Message Lists JMP0327I U INVALID KEY CONDITION STM 1 FILE 2 3 4 Abnormally terminates the program Response If 3 is RRN gt R KEY correct the program so that the relative reco
465. rts programs for a client to operate a server database Before executing a COBOL application program using ODBC use the programs to check whether the client and server are connected normally Execute the COBOL application program after completing the setup of the ODBC control panel with the runtime environment information which is placed in initialization file COBOL85 CBR and the ODBC information file Chapter 15 Database SQL 545 Embedded SQL Keyword List This section gives a keyword list for enbedded SQL A ABSOLUTE ADA ADD ALL ALLOCATE ALTER AND ANY ARE AS ASC ASSERTION AT AUTHORIZATION AVG B BEGIN BETWEEN BIND BIT BIT_LENGTH BY C CASCADE CASCADED CASE CAST CATALOG CHAR CHAR_LENGTH CHARACTER CHARACTER_LENGTH CHARACTER_SET_CATALOG CHARACTER_SET_NAME CHARACTER_SET_SCHEMA CHECK CLOSE COALESCE COBOL COLLATE COLLATION COLLATION_CATALOG COLLATION_NAME COLLATION_SCHEMA COLUMN COMMIT CONNECT CONNECTION CONSTRAINT CONSTRAINTS CONTINUE CONVERT CORRESPONDING COUNT CREATE CURRENT CURRENT_DATE CURRENT_TIME CURRENT_TIMESTAMP_ CURSOR D DATA DATE DATETIME INTERVAL_CODE DATETIME_INTERVAL_PRECISION DAY DEALLOCATE DEC DECIMAL DECLARE DEFAULT DEFERRABLE DEFERRED DELETE DESC DESCRIBE DESCRIPTOR DIAGNOSTICS DICTIONARY 546 Chapter 15 Database SQL DISCONNECT DISPLACEMENT DISTINCT DOMAIN DOUBLE DROP E ELSE END E
466. rver is identified by the server identifier returned at calling of the COBCI_OPEN function Calling Format DATA DIVISION 01 STATUS REC 05 ERRORCD PIC S9 9 COMP 5 05 DETAIL PIC S9 9 COMP 5 01 SERVERHD REC PIC 919 COMP 5 lt 01 UNUSED REC PIC S9 9 COMP 5 VALUE 0 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL COBCI_CLOSE WITH C LINKAGE USING BY REFERENCE STATUS REC BY VALUE SERVERHD REC BY VALUE UNUSED REC Parameters STATUS REC An error code is returned to ERRORCD a detail code is returned to DETAIL Chapter 14 Communication Functions 485 SERVERH D REC Specify the server identifier returned at calling of the COBCI_OPEN function UNUSED REC Zero must be set for this area which is reserved for future expansion Return Value If the client is disconnected from the server normally the system returns 0 to special register PROGRAM STATUS Otherwise the system returns 1 to special register PROGRAM STATUS COBCI_READ Reads messages from the server logical destination The message in the highest priority level is first read Messages in the same priority level are read in the order they were written If there is no message at the logical destination a method of queuing processing can be specified depending on the processing type specification 486 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Calling Format DATA DIVISION 01 STATUS REC 05 ERRORCD 05 DETAIL SERVERHD REC LDNAME REC RECEIVETYPE REC 05 BUFFERLEN
467. ry key value must be set In sequential access records must be written so that the primary keys arein ascending order The following tasks are useful for collecting data to create index files e Create data with the editor read the data with the line sequential file function then write it to an indexed file as shown in the following example Indexed file Y Line sequential l w file 200001 John Davis ale 200021 Mary Jones 200001 John Davis 200100 Kate Smith 200021 Mary Jones 200100 Kate Smith es Figure 67 Writing data to an indexed file e With the screen handling functions presentation file and screen operation functions enter data from the screen then write it to an indexed file as shown in the following example Chapter 7 File Processing 229 Indexed file Ey 200001 John Davis 200021 Mary Jones Employee 200100 200100 Kate Smith Name Kate Smith EXECUTE REGISTER PF2 END Figure 68 Writing data from the screen to an indexed file Extending Sequential To extend an indexed file open the file in EXTEN D mode then write records sequentially At this time records are added to the end of the last record in the file The file can be extended only in sequential access mode To edit the records to be written the primary key values must be in ascending order When DUPLICATES is not specified in the RECORD K
468. s LD name Displays the logical destination name Read status line Displays the active A ct or inactive read status of a logical destination Write status line Displays the active A ct or inactive write status of a logical destination Chapter 14 Communication Functions 461 Read radio buttons To read messages from the logical destination select the Active radio button If Inactive is clicked messages cannot be read from the logical destination Write radio buttons To write messages to the logical destination select the Active radio button If Inactive is clicked messages cannot be written to the logical destination Displaying Information To display information select Display information from the Logical Destination operation menu The Logical Destination Information dialog box is displayed To update information click on the Update button Communication system setting information Max messages 999999999 Max waiting instruction 999999999 LD Name Read Write Priority Max messages Current Waiting LD2 Act Act 9 999999999 8 8 uoe Cm ee Figure 121 The Logical Destination Information dialog box 462 Chapter 14 Communication Functions The Logical Destination Information dialog box contains the following elements Communication system set information Max messages Displays the maximum number of messages that can be stored in the server Max waiti
469. s Other libraries excluding libraries provided by COBOL85 can be specified Quitting Registration After registration is completed click on the OK button in the Dependent Files dialog box The Dependent Files dialog box Chapter 6 Project Management Function 183 closes control is then returned to the project window The Project window then displays all registered files by target e The Project window is displayed outside the P STAFF window 32 e The Project window is displayed inside the P STAFF window 16 Sample5 prj Piel x h Files opened ce niet Build E Rebuild D Execute EQ CAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLES SAMPLES EXE C AFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLES PRINTPRC LIB BB C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 SAMPLE5 COB O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 S_REC CBL FE OCAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLESSPRINTPRC DLL O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 PRINTPRC COB O C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLES5 S_REC CBL 2 C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE5 PRINTPRC DEF re Figure 61 The Project window Setting Compiler Options Compiler options are set before compiling source files managed under the project Saved compiler options are saved in the option file project name CBI To set compiler options 1 Click on the Compiler Options button on the Project window The Compiler Options dialog box is displayed Refer to Compiler Options Dialog Box in Chapter 3 for more details Set the required infor
470. s If the row has not changed the table is locked until the operation is complete To determine if a row has changed the rows and versions should be compared VALUE Operation is the same as ROWVER To determine if a row has changed the data values should be compared N ote Operation for the cursor concurrency mode of SQL_CON CURRENCY depends on the data source 32 Chapter 15 Database SQL 541 Defining Default Connection Information If DEFAULT is specified in the CONNECT statement connection is established A user ID and password defined in default connection information are used for establishing connection if server name is specified in the CONNECT statement but the user ID and password are omitted The following table defines default connection information Table 59 How to define default connection information Ga DEFAULT_INF Ea character Specify the fixed character string section ee B name indicating the start of definition of default connection information GSQL_SERVER Server name Specify the name of a server where default connection is to be established This server name is used for retrieving the definition information of each server and for establishing connection for the data source for each server The definition information must be specified eae USERID eee ID Specify the user ID for operating the data source of the server Docc SSWORD e Specify the password for operating the data source o
471. s International Inc INFORMIX is a registered trademark of Informix Software Co EPSON ESC P is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Inc LIPS is a registered trademark of Canon Inc Sun is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Company U S Other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of each company Trademark indications are omitted for some system and product names described in this manual x COBOL85 User s Guide Acknowledgment The language specifications of COBOL are based on the original specifications developed by the work of the Conference on Data Systems Languages CODASYL The specifications described in this manual are also derived from the original The following passages are quoted at the request of CODASYL COBOL is an industry language and is not the property of any company or group of companies or of any organization or group of organizations No warranty expressed or implied is made by the COBOL Committee as to the accuracy and functioning of the programming system and language Moreover no responsibility is assumed by the committee in connection therewith The authors of the following copyrighted material have authorized the use of this material in part in the COBOL specifications Such authorization extends to the use of the original specifications in other COBOL specifications e FLOW MATIC Trademark of Sperry Rand Corporation Processing for the UNIVAC and II Data Automation S
472. s specify the GLOBAL clause in the data description entry Normally names are valid only within the same program but data items with the GLOBAL clause specified can be used by internal programs External programs cannot use data items with GLOBAL clause specified in the internal programs Notes If compiler option ALPHAL is valid in both the calling program and subprogram literal of the program name is treated as follows e Calling program A program name specified with a literal in the CALL statement is always treated as uppercase 364 Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication e Subprogram A program name written in the PROGRAM ID paragraph is always treated as uppercase When compiling the calling program and subprogram specify the same compiler option for each ALPHAL or NOALPHAL N ote Specify compiler option NOALPHAL when using lowercase letters for a program name When compiling the main program compiler option MAIN must be specified When compiling the subprogram compiler option NOMAIN must be specified Linking C Programs This section explains how to call C programs functions from COBOL programs and how to call COBOL programs from C programs functions In this section C programs functions are simply called C programs Calling C Programs from COBOL Programs This section explains how to call C programs from COBOL programs Calling Method To call C programs from COBOL programs spe
473. s is unnecessary message Specify the address of the area storing a message that indicates the execution result of the indexed file recovery function Allocate the storage area to the calling source 512 bytes required Specify 0 if a message is unnecessary Appendix L Indexed File Recovery 727 Return Value The code corresponding to the message is returned as the execution result of the indexed file recovery function See Table 94 for codes and messages The following is an example how to use the indexed file recovery function with Windows 95 and Windows NT 32 include f3bifutc h void callcobfrcov void char ixdfilename 512 c ixdfile 0 char blkdatname 512 c blkdat 0 char message 512 CFURCOV ixdfilename blkdatname message return 728 Appendix L Indexed File Recovery Indexed File Simple Recovery Function Function Resets flags in an indexed file in unusable state so that the file is enabled Unlike the indexed file recovery function the indexed file simple recovery function does not recover abnormal sections in the indexed file Consequently access to the indexed file after flag reset can result in an error because of conflicting data If an indexed file in the unusable state is opened 90 is returned as the I O status Coding Format include flbcfutc h function declaration 16 include f3bifutc h function declaration 32 signed long int CFURCOVS char
474. s of the specification of run time environment information SYSIN When SYSOUT is specified to compiler option SSOUT a console window is the data output destination of aDISPLAY statement regardless of the specification of run time environment information SYSOUT Program Execution Specify the names of files used for input output in the run time environment information specified for compiler options SSIN and SSOUT For example INDATA A IN DAT OUTDATA A OUT DAT If a specified file already exists at the output destination the file is recreated previous data is deleted Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 397 Entering Current Date and Time This section explains how to write compile link and execute programs for entering the current date and time by using system clocks with the ACCEPT DISPLAY function IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 date 1 01 day 01 day of week 1 01 time 1 PROCEDURE DIVISION ACCEPT date 1 FROM DATE ACCEPT day 1 FROM DAY ACCEPT day of week 1 FROM DAY OF WEEK ACCEPT time 1 FROM TIME EXIT PROGRAM END PROGRAM program name Programs Descriptions This section explains program descriptions for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required DATA DIVISION In the DATA DIVISION define the data items required to store input data 398 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY S
475. s to the server logical destination Priority levels can be specified for the messages to be written If the logical destination has no free space a method of queuing processing can be specified depending on the processing type specification Chapter 14 Communication Functions 489 Calling Format DATA DIVISION 01 STATUS REC 05 ERRORCD 05 DETAIL SERVERHD REC LDNAME REC SENDTYPE REC MSGLEN COMP 5 PRIORITY COMP 5 MSGTYPE COMP 5 WAITTIME COMP 5 UNUSED VALUE LOW VALUE BUFFER REC UNUSED REC COMP 5 VALUE 0 PROCEDURE DIVISION CALL COBCI_WRITE WITH C LINKAGE USING BY REFERENCE STATUS REC BY VALUE SERVERHD REC BY REFERENCE LDNAME REC BY REFERENCE SENDTYPE REC BY REFERENCE BUFFER REC BY VALUE UNUSED REC 490 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Parameters STATUS REC An error code is returned to ERRORCD a detail code is returned to DETAIL SERVERH D REC Specify the server identifier returned at calling of the COBCI_OPEN function LDNAME REC Specify the name of the client logical destination where messages are to be written If the logical destination name is shorter than eight bytes the remaining bytes must be padded with spaces SEN DTY PE REC For MSGLEN specify the length of the messages to be written to the logical destination Up to 32 000 bytes can be specified for MSGLEN For PRIORITY specify the priority levels of the messages to be written to the server logical destinat
476. sage is displayed ON or not OFF when the console window used by the ACCEPT DISPLAY function or the window used by the screen handling function closes 10 EnvSetWindow Set if Run time Environment Setup Window is Used EnvSetWindow USE UNUSE Specify whether the Run time Environment Setup window is displayed USE or not UN USE when a program is executed To change to USE once UNUSE is set modify the contents of the initialization file 134 Chapter 5 Executing Programs 11 AIIFileExclusive Set Exclusive Control of Files ALIFileExclusive YES NO Specify whether all files are exclusively controlled YES or not NO when a program is executed When YES is selected files used by the program cannot be accessed from any other program open error File exclusive control can reduce file access time 12 CnslFont Set the Console Window Font CnslFont font name font size Specify the font of the console window used for the ACCEPT DISPLAY function 13 ScrnFont Set the Font Used for Screen Handling ScrnFont font name font size Specify the font used for screen handling 14 PrinterFontName Set the Font Used for Print Files PrinterFontName Minchou font name Gothic font name Specify the font used for print files Specify the printer font name using up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters Spaces before and after the printer font name are included in the printer font name
477. scriptors COBOL program coding C gt K Save E COPY A OF XNDLIB lphanuneric item name TEM Length 6 Attribute Aphanumer ic With a byte Item Control field Without Item Control Division a i ak ae clara alae er ia 7101 record t 101 record 1 ee 02 FILLER PIC 5 g 02 ITENI PIC X 6 02 ITENI PIC X 6 With a d byte Item Control field Without the item name a record l 02 ITENI NODE PIC X 1 02 ITENI OPTION PIC X 1 02 ITENI COLOR PIC X I i 02 ITEMI PIC X 6 i Figure 100 Expanding a record description statement PROCEDURE DIVISION The input output statements are used for screen input output processing the same as for ordinary file processing 338 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Input output processing is executed in the following order 1 OPEN statement with I O phrase specified Starts screen input output processing 2 READ and WRITE statements Screen input output processing 3 CLOSE statement Stops screen input output processing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Use an OPEN statement once at the start of screen input output processing and a CLOSE statement once at the end of screen input output processing READ or WRITE Statements To display a screen use a WRITE statement with a presentation record specified To read data from a screen use a READ statement with a presentation record specified Before executing a WRITE statement the screen desc
478. se PROCESSING CONTROL clause Data name Data name Data name Data name Data name Specify a data name defined as an 8 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The logical destination name of input output processing must be specified for this data name when communication starts Specify a data name defined as an 8 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The logical destination name of input output processing must be specified for this data name when communication starts Specify a data name defined as a 1 byte numeric item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section Input output processing priority 1 9 must be specified for this name when communication starts A value of 1 specifies the highest priority If the default or 0 is specified the system assumes the lowest level of specified logical destination Specify a data name defined as a 1 32767 digit alphanumeric character in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section This sets the reason codes that will be given in the event of force ended communication Specify a data name defined as an alphanumeric character of the digit provided by IDCM in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section 448 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Note Refer to the online help in the IDCM software development kit for more details on the settings for the optional clauses DATA DIVISION
479. seaseesesaseaseetees 68 Windows 95 and Windows NT ce eeeeseeeseeseeseseeeeeaeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeessesaesassetaeeaesaeeaseeas 68 WINDOWS 3 1 c ttt EA A E A ceed E aee tsar deeds 70 Resources Required for Linking ceeeeescecseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeececeesaeeeseecaeesaeseesetaeeaseenaes 71 Executable Riles cudnt nce eE A A AEN eee 75 DI EE E EA E al aie yeaa 76 Mport Gp a ae ieee as eee dis a ea 76 Module Definition File ee cceeceecessesseceeeeeesecseeaseeeseeseeaseecansaeeaeeaneensessetaseaneataes 76 Linkage Types and Program Structure ccccececceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeaeeeseessesaseaseeseetaeeanentees 81 Link Pr ced reS inner e aaas ARE a Ta ed eee Ca a ee ada 84 Linking a Single Object Programm ecceccseseeseeeeteeeteeeeeeecaeeaeeeeeesesaseaseesesaeeateetaes 84 Creating a DEL iiio ee a a E A O Ea TEETE TE ETEEN Tiaa 85 Creating an Executable Program with a Simple Structure 85 Creating an Executable Program with a Dynamic Link Structure s 86 Creating an Executable Program with a Dynamic Program Structure 88 Creating a Library sorsia eaaa iiai E aiia ea aiia iaaa 89 Creating an Import Library sssssessssssssisssssssssssrnsnnsnsrsrsrsrsrsnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnne 89 WINEN Keecetee dace ed tveeicticed aitet 0 ieee eae Sa aed ah ceased ek 90 Activating the WINLINK Window 2 0 cceeecceeseeseeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeecaesaeeeseesesaetateetaes 90 WINLINK Linking Files WindOW cccccccsescesessesessessesseese
480. sed by exclusive control of files is set for the data name specified in the FILE STATUS clause Locking Records If records are locked other users cannot lock them To lock a record open the file containing the record in share mode A file is opened in share mode in the following cases e An OPEN statement without WITH LOCK specified in other than OUTPUT mode is executed for a file with AUTOMATIC 242 Chapter 7 File Processing or MANUAL specified in the LOCK MODE clause of the file control entry An OPEN statement in the INPUT mode is executed Files opened in share mode can be used by other users If a file is already in usein exclusive mode by another user however an OPEN statement fails Records in a file opened in share mode are locked with the execution of an input output statement with exclusive control specified Records are locked in the following cases A filewith AUTOMATIC specified in the LOCK MODE clause in the file control entry is opened in I O mode then a READ statement without WITH NO LOCK specified is executed A filewith MANUAL specified in the LOCK MODE clausein the file control entry is opened in I O mode then a READ statement with WITH LOCK specified is executed Records are released from lock in the following cases For afilewith AUTOMATIC specified in the LOCK MODE clause A READ REWRITE WRITE DELETE or START statement is executed An UNLOCK statement is executed A CLOSE statemen
481. seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeaseessesaeeaseeetassasaeeatiees 118 Setting Run time Environment Information eceeceeeceeseeeeeeseeesaseeeeesetaeeeteees 119 Types of Run time Environment I nformation cccecceseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesteeeeeeeees 119 How to Set Run time Environment Information cece eseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 122 Format of Run time Environment I nformation cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteteeeeeees 129 Environment V ari abol eso ceeecceeseeeeeeneceeeeeeeeecaeeaeeeeeeaesaseeseesesastaseeseesesaseatiee 129 Entry linformiatl ona aaeiecadaniaieanathadanvned eh edited 147 WIN EXE Coed bec ee a ea naaa elds ash netted aiaa E Aa aa anaa Eea erated 152 Activating the WIN EXEC Window 32 sssssessssssssrssrsrssrisrssnsrssnsrsrnsrsrnrnsrnrnnens 152 Activating the WIN EXEC Window 16 ccccssesssssssssssssessssersssssesessrseeseaees 154 Entering a File NamMe ssesesesssssssnsnsnsusnnisnsssrnsssntnsnsnsneununnnnnnnsnonnnnntntnsnenonnnnnennnnns 154 Starting and Quitting EX CUTION 0 ee eee eceeeteeeeeeesetetseeaeeetsetaetaseeteetseteateeeetaes 155 Run time Environment Setup Window 32 cscccsssssssrssssscsessrssesesersseseseass 155 Setting Environment Variable Information 0 2 eeeeeecceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaetaseetees 158 Setting Entry Informati n 00 ceceeccececeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseecaesaeeaeeesesaesaaesenessesaeeaneetaes 160 Saving to the Initialization File eee eeeccee esses ceeeeceesseeeeeeseessesa
482. seeseessaseenaeeetees 161 Setting Printer Ssi a in eiaa aa aa Tie E aa ia aiaa 161 Exiting the Run time Environment Setup WINdoOW sssssssssssssssssssrsrsisresrsrsrssrsns 162 Run time Environment Setup Window 16 ccccscssssessessecssesseeesesrserseeeeaees 162 Setting Environment Variable Information 00 0 ceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetetaeeateetees 163 Setting Entry Information 0 ce eeeececseceeseeeeeesaeeeaeeeeeeceesaeeaeeessecaesaesseeessesaeeaseetaes 164 Saving to the Initialization File eee ceecceeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaesaeeeteetsaeeenateetees 165 Exiting from the Run time Environment Setup Window sses 165 Format of Run time Options eeeceeceeeeeeceeeseeceeeceeseeeeseessesaeeaseessesaeseeeeseetaetaneateees 166 Chapter 6 Project M anagement eee 169 What is the Project Management FUNCTION ceeeeeeceeecteeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeetetaetateetaes 170 Resources Required for Project Management cceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseetetaeeeeeee 171 Project Management ProCeQures eeccccesseeseeseeeceeceeeeteecsesaseaseessesaesaeeeseaeeasaeeetiees 173 Projet WING OW eiei n dec eea lev fence a a hate ee Ton etn Cee eee 175 Creating the Project File ccccccecsesessesseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesecseeaeeeseesseseaseesaeeetsesaseaseeees 176 Registering Piles vvcs ian eA ei ei A a a 177 Setting Compiler OPtion cceeeececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaseaseessesaeseesetaesaeaeeetee 183 Setting Linker Options
483. send a message use the WRITE statement where the communication record is specified To receive a message use the READ statement where the presentation file is specified Before executing the READ or WRITE statement specify the logical destination name for the data name specified in the DESTINATION 1 clause Messages are sent to and received from the destination of the specified logical destination name Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler or linkage options are required Program Execution This section shows the environment setup for executing a program that sends and receives messages by using the presentation file module Specify the name of the connected product to use with the file identifier as the environment variable name For example to specify the ASSIGN clause of the COBOL program ASSIGN TO GS ACMFILE Chapter 14 Communication Functions 441 The initial file contents are program name ACMFILE ACM Specify ACM connected product name for the file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of the COBOL file Specify a comma before ACM If the connected product is not specified for the file identifier the connected product specified in the environment variable CBR_PSFILE_ACM is used CBR_PSFILE_ACM ACM For details refer to Environment Variables in Chapter 5 To use ACM communication from a COBOL program using the presentation file module set up the ACM environme
484. serjet 5P Properties 24x General Details Paper Graphics Fonts Device Options GD HP Lasevet 5P Print to the following port LPT1 Printer Port Add Pott Delete Port Print using the following driver HP Lasenet 5P x New Driver Capture Printer Port End Capture r Timeout settings Not selected fi 5 seconds Transmission retry 45 seconds Spool Settings Port Settings Cancel Figure 86 The Details tab in the Printer Properties dialog box Printer name Specify a locally connected printer in the following manner PRTNAME HP Laserjet 5P In this example HP Laserjet 5P is the specified printer Specify a printer connected to a network in the following manner 286 Chapter 8 Printing PRTNAME NMSVR2Q Canon LBP A 404E Local printer port name Serial port name Specify a local printer port name or serial port name in the following manner Example LPT1 Windows NT Use the information in the Printer Properties dialog to obtain the printer name Activate the Print Manager and select Properties from the Printer menu to display the Printer Properties dialog box The Printer Properties dialog box is shown below Printer Properties Printer Name LaserJet f z Cancel Driver Adobe LaserJet II Cartridge v52 3 E Setup Description Adobe LaserJet II Cartridge v52 3 on LPT1 Print to LPT1 Details Settings Share
485. sing the EXECUTE statement The following figure is a COBOL program used to dynamically execute SQL statements input with the ACCEPT statement The example inputs the UPDATE statement at execution Chapter 15 Database SQL 527 UPDATE STOCK SET QOH 0 WHERE GOODS TELEVISION EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION END EXEC 01 STMVAR PIC X 254 01 SQLSTATE PIC X 5 EXEC PROCEDURE DIVISION SQL END DECLARE SECTION END EXEC ACCEPT STMVAR FROM CONSOLE EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC STOP SQL CONNECT TO DEFAULT END EXEC SQL PREPARE STMIDT FROM STMVAR END EXEC SQL EXECUTE STMIDT END EXEC SQL ROLLBACK WORK END EXEC SQL DISCONNECT DEFAULT END EXEC RUN Figure 132 Dynamically determining SQL statements 1 1 Executes the ACCEPT statement to read the UPDATE statement and sets the read data into the SQL statement variable STMVAR 2 Executes the PREPARE statement corresponding to the statement the UPDATE statement in the example set in the SQL statement variable STMVAR of the SQL statement identifier STMIDT 3 The EXECUTE statement executes the prepared statement that is associated with the specified SQL statement identifier If parameter specification is not required for dynamically determining SQL statements the EXECUTE IMMEDIATE statement can be used instead of the EXECUTE statement 528 Chapter 15 Database SQL The following COBOL program illustrates the use of the EXECUTE IMMEDIA
486. son between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification Comparison Classification Function outline a classification AIO O O Extension System poanion T A Network B pan Operation can database be checked with the D 32 F o il EE E Dnt a aS SSS Built in funtion Jah o SC S O Sereen handling pinton Command line argument handling and environment variable handling Checking Program Operation Programs created in common function scope can be checked under this system Some functions may cause program execution methods and execution results to differ between systems When operating a program using the inter program communication function if the program is activated through a system the method of specifying the parameters to be passed to the program is different To pass parameters in the global server system format under this system use the initialization file COBOL85 CBR or Run time Environment Setup window to specify the parameters Refer to Setting Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 for the method of specifying the global server system format parameters in the initialization file COBOL85 CBR and the Run time Environment Setup window 702 Appendix Function Comparison For example a COBOL program description is as follows Example COBOL program description IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID A LINKAGE SECTION 01 parameter 03 parameter len
487. specified SEL op E E file ASSIGN TO data name 1 DATA DIVISION FILE PR canine DI VIS HOVE LPT PEN OUTPUT ee file WRITE outrec AFTER ADVANCING 2 CLOSE z ile Ex IT PROGRAM OGRAM D Figure 91 Data sent to a printer specified in the data name in the ASSIGN clause 292 Chapter 8 Printing Using Print File 2 This section explains how to use a form overlay pattern and FCB in a print file without a FORMAT clause IDENTIFIC ATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID pragram name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECIAL NAMES function name IS mnemonic name 1 CTL IS mnemonic name 2 INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file name ASSIGN TO PRINTER ORGANIZATION IS SEQUENTIAL FILE STATUS I in put output status DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD file name RECORD record size specificatian LIN AGE IS logical page contfiguration specification MODE 1 0l lin record name CHARACTER TYPE I5 MODE 2 MODE 3 Contents of the line record mnem onic nam e 1 O2 data name 1 0l control record name Contents of the control record G data name 2 0 WOREING 5TORAGE SECTION 01 input output status PIC HY24 MODE 1 01 data name 3 CHARACTER TYPE IS MODE 2 MODE 3 PROCEDURE DIVISION mnemanic name 1 OPEN OUTPUT file name WRITE control record name ADVANCING mnemonic name 2 WRITE line record nam e AFTER ADVANCING PAGE WRITE line record name FROM data name 3 AFTER AD
488. srssesseeseesersenseaees 91 Starting ANd Quitting LINKING eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeteessesaeeaseeteetsetateeteeees 97 WINLINK Building COBOL Libraries Window ccccesesceseeeteeteseeseeeaees 98 Using Commands t Einka a hei a Awe ene 101 LINK COMIMANG 32 shccsteereatincntebsatevaadctainecdudtesualatiavectudewcaidazsavwstelensanestenaweaaesiats 102 LIB COMMANG 32 anarai rene ah aena ane aah aaa a an a at aaaea i a aain iaai 102 Examples of Using the LINK and LIB commands 32 csssceeeteteeeseeeeeeees 102 LINK Command C16 Aar niaan aaa a ata anaana Seea aa aiaa aai 103 Linker Messages rniii ene a iaai iaa adain aaia T a Eaa Tiaa TE aia iaa 105 Windows 95 and Windows NT sssssssssssssssssssssisisisisrsrsrsrsrsrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 105 Linker Messages 16 ccescssscsscsecsssseseecsecsessseseesessessaeseesessessaeseeseessassaesensenseaees 107 xiv COBOL85 User s Guide Chapter 5 Executing Programs see eee 109 Executing Sample Programs ccccccccecceeeeeeeeseeceeecsesaeeeseessesaeeaseessesaeseeeeseesaeeaseetiees 110 Windows 95 and Windows NT ececeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeecaesaeaeeaeeeesesaetaeeaseeseetsaeeeseneees 110 WINGOWS Sal E tial aa irate at ea te ce ae ei eee iar 113 Execution Procedures niai edine Bai ee eed che noah deena 117 Before Executing COBOL Prograrms ccecceceeceseeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeseeateeseesietateaeeaes 117 Executing COBOL Prograins scceccseses
489. srssisrsrsrsrsrsrsnnnenns 364 Calling COBOL Programs from C ProgramMS ssssssssssssesrsrersrsresiersrsrsrsrsrsrnnenns 368 Correspondence of Data TypeS ssssessssssssrsrsrsrsrsrnsrsrsrunstntnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenene 369 Compiling PrOQKrAMS eeeeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeaeeeceecaesesaeeaseeesassaseessesaesaseaseeeetaes 371 Executing Programs sienien iiieie iia iaia eanna aeae a iaaea aa iania ieai 381 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements ssssssssssssseseesenes 383 ACCEPT DISPLAY FUNGI ON nn ececcceeeceeeseesceeecaeeeeeeesecaeeaseeseeesseseeseesetaeeaseeeas 384 QUUING ea a aa an E aus lip E eaa a Ea AO e A aE Ea Eaa 384 Input Output Destination Types and Specification M ethods ce eee 385 Reading Writing Data with Console WiNGOWS s sssssssssssssssssrsrsrsrernsrsrsrsrsrsrsns 386 Writing Messages to M esSage BOXES esceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteessesaeeaseeseetaetataeeaeens 390 Programs Using FileS mesinna aaia 392 Entering Current Date and TiMe sssssssssssssssssrererisisrsisrsrsrnisrntnnntnnnnnnsrnnnsnnnnns 397 Fetching Command Line ArgUMeEntS ssssssesesesrsrererssnsrsrsintntnnntnnnnnnnrsnnnnnn ennnen 399 xviii COBOL85 User s Guide CSND aE a See SE EEE A A A A E E 399 Environment Variable Handling Function sssssssssssssssssssrsisisissnrnsnrrsrsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 403 QUUING ish tinh aaah ea Ea ah eerie E E EE denen 403 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort M erge F
490. ssage DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE TEST61 C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES test 4 JMN2563I S USER WORD A IS UNDEFINED STATISTICS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE S PROGRAM UNIT 1 7 C FSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES test BEI IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAH ID TEST61 PROCEDURE DIVISION MOVE A TO B END PROGRAM TEST61 Figure 25 The P STAFF editor Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 61 4 Correct the program in the edit window To switch from the edit window to the message window press the Shift and F11 keys or select Back Tag Jump from the Search menu The error search function is effective only for compile messages This function cannot be activated from messages written to the compiler listings when PRINT has been specified as the compiler option Error search cannot be used when the compiler option NUMBER has been specified If the total length underlined portion of the file name spaces and line numbers in the diagnostic message exceeds 63 bytes the first part of the file name is truncated and the message is written as 63 bytes This means error search cannot be used For example C TEST COB 4 JMN25031 S USER WORD A IS UNDEFINED Using the P STAFF Editor File The error search function displays the COBOL85 P STAFF edit window of the COBOL source program This section describes the functions of each item in the P STAFF editor menu bar The menu bar used in the P STAFF editor has three items File Edit and Find Refer t
491. st specify GEN otherwise specify NOGEN Compilation Results A W level message indicating GS specific functions is produced for the following specified in the COBOL source program Network database manipulation language DML Destination APL CMD TRM WST with literal specified in presentation file IF DB EXCEPTION statement USE FOR DB EXCEPTION statement USE FOR DEAD LOCK statement TRANSACTION management statement 562 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions When the TRANSACTION management statement is executed the syntax is analyzed but no object is produced Linking a GS Program Whenever a debugger is used specify linkage option DEBUG Specify to use debugger and DEBUGTY PE COFF BOTH 32 CO 16 Executing a GS Program To execute the executable file of a GS program use the COBOL85 debugger If the file is executed without the debugger a message is written indicating GS specific functions cannot be executed and the program is forcibly terminated To execute a GS program with the debugger 1 Activate the debugger Refer to the Fujitsu COBOL Debugging Guide for additional information The COBOL 85 Debugger window is displayed Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 563 Figure 138 The COBOL85 Debugger window 564 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions 2 Select Start Debugging from the File menu to open the Start Debugging dialog box Spec
492. statement POSITIONING POINTER specified in the START statement Sort merge Mnemonic BUSHU SOKAKU name ON YOMI KUN YOMI ala SORT M ESSA GE Other than the above Appendix Function Comparison 699 Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Function Classification Comparison Classification Function outline Inter program PROCEDURE C communication DIVISION statement specification Other than the above S Oooo Source text COPY OF IN SYSDBDCT manipulation statement specification OF IN XMDLIB C and XFDLIB specification literal JOINING C specification only Report writer File definition BLOCK feature CONTAINS clause CODE clause Other than the A above Aa G 700 Appendix Function Comparison Table 88 Function comparison between the GS series and this system cont Comparison PERT Presentation Environment APL CMD TRM B 16 Operation can file definition or WST specified in be checked the SYM BOLIC with the DESTINATION debugger dause APPLY MULTICONVERSA TION MODE dause PROCESSING CONTROL clause SEQUENCE clause MESSAGE CODE dause not 4 bytes Other than the above File definition Input output All statement Special register Debugging functions All Compilation only if used with the GS series Segmentation All Compilation only if used with the GS series Appendix Function Comparison 701 Table 88 Function compari
493. statement data stored in the specified data name is output If anonnumeric literal is specified the specified character string is output The maximum length of the message that can be written at one time is the length of the data that can be displayed within the message box Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linker options are required Program Execution Execute programs as ordinary programs Programs Using Files This section explains how to write compile link and execute programs and provides an example of the simplest coding for file processing using the ACCEPT DISPLAY function Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 393 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 data name PROCEDURE DIVISION ACCEPT data name DISPLAY data name EXIT PROGRAM END PROGRAM program name Program Specifications This section explains program descriptions for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION No specifications are required DATA DIVISION In the DATA DIVISION define data items to store input data and items to set output data Define these data items with one of the following attributes Group item Alphabetic item Alphanumeric item External decimal item Alphanumeric edited item Numeric edited item National item National edited item 394 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements National item and national edited item
494. statement variable STM VAR is referred to when the PREPARE statement in 4 is executed 526 Chapter 15 Database SQL 2 The SQL statement identifier STMIDT is corresponding to the SQL statement variable STM VAR when the PREPARE statement in 4 is executed G Executes the A CCEPT statement to read the query expression and sets the read data into the SQL statement variable STMVAR Executes the PREPARE statement corresponding to the statement dynamic SELECT statement in the example and set in the SQL statement variable STM VAR of the SQL statement identifier STMIDT Executes the dynamic OPEN statement to extract from the STOCK table rows showing a value less than 10 as the number of refrigerators in stock then creates a table including the data of columns GNO product number GOODS product name and QOH quantity in stock that is retrieved from the extracted rows Executes the dynamic FETCH statement to fetch data row by row from the table and sets the values of each column into the corresponding host variable area S G 7 Executes the dynamic CLOSE statement to disable the specified cursor and the table corresponding to the cursor Determining SQL Statements Dynamically Dynamic SQL not only determines search conditions in a query expression through cursor declaration but dynamically determines the SQL statements to be executed there The following explains methods of determining the SQL statements u
495. system returns non zero values as the error code and detail code For error codes and detail codes see Table 55 Abbreviations of the functions in Table 55 O COBCI_OPEN function C COBCI_CLOSE function R COBCI_READ function W COBCI WRITE function o Related 494 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 55 Error codes of simplified inter application communication functions Error Detail Explanation Response Code Code TESE Normal termination The message was read normally but the message was longer than the buffer The excess data was No message was found to read Queuing not specified M essages exceeding the maximum number of messages specified for the logical destination were stored Forced execution specified A message could not be read because no message was found at the logical destination when the specified monitoring time elapsed Queuing specified A message could not be Delete unprocessed written because the messages then re execute maximum number of messages specified for the logical destination or the system was reached when monitoring time elapsed Queuing specified Chapter 14 Communication Functions 495 Table 55 Error codes of simplified inter application communication functions cont Error Detail Explanation Response Fat eel Code Code 1537 1538 1539 2049 l i A message could not be read because the logical destination was not in
496. t The five types of special registers are as follows e EDIT MODE Specify whether items are eligible for output processing e EDIT OPTION Specify emphasis underline and reverse display e EDIT COLOR Specify a color e EDIT STATUS Specify whether items are eligible for input processing In addition input results are posted e EDIT CURSOR Specify a cursor position Use these special registers with modification of data names defined with screen descriptors For example write EDIT COLOR OF A for the color of data name A For the values to be set for special registers refer to Special Registers Used for the Presentation File Module in Appendix E 340 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens With 3 byte screen and form descriptors where item control fields are shared in input and output processing EDIT MODE EDIT STATUS EDIT CURSOR and EDIT OPTION use the same storage area for items defined in the screen and form descriptors For example EDIT MODE OF A and EDIT STATUS OF A and EDIT CURSOR OF A and EDIT OPTION OF A both use the same storage area Program Compilation and Linkage Compilation Select compiler option FORMLIB and specify the path name to the directory containing the screen descriptors file Linkage No libraries need to be linked Generating Window Information Files This section describes how to generate a window information file to perform screen input output processing with the presentation
497. t a digit count exceeding the digit count specified in the PICTURE clause is not stored in the receiving item even when no digit is truncated If NOTRUNC is specified whether to truncate digits depends on the compiler Thus a program with no truncation is used by specifying NOTRUNC may be incompatible with another system 42 WINCOB WC ZWB NOZWB Specify this option to determine how to treat a sign part when a signed external decimal item is compared with an alphanumeric field Specify ZWB for comparison ignoring the sign part of the external decimal item specify NOZWB for comparison including the sign part Alphanumeric characters include alphanumeric data items alphabetic data items alphanumeric edited data items numeric edited items nonnumeric literals and figurative constants other than ZERO For example e 77 ED PIC S 3 VALUE 4123 e 77 AN PIC X 3 VALUE 123 610 Appendix A Compiler Options The conditional expression ED AN is defined as shown below in this example e With ZWB specified True e With NOZWB specified False Appendix B I O Status List This appendix lists the meanings of the values status values set when input output statements are executed The values are set in a data name specified in the FILE STATUS clause of the file control entry when input output statements are executed Table 65 I O Status List Classification I O Detailed Status Information Value Successful Inpu
498. t r statements were executed i peee The status is one of the following The value of the reference key of the record read by executing the READ statement is the same as that of the next record The record having the same record key value as the record written by executing the WRITE or REWRITE statement already exists in afile This is not an error however because a record key value may be duplicated 612 Appendix B I O Status List Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification 1 O Detailed Status Information Value Successful Poe ee eee of an input record is greater than the maximum eee eae RTS One of the following status occurred in the presentation file Aninput error occurred in required full field input items or required input items The data error occurred A national language data error an ANK data error anumeric item configuration data error anumeric item sign error anumeric item decimal point error a redundancy check error Data entered in the data item is invalid The input message is longer than the specified maximum record One of the following status occurred in the file where the OPTIONAL clause is specified The OPEN statement in INPUT I O or EXTEND mode was executed for a file but the file has yet to be created The OPEN statement in INPUT mode was executed for a nonexistent file In this case the file is not created and at end condition occurs input output
499. t If the same error occurs when the 54 processing for the record to be sorted program is re executed a system error 56 probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE ith processing for the record to be sorted Pe at eee processing for the record to be merged could not be obtained 111 The record length is invalid Check whether the record length complies with the COBOL85 specification An error occurred during input If the same error occurs when the processing for the record to be sorted program is re executed a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE eager aes processing for the record to be merged An error occurred when a temporary Modify the environment eg hard file for sorting and merging was disk to allocate a large enough opened temporary file If the same error occurs when the program is re executed a system error probably occurred Collect the error information then call your Fujitsu SE 212 The size of the temporary file for Modify the environment eg hard sorting and merging is insufficient disk to allocate a large enough temporary file Appendix F Message Lists 675 Table 85 Values written for JMPO601I I U 1 cont 1 Error Contents Programmer Response _ _ 214 A temporary file for sorting and Modify the environment e g hard merging cannot be created disk to allocate a large enough temporary
500. t be defined The ASSIGN clause is assumed as a comment up to 8 alphanumeric characters must be specified in it Input file All files to be merged must be defined 418 Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function e Output file Define the same way as for ordinary file processing if required When sort is performed within the same program only one sort merge file must be defined DATA DIVISION Define the records of files defined in the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION PROCEDURE DIVISION The MERGE statement is used for merge processing The contents of the MERGE statement differ depending on whether file or record output is to be used for merge processing e For file output GIVING output filename must be specified e For record output OUTPUT PROCEDURE output procedure name must be specified The output procedure specified in OUTPUT PROCEDURE can receive merged records one by one by using the RETURN statement Multiple merge keys can be specified When all records are merged the merge result is set in special register SORT STATUS Unlike general data special register SORT STATUS need not be defined in the COBOL program since it is automatically generated By checking the SORT STATUS value after MERGE statement execution COBOL program execution can continue even if merge processing terminates abnormally Chapter 12 Using SORT MERGE Statements Sort Merge Function 419 Setting 16 in SORT STATUS in
501. t compiler option s from the list box Other Compiler Options edit box Allows the compile options to be keyed in directly 52 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs OK button Click to confirm the compiler option settings or changes Cancel button Click to cancel any compiler option settings or changes and return to the state before the dialog box was opened Library Names button Click to specify the library text files Help button Click to access the online help Previously specified compiler options as well as those you add are displayed in the compiler options list field Adding a Compiler Option To set a compiler option that is not shown in the Compiler Options list box 1 Click on the Add button The Add Compiler Options dialog box appears Select the compiler option to be added from the Compiler Options list box and click on the Add button The Details Compiler Option dialog box then appears Specify the details to be set for the compiler option The details in the Details Compiler Option dialog box differ depending on the compiler option Refer to the online help or Compiler Options in Appendix A for more information Click on the OK button in the Details Compiler Option dialog box The Details Compiler Options dialog box closes and the Add Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed To delete a compiler option setup click on the Cance button 5 7 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 53 T
502. t data 8 bytes Gee A IN DAT Digits enclosed in parentheses indicate Data at byte 1 and the data Length not subsequent bytes is truncated including Line feed characters Records are read until the entered data satisfies the specified length of the data item specified in an ACCEPT statement Only ten bytes are set for the third record the remaining bytes are truncated lt Line feed character Figure 108 Reading records Outputting Data Usea DISPLAY statement to send data to a file When a data name is specified in a DISPLAY statement the contents stored in the data name is output If anonnumeric literal is specified in a DISPLAY statement the specified character string is output With one DISPLAY statement the length of the line feed character plus output data is the length of data to be output A OUT DAT Digits enclosed in parentheses indicate the data Length not including Line feed characters Qutput data lt Line feed character Figure 109 Using DISPLAY to output data 396 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements Program Compilation and Linkage To enter data from a file with ACCEPT specify compiler option SSIN To send data to a file with DISPLAY specify compiler option SSOUT For example SSIN INDATA SSOUT OUTDATA When SYSIN is specified to compiler option SSIN a console window is the data input destination of an ACCEPT statement regardles
503. t equal to the string that defines the paper size The values for the paper size strings are found in the Windows system printer defaults Windows 95 Use the information in the Paper tab of the printer Properties dialog box to obtain paper sizes Click on the Start button and select Settings gt Printers Highlight the target printer and select Properties from the File menu Available paper sizes are shown 140 Chapter 5 Executing Programs as icons Click on an icon to display the specifications following Paper Size The following figure shows the printer Properties dialog box HP LaserJet 5Si MX Properties 10 O 0 Bf amp wz Legal Executiv A4 Envelop Envelop Envelop Figure 47 A Windows 95 printer Properties dialog box Windows NT Use the information in the Forms dialog box to obtain paper sizes Activate Print Manager and select Forms from the Printer menu Available paper sizes are listed in the Forms on this Chapter 5 Executing Programs 141 Computer list box Click on a paper size and the specifications are displayed in the Form Description N ame edit box Note The range of support differs between printers Be sure to confirm that the paper size is supported by the target printer driver Forms Forms on this Computer Form Description Name 10x14 Paper Size Print Area Margins wat Lert a Height 1400n Right 00n _ Bottom 0 00in Unit Olt English Figure 48 Windows N
504. t is executed For afilewith MANUAL specified in the LOCK MODE clause An UNLOCK statement is executed A CLOSE statement is executed Chapter 7 File Processing 243 The following is an example of locking records IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAN 1D C ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file 1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAN 1D D ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT file 2 ASSIGN TO SANPLE LOCK MODE 1S AUTOMATIC ASSIGN TO SANPLE LOCK MODE 1S AUTOMATIC s LE STATUS 18 FS m gt OPEN 1 0 file 1 s m gt READ file 1 NG STORAGE SECTION s FS PIC X 2 S EN 1 0 file 2 EAD file 2 F FS 99 THEN GO TO exclusive error gt END 1F Ll N Failed Share Node Figure 70 Locking records The file is opened in share mode 2 The first record in the file is locked upon execution of a READ statement 3 The file is opened in share mode A READ statement for the locked record fails I O status value 99 error caused by locking records is set for the data name specified in the FILE STATUS clause 244 Chapter 7 File Processing File Processing Results File processing generates new files or updates files This section explains file status when file processing is done e Filecreation Generates a new file upon execution of an OPEN statement If a file with the same name already exists the file is regenerated a
505. t linkage use the LINK command to link the following files e 16 flbcfutc lib e 32 f3bifutc lib For calling from a C program refer to Linking Programs in Chapter 10 At execution set up the following environment e Before starting Windows execute the SHARE command 16 e Specify the directory storing the following files for the PATH environment variable 16 flbcfutc dll fllbcfute dll flbocfrm dll 32 f3bifutc dll f3bifute dll f3bifrm dll Examples of Calling from COBOL This section shows examples of programs that perform recovery processing according to the open status The following example calls the indexed file recovery function when a file for storing unrecoverable data and a message are unnecessary Appendix L Indexed File Recovery 731 00010 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 00020 PROGRAM ID WORK1 00030 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION 00040 CONFIGURATION SECTION 00050 SPECIAL NAMES 00060 ENVIRONMENT NAME ENV NAME 00070 ENVIRONMENT VALUE ENV VALUE 00080 INPUT OUTPUT SECTION 00090 FILE CONTROL 00100 SELECT IXDFILE ASSIGN TO FILE1 00110 ORGANIZATION IS INDEXED 00120 RECORD KEY IS IXDFILE RECKEY 00130 FILE STATUS IS FSDATA 00140 DATA DIVISIO 00150 FILE SECTIO 00160 FD IXDFILE 00170 01 IXDFILE REC 00180 03 IXDFILE RECKEY PIC X 8 00190 03 IXDFILE DATA PIC X 20 00200 WORKING STORAGE SECTION N 00210 77 IXDFILE NAME PIC X 512 00220 77 BLKFILE NON PIC S9 9 CO
506. t to delete all rows showing CASSETTE DECK from the STOCK table EXEC SQL DELETE FROM STOCK WHERE GOODS CASSETTE DECK END EXEC The previous method cannot delete data from a table created by relating multiple tables Inserting Data Use the INSERT statement to insert data Select either of the following methods to insert data e Inserting the data in only one row e Inserting the data in a set of rows extracted from another table based on search conditions Inserting a Single Row The following example specifies the INSERT statement to add a row showing product number 301 to the STOCK table The product name is WASHER the quantity in stock is 50 and the warehouse number is 1 EXEC SQL INSERT INTO STOCK GNO GOODS QOH WHNO VALUES 301 WASHER 50 1 END EXEC 524 Chapter 15 Database SQL Inserting Multiple Rows from Another Table The following example assumes that the database of the STOCK table contains another stock table table name SUBSTOCK column names and attributes same as those of the STOCK table The example specifies the INSERT statement to insert rows showing product name MICROWAVE OVEN in the SUBSTOCK table into the STOCK table The example also sets the warehouse numbers of all new rows to 2 EXEC SQL INSERT INTO STOCK GNO GOODS QOH WHNO SELECT GNO GOODS QOH 2 FROM SUBSTOCK WHERE GOODS MICROWAVE OVEN END EXEC Using Dynamic SQL To generate SQL statements
507. tarting and Quitting Execution To start execution click on the Execute button After execution starts the system may display the Run time Environment Setup window for COBOL programs Set information where necessary For details about setting run time environment information see Run time Environment Setup Window 16 After execution is completed click on the Cancel button in the WINEXEC window to close the window Run time Environment Setup Window 32 The Run time Environment Setup window is used to set run time environment information that is displayed when a COBOL program is executed The Run time Environment Setup window displays run time environment information defined in the initialization file as initial values Information set in the Run time Environment Setup window can also be saved in the initialization file To prevent display of the Run time Environment Setup window at run time define GEnvSetWindow U N USE in the initialization file N ote U N USE must be in upper case 156 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Runtime Environment Setup SAMPLE1 x Command Section Selection Environment Setup Help r Environment Yariables Information Set List Delete lconN ame COBS5EXE ScmSize 80 24 ChshwinSize 80 24 ChslBufLine 100 WinCloseMsg 0N EnvSetwindow USE AIFileE xclusive NO CBR_PrintT extPosition TYPE1 CBR_TextAlign BOTTOM rk Figure 50 The Run time Envi
508. tarts To quit log collection click on the End logging button 464 Chapter 14 Communication Functions The name of the file for log collection can be specified with an absolute or relative path The path from the current server directory serves as the relative path If the specified file does not exist a new file is created If the specified file exists log information is appended to the file Logs are classified into error information and trace information Select Get error log to collect server error information in the file Select Get trace log to write server error information processing requests from clients and processing results in the file Error information should be collected during server operation so that server errors can be ascertained Use the trace information when you debug the client because there is much output information The following shows the log output format lt 1 gt 2 ID 3 Client 4 EXE 5 6 1 Collection date and time year month day hours minutes seconds 2 Event Chapter 14 Communication Functions 465 Table 52 Log Collection Explanation of Events Evet Explanation O 3 Client identification number 4 Client IP address 5 Name of the client execution module 12 bytes Excess bytes are truncated 6 Additional information 466 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 53 Log Collection Additional Information Event Additional Infor
509. tatements PROCEDURE DIVISION To input the current date and time use an ACCEPT statement in which DATE DAY DAY OF WEEK or TIME are written for the FROM specification Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linker options are required Program Execution Execute programs as ordinary programs When an ACCEPT statement in a program is executed the current date and time are set for the data name specified in an ACCEPT statement For example 12 23 1991 Mon 14 15 45 00 Table 43 Entering current date and time Coding of FROM Specification Contents Set for the D ata N ame FROM DATE 9 1 1 2 2 3 FROM DAY 9 1 3 5 71 FROM DAY OF WEEK FROM TIME 1 4 1 5 4 5 0 0l Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 399 Fetching Command Line Arguments This section explains how to refer to the counts and values of arguments specified for commands that call programs IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID program name ENVIRONMENT DIVISION CONFIGURATION SECTION SPECIAL NAMES ARGUMENT NUMBER IS mnemonic name 1 ARGUMENT VALUE IS mnemonic name 2 DATA DIVISION WORKING STORAGE SECTION 01 data name 1 01 data name 2 01 data name 3 PROCEDURE DIVISION ACCEPT data name 1 FROM mnemonic name 1 DISPLAY numeric literal UPON mnemonic name 1 DISPLAY data name 2 UPON mnemonic name 1 ACCEPT data name 3 FROM mnemonic name 2 ON EXCEPTION END P
510. te a program that uses form descriptors with a print file e Add thedirectory containing FORM RTS to environment variable PATH Generate a printer information file to be used by FORM RTS and assign the file according to the contents of the ASSIGN clause For information about how to assign a file refer to Assigning Files in Chapter 7 because it is the same as assigning ordinary files For details on a printer information file and how to generate it refer to the FORM RTS online help When a printer information file is specified with a relative path name it is retrieved in the following sequence 1 Directory set for environment variable MEFTDIR 2 Current directory The following is an example showing form descriptors used with aprint file Contents of the ASSIGN clause in a COBOL program ASSIGN TO PRIFILE Contents of the initialization file COBOL85 CBR PRTIFILE C DIR MEFPRC Using Chapter 8 Printing 315 Assign a printer information file to the file identifier specified in the ASSIGN clause of aCOBOL program To usea form overlay pattern in form descriptors set the extents of the path and file names of the directory where the form overlay pattern is stored for the printer information file In this case the extents set in run time environment information FOVLDIR and OVD_SUFFIX have no effect Presentation Files Printing Forms This section explains how to print forms using a presentation file For i
511. te dv einen te etonae 317 Generating Form DeSCTiptor 0 eecccceceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesecaeeaeeeseeesesaesaseeseetaetaseaseeas 318 Program SpecifiCatiOnS cecececcceeseeceeeeteceeeeeeceeeaeeaeeeeeecaesaseeseesesaetaseeseetetaseatiee 319 Generating Printer Information Files cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeeeseesesaeeeteeees 323 Program EXECU On n anus AAR a 324 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens eee 327 Types of Input Output USING SCrECNS ce eeeeecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeetaeeeteetsesaetaseeseetaetaeeatiee 328 Using Presentation Files Screen Input Output 0 0 eseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetaeeeteees 329 OUt Esna See Riiyi ieee dee is iin Renee eerie 329 Operation Environments cccececcececceseeeeeeeececaeeaeeeesecaeeaeeessessesaesaseeseetsesaseateees 329 Work Procedures irihia Mok ee ed etl eat Nod ch Meee See 332 COBOL85 User s Guide xvii Generating Screen De SCri tors eeeccecesseseeeeecseeseceeeseesaesaeeeesesaesaseeseetsaseaseeeetaes 332 Program Specification oo ceeeeeeccecseeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeecsesaeeaseessesaesaeeeesaesaseesieeesesaseateeees 333 Generating Window Information FileS ceesseseeesesseeeeceeseaesaeeeseeseesaeeaeeetees 340 Program EX Cution aenieiai n E NAE ERR E N Eda N 341 Using the Screen Handling Function sssssssssssssssisrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnrnnsnnsnnnnne 343 QuUUING sensan e a a ee ee ss a ee a te es de 344 Screen WiNdOWwS ii ieicuceediveeiece eves aneian aiaia aia ida Kvia aaae
512. ted product name is specified in the run time environment information and ACM is specified an error message is displayed during execution If the SYMBOLIC DESTINATION clauseis omitted always specify DSP 20 NoMessage Set to Suppress Run time Messages NoMessage YES Suppresses the following run time messages e Run time messages other than U level e Run time messages not requiring operator response 138 Chapter 5 Executing Programs To suppress the message displayed when the window closes specify WVinCloseM sg OFF refer to No 9 21 CBR_PrintTextPosition Specify method of calculating character arrangement coordinates 32 TYPE1 CBR_PrintTextPosition TYPE2 Specify the method of calculating coordinates x y for arranging printed characters when the FORMAT clause is omitted from the file control entry An effective range of this specification is in the execution unit You specify whether TY PE2 or not TY PE1 to correct the character arrangement coordinates TYPE1 The x coordinate is calculated by dividing the DPI dots per inch by the CPI characters per inch and then multiplying the remainder which is rounded down by the line number The y coordinate is calculated by dividing the DPI by the LPI lines per inch and then multiplying the remainder which is rounded down by the line number Note Errors caused by rounding down the remainder may cause the PrintTextPosition to shift TYPE2
513. tents of record mnem anic nan e 02 data name 1 WOREING 5 TORAGE SECTION 0l input output status PIC Hi2 MODE 1 Ol data name 2 CHARACTER TYPE I MODE 2 MODE 3 PROCEDURE DIVISION mnemonic nam e OPEN OUTPUT file name WRITE record name FROM data name 2 AFTER ADVANCING CLOSE file name END PROGRAM program name Chapter 8 Printing 279 MODE 1 MODE 5 Define a print file in the same manner as a record sequential file and do the same processing as generating the record sequential file The following can be specified with a print file without a FORMAT clause e Logical page size LINAGE clause in the file description entry 280 Chapter 8 Printing e Character size font form direction and space CHARACTER TYPE clause in the data description entry e Line feed and page alignment ADVANCING phrase in the WRITE statement Program Specifications This section details program descriptions in a print file using data in line mode for each COBOL division ENVIRONMENT DIVISION In the ENVIRONMENT DIVISION write the relation between the function name and mnemonic name print characters are indicated in the program and define a print file Relating the Function Name to the Mnemonic Name Relate the function name indicating the size font form direction and space of a print character to the mnemonic name Specify the mnemonic name in the CHARACTER TYPE clause when defining data items in records
514. than the maximum number of messages specified for the logical destination can be written In this case the system returns an error code indicating that more messages than the maximum number have been written However messages exceeding the maximum number of messages specified in the system System max messages cannot be written UNUSED isan area reserved for future expansion Zero must be set for the area 492 Chapter 14 Communication Functions BUFFER REC Specify the record area containing the messages to be written to the logical destination UNUSED REC Zero must be set for this area which is reserved for future expansion Return Value If a message is written normally the system returns 0 to special register PROGRAM STATUS Otherwise the system returns 1 to special register PROGRAM STATUS The WM_TIMER message is used for checking time out of monitoring time There may be a difference between the elapsed time and the specified monitoring time Chapter 14 Communication Functions 493 Error Codes This section explains the error codes of functions used with simplified inter application communication If a function quits normally the system returns 0 to the special register PROGRAM STATUS The system also returns 0 as the error code STATUS REC ERROR value and detail code STATUS REC DETAIL value If afunction quits with an error the system returns 1 to special register PROGRAM STATUS In this case the
515. the read enabled state A message could not be written because the logical destination was not in the write enabled state An attempt was made to read a message or write a message to a logical destination that had not been generated A message could not be written because the maximum number of messages specified in the logical destination was reached Queuing specified Either a message could not be written because the maximum number of messages specified in the system was reached or a message could not be read or written because the maximum number of instructions specified in the system was reached A connection request was issued for an already connected server Specify Active for the read attribute of the server of the logical destination Specify Active for the write attribute of the server of the logical destination Generate a logical destination in the server Delete unprocessed messages then re execute Delete unprocessed messages then re execute Check whether a connection request was issued repeatedly for the same server 496 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 55 Error codes of simplified inter application communication functions cont Error Detail Explanation Response code Code 2833 Logical destination name Check whether the error specified logical destination name is correct specified processing typeis correct 2835 Message or buffer length Check whet
516. the Options button in the WINCOB window to open the Compiler Options dialog box then set the options When necessary open the Library Names dialog box from the Compiler Options dialog box and define the library names For details on the compiler options that can be set refer to Appendix A Compiler Options For additional details on how to use the windows refer to the online help Setting Compiler Options Set the compiler options from the Compiler Options list box or the Other Compiler Options edit box When setting compiler options in the Compiler Options list box use the Add Change and Delete buttons When setting compiler options in the Other Compiler Options edit box enter the compiler options as character strings directly from the keyboard Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 51 Option File 0 CAFSC PCOBOL32 SAMPLES SAMPLE2 DEFAULT CBI Cancel Compiler Options ikt Library Names Add Change hep Delete ull Other Compiler Options Figure 21 The Compiler Options dialog box The Compiler Options dialog box contains the following elements Option File display field Displays the file in which option settings will be saved Compiler Options list box Displays compiler options selected by the Add button Add button Click to select from a list of compiler options Change button Click to change the setting of the selected compiler option s Delete button Click to remove the selec
517. the environment information file correctly then re execute The character string indicating the error information is written for 1 See Table 81 Appendix F Message Lists 669 Table 82 Character strings written for JMP0371I U 1 With SequeLink 1 Errorinformation _ O SQL_CLI No client interface type was specified or the specified No SequeLink information file was specified or the specified SequeLink information file does not exist GSQL_PASSWORD No password was specified SQL_DBKIND No database type was specified or the specified database type is not supported SQL_ SERVICE No service name was specified SQL_LOGPRM1 Logon parameter 1 was specified GSQL_USERID No user ID was specified SQL_LOGPRM2 Logon parameter 2 was specified With ODBC ODBC _Inf No ODBC information file was specified or the specified ODBC information file does not exist No data source name was specified JMP0372I U START ENVIRONMENT ERROR TO PERFORM SQL VS gt BZ Abnormally terminates the program Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 1 then re execute See Table 82 670 Appendix F Message Lists Table 83 Character string written for JMP0372I U 1 1 Error Contents Programmer Response LOAD The run time library could not Eliminate the cause of the error according to be loaded the detail code Load Library function error code written fo
518. the file identifier as the run time environment information name For details on setting run time environment information refer to Setting Run time Environment Information in Chapter 5 A file assignment error occurs if no printer is assigned to the file identifier An example of when the initialization file is used is shown in the following figure Chapter 8 Printing 289 When a printer name is specifed 32 N y 4 UTS TON Contents of the IDENTIFICATION DIVISION initdatisation fie CROCE IDs Bi COBOLE5 CBR ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION 8 FILE CONTROL OUTDATA PRTNAME SELECT print file FUJITSU FMLBP 240DPT ASSIGN TO OUTDATA DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FUJITSU PMLBP 240DPI FD print file 01 outres Pic X 125 PROCEDURE DIVISION OPEN OUTPUT print file WRITE outrec APTER ADVANCING brint file CLOSE EXIT PROGRAM Data is sent to END PROGRAM 5 a specified printer When a local port name is specified Contents of the initialization file COBOL85 CBRI IB OUTDATA LPT1 LPT LA Data is sent to a printe connected to local port LETI IDENTIFICATION DIVISION PROGRAM ID B ENVIRONMENT DIVISION INPUT OUTPUT SECTION FILE CONTROL SELECT print file ASSIGN TO OUTDATA DATA DIVISION FILE SECTION FD print file 01 outres PIC X 125 PROCEDORE DIVISION OPEN OUTPUT print file WRITE outrec AFTER ADVANCING 2 CLOSE print file EXIT PROGRAM END PROG
519. the file is usually created in the directory of the source program To create the file in another directory specify the directory name 30 WINCOB WC QUOTE APOST Specify QUOTE to use quotation marks as the values of the QUOTE and QUOTES figurative constants specify APOST to use apostrophes as the values Either quotation marks or apostrophes can be used as delimiter of nonnumeric literal in source programs regardless of the specification of this option The right and left side delimiters must be identical 31 WINCOB WC ALL V111 V112 RSV V122 V125 VSR2 VSR3 Specify the type of a reserved word The following are the names of reserved word sets Appendix A Compiler Options 603 e RSV ALL For COBOL85 V20 or later e RSV V111 For GS series COBOL85 V11L11 e RSV V112 For GS series COBOL85 V11L20 e RSV V122 For GS series COBOL85 V12L 20 e RSV V125 For COBOL85 V12L50 e RSV VSR2 For VS COBOL II REL2 0 e RSV VSR3 For VS COBOL II REL3 0 32 WINCOB WC SDS NOSDS Specify this option to determine how to move a signed internal decimal item to another signed internal decimal item Specify SDS to move the sign of the sending item as is specify NOSDS to move a converted sign X B and X D are treated as minus signs The other values are treated as plus signs A plus sign of the sending item is converted to X C a minus sign of the sending item is converted to X D 33 WINCOB WC SOURCE
520. the file where the data name is specified If the character string DISK is specified as the file reference identifier the Btrieve Record M anager cannot be used The COBOL file system is used If a file identifier is specified as the filereferenceidentifier specify the same data as specified in the file identifier literal format for the environment variable that defines the file identifier as the environment variable name The environment variable specification format is w specificatior environccert varisbtle path narne file neacce ETEY Appendix M Using Other File Systems 737 Function Outline For sequential files indexed files COBOL syntax and basic usage refer to the COBOL85 Reference M anual If the function is more enhanced than the COBOL file system the key item attributes in index files can be Alphanumeric characters National characters External decimal numbers Internal decimal numbers and Binary numbers Unlike the COBOL file system the following restrictions are placed on use of the Btrieve Record Manager e A relative file cannot be specified e A data item which is part of a record key cannot be specified inthe START statement e DISK cannot be specified as the filereference identifier e FILE STATUS 02 cannot be returned The following table shows the differences between limitations for the COBOL file system COBOL and the Btrieve record manager Btrieve 738 Appendix M Usi
521. the following items are included in the subordinate items the item will not be converted e Items other than external decimal items with the sign using the without SEPARATE specification Appendix M Using Other File Systems 741 e Items subordinate to items which specify the REDEFINES clause as well as the item itself e Items which specify the RENAMES clause In the following cases the execution results are not guaranteed e The program name called by a CALL statement is specified by the name and DEC88TOF J or DECFJTO88 is specified by the name e DEC88TOF or DECF TO88 is called by a form different from the above mentioned description form Two or more names are specified for USING phrase BY CONTENT phrase is specified e Thename isa group item and the item uses the OCCURS clause with DEPENDING specification in the subordinate item e When data items are defined in the constant paragraph e Data items that refer the part applies by the name and is done Notes 32 Immediately before passing a record to a Btrieve file or immediately after having received one do this function call The external decimal number of 88consortium form of conversion by immediately after having input from Btrieve file and this function cannot be treated by COBOL It is not possible to be treated by COBOL means that the results of operates compares or post as external decimal item are not guaranteed The val
522. the program 12 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 Developing a Program The standard procedure for developing a program using P STAFF is explained in the following figure 000100 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 000200 PROGRAM ID SAMPLE1 1 P STAFF Library file Create project file 10 Execute MAKE 3 existing Execute WINLINK Execute WINSVD Execute link debug file utility 4 6 8 11 _ _ Execute WINCOB Execute WINEXEC 5 Error compile 7 execute search Figure 2 Developing a program with P STAFF Describe the COBOL source program Activate P STAFF Edit the program after P STAFF has been activated 16 PowerFRAMEVIEW editor 32 P STAFF editor Execute WIN COB to compile the program Refer to Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Use the error search function to correct a COBOL statement where a compile error has occurred Refer to Correcting a Compile Error in Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 13 Execute WINLINK to link a program Refer to Chapter 4 Linking Programs Execute WIN EXEC to execute a program Refer to Chapter 5 Executing Programs When the program does not execute as expected or when the unit test is being executed on a program 16 debug a program with the interactive debugger Refer to the Fujitsu COBOL D
523. ther message is written refer to it to determine the cause The program name is written for 1 The access name or file name is written for 2 JMP0310I I U 1 ERROR FILE 2 3 4 Continues program processing if the severity code is l aborts the program if the severity code is U The severity codeis determined as follows I The FILE STATUS clause is specified for file definition U The FILE STATUS clause and error procedures are not specified Appendix F Message Lists 653 Response Eliminate the cause of the error according to the character string written for 3 then re execute OPEN or CLOSE is written for 1 The access name or file name is written for 2 One of the character strings shown in Tables 77 and 78 are written for 3 The error address is written for 4 654 Appendix F Message Lists Table 77 Character strings written for JMP0310I I U 3 1 3 Error Contents Programmer Response ACC METHOD The specified file access method Specify the file access method isinvalid 1 correctly of a CLOSE statement error the CLOSE statement error ERFLD xxxx Error code from the system Check for and eliminate the xxxx Expressed in hexadecimal cause of the error according to the system error code 2 ERRCD xxxx A presentation file access error Check for and eliminate the occurred cause of the error according to the manuals of the connected products 3 EXCL ERROR An exclusive error occurred Re execute
524. time Environment Information This section describes the format of run time environment information The parameters for some fields can be case sensitive so be sure to enter values for the parameters as shown Environment Variables The following table lists environment variable information The numbers refer to the detailed descriptions that follow the table Table 10 Environment Variable Information Information Environment Variables Related to Run time Options Setruntimeoptions CE GOPT o i y Oioi Set the GS series format run time parameter GMGPRM_ 2 Environment variables related to windows Set the DLL name of an icon resource conDLL Set the identifier of an icon resource conName Set the size of the logical screen for screen handling amp crnSize Set the size of the console window CnslWinSize Set the buffer count for the console window CnslBufLine Environment variables related to messages Set the message output file M essOutFile Set a display message when the window closes WNinCloseM sg Set to suppress run time messages N oM essage Environment variables related to fonts Set the console window font CnslFont Set the font used for screen handling ScrnFont Set the font used for print files PrinterFontN ame 130 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Table 10 Environment Variable Information cont Function Environment V ariable Information Environment variables related to files related to SQL Set
525. time Environment Setup window e For Sample 1 there is no information to set Click on the OK button in the Run time Environment Setup window The system starts executing the program e For Sample 1 the system inputs or outputs data using the COBOL ACCEPT DISPLAY function A console window is displayed 112 Chapter 5 Executing Programs Console SAMPLE1 p i ENTER ONE CHARACTER OF ALPHABETIC LOWER gt 4 Figure 41 The COBOL85 console window e Enter alowercase letter then press the ENTER key A lowercase letter is displayed along with corresponding text In the following example cobol85 is displayed based on the specified letter c Chapter 5 Executing Programs 113 Console SAMPLE1 ENTER ONE CHARACTER OF ALPHABETIC LOWER gt c cobo185 Message SAMPLE1 zi Gi The console window is closed a Figure 42 The COBOL85 console window and message window e Check the results then click on the OK button in the message window The message window and console window close This completes execution of the sample program Windows 3 1 Throughout this section assume the run time information to be C FSC PCOBOL16 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 EXE Select WIN EXEC from the Utilities menu in the P STAFF window The WINEXEC window appears 114 Chapter 5 Executing Programs 7 WINEXEC Command Line CA FSC PCOBOL1 6 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 SAMPLE1 EXE Execute History Figure 43 The WINEXEC wi
526. tion The specification order and the number of primary keys must be the same as for the alternate keys Chapter 7 File Processing 225 When writing two or more record description entries for a file write the primary key data item in only one of these record description entries The character position and size defining the primary key are applied to other record description entries In the variable length records format the key must be set at the same fixed part position from the beginning of the record is always the same The following is an example of record definitions in the variable length records format Primary key Alternate key Employee Full name Section number 6digit number 20 characters Up to 32 characters RECORD EEY I5 employee number ALTERNATE RECORD EEY I full name FD employee file RECOEDIS VARYING IN SIZE FROM 27 To 58 CHARACTERS DEPENDING ON record length 0l employee record O2 employee number PIC f O2 full name PIC i20 O02 section 03 PIC HZ OCCURS 1 TO 32 TIMES DEPENDING ONH section lengeth WORKING STORAGE SECTION Ol record length PIC 93 BINARY Ol secticn length PIC 3 BINARY 226 Chapter 7 File Processing Processing Indexed Files Use input output statements to create extend insert reference update and delete indexed files Some processing may not be used depending on the access mode This section explains the types and input output statements used in indexed fil
527. tion a file identification does not correspond to a physical file name 92 Arn exclusiveerror occurred RDM file 83 Anexclusive error occurred File lock Appendix B I O Status List 617 Table 65 I O Status List cont Classification I O Detailed Status Information Value Other Errors Anexclusive error occurred Record lock ACM A system error occurred ge te A destination error occurred PE PRIN wescompulsoniy dead was compulsorily released FAS LA cena evor stopped processing A destination error stopped processing destination exceeds the specified maximum a logical destination FORM RTS in the Detail code column means a FORM RTS error code For details refer to the FORM RTS online help 618 Appendix B I O Status List Appendix C Global Optimization This appendix explains the global optimization performed by the COBOL85 compiler Optimization Global optimization divides the procedure division into sets of statements called basic blocks each consisting of one entry one exit and statements executable in physical sequence between the entry and the exit Control flow and data use status are then analyzed mainly in connection with loops program parts to execute repeatedly Specifically the following operations occur during global optimization Removing common expressions Shifting an invariant Optimizing induction variables Optim
528. tion Functions Simplified Inter application Communication Server Window The following can be done in the Simplified Inter application Communication Server window e Logical destination operation create delete change mode delete message quit server e Display information e Logging Figure 117 Simplified inter application communication server window Creating a Logical Destination To create a logical destination select Create logical destination from the Logical destination operation menu specify the logical destination name the maximum number of messages and priority in the Create Logical Destination dialog box then click on the OK button Create Logical Destination Logical destination An Cancel Max messages Creat fo Create Priority Help Figure 118 The Create Logical Destination dialog box Chapter 14 Communication Functions 457 A logical destination is generated The Create Logical Destination dialog box contains the following elements Logical destination edit box Specify the name of the logical destination to be generated in the server The logical destination name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters The logical destination name for an opponent logical destination is specified in the Client Definition dialog box M ax messages 0 to 999999999 Specify the maximum number of messages that can be stored at the logical destination to be generated If the d
529. tion key defined using the run time environment variable TERMINATOR 2 A system defined function key is a function key not defined using the run time environment variable TERMINATOR DATA DIVISION The SCREEN section is written at the end of the DATA DIVISION The SCREEN section has literal input output update and input output items These items are classified based on coding of the screen data description entry The following table lists relationships between screen item attributes and clauses that can be specified in the screen data description entry For information about how to code the screen data description entry refer to the COBOL85 Reference Manual Data items defined in the BASED STORAGE section cannot be specified in the SCREEN section 348 Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens Table 39 COBOL clauses specified for screen items Purpose COBOL Clause Screen Item Attribute 1 cmo Emphasis Display in high HIGHLIGHT masy ease PE msy e aa PE intensity dause blinking mete awe 1 1 1 underline clause ae ees background color COLOR dause reg foreground color COLOR cause Reverse REVERSE VIDEO background and clause foreground colors Expression format Chapter 9 Input Output Using Screens 349 Table 39 COBOL clauses specified for screen items cont Purpose COBOL Clause Screen Item mao sremeaure dase S method screen erasure clause Specify partial ERASE
530. tion of input output processing at printing See Table 29 Table 29 Input output processing types and specification values Processing Type Control Information Printer control Form feed PAGE Partition output PW Output after feeding nnn lines Feed nnn lines after ee output eee ee _al number nnn Line movement Move backward by output nnn lines Move forward by nnn lines 322 Chapter 8 Printing DATA DIVISION In the DATA DIVISION write chart record definitions and the definitions of data names specified in the file control entry A record description statement defined in a chart record can be fetched from form descriptors with a COPY statement with XMDLIB specified as a library name For details of the record description statement to be expanded see Program Specifications PROCEDURE DIVISION Like ordinary file processing use input output statements for printing forms Execute input output statements in the following sequence 1 OPEN statement with I O specified Starts printing 2 WRITE statement Outputs data 3 CLOSE statement Stops printing OPEN and CLOSE Statements Use an OPEN statement once at the start of printing and a CLOSE statement once at the end of printing WRITE Statement One WRITE statement prints one form The name of form descriptors used for printing must be set for the data name specified in the FORMAT clause before executing a WRITE statement With aWRITE state
531. tions xi Compiler Options LIB LINECOUNT LINESIZE Figure 12 The Add Compiler Options Dialog Box Select MAIN in the Compiler Options list box and click on the Add button The Details Compiler Option dialog box is displayed Chapter 3 Compiling Programs 31 MAIN Specification of main entry program C Compi e program as sub program Figure 13 The Details Compiler Option dialog box Select Compile program as main program and click on the OK button The Details Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed Since there are no options to be added click on the Exit button The Details Compiler Options dialog box closes The Compiler Options dialog box is redisplayed Compiler Options CA FSC PCOBOL1 6 SAMPLES SAMPLE1 DEFAULT CBI OK Compiler Options Cancel Modify Remove Library Names Other Compiler Options Figure 14 The Compiler Options dialog box with MAIN specified Verify that MAIN appears in the Compiler Options list box of the Compiler Options dialog box then click on the OK button The Compiler Options dialog box closes and the WIN COB window is displayed 32 Chapter 3 Compiling Programs Click on the Compile button in the WIN COB window Compilation starts and a window showing compilation progress is displayed SAMPLE1 COB SAMPLE1 Figure 15 The compilation progress window Compilation ends Compiler messages are displayed in the PowerFRAMEVIEW Editor
532. tivity for host variable names specify the NOALPHAL compiler option before compiling the program N ote Embedded SQL keywords cannot be used as user defined names 536 Chapter 15 Database SQL Executing the Program This section explains how to construct the program execution environment and how to use the ODBC Information Setup Tool Constructing the Program Execution Environment An initialization file COBOL85 CBR where run time environment information is specified and the ODBC information file are required for program execution Specify information in the files so that the files are related as follows Initialization file COBOL85 CBR PROGA D ODBC Inf C DBMSACS INF COBOL source program ODBC information file C DBMSACS INF L ODBCSV1 SQL_DATASRC DATASRC1 CONNECT TO ODBCSV1 AS CON2 3 USER tanaka sky DEFSV SQL_DATASRC DATASRC2 CONNECT TO DEFAULT t SQL_DEFAULT_INF SQL_SERVER DEFSV Specification of data source name 1 defined on the ODBC control panel of the windows system Data source name Data source name DATASRC1 DATASRC2 1 A data source is the generic name of the overall environment including the ODBC driver network system and database e Specify the ODBC information file name CA DBMSACS INF Chapter 15 Database SQL 537 e If aserver nameis specified in the CONNECT statement specify the server name in t
533. to read e Queuing specified Specify 1 for MSGTY PE Consequently the system waits until messages up to the maximum number of instructions specified in the system have been written to the logical destination Monitoring time can specified for WAITTIME at the same time The specified monitoring time must be in the range from 0 to 999999999 seconds If O is specified infinite wait time is assumed Note Again this depends on the maximum number of instructions specified in the system 488 Chapter 14 Communication Functions If messages are not written to the logical destination within the specified time the system returns the error code UNUSED isan area reserved for future expansion Zero must be set for the area BUFFER REC Specify the record area for receiving messages from the logical destination Messages are returned here Data exceeding the length returned as MSGLEN are not guaranteed If aread message exceeds the length specified for BUFFERLEN the excess data is truncated UNUSED REC Zero must be set for this area which is reserved for future expansion Return Value If a message is read normally the system returns 0 to special register PROGRAM STATUS Otherwise the system returns 1 to special register PROGRAM STATUS The WM_TIMER message is used for checking time out of monitoring time There may be a difference between the elapsed time and the specified monitoring time COBCI_WRITE Writes message
534. tup window e or from the command line The following table lists the available functions and formats of the run time options When multiple run time options are defined they must be delimited by a comma Table 12 Run time options Function Format Set the number of trace data Set the process count at error c count noc detection r COUNT Set this option to change the amount of trace information produced by the TRACE function Specify the amount of trace information in the range from 1 to 999999 This option is effective in programs defined with the Dr option or the compiler option TRACE during compilation Chapter 5 Executing Programs 167 c COUNT NOC Set this option to change the process when an error is detected by the CHECK function Specify the process count in the range from 9 to 999999 A value of 0 assumes no limit A value of noc suppresses the CHECK function This option is effective only in the program defined with the Dk option or the compiler option CHECK during compilation s VALUE Set this option to set a value for external SWITCH 0 to SWITCH 7 specified in the SPECIAL NAMES paragraph in the COBOL program Enter eight consecutive switch values from SWITCH 0 sequentially The values can be 0 or 1 If omitted SOOOO0000 is assumed SWITCH 8 is equivalent to SWITCH 0 When SWITCH 8 is used therefore the switch values correspond to SWITCH 8 SWITCH 1 to SWITCH 7 from the l
535. ue is referred to without executing a DISPLAY statement for positioning the argument position is 1 at the start 402 Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements of program execution For each subsequent execution of the ACCEPT statement the argument position is moved to the next argument The lengths of argument values cannot be obtained The rules for the COBOL MOVE statement are applied to the setting of data items for the number of arguments and argument values number 1 PLE 9 argument 1 PIC X 10 ACCEPT number 1 FROM argument number ACCEPT argument 1 FROM argument value If statement 1 is executed when the number of arguments specified in the command is 10 the contents of number 1 is 0 If statement 2 is executed when the value of an argument to be fetched is A BCDE the content of argument 1 is as follows TATB C D E Blank Blank Blank Bink If statement 2 is executed when the value of an argument to be fetched is ABCDE12345FGHIJ the content of argument 1 is as follows FAT BI C D E 1 2 3 4 5 Program Compilation and Linkage No specific compiler and linker options are required Program Execution Execute programs as ordinary programs This can be used only with a COBOL program activated by the system Chapter 11 Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY Statements 403 With a COBOL program called from another COBOL program the value of an argument to be referred to is that of an argum
536. ue of the external decimal of the 88consortium form is guaranteed only in records containing the external decimal item of the 88consortium form when the group item is posted to other records 742 Appendix M Using Other File Systems The sorting and merging function cannot be used for Btrieve files Incorrect function calls will be called if an external reference error of DECFJTO88 or DEC88TOF occurs when linking Example 32 FILE CONTROL SELECT file ASSIGN TO filename BIRV ORGANIZATION IS INDEXED ACCESS MODE SEQUENTIAL RECORD KEY IS mainkey OF record DATA DIVISION FD file 01 record 02 mainkey PIC oes 02 datal PIC 9 ar 02 data2 PIC x 50 WORKING Sf fpaGE SECTION workarea 02 mainkey PIC9 4 02 datal PICS9 8 02 data2 PIC X 50 PROCEDURE DIVISION Writing in_Btrieye file OPEN QUTPUT file CALL DECFJTO88 USING workarea 22 tes xl RITE record FROM workarea CLOSE file Reading from Btrieve file OPEN INPUT fi MOVE 6 TO avinkey OF record START file READ file INTO workarea CALL HDECSS TO FS USING workarea ines 2 CLOSE H gatal gt datal OF workarea L External decimal data which becomes the written data before writing in Btrieve file with all signs in workarea which are not SEPARATE is converted from COBOL85 form into 88consortium form 2 External decimal data which before reading after reading of the record from Btrieve file with all si
537. ueuing read instructions WW Number of queuing write instructions MM Maximum number of messages specified in the system System max messages MW Maximum number of instructions specified in the system M ax waiting instructions tr If there is a forced ending of a client application If the power supply to the client terminal is cut off before the client application writes back to the server the waiting instruction remains in the server If there is a forced ending of the client application by issuing Close the waiting instruction corresponding to the client application is automatically deleted in the server N Messages are remaining when the Inter application Communication Server window ends When the Inter application Communication Server window ends all message on the server will be deleted 480 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Simplified Inter application Communication Functions This section explains the functions used in simplified inter application communication Clients use the COBCI _OPEN COBCI_CLOSE COBCI_READ and COBCI_WRITE simplified inter application communication functions with the CALL statement to transfer messages between them Calling sequence e COBCI_OPEN Connection to the server e COBCI_READ COBCI_WRITE Message reading from the server or writing to the server e COBCI_CLOSE Disconnection from the server Chapter 14 Communication Functions 481 An example of th
538. umeric data item for detailed information 438 Chapter 14 Communication Functions Table 49 Information to be specified in the file control entry cont Location Information Type Details and Use of Specification Optional MESSAGE Data name Specify a data name defined as a CLASS clause 1 byte numeric item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section Input output processing priority 1 9 must be specified for this name when communication starts A value of 1 specifies the highest priority If the default or Ois specified the system assumes the lowest level of specified logical destination PROCESSING Data name Specify a data name defined as a MODE clause 2 byte alphanumeric data item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section The type of input output processing must be specified for this data name when communication starts See Table 50 PROCESSING Data name Specify a data name defined as a TIME dause 4 byte numeric item in the WORKING STORAGE section or LINKAGE section Input output processing monitoring time must be specified in seconds for this data name when communication starts If the default or O is specified the system assumes infinite wait time Chapter 14 Communication Functions 439 Table 50 Processing types and values to be specified ot Processing M ode Control Information Input Queuing not NW specified Queuing WT specified Blank Output Queuing not specified Qu
539. unction 0 0008 407 Outline of Sort and Merge Processing ccccecceseeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeetsesaseaseesetaeteees 408 SOP EEA ETE TAA AATA TAE E A 408 MCR QC E A E A E A 408 USING SOrt e a a a a a A aaa a aae aKa eara aaie 409 Types of Sort Procesno aeiiaaie Andi deitieneatien Nectledeves 411 Programi Sped fications dessini ai aaia ia a aiai 411 Program Compilation and LiINKAQE cccsceeesessecseeseesssscesassesseeseserseeseaeeeaees 413 Prograny EXGCUUON isien ipa aiana anaiai a adaa aiad a 414 VETEM RO S a Ea E E E E E 415 Types of Merge ProcesSSing scscesssssssssssssseseessessesssssessesseesaeseeseeeseessansaesensateas 417 Program SpecifiCatiONS csccsccsscssssssssscseecssscessecesssssseseessesseesaesseeserssessassnsenseaseas 417 Program Compilation and LiINKAQE cccececssssssseeseessessesassessaesaesersseseaeeeaees 419 Program EXECU Ome a i an niin ea aaa 419 Chapter 13 System Program Description SD FUnCtHoOnS ssssssssssusssnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 421 Types of System Program Description FUNCHONS ssssesssesrssrsrsssrsrssrnsrsrnnsrnrsrnns 422 ON AEE E POA E A A A E A 422 ADDR Function and LENG FUN CtON ccccsscscscssessecseessesseesaeserseeeeeserseeesaesaness 422 PERFORM Statement without an at end Condition cccsseeesseeeeeseeees 423 Using Pointersysara5 hoa an saad ea a hire iai seat 423 UTS eet ee chet atc ea Dhan ah de A E E E E A ett tetuashen enti tenes 423 Program Spe
540. unctions and the PERFORM statement without an at end condition 422 Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions Types of System Program Description Functions COBOL85 has the following functions that are not included in the COBOL standards These functions are called the system program description SD functions in COBOL85 The following SD functions are useful for the description of a system program e Pointer e ADDR function and LENG function e PERFORM statement without an at end condition The following section outlines and explains the features of each function Pointer An area with a specific address can be referenced and updated using a pointer For example when a parameter identifying an area address is used to call aCOBOL program from a program written in another language the area contents at that address can be referenced or updated with a pointer in the COBOL program ADDR Function and LENG Function The ADDR function can obtain the address of a data item defined by COBOL The LENG function can obtain the lengths of a data item and literal defined by COBOL in bytes Chapter 13 System Program Description SD Functions 423 For example an area address or length can be passed as a parameter to call a program written in another language from a COBOL program PERFORM Statement without an at end Condition In COBOL85 the PERFORM statement can be written without setting an at end
541. uration rules You must determine if the literal complies with the linker rules Text Name Literal For the text name literal to be written in the COPY statement specify the name of the file containing library text in the following format drive name path name file name extension drivename Specify the drive name by a single character from A to Z When the drive name is omitted the current drive will be used path name Specify the directory storing the file in the following format directory name directory name When the path name is omitted the file will be placed in the directory specified by compile option LIB When compiling from 686 Appendix G Writing Special Literals the WIN COB window the source file to be compiled is stored in the current directory When the relativity path name is specified the current directory is added to the front Filename Specify the filename extension Specify the file extension if possible Note CBL and COB may not be used For example e CA COPY A CBL e A CPY e CA COPY A File Identifier Literal For the file identifier literal to be written in the ASSIGN clause of the file control entry specify the file to be processed in the following manner drive name a path name file name extention port name drivename Specify a drive name with an alphabetic character from A to Z A name not specified with an al
542. urrency symbols that can be used 8 WINCOB WC DLOAD NODLOAD To dynamically call the subprogram specified with the CALL literal specify DLOAD otherwise specify NODLOAD Refer to Linkage Types and Program Structure in Chapter 4 590 Appendix A Compiler Options 9 WINCOB WC EQUALS NOEQUALS If records having the same key are input by a SORT statement specify EQUALS to ensure that the record sequential at output of the SORT statement is identical to the record sequential at inputted Otherwise specify NOEQUALS If NOEQUALS is specified the sequence of records having the same key is not defined when the SORT statement outputs records If EQUALS is specified special processing to ensure the input sequence is done sorting operation Consequently execution performance decreases 10 WINCOB FILEEXT extension Specify the extension of a file containing the file descriptor Any character string can be specified as the extension If a file name has no extension specify character string None as the extension Do not specify more than one extension The following is the priority if the option is specified in duplicate 1 Compiler option FILEEXT 2 FFD _SUFFIX environment variable 32 3 Default value FFD Appendix A Compiler Options 591 11 WINCOB FILELIB directory name directory name If the COPY statement with IN OF XFDLIB specified is used to fetch a record descriptor from a file descri
543. values When defining an indexed file specify the name of a data item as the primary key in the RECORD KEY clause 224 Chapter 7 File Processing As with the primary key an alternate key is the information used to select specific records in the file Specify the name of a data item to use as the alternate key in the ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clause as required Multiple data items can be specified in the RECORD KEY and ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clauses When multiple data items are specified in the RECORD KEY clause the primary key consists of these data items Data items specified in the RECORD KEY clause need not be contiguous Multiple records can have the same key value duplicate key value by specifying DUPLICATES in the RECORD KEY and ALTERNATE RECORD KEY clauses An error occurs if the key value is duplicated when DUPLICATES is not specified Defining Indexed File Records This section explains record formats lengths and organization Record Formats and Lengths The explanations of the record formats and lengths of indexed files are the same as for record sequential files See Defining Record Sequential File Records Record Organization Define the attributes positions and sizes of keys and data other than keys in records in the record description entries To process an existing file the number of items item positions and sizes to be specified for the primary or alternate keys must be equal to those defined at file crea
544. ving item Specify MODE CCVS to move a left justified character string to areceiving item If MODE CCVS is specified only an external decimal item can be specified as a receiving item in the ACCEPT statement 598 Appendix A Compiler Options 24 WINCOB WC STD NCW SYS Specify this option for a national character set that can be defined as user defined words Specify NCW STD to use the national character set as a national character set common to systems specify NCW SYS to use the national character set as a national character set of the computer The following are national character sets that can be used NCW STD OG 1 9 A B Z a b Z 4 Li yo oA 7 F 4 4 8 Won prolonged sound Chyphen minus sign etc NCW SYS Character set with STD specified Extended character JISLeve non kanji 1 Extended non kanji User defined characters Appendix A Compiler Options 599 1 The following characters cannot be used te sr 4 ete a See Ay Bete eo fe ome E PS Sp ee Ut See Fes ae amp KRHA K 25 WINCOB WC NSP NSPCOMP ASP Specify this option to determine how to treat a national space at comparison Specify NSPCOM P N SP to treat the national space as a national space specify NSPCOMP ASP to treat the national space as an ANK space A national space treated as an ANK space is assumed to be equivalent to a 2 byte AN
545. ware product responsible for the network If the ODBC driver processes data in an embedded SQL statement from COBOL the embedded SQL statement may be longer than specified in the COBOL source program An area for input and output processing between a client and server can be up to 8 192 bytes in length The sum of the input variable length and output variable length must be within the allowable range The area may be shorter than 8 192 bytes depending on the ODBC driver environment Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions COBOL85 uses the SIA COBOL syntax defined in the FUJITSU COBOL Reference Manual A program written according to the SIA specification can be developed under this system The developed program can operate under various types of systems This chapter explains distributed development with the system of GS series M series application program as a host Note This chapter is only applicable if you are running M series or GS series 556 Chapter 16 Distributed Development Support Functions Outline of Distributed Development COBOL85 enables development of a program that operates with the Global server hereafter referred to as GS or GS program To operate a host program that uses a function specific to the Global server system requirements for the operating environment movement method must be cleared For information about specific functions refer to Appendix GS series Function Comparison
546. y LIBW LIB Windows function import library name CPROG DEF C program module definition file name FIBCCIM P LIB is required to call JMPCINT2 or JMPCINT3 2 Generating executable files from COBOL programs and C programs that call COBOL programs LINK NOD COB OBJ Cprog OBJ COB EXE COB MAP F1BCCIMP F1BCARMV LIB Cimplib LIBW COB DEF COB OB COBOL program object file name COB EXE Name of the executable file to be generated COB MAP Map file name optional FIBCCIMP LIB FIBCARMV LIB COBOL run time system import library name CIMPLIB Import library of C run time library LIBW LIB Windows function import library name Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 375 COB DEF COBOL program module definition file name To generate an executable file by linking a COBOL program to a C program the import library of the run time library COBOL run time system of the program having the WinM ain function must be specified first For example when a COBOL program has the WinM ain function when compiled with compiler option MAIN specified specify the import library of the COBOL run time system prior to that of the C run time library Doing so prevents the startup routine provided by the import library of the C run time library from being linked to the COBOL program 3 Generating DLLs from C programs that call COBOL programs LINK NOD Cprog OBJ LIBENTRY OBJ Cprog DLL Cprog MAP Cimpl
547. y editing AUTOEXEC BAT Each variable is set ona separate line by entering environment variable value Where the environment variable is one of the strings from the previous table and value is the value to be set Setting from the Control Panel Windows NT Set environment variables common to multiple applications by the Control Panel before execution For details about setting from the Control Panel refer to the online help Setting from the Command Prompt 32 Use the SET command to set environment variables from the Command Prompt before executing programs A batch file can also be used Environment information set here is effective only within the specific command prompt session used Setting in the Initialization File Use an initialization file to set application specific information required every time you run an application Create the initialization file in the directory containing the programs using the file name COBOL85 CBR If any other file name is given you must enter the initialization file name in the command line upon execution 124 Chapter 5 Executing Programs The contents of the initialization file can be modified with an editor or by saving the contents set in the Run time Environment Setup window Programs can be executed even if no initialization file is available Contents of the Initialization File There are two types of sections in initialization files one for setting environment variable
548. ying data names in the CALL statement Chapter 10 Calling Programs Inter Program Communication 357 makes the program structure dynamic between calling programs and subprograms For details of program structure refer to Linkage Types and Program Structure in Chapter 4 Secondary Entry Points An entry point to call programs can be set in the procedures in COBOL programs The start point of a program procedureisa primary entry point and an entry point set in the middle of a procedure is a secondary entry point Executing the CALL statement with a program name specified executes a subprogram from the primary entry point To execute a subprogram from a secondary entry point specify the name of the secondary entry point in the CALL statement the same way you specify the program name To set a secondary entry point ina COBOL program write an ENTRY statement When a program is sequentially executed the ENTRY statement is skipped An ENTRY statement cannot be written in internal programs Returning Control and Exiting Programs To return control from subprograms to calling programs execute the EXIT PROGRAM statement When the EXIT PROGRAM statement is executed control returns immediately after the CALL statement executed by the calling program To quit execution of all COBOL programs execute the STOP RUN statement When the STOP RUN statement is executed control returns to the calling source of the COBOL main program
549. ystems copyrighted 1958 1959 by Sperry Rand Corporation e IBM Commercial Translator Form N o F28 8013 copyrighted 1959 by International Business M achines Corporation e FACT DSI 27A5260 2760 copyrighted 1960 by Minneapolis Honeywell All Rights Reserved Copyright Fujitsu Limited 1996 All Rights Reserved Copyright Microsoft Corporation 1983 1996 COBOL85 User s Guide xi xii COBOL85 User s Guide Contents Chapter 1 Overview of COBOL85 csc 1 COBOLBS FUNCHONS gt 2006 ie ecacle nia deans iin iets ends edie n 2 COBOL FUNGHIONS sisiane eiaeaen iaa ea iea iei ea ea aaia iin aaia 2 Programs and Utilities Provided by COBOL 5 ssssessssssssisrersrsrsrnsisrsrsrsrsrsnnsnnn 3 COBOL85 Development Environment cccceeceeceeiececeeeeeeeeaeeeseesetaeseeeeeeteeteseetees 7 Setting Up Environment Variables 0 ce eeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesesaesaeeeseeeeseeeeaeeetaes 8 Related Product Sicccicsscescdteiee dheend eee lida iaaa eare a ane aE aaa ia EEEa 10 Developing a Program ceeeeteeseeceneeeeseeeeecaeeaeeeeseeaesaeeaseessesaasaseessesaesaseaseesetaaeateetees 11 Chapter 2 Creating and Editing a Program ssssssssssussnsunannunannunannnnannnnannnnnnannnnannnnannnna 15 Creating the Progranski ireanii ataa taiea ideata iiaiai iaa teana 16 Creating and Editing a COBOL Source Program ssssssssesssrsisisreierersrsrsrsrnrnnnnn 16 Creating EI brary Texts Aapan ch een ied hae habe eid hae 18 Program

COBOL85 User's Guide 3.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents